Table of Contents

As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on April 19, 2007
Registration No. 333-140600
 
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
Washington, D.C. 20549
 
 
 
AMENDMENT NO. 3
to
 
Form S-1
REGISTRATION STATEMENT
UNDER
THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933
 
 
 
 
TomoTherapy Incorporated
(Exact Name of Registrant as Specified in its Charter)
 
         
Wisconsin   3845   39-1914727
(State or Other Jurisdiction of
Incorporation or Organization)
  (Primary Standard Industrial
Classification Code Number)
  (I.R.S. Employer
Identification Number)
 
1240 Deming Way
Madison, Wisconsin 53717
(608) 824-2800
(Address, including zip code, and telephone number,
including area code, of registrant’s principal executive offices)
 
 
 
 
Stephen C. Hathaway
Chief Financial Officer and Treasurer
1240 Deming Way
Madison, Wisconsin 53717
(608) 824-2800
(Name, address, including zip code, and telephone number,
including area code, of agent for service)
 
 
 
 
Copies to:
 
         
Gregory J. Lynch, Esq.
Geoffrey R. Morgan, Esq.
Michael Best & Friedrich LLP
100 East Wisconsin Avenue
Suite 3300
Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53202
Telephone: (414) 225-2752
Facsimile: (414) 277-0656
  Shawn Guse, Esq.
Vice President, General Counsel and Secretary
TomoTherapy Incorporated
1240 Deming Way
Madison, Wisconsin 53717
Telephone: (608) 824-2800
Facsimile: (608) 824-2996
  Colin J. Diamond, Esq.
White & Case LLP
1155 Avenue of the Americas
New York, NY 10036
Telephone: (212) 819-8200
Facsimile: (212) 354-8113
 
 
 
 
Approximate date of commencement of proposed sale to the public:   As soon as practicable after the effective date of this registration statement.
 
If any of the securities being registered on this Form are to be offered on a delayed or continuous basis pursuant to Rule 415 under the Securities Act of 1933 check the following box:   o
 
If this Form is filed to register additional securities for an offering pursuant to Rule 462(b) under the Securities Act, please check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.   o
 
If this Form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(c) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.   o
 
If this form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(d) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.   o
 


Table of Contents

The information contained in this prospectus is not complete and may be changed. We may not sell these securities until the registration statement filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission is effective. This prospectus is not an offer to sell these securities and it is not soliciting an offer to buy these securities in any state where the offer or sale is not permitted.
 
Subject to Completion
Preliminary Prospectus dated April 19, 2007
 
PROSPECTUS
 
10,937,500 Shares
 
(LOGO)
 
Common Stock
 
 
 
 
This is TomoTherapy Incorporated’s initial public offering. We are offering 10,200,000 shares of our common stock and the selling shareholders are offering 737,500 shares of our common stock. We will not receive any proceeds from the sale of shares by the selling shareholders. We expect the initial public offering price to be between $15.00 and $17.00 per share.
 
Currently, no public market exists for our shares of common stock. We have applied to have our shares of common stock approved for quotation on the Nasdaq Global Market under the symbol “TTPY.”
 
Investing in shares of our common stock involves risks that are described in the “Risk Factors” section beginning on page 9 of this prospectus.
 
 
 
 
                 
    Per Share     Total  
 
Public offering price
  $       $    
Underwriting discount
  $       $    
Proceeds, before expenses, to TomoTherapy Incorporated
  $       $    
Proceeds, before expenses, to the selling shareholders
  $       $  
 
The underwriters may also purchase up to an additional 1,640,625 shares from the selling shareholders at the public offering price, less the underwriting discount, within 30 days from the date of this prospectus to cover overallotments.
 
Neither the Securities and Exchange Commission nor any state securities commission has approved or disapproved of these securities or determined if this prospectus is truthful or complete. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense.
 
The shares will be ready for delivery on or about          , 2007.
 
 
 
 
Merrill Lynch & Co.
 
  Piper Jaffray
 
  Thomas Weisel Partners LLC
 
  Robert W. Baird & Co.
 
  William Blair & Company
 
 
 
The date of this prospectus is          , 2007.


Table of Contents

(TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED LOGO)

 


 

 
TABLE OF CONTENTS
 
         
    Page  
 
    1  
    9  
    26  
    27  
    27  
    28  
    30  
    32  
    34  
    54  
    73  
    80  
    100  
    106  
    111  
    116  
    119  
    123  
    127  
    127  
    127  
    F-1  
  Form of Amended and Restated Articles of Incorporation
  License Agreement
  Development and OEM Supply Agreement
  Manufacturing and Supply Agreement
  Purchase Order
  Variable Pay Plan
  Consent
  Consent
 
 
You should rely only on the information contained in this prospectus and any free writing prospectus prepared by or on our behalf. We have not, and the underwriters have not, authorized anyone to provide you with information different from, or in addition to, that contained in this prospectus. If anyone provides you with different or inconsistent information, you should not rely on it. We are not, and the underwriters are not, making an offer to sell these securities in any jurisdiction where the offer or sale is not permitted. You should assume that the information appearing in this prospectus is accurate only as of the date on the cover of this prospectus. Our business, financial condition, results of operations and prospects may have changed since that date.


Table of Contents

SUMMARY
 
This summary highlights information contained elsewhere in this prospectus. This summary does not contain all the information you should consider before buying shares of our common stock. You should read the entire prospectus carefully, especially the risks of investing in shares of our common stock that we describe under “Risk Factors” and our consolidated financial statements and the related notes included at the end of this prospectus, before deciding to invest in shares of our common stock. Unless the context requires otherwise, reference to “TomoTherapy”, “we”, “our” and “us” in this prospectus refers to TomoTherapy Incorporated and its subsidiaries.
 
Our Business
 
We have developed, manufacture and sell the Hi Art system, an advanced and versatile radiation therapy system for the treatment of a wide variety of cancers. The Hi Art system precisely delivers radiation with sub-millimeter accuracy to kill cancer cells while reducing radiation exposure to surrounding healthy tissue, which we believe can lead to improved patient outcomes. The Hi Art system contains a linear accelerator, which is a device that generates external beam radiation that is used both to capture high quality, quantitative images and to deliver therapeutic radiation in a helical, or spiral, delivery pattern 360 degrees around the body. The linear accelerator rotates around a rigid circular frame, or ring gantry, that is housed in a protective casing. This integrated design contrasts with traditional radiation therapy systems, which utilize a single, rotating arm, referred to as a “C-arm”, that can deliver radiation from only a limited number of angles. Generating CT images with traditional C-arm systems typically requires the addition of auxiliary devices that generally lack the quantitative imaging capabilities necessary to accurately image the location, size, shape and density of tumors and internal anatomy. The Hi Art system’s helical delivery pattern and imaging capabilities, combined with the system’s advanced treatment planning software and ability to precisely shape the beam delivering radiation, allow clinicians to locate and define the size, shape and density of tumors, maximize radiation delivered to diseased tissue, minimize radiation delivered to healthy tissue and measure the radiation dose actually received by the patient. We believe these capabilities allow the Hi Art system to deliver sophisticated radiation treatments with speed and precision.
 
The Hi Art system’s combination of technologies allows clinicians to make modifications to a patient’s cancer treatment plan as changes in the location, size, shape and density of tumors or in the patient’s internal anatomy are detected over the course of treatment. To deliver radiation therapy, the Hi Art system first optimizes a patient’s treatment plan by calculating the radiation dose pattern that maximizes the radiation dose to the tumor and minimizes exposure of healthy tissue. A quantitative CT image of the treatment area is taken to identify the location, size, shape and density of the tumor and is used to position the patient on the treatment couch. The optimized radiation dose is then delivered using a proprietary device referred to as a multi-leaf collimator, or MLC, that consists of tungsten leaves that open and close to modulate the shape of radiation beams produced by the linear accelerator as the patient passes horizontally through the ring gantry. The data acquired for the accurate positioning of the patient can also be used to compute the dose received by the patient. Data regarding the dose distribution is used by the clinician to evaluate and, if necessary, adjust the treatment plan in subsequent treatment sessions to address changes in patient anatomy, such as tumor shrinkage or weight loss, as well as any previous errors accumulated in treatment delivery and planning. We believe that the process of making iterative adjustments to a patient’s treatment plan, referred to as adaptive radiation therapy, should become a standard technique for the treatment of most cancer patients receiving radiation therapy. The Hi Art system has the ability to provide daily, quantitative imaging and to incorporate adaptive radiation therapy easily and efficiently into clinicians’ regular clinical workflow.
 
We market the Hi Art system to hospitals and cancer treatment centers in North America, Europe and Asia, and offer customer support services in each region. Since commercial introduction of the Hi Art system in 2003, we have experienced significant revenue growth and have invested extensively in our manufacturing capabilities and customer service and support infrastructure. For the years ended December 31, 2005 and 2006, we had revenue of $75.8 million and $156.1 million, respectively, representing growth of 106%. For the years ended December 31, 2005 and 2006, we had net income of $0.2 million and $12.8 million, respectively. Net income for 2006 included a $7.8 million benefit from deferred income taxes and an expense of $3.1 million reflecting the fair value of outstanding warrants. As of December 31, 2006, we had an installed


1


Table of Contents

base of 108 Hi Art systems worldwide and a backlog of $164 million, the significant majority of which we expect to deliver before the end of 2007.
 
Our Market
 
According to the World Health Organization, in 2005 there were approximately 24.6 million people worldwide living with cancer and an estimated 7.6 million cancer deaths, accounting for 13% of all deaths globally. The World Health Organization estimates that approximately 10.9 million new cases of cancer are diagnosed globally each year. The National Cancer Institute estimates that nearly 50% of cancer patients in the United States are treated using radiation therapy. Currently, the most common type of radiation therapy is external beam radiation therapy, during which patients are treated with high-energy radiation generated by medical equipment external to the patient. Approximately 90% of patients treated with radiation therapy in the United States receive external beam radiation generated by a device called a linear accelerator. Linear accelerator-based radiation therapy systems represent the largest product segment by expenditure within the global radiation therapy equipment market, which totaled approximately $2.0 billion in 2006.
 
Radiation energy is an effective method for killing cells and is used to treat various cancers. While the goal of radiation therapy is to selectively deliver radiation solely to cancer cells, traditional radiation therapy technologies can result in healthy tissue being exposed to significant doses of radiation. Damage to healthy tissue can cause side effects ranging in severity from superficial burns, nausea and vomiting to more serious side effects such as damage to vital organs. Recent advances in radiation therapy technologies have focused on further improving the ability to target the radiation dose more precisely at cancer cells, while minimizing the exposure of healthy tissue. These advances include:
 
  •      Intensity Modulated Radiation Therapy (IMRT) , which varies the radiation beam intensity to conform the dose more accurately to the shape of the tumor;
 
  •      Image Guided Radiation Therapy (IGRT) , which involves delivering IMRT guided by images taken shortly before treatment to compare the patient’s position to, and make adjustments from, the original treatment plan for more precision;
 
  •      Dose escalation , which involves delivering the cumulative prescribed dose of radiation to the patient over less than the typical number of treatment sessions by relying on extremely precise targeting to deliver a higher dose of radiation during each session; and
 
  •      Adaptive radiation therapy , which we believe requires continual adjustments to the treatment plan throughout the entire course of treatment, facilitated by both the regular acquisition of updated images showing the location, geometry and density of the tumor, as well as verification of the actual radiation dose received by the patient.
 
We believe that increasing demand for advanced medical treatments in many international markets, growth in cancer cases worldwide and improvements in the sophistication of radiation therapy techniques will continue to drive demand for more advanced linear accelerators. However, despite advances in radiation therapy techniques, most commercially available radiation therapy systems still present significant limitations that restrict clinicians’ ability to provide the most efficient and effective treatment possible. These limitations include the following:
 
  •      Limited versatility and precision.   The limited speed and range of C-arm gantries used by most other systems often make it impractical to deliver radiation from more than five to nine treatment angles during a typical treatment session. These mechanical limitations reduce the system’s ability to deliver precisely targeted radiation that avoids healthy tissue.
 
  •      Limited ability to provide frequent, quantitative images.   Many traditional radiation therapy systems either do not incorporate CT imaging functionality or use imaging technologies that do not have the ability to generate daily, quantitative images. Since it is common for internal organs to shift and for the size of the tumor to change during the course of treatment, failure to obtain updated images and adapt the treatment plan throughout the course of treatment may result in a portion or potentially all of the radiation dose missing the tumor and instead being absorbed by healthy tissue.


2


Table of Contents

 
  •      Failure to integrate multiple functions.   Many traditional radiation therapy systems were designed solely for the purpose of delivering radiation and therefore do not possess integrated imaging, treatment planning, dose verification or quality assurance capabilities necessary for more advanced treatment protocols.
 
The TomoTherapy Solution
 
The Hi Art system is an advanced and versatile radiation therapy system for the treatment of a wide variety of cancers. We have designed the Hi Art system to offer clinicians and patients the following benefits:
 
  •      More versatile treatment capabilities.   The Hi Art system’s high-speed ring gantry and beam- shaping capability allow the intensity of the radiation beam to be modified and treatment to be delivered continuously in a helical pattern 360 degrees around the patient’s body from thousands of angles without extending the time it takes to complete the procedure.
 
  •      Daily, quantitative imaging for better identification of tumors, dose verification and treatment planning.   The Hi Art system is the only commercially available radiation therapy system offering integrated quantitative CT imaging capabilities, which we market as our CTrue technology, which depict the density of tumors and healthy tissue more accurately than traditional radiation therapy systems. We believe that daily, quantitative images are necessary for the accurate delivery of IMRT and are essential to optimizing a patient’s treatment by enabling clinicians to adapt the treatment plan in response to anatomical changes and the cumulative amount of radiation received by specific areas within the patient over time.
 
  •      Fully integrated treatment system for more precise radiation delivery.   We believe that the integration of our CTrue imaging technology, treatment planning and helical delivery of radiation beams shaped by the MLC enables highly precise radiation delivery to ensure that the radiation conforms to the patient’s tumor and avoids sensitive structures. We also believe these features significantly benefit patients by providing a precisely-targeted dose distribution which maximizes the radiation delivered to cancerous tissues and minimizes damage to healthy tissues.
 
  •      Efficient clinical workflow for IGRT and adaptive radiation therapy.   We believe that the Hi Art system allows clinicians to easily and rapidly scan, plan and treat cancer patients. This capability enables healthcare providers to increase patient throughput for sophisticated IGRT and adaptive radiation therapy procedures using the Hi Art system.
 
  •      Low barriers to installation and implementation.   The Hi Art system’s compact design, with built-in shielding, allows customers to retrofit the Hi Art system into existing treatment rooms and avoid or reduce the significant construction costs that can be associated with the installation of other systems. We preassemble, test and commission each Hi Art system at our manufacturing facility and ship the unit almost fully assembled. This assembly process allows radiation “beam-on” within four days and treatments to begin within 45 days of delivery in most cases.
 
  •      Platform for further technological advancements in adaptive radiation therapy.   We believe that the Hi Art system is the only commercially available linear accelerator that enables adaptive radiation therapy because of its unique ability to provide daily, quantitative images, high speed delivery of radiation from 360 degrees around the body and the data necessary for clinicians to verify the actual radiation dose received by the patient. We also believe that the combination of these design features and our integrated treatment planning and optimization software will allow us to continue to enhance the Hi Art system’s adaptive capabilities to a point where clinicians can routinely and easily adjust a patient’s treatment as needed.
 
Our Strategy
 
Our goal is to become a leading provider of radiation therapy systems and the technology of choice for radiation therapy providers around the world. We are pursuing the following strategies to achieve this goal:
 
  •      Increase market awareness of the Hi Art system’s clinical and economic benefits.   In order to expand our installed base of Hi Art systems, we intend to continue to position the Hi Art system as the most advanced radiation therapy system for treating a wide range of cancers effectively and efficiently.


3


Table of Contents

 
  •      Expand our worldwide sales presence.   We intend to add additional direct sales representatives to better penetrate the United States market, while further investing in direct and indirect sales and marketing efforts in international markets.
 
  •      Increase our profitability through cost reductions and improved operating leverage.   In order to increase our profitability, we will seek to decrease our reliance on single-source suppliers of key components in order to enable us to negotiate better prices with a wider range of suppliers and to improve component reliability. In addition, a number of opportunities exist to reduce costs through re-engineering higher cost components. We will also seek to increase our profitability as we leverage our investments in our global service and support infrastructure through increased sales volumes.
 
  •      Continue to enhance our customer service and support capabilities.   We intend to build upon our infrastructure and technology advantages by hiring additional support personnel, implementing regional training programs and expanding the number of local spare parts depots to continually augment and refine our customer service.
 
  •      Enhance the Hi Art system’s treatment capabilities through on-going research and development initiatives.   Our research and development initiatives are focused on more fully automating the treatment optimization process, thereby decreasing the time necessary for clinicians to develop and adapt treatment plans. We believe these enhancements will allow clinicians to increase patient throughput without compromising treatment plan quality and increase our customers’ return on their investment.
 
Risks
 
Our business is subject to numerous risks as more fully described under “Risk Factors” including:
 
  •      We depend on the Hi Art system for substantially all of our revenue.
 
  •      The long sales cycle and high unit price of the Hi Art system, as well as other factors, may contribute to substantial fluctuations in our quarterly operating results and stock price.
 
  •      We face competition from numerous competitors, many of whom have greater resources than we do.
 
  •      Our reliance on single-source suppliers for critical components of the Hi Art system could harm our ability to meet demand for our products in a timely and cost-effective manner.
 
  •      Sales of the Hi Art system may be adversely affected if clinicians do not widely adopt IGRT and adaptive radiation therapy.
 
  •      We may be delayed or prevented from implementing our long-term sales strategy if we fail to educate clinicians about the benefits of the Hi Art system.
 
  •      If we are unable to satisfy the requirements of our licenses with the Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation, or WARF, we could lose access to those licensed technologies and be unable to produce or sell the Hi Art system.
 
Recent Developments
 
Although our financial statements for the quarter ended March 31, 2007 are not yet complete, the following revenue and backlog information reflects our estimate of our results based on currently available information. We estimate that revenues for the three months ended March 31, 2007 were between $50.0 million and $52.0 million, compared with revenues of $27.5 million for the three months ended March 31, 2006, and $59.6 million for the three months ended December 31, 2006. The increase in year-over-year quarterly revenues resulted primarily from increased Hi Art system sales. The decrease in revenues from the most recent prior quarter resulted primarily from the timing of installation and receipt of customers’ acceptance of the Hi Art system in their facilities. As of March 31, 2007, we estimate that our backlog was approximately $162 million, the significant majority of which we expect to deliver within the next 12 months.
 
The foregoing revenue and backlog information is not a comprehensive statement of our financial results for the quarter ended March 31, 2007. The foregoing information should therefore be considered together with our full results of operations when published. The foregoing information is subject to adjustment


4


Table of Contents

based upon, among other things, the finalization of our quarter-end closing and reporting processes. The estimates for any interim period are not necessarily indicative of our operating results for a full year or any future period, and are qualified in their entirety by, and should be read in conjunction with, “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and our consolidated financial statements.
 
Company Information
 
We were incorporated in Wisconsin in 1997 under the name TomoTherapy Incorporated. Our principal executive offices are located at 1240 Deming Way, Madison, WI 53717-1954, and our telephone number is (608) 824-2800. TomoTherapy ® , Tomo ® , Hi Art ® and the TomoTherapy logo are registered trademarks of TomoTherapy and CTrue™, TomoPortal™, TomoGateway™ and TomoExchange™ are trademarks of TomoTherapy. Our website is located at www.TomoTherapy.com. Information on our website is not part of this prospectus.


5


Table of Contents

 
THE OFFERING
 
Common stock offered:
 
  By TomoTherapy 10,200,000 shares
 
  By the selling shareholders 737,500 shares
 
Shares to be outstanding after this offering 48,345,337 shares
 
Use of proceeds We estimate that the net proceeds from this offering will be approximately $150.0 million after deducting underwriting discounts and estimated offering expenses. We intend to use the net proceeds from this offering to finance expanding our sales and marketing efforts, increasing our research and development programs, expanding our international service and support group, and for working capital and other general corporate purposes. We may also use a portion of the net proceeds to acquire or invest in complementary businesses, products or technologies, although we currently do not have any acquisitions or investments planned. See “Use of Proceeds.” We will not receive any proceeds from the sale of shares by the selling shareholders.
 
Risk factors See “Risk Factors” and other information included in this prospectus for a discussion of factors you should carefully consider before deciding to invest in our common stock.
 
Nasdaq Global Market Symbol TTPY
 
The number of shares of common stock outstanding after the offering is based on 38,145,337 shares of common stock outstanding as of March 31, 2007, and as of that date excludes:
 
  •      9,533,677 shares reserved for issuance under our stock option plans, of which options to purchase 7,231,189 shares of common stock at a weighted average exercise price of $3.97 per share had been granted; and
 
  •      10,039 shares reserved for issuance upon the exercise of outstanding warrants with an exercise price of $1.84 per share.
 
The number of shares of common stock outstanding as of March 31, 2007 reflects the issuance subsequent to December 31, 2006 of:
 
  •      1,288,669 shares issued for no consideration to certain holders of our Series A preferred stock, including certain members of our management and entities affiliated with our directors, pursuant to the Series A Investment Agreement;
 
  •      1,915,522 shares issued upon the exercise of stock options; and
 
  •      455,615 shares issued upon the exercise of warrants;
 
Unless otherwise indicated, all information in this prospectus:
 
  •      reflects the conversion upon the closing of this offering of all of our shares of preferred stock on a one-for-one basis into shares of common stock;
 
  •      assumes an initial public offering price of $16.00 per share, the midpoint of the estimated initial public offering price range;
 
  •      assumes no exercise of the underwriters’ option to purchase from the selling shareholders up to 1,640,625 additional shares to cover overallotments; and
 
  •      reflects a 50-for-1 stock split effected on August 26, 2002, a 4-for-1 stock split effected on June 30, 2005, and a 1.36-for-1 stock split to become effective prior to the effectiveness of the registration statement of which this prospectus forms a part.


6


Table of Contents

SUMMARY CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL DATA
 
You should read the following summary consolidated financial and other data in conjunction with “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and our consolidated financial statements and the related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus. Our historical results are not necessarily indicative of results expected for any future period.
 
                         
    Year Ended December 31,  
    2004     2005     2006  
    (in thousands, other than share and per share data)  
 
Consolidated statements of operations data:
                       
Revenue
  $ 45,460     $ 75,754     $ 156,102  
Cost of revenue
    28,078       50,047       102,653  
                         
Gross profit
    17,382       25,707       53,449  
                         
Operating expenses:
                       
Research and development
    6,492       11,372       21,397  
Selling, general and administrative
    7,827       14,197       23,119  
                         
Total operating expenses
    14,319       25,569       44,516  
                         
Income from operations
    3,063       138       8,933  
Other income (expense), net
    (31 )     179       (1,202 )
                         
Income before income tax and cumulative effect of change in accounting principle
    3,032       317       7,731  
Income tax expense (benefit)
    151       78       (7,184 )
                         
Income before cumulative effect of change in accounting principle
    2,881       239       14,915  
Cumulative effect of change in accounting principle(1)
                (2,140 )
                         
Net income
    2,881       239       12,775  
Accretion of redeemable convertible preferred stock(2)
    (41,960 )     (68,075 )     (46,253 )
                         
Net loss attributable to common shareholders
  $ (39,079 )   $ (67,836 )   $ (33,478 )
                         
Basic and diluted net loss per share attributable to common shareholders
  $ (5.40 )   $ (8.48 )   $ (3.78 )
                         
Weighted average common shares used in computing basic and diluted net loss per share attributable to common shareholders
    7,234,229       7,995,629       8,855,870  
                         
Pro forma basic net income per share(3)
                  $ 0.36  
                         
Pro forma diluted net income per share(3)
                  $ 0.32  
                         
Pro forma weighted average number of shares used in computing basic net income per share(3)
                    35,365,778  
                         
Pro forma weighted average number of shares used in computing diluted net income per share(3)
                    40,130,383  
                         
 
 
(1) Represents impact of the adoption of Staff Position 150-5, Issuer’s Accounting under Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) Statement No. 150 for Freestanding Warrants and Other Similar Instruments on Shares That Are Redeemable (“FSP 150-5”). Pursuant to FSP 150-5, we are required to classify our outstanding warrants to purchase preferred stock as a liability on our balance sheet and record adjustments to their fair value in our statements of operations at the end of each reporting period. For the year ended December 31, 2006, the impact of the change in accounting principle was to decrease net income by $3.1 million, consisting of a $2.2 million cumulative effect adjustment for the change in accounting principle as of January 1, 2006, when the Company adopted FSP 150-5, and $0.9 million of expense that was recorded in other income (expense), net to reflect the increase in fair value between January 1, 2006 and December 31, 2006. The warrants will be subject to revaluation at each balance sheet date and any change in fair value will be recognized as a component of other income (expense), net, until the earlier of exercise of the warrants or the closing of this offering.
 
(2) Accretion of redeemable convertible preferred stock represents the impact attributable to the increase in the fair market value of such shares. The holders of Series A, B, C and D preferred stock have the option to put their shares back to us at the greater of (i) the original purchase price plus accrued dividends, or


7


Table of Contents

(ii) the fair market value of the shares. The holders of Series E preferred stock have the option to put their shares back to us at the original purchase price plus accrued dividends. The put option and the related accretion of the preferred shares will terminate upon the closing of this offering.
 
(3) Pro forma net income per share gives effect to the conversion upon the closing of this offering of all of our issued and outstanding shares of preferred stock on a 1-for-1 basis into shares of common stock. See Note A to our consolidated financial statements for an explanation of the number of shares used in computing per share data.
 
                         
    As of December 31, 2006  
                Pro forma as
 
    Actual     Pro forma     Adjusted  
          (unaudited)     (unaudited)  
    (in thousands)  
 
Consolidated balance sheet data:
                       
Cash and cash equivalents
  $ 20,137     $ 20,137     $ 170,113  
Inventories
    40,026       40,026       40,026  
Working capital
    7,446       7,446       157,422  
Total assets
    109,314       109,314       259,290  
Deferred revenue and customer deposits
    43,307       43,307       43,307  
Redeemable convertible preferred stock
    212,663              
Total shareholders’ equity (deficit)
    (184,117 )     28,546       178,522  
 
Pro forma information included above in the consolidated balance sheet data reflects the conversion of all outstanding shares of our preferred stock into an aggregate of 25,221,239 shares of common stock and the issuance of 1,288,669 shares of common stock issuable for no consideration to certain holders of our Series A preferred stock, including certain members of our management and entities affiliated with our directors, immediately prior to the closing of this offering.
 
Pro forma as adjusted information included above in the consolidated balance sheet data reflects: (1) the automatic conversion upon the closing of this offering of all of our shares of preferred stock outstanding as of December 31, 2006 on a one-for-one basis into an aggregate of 25,221,239 shares of common stock; (2) the issuance of 1,288,669 shares of common stock issuable for no additional consideration; and (3) our receipt of estimated net proceeds of $150.0 million from our sale of shares in this offering, based on an initial public offering price of $16.00 per share, the midpoint of the estimated initial public offering price range, after deducting the underwriting discount and estimated offering expenses payable by us.


8


Table of Contents

 
RISK FACTORS
 
Investment in our common stock involves a number of risks. You should carefully consider the risks and uncertainties described below and the other information included in this prospectus, before deciding to invest in shares of our common stock. If any of the following risks or uncertainties actually occurs, our business, prospects, financial condition and operating results would likely suffer, possibly materially. In that event, the market price of our common stock could decline and you could lose all or part of your investment. Additional risks and uncertainties presently unknown to us, or that we believe not to be material at this time, may also impair or have a material adverse effect on our operations.
 
Risks Related to Our Business
 
We depend on sales of the Hi Art system for substantially all of our revenue and if we are unable to grow or sustain sales of the Hi Art system, we may not generate sufficient revenue to support our business.
 
Our sole product is the Hi Art system, which we commenced marketing in 2003. We expect to generate substantially all of our revenue for the foreseeable future from sales of the Hi Art system and post-warranty service contracts for the Hi Art system. Accordingly, we are dependent on our ability to market and sell the Hi Art system. Any factor materially adversely affecting our ability to market and sell the Hi Art system or pricing and demand for the Hi Art system would have a material adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operations.
 
The long sales cycle and high unit price of the Hi Art system, as well as other factors, may contribute to substantial fluctuations in our quarterly operating results and stock price and make it difficult to compare our results of operations to prior periods.
 
The Hi Art system is a major capital equipment item and has a lengthy sales cycle. Generally, the time from initial customer contact to execution of a purchase order can be one year or more. Following execution of a contract, it may take several additional months for a customer to retrofit an existing radiation treatment room, or bunker, to house the Hi Art system and between nine and twelve months if a new bunker must be constructed. Upon delivery of the Hi Art system to the customer’s facility, it typically takes three to four weeks to complete the installation and on-site testing of the system, including the completion of acceptance test procedures with the customer. We recognize revenue from the sale of the Hi Art system upon receipt of a signed acceptance test procedure report from the customer. Because of the high unit price of the Hi Art system and the relatively small number of units installed each quarter, each installation currently represents a significant component of our revenue for a particular quarter. If a small number of customers defer installation of a Hi Art system for even a short period of time, recognition of a significant amount of revenue may be deferred to a subsequent period. For example, the deferral of a number of anticipated installations in the quarter ended September 30, 2005, resulted in revenue of $14.1 million in that quarter compared to $29.6 million in the prior quarter and $21.9 million in the subsequent quarter. Because our operating costs are relatively fixed, our inability to recognize revenue in a particular quarter may adversely affect our profitability in that quarter. As a result, the inability to recognize revenue in a particular quarter may make it difficult to compare our quarterly operating results with prior periods. In addition, while we believe that our backlog of orders provides a better measure at any particular point in time of the long-term performance prospects of our business than our quarterly operating results, investors may attribute significant weight to our quarterly operating results, which may result in substantial fluctuations in our stock price.
 
We face competition from numerous competitors, many of whom have greater resources than we do, which may make it more difficult for us to achieve significant market penetration.
 
The market for radiation therapy equipment is characterized by intense competition and pricing pressure. We consider the competition for the Hi Art system to be existing radiation therapy systems, primarily using C-arm linear accelerators. In particular, we compete with a number of existing radiation therapy equipment companies including Varian Medical Systems, Inc., Elekta AB, Siemens Medical Solutions, and, to a lesser extent, Accuray Incorporated and BrainLAB AG. Varian Medical Systems has been the market leader for many years and has the majority market share for radiation therapy systems worldwide. Most of our competitors are large, well-capitalized companies with significantly greater market share and resources than


9


Table of Contents

we have. As a result, these companies may be better positioned than we are to spend more aggressively on research and development, marketing, sales and other product initiatives.
 
Our current competitors or other companies may at any time develop new products for the treatment of tumors. If we are unable to develop products that compete effectively against the products of existing or future competitors, our net revenue could decline. Some of our competitors may compete by changing their pricing model or by lowering the price of their conventional radiation therapy systems or ancillary supplies. If these competitors’ pricing techniques are effective, it could result in downward pressure on the price of radiation therapy systems. If we are unable to maintain or increase our selling prices in the face of competition, we may not improve our gross margins.
 
In addition to the competition that we face from technologies performing similar functions to the Hi Art system, competition also exists for the limited capital expenditure budgets of our customers. A potential purchaser may be forced to choose between two items of capital equipment. Our ability to compete may also be adversely affected when purchase decisions are based largely upon price, since the Hi Art system is a premium priced system due to its greater functionality compared to traditional systems. If we are unable to market the Hi Art system more effectively than competing products, which could be purchased as an alternative to the Hi Art system using the same budget at comparable or lower prices, we may be unable to maintain our current growth rate.
 
Our reliance on single-source suppliers for critical components of the Hi Art system could harm our ability to meet demand for our products in a timely and cost effective manner.
 
We currently depend on single-source suppliers for a number of critical components necessary for the assembly of the Hi Art system, including the ring gantry, the linear accelerator, the couch, the solid state modulator, the rotary union, the radiation detector and the magnetron. We purchase some of these components from major industry suppliers. We do not have long-term supply contracts with the suppliers of the solid state modulator, the rotary union and the magnetron. An affiliate of one of our competitors, Siemens Medical Solutions, Inc., is also our supplier for the linear accelerator used in the Hi Art system. If the supply of any of these components were to be disrupted or terminated, or if these suppliers were unable to supply the quantities of components that we require, we may have difficulty or be unable to find alternative sources for these key components. As a result, we may be unable to meet the demand for the Hi Art system, which could harm our ability to generate revenue and damage our reputation. In addition, such a delay in components might cause us to have insufficient spare parts to service existing installed systems, which may lead to customer dissatisfaction. Some of our single-source suppliers have at times had material difficulties maintaining an adequate supply of parts to meet our manufacturing and service demands.
 
We believe it will be necessary to find alternative manufacturers for key components of the Hi Art system over time as our quantity and quality demands evolve, but we may experience a significant delay in locating an alternative manufacturer. Furthermore, we will need to verify that any new manufacturer meets our technical specifications and maintains facilities, procedures and operations that comply with our quality requirements. We will also have to assess any new manufacturer’s compliance with all applicable regulations and guidelines, which could further impede our ability to manufacture our products in a timely manner. If the change in manufacturer results in a significant change to the product, a new 510(k) clearance from the U.S. Food and Drug Administration, or FDA, or similar foreign clearance may be necessary, which would likely cause substantial delays. The occurrence of any of these events could harm our ability to meet the demand for the Hi Art system in a timely manner or within budget.
 
Sales of the Hi Art system may be adversely affected if clinicians do not widely adopt IGRT and adaptive radiotherapy, which is an emerging cancer treatment technique.
 
Our success in marketing the Hi Art system depends in part on persuading clinicians and patients of the benefits of adaptive radiation therapy. Image guided radiation therapy, or IGRT, is an emerging cancer treatment technique which involves delivering intensity modulated radiation therapy, or IMRT, guided by images of the treatment area taken shortly before treatment, using CT, x-ray, ultrasound or other imaging technologies. IMRT is a widely accepted technique, which involves varying, or modulating, the intensity of the radiation beam across a targeted treatment area. Adaptive radiation therapy involves adjusting a patient’s radiation therapy plan between treatment sessions to account for changes in the patient’s anatomy, the amount


10


Table of Contents

and location of the radiation received by the patient, and the size, shape and location of the tumor. In particular, we believe that adaptive radiation therapy requires, and we have designed the Hi Art system to enable, continual adjustments to a patient’s treatment plan throughout the entire course of treatment, facilitated by both the regular acquisition of updated quantitative images showing the location, geometry and density of the tumor, as well as the verification of the actual radiation dose received by the patient. Since IGRT and adaptive radiation therapy are still in the early stages of emergence and implementation, increased sales of the Hi Art system depend, in part, on widespread adoption of these techniques by clinicians. Widespread adoption of IGRT and adaptive radiation therapy depends on many factors, including some that are outside of our control. These factors include acceptance by clinicians that IGRT and adaptive radiation therapy are clinically effective and cost effective in treating a wide range of tumors, demand by patients for such treatment, successful education of clinicians on the various aspects of these techniques and adequate reimbursement for procedures performed using adaptive radiation therapy. If widespread market acceptance of IGRT and adaptive radiation therapy do not occur, or do not occur as rapidly as we anticipate, sales of the Hi Art system may be adversely affected and our revenue may decline or fail to grow at its current rate.
 
We may be delayed or prevented from implementing our long-term sales strategy if we fail to educate clinicians and patients about the benefits of the Hi Art system and to implement enhancements to the system in a timely manner.
 
As of December 31, 2006, we had an installed base of 108 Hi Art systems worldwide. We believe that sales of the Hi Art system to date have been principally to those hospitals and cancer treatment centers that are most open to the adoption of new technologies. In order to expand our sales, we must raise awareness of the range of benefits that we believe the Hi Art system offers to both existing and potential customers, and their patients. An important part of our sales strategy involves educating and training clinicians to utilize the entire functionality of the Hi Art system. In particular, most clinicians are currently unfamiliar with techniques which involve using the full quantitative imaging capabilities of the Hi Art system, which enables clinicians to adapt a patient’s treatment plan in response to anatomical changes and the cumulative amount of radiation received by specific areas within the patient over the course of treatment. In addition, we must further educate clinicians about the ability of the Hi Art system to treat a wide range of cancers effectively and efficiently. If clinicians are not properly educated about the use of the Hi Art system for adaptive radiation therapy, they may be unwilling or unable to take advantage of the full range of functionality that we believe the Hi Art system offers, which could have an adverse effect on our product sales.
 
In determining whether to purchase a single Hi Art system or whether to purchase multiple Hi Art systems, we understand that clinicians may weigh the benefits that the Hi Art system offers their patients, especially those with tumors typically treated using less sophisticated equipment, against the additional time required to implement Hi Art system’s image guided treatment functionality and the higher cost of the Hi Art system when compared to systems with less functionality. Customers or potential customers may decide that certain tumors can be adequately treated using traditional radiation therapy systems, notwithstanding the greater precision and functionality enabled by the Hi Art system. These considerations may be particularly relevant to cancer treatment centers that only have space for a single radiation therapy system. In order to increase sales of the Hi Art system to these customers, we must succeed in implementing enhancements to the Hi Art system to improve speed and patient throughput in order to render the time differentials between certain procedures performed using the Hi Art system and those performed using competitive systems insignificant. We must also succeed in educating clinicians about the potential for cost effective reimbursement for procedures performed using the Hi Art system. In addition, we must raise awareness of the Hi Art system among potential patients, who are increasingly educated about cancer treatment options and therefore drive adoption of new technologies by clinicians. Our efforts to expand sales of the Hi Art system in the long-term may be adversely affected if we fail in implementing these strategies.
 
Our ability to increase our profitability depends in part on reducing our cost of revenue, which we may not be able to achieve.
 
Our gross margin was 38.2% in 2004, 33.9% in 2005 and 34.2% in 2006. Our gross margins have been impacted by higher component costs and failure rates than we originally anticipated, resulting in increased warranty expense and negative profit margins on most of our existing service contracts for the Hi Art


11


Table of Contents

system. We are making investments in developing alternate components, implementing enhancements to increase the performance of components currently used in the Hi Art system and seeking to identify lower priced components of comparable or improved performance and quality. If we are unable to reduce our expenses through these initiatives and maintain competitive pricing of service contracts, our profitability may not improve or may be adversely affected.
 
If we are unable to maintain existing research collaboration relationships, enter into new collaboration arrangements in the future or enter into license agreements with our collaborators and others, our ability to enhance the Hi Art system may be adversely affected.
 
To date, we have entered into research collaboration arrangements with over 20 hospitals, cancer treatment centers and academic institutions, and a national laboratory. These research collaborations support our internal research and development capabilities and represent a key element of our on-going research and development program. Among other things, our current collaborations supplement initiatives to more fully automate the treatment and adaptive therapy processes enabled by the Hi Art system, as well as initiatives to accommodate real-time patient movements during treatment. Our research collaboration partners may not fulfill all of their obligations under our arrangements with them. If our current research collaborations do not meet our research and development expectations, or if we are unable to enter into additional research collaborations in the future to replace unproductive collaborations or add new collaborations, our ability to enhance the Hi Art system may be adversely affected. In addition, we may also face significant competition in seeking third-party collaborators and may be unable to find third parties with whom to pursue research collaborations on a timely basis or on acceptable terms. Our inability to successfully collaborate with third parties would increase our development costs, delay new or pending developments and could limit the likelihood of successful enhancements to the Hi Art system.
 
Our collaboration agreements generally provide that we either (1) own, in the case of our own developments, (2) have the right to use, in the case of joint developments, or (3) have the right to license, in the case of developments by our collaborator, technology developed pursuant to a collaboration. We cannot provide any assurance that we will successfully enter into license agreements with any of our collaborators concerning technology that is jointly developed or developed by the collaborator. If we are unable to enter into exclusive license agreements with a collaborator over technology that is jointly developed with, or solely developed by, the collaborator, the collaborator may be able to use or license the technology to third parties. Furthermore, if we are unable to enter into license agreements with a collaborator for technology that is jointly developed with, or solely developed by, the collaborator, we may be unable to use that technology. In addition, if we are unable to agree with our collaborators concerning ownership or proper inventorship of technology developed under the collaboration agreement, we may be forced to engage in arbitration or litigation to determine the proper ownership or inventorship.
 
We continue to invest in developing technology that we may wish to incorporate into future Hi Art systems in order to improve our product offering and keep pace with our competition. We may need to license such technology from third parties, but there can be no assurance that such licenses will be available on terms acceptable to us or at all.
 
We rely on a third party to perform spare parts shipping and other logistics functions on our behalf. A failure or disruption at our logistics providers would adversely impact our business.
 
Customer service is a critical element of our sales strategy. In particular, Kuehne + Nagel Inc. stores almost all of our spare parts inventory in depots around the world and performs a significant portion of our spare parts logistics and shipping activities. We may utilize additional logistics service providers in connection with the expansion of our international sales. If Kuehne + Nagel suffers an interruption in its business, or experiences delays, disruptions or quality control problems in its operations, or we have to change and qualify an alternative logistics provider, shipments of spare parts to our customers may be delayed and our reputation and results of operations may be adversely affected.


12


Table of Contents

 
If third-party payors do not continue to provide sufficient coverage and reimbursement to healthcare providers for use of the Hi Art system, sales of the Hi Art system may be adversely affected.
 
Our ability to market and sell the Hi Art system successfully depends in part on the extent to which sufficient reimbursement for treatment procedures using the Hi Art system will be available from third-party payors such as private health insurance plans and health maintenance organizations and, to a lesser degree, government payor programs such as Medicare and Medicaid. Third-party payors, and in particular managed care organizations, are continuously challenging the prices charged for medical products and services and instituting cost containment measures to control or significantly influence the purchase of medical products and services. These cost containment measures, if instituted in a manner affecting the coverage of, or reimbursement for, treatment procedures performed using the Hi Art system, could discourage cancer treatment centers and hospitals from purchasing the Hi Art system.
 
Treatment procedures performed using the Hi Art system are currently covered and reimbursed at acceptable rates by third-party payors. However, we cannot provide any assurance that third-party payors will continue to reimburse these procedures at current rates or will continue to consider these procedures to be cost-effective compared to other treatments. Clinicians may be reluctant to purchase the Hi Art system or may decline to do so entirely if they determine there is insufficient coverage and reimbursement from third-party payors for the cost of procedures performed using the Hi Art system, which could have an adverse impact on our sales.
 
Reimbursement for services rendered to Medicaid beneficiaries is determined pursuant to each state’s Medicaid plan, which is established by state law and regulations and is subject to the requirements of federal laws and regulations. The Balanced Budget Act of 1997 revised the Medicaid program to provide each state more control over coverage and payment matters. In addition, the Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services has granted many states waivers to allow for greater control of the Medicaid program at the state level. The impact on our business of this greater state control on Medicaid payment for diagnostic services remains uncertain.
 
Our success in non-U.S. markets also depends upon treatment procedures using the Hi Art system being eligible for reimbursement through government-sponsored healthcare payment systems, private third-party payors and labor unions. Reimbursement and healthcare payment systems in international markets vary significantly by country and, within some countries, by region. In many international markets, payment systems may control reimbursement for procedures performed using new products as well as procurement of these products. In addition, as economies of emerging markets develop, these countries may implement changes in their healthcare delivery and payment systems. Healthcare cost containment efforts are prevalent in many of the countries in which we sell, or intend to sell, our product and these efforts are expected to continue. Market acceptance of the Hi Art system in a particular country may depend on the availability and level of reimbursement in that country. Our ability to generate sales may be adversely affected if customers are unable to obtain or maintain adequate reimbursement for treatment procedures using the Hi Art system in markets outside of the United States in which we are selling, or are seeking to sell, the Hi Art system.
 
We have a limited history of manufacturing the Hi Art system in commercial quantities and may encounter manufacturing problems or delays that could result in lost revenue.
 
We commenced manufacturing the Hi Art system in late 2002 and recently moved production to a newly-constructed facility in Madison, Wisconsin. The manufacturing processes at our facility include subassembly, assembly, system integration and testing. We must manufacture and assemble the Hi Art system in commercial quantities in compliance with regulatory requirements and at an acceptable cost. We have only a limited history of manufacturing commercial quantities of the Hi Art system and, as a result, we may have difficulty manufacturing the Hi Art system in sufficient quantities in a timely manner. To manage our manufacturing operations with our suppliers, we forecast anticipated product orders and material requirements to predict our inventory needs up to six months in advance and enter into purchase orders on the basis of these requirements. Our limited manufacturing history may not provide us with enough data to accurately predict future component demand. Accordingly, we may encounter difficulties in scaling up production of the Hi Art system, including problems with quality control and assurance, component supply shortages, increased costs, shortages of qualified personnel and difficulties associated with compliance with local, state, federal and foreign regulatory requirements. In addition, if we are unable to maintain larger-scale manufacturing capabilities, our ability to generate revenue will also be limited and our reputation could be damaged. If we


13


Table of Contents

cannot achieve the required level and quality of production, we may need to outsource production or rely on licensing and other arrangements with third parties who possess sufficient manufacturing facilities and capabilities in compliance with regulatory requirements. Even if we could outsource needed production or enter into licensing or other third-party arrangements, this could reduce our gross margin.
 
Our manufacturing operations are conducted at a single location and any disruption at our facility could increase our expenses.
 
All of our manufacturing operations are conducted at a single location in Madison, Wisconsin. This location contains bunkers for testing the Hi Art system because it emits radiation. We do not maintain a backup manufacturing facility and we therefore depend on our current facility for the continued operation of our business. We take precautions to safeguard our facility, including insurance, health and safety protocols, and off-site storage of computer data. However, a natural disaster could cause substantial delays in our manufacturing operations, damage or destroy our manufacturing equipment or inventory, and cause us to incur additional expenses. The insurance we maintain against natural disasters may not be adequate to cover our losses in any particular case. With or without insurance, damage to our manufacturing facility or our other property, or to any of our suppliers, due to a natural disaster or casualty event may have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.
 
We rely on local distributors to market and distribute the Hi Art system in much of the Asian market.
 
We rely on third-party distributors for the marketing and distribution of the Hi Art system in Japan, Taiwan, South Korea, Singapore, India and China. The percentage of our revenue derived from sales by local distributors was 11% in 2005 and 21% in 2006. A component of our growth strategy is to expand our marketing and sales through distributors in additional countries. In our standard distribution agreement, we appoint an exclusive distributor for a specific country for a period of three years. The agreement sets forth annual sales targets and we are entitled to terminate the agreement if the distributor fails to meet these sales targets. To date, we have not had to terminate our relationship with a single distributor due to a failure to meet the minimum sales targets. We have also developed a certification procedure to ensure each distributor can fulfill its obligations under the distribution agreement. Accordingly, our success in generating sales in countries where we have engaged local distributors depends in part on the efforts of others whom we do not control. Many of our local distributors have only limited personnel capabilities, although we require them to assume responsibility for marketing, sales and service efforts in their country. As a result, these distributors may not be able to successfully market, sell and service the Hi Art system, may not devote sufficient time and resources to support adequate marketing and selling efforts, and may not market the Hi Art system at prices that will permit the Hi Art system to develop, achieve or sustain market acceptance, any of which could adversely affect our potential for revenue from international markets. In addition, if a distributor is terminated by us or goes out of business, it may take us a period of time to locate an alternative distributor and to train its personnel to market the Hi Art system and our ability to sell the Hi Art system in that distributor’s country could be adversely affected.
 
Our results may be adversely affected by changes in foreign currency exchange rates.
 
In 2006, we derived 84% of our revenue from contracts denominated in U.S. dollars, 15% in Euros and 1% in Canadian dollars. The substantial majority of our expenses have historically been denominated in U.S. dollars. However, in 2006 we opened an office in Brussels, Belgium and increased our hiring efforts in Europe. As a result, we anticipate that an increasing portion of our expenses will be denominated in Euros. If the U.S. dollar weakens against the Euro, it will have a negative impact on our profit margins. We do not currently have a hedging program in place to offset these risks.
 
In addition, long-term movements in foreign currency exchange rates could affect the competitiveness of the Hi Art system. In the recent past, we have benefited from a relatively weak U.S. dollar that has made our pricing more competitive compared to our non-U.S. competitors. This has been a contributor to our international orders and revenue growth. Although sales of the Hi Art system internationally may occur in local currencies, our overall cost structure remains largely U.S. dollar based. If some of our competitors have cost structures based in other currencies, our overall margins and pricing competitiveness may be adversely affected. Any significant strengthening of the U.S. dollar against other countries’ currencies may result in


14


Table of Contents

slower growth in our international orders and revenue, which could negatively affect our overall financial performance and results.
 
Technological breakthroughs in cancer treatment could render the Hi Art system obsolete.
 
The cancer treatment market is characterized by continual technological change and product innovation. The Hi Art system is based on our proprietary technology, but a number of our competitors are pursuing new radiation therapy systems incorporating IGRT and adaptive radiation therapy techniques. In addition, companies in the pharmaceutical or biotechnology fields may seek to develop methods of cancer treatment that are more effective than radiation therapy, resulting in decreased demand for the Hi Art system. Because the Hi Art system has a long development cycle and because it can take significant time to receive government approvals for changes to the Hi Art system, we must anticipate changes in the marketplace and the direction of technological innovation. Accordingly, if we are unable to anticipate and address new innovations in the cancer treatment market, the Hi Art system or an aspect of its functionality may be rendered obsolete, which would have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.
 
A significant percentage of our sales are in international markets, and economic, political and other risks associated with international sales and operations could adversely affect our sales or make them less predictable.
 
The percentage of our revenue derived from sales of the Hi Art system outside of North America was 6% in 2004, 22% in 2005 and 43% in 2006. To accommodate our international sales, we have invested significant financial and management resources to develop an international infrastructure that will meet the needs of our customers. In particular, in 2006 we opened a European office in Brussels, Belgium which includes sales, service and call center operations. In addition, we have entered into agreements with distributors in Asia who purchase the Hi Art system from us for resale to end customers. We support our international marketing and sales activities from both our U.S. headquarters in Madison, Wisconsin and our office in Brussels, Belgium.
 
We face additional risks resulting from our international operations including:
 
  •      difficulties in enforcing agreements and collecting receivables in a timely manner through the legal systems of many countries outside North America;
 
  •      the failure to fulfill foreign regulatory requirements to market the Hi Art system on a timely basis or at all;
 
  •      availability of, and changes in, reimbursement within prevailing foreign health care payment systems;
 
  •      difficulties in managing foreign relationships and operations, including any relationships that we establish with foreign distributors or sales or marketing agents;
 
  •      limited protection for intellectual property rights in some countries;
 
  •      fluctuations in currency exchange rates;
 
  •      the possibility that foreign countries may impose additional withholding taxes or otherwise tax our foreign income, impose tariffs or adopt other restrictions on foreign trade;
 
  •      the possibility of any material shipping delays; and
 
  •      significant changes in the political, regulatory, safety or economic conditions in a country or region.
 
If we fail to overcome the challenges we encounter in our international operations, our business will be materially adversely affected.
 
Product liability suits, whether or not meritorious, could be brought against us due to an alleged defective component of the Hi Art system or for the misuse of the Hi Art system. These suits could result in expensive and time-consuming litigation, payment of substantial damages and an increase in our insurance rates.
 
Our business exposes us to potential product liability claims that are inherent in the manufacture, sale, installation, servicing and support of medical devices. The medical device industry has historically been litigious, and we would face financial exposure to product liability claims if the use of the Hi Art system were to cause or contribute to injury or death, whether by aggravating existing patient symptoms or otherwise. Because the Hi Art system involves the delivery of radiation to the human body, the possibility for significant


15


Table of Contents

injury or death exists. The tolerance for error in the design, manufacture, installation, servicing, support or use of the Hi Art system may be small or nonexistent. We may also be subject to claims for property damage or economic loss related to, or resulting from, any errors or defects in the Hi Art system, or the installation, servicing and support of the Hi Art system, or any professional services rendered in conjunction with the Hi Art system. Additionally, it is also possible that defects in the design or manufacture of the Hi Art system might necessitate a product recall. For instance, new components or enhancements to the Hi Art system may contain undetected errors or performance problems that, despite testing, are discovered only after installation. Although we maintain product liability insurance for the Hi Art system, the coverage limits of these policies may be inadequate to cover future claims. As sales of the Hi Art system increase, we may be unable to maintain product liability insurance on acceptable terms or at reasonable costs and such insurance may not provide us with adequate coverage for all potential liabilities. A successful claim brought against us relating to a liability that is in excess of our insurance coverage, or for which insurance coverage is denied or limited, would require us to pay damage amounts that could be substantial and have a material adverse effect on our financial position and could divert management’s attention from our core business.
 
The effectiveness of procedures performed using the Hi Art system are not yet supported by long-term clinical data and the medical community has not yet developed a large body of peer-reviewed literature that supports the Hi Art system’s safety and efficacy.
 
We do not have significant clinical data supporting the advantages that we believe the Hi Art system offers in comparison with competing products and technologies. For example, because the Hi Art system has only been on the market since 2003, we have only limited complication or patient survival rate data, which are a common long-term measures of clinical effectiveness in cancer treatment. In addition, there are a limited number of peer-reviewed medical journal publications regarding the safety and efficacy of the Hi Art system. If future patient studies or clinical experience do not support our beliefs that the Hi Art system offers a safe and effective treatment for a wide variety of cancers, use of the Hi Art system could fail to increase or could decrease, and our growth and operating results would therefore be adversely affected. In addition, if future results and experience indicate that the Hi Art system causes unexpected or serious complications or other unforeseen negative effects, the FDA could rescind our clearances, our reputation with clinicians and patients could suffer and we could be subject to significant legal liability.
 
Our success will depend on our ability to attract and retain qualified personnel.
 
We are highly dependent on members of our senior management, operations and research and development staff. Our continued success will depend on our ability to retain our current management and qualified personnel with expertise in research and development, engineering, service, manufacturing, sales, marketing and finance. Competition is intense in the medical device industry for senior management personnel, as well as other qualified personnel, and finding and retaining such personnel with experience in our industry is very difficult. There is substantial time and training required for all newly-hired employees to learn our product and proprietary systems. The loss of the services of certain members of our senior management, scientists, clinicians, or engineers could prevent the implementation and completion of our business objectives. The loss of a member of senior management or our professional staff would also require the remaining executive officers to divert substantial attention to seeking a replacement.
 
Additionally, the sale and after-sale support of the Hi Art system is logistically complex, requiring us to maintain an extensive infrastructure of field sales and customer support personnel. We face considerable challenges, including managing geographically dispersed efforts, in recruiting, training, managing, motivating and retaining these teams. If we are unable to maintain and grow an adequate pool of trained and motivated personnel, our reputation could suffer and our financial position could be adversely affected.
 
If we do not effectively manage our growth, our business may be significantly harmed.
 
The number of our employees increased from 327 as of December 31, 2005 to 492 as of December 31, 2006. In addition, we have significantly expanded our activities outside of the United States, including the establishment of a customer support center in Brussels, Belgium and spare parts depots around the world. In order to implement our business strategy, we expect continued growth in our employee and infrastructure requirements, particularly as we expand our manufacturing, customer service and sales and marketing capacities.


16


Table of Contents

To manage our growth, we must expand our facilities, augment our management, operational and financial systems, hire and train additional qualified personnel, scale-up our manufacturing capacity and expand our marketing and distribution capabilities. Our manufacturing, assembly and installation process is complex and we must effectively scale this entire process to satisfy customer expectations and changes in demand. We also expect to increase the number of sales and marketing personnel as we expand our business, and although the number of people we employ in our international offices has grown significantly, in many international locations we still lack the minimum critical mass to qualify for group efficiencies, which drives our overall cost of operations higher. We cannot be certain that our personnel, systems, procedures and internal controls will be adequate to support our future operations. Our business will suffer if we cannot manage our growth effectively.
 
Many countries require that software user interfaces be translated into their respective local language. Failure to adhere to each country’s law with respect to the language of the user interface may cause substantial disruptions in the delivery of new systems and the use of existing systems.
 
The governmental agencies regulating medical devices in some countries require that the user interface on medical device software be in the local language. This may conflict with the preferences of some end customers who believe that an English user interface allows for the broadest range of use by clinicians and the safest way to utilize the system. We currently provide user guides and manuals in the local language but only provide an English language version of the user interface. If we cannot convert our user interface to local languages to comply with those regulatory requirements, the use of our systems may be interrupted and it may cause the delay or cessation of future sales in those countries.
 
We may need to raise additional capital in the future and may be unable to do so on acceptable terms. This could limit our ability to grow and carry out our business plan.
 
We believe that the net proceeds from this offering, together with our cash reserves and cash from operations, will be sufficient to meet our anticipated cash needs for working capital and capital expenditures for at least the next 12 months. If our estimates of revenue, expenses, or capital or liquidity requirements change or are inaccurate, or if cash generated from operations is insufficient to satisfy our liquidity requirements, we may seek to sell additional equity or arrange additional debt financing. In the future, we may also seek to sell additional equity or arrange debt financing to give us financial flexibility to pursue attractive acquisition or investment opportunities that may arise, although we currently do not have any acquisitions or investments planned. We cannot be certain that we will be able to obtain additional financing on commercially reasonable terms or at all, which could limit our ability to grow and carry out our business plan, or that any such additional financing, if raised through the issuance of equity securities, will not be dilutive to our existing shareholders. If we raise additional funds through licensing arrangements, it may be necessary to relinquish potentially valuable rights to our products or proprietary technologies, or grant licenses on terms that are not favorable to us. If we cannot raise funds on acceptable terms, we may not be able to develop or enhance our products, execute our business plan, take advantage of future opportunities, or respond to competitive pressures or unanticipated customer requirements. If any of these events occurs, it could adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.
 
We have not yet evaluated our internal controls over financial reporting in compliance with Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act.
 
Upon the effectiveness of this registration, we will be required to comply with the internal control evaluation and certification requirements of Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act by no later than the end of our 2008 fiscal year. We are in the process of determining whether our existing internal controls over financial reporting systems are compliant with Section 404. This process may divert internal resources and will take a significant amount of time and effort to complete. To the extent that we are not currently in compliance with Section 404, we may be required to implement new internal control procedures and re-evaluate our financial reporting. We may experience higher than anticipated operating expenses as well as increased independent auditor fees during the implementation of these changes and thereafter. Further, we may need to hire additional qualified personnel in order for us to comply with Section 404. If we are unable to implement these changes effectively or efficiently, it could harm our operations, financial reporting or financial results and could result in our being unable to obtain an unqualified report on internal controls from our independent auditors, which could have a negative impact on our stock price.


17


Table of Contents

Risks Related to Our Intellectual Property
 
If we are not able to meet the requirements of our license agreement with the Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation, or WARF, we could lose access to the technologies licensed thereunder and be unable to produce or sell the Hi Art system.
 
We license from WARF significant technology under a license agreement that requires us to pay royalties to WARF. In addition, the license agreement obligates us to pursue an agreed development plan and to submit periodic reports, and restricts our ability to take actions to defend the licensed patents. WARF has the right to unilaterally terminate the agreement if we do not meet certain minimum royalty obligations or satisfy other obligations related to our utilization of the technology. If WARF were to terminate the agreement or if we were to otherwise lose the ability to exploit the licensed patents, our competitive advantage would be greatly reduced and we may not be able to find a source to replace the licensed technology.
 
The license agreement reserves to WARF the right to defend or prosecute any claim arising with respect to the licensed technology. If WARF does not vigorously defend the patents, any competitive advantage we have based on the licensed technology may be hampered. WARF also has the option, without receiving our prior consent, to settle a claim by granting a license to a third party for any of the licensed technology. Such a license would have the potential to reduce our competitive advantage.
 
If we are not able to adequately protect our intellectual property and proprietary technology our competitive position, future business prospects and financial performance will be adversely affected.
 
Our success depends significantly on our ability to protect our intellectual property and proprietary technologies used in the Hi Art system. If we fail to obtain patents, are unable to obtain patents with claims of a scope necessary to cover our technology, or our issued patents are determined to be invalid or not to cover our technology, our competitors could use portions of our intellectual property, which could weaken our competitive position. We have an active program to protect our proprietary inventions through the filing of patent applications and taking certain steps to preserve the confidentiality of our confidential and proprietary information. There can be no assurance, however, that:
 
  •      current or future U.S. or foreign patent applications will be approved in a timely manner or at all;
 
  •      our issued patents will protect our intellectual property and not be challenged by third parties;
 
  •      we will develop patentable intellectual property;
 
  •      the validity of our patents will be upheld;
 
  •      the patents of others will not have an adverse effect on our ability to do business; or
 
  •      others will not independently develop similar or competing products or methods or design around any patents that may be issued to us.
 
Although we have attempted to obtain patent coverage for our technology where available and appropriate, there are aspects of the technology for which patent coverage was never sought or never received. There are also countries in which we sell or intend to sell the Hi Art system, but have no patents or pending patent applications. Our ability to prevent others from making or selling duplicate or similar technologies will be impaired in those countries in which we have no patent protection. We also may not be able to protect our patent rights effectively in some foreign countries.
 
Our failure to protect the intellectual property we create would cause our business to suffer.
 
In addition to patents, we rely on a combination of copyright, trade secret and other laws, and contractual restrictions on disclosure, copying and transferring title, including confidentiality agreements with vendors, strategic partners, co-developers, employees, consultants and other third parties, to protect our proprietary rights. We cannot be certain that these contracts have not and will not be breached, that we will have adequate remedies for any breach or that our trade secrets will not otherwise become known or be independently developed by competitors. We cannot be certain that the steps we have taken to protect our proprietary information will be sufficient to safeguard the technology underlying the Hi Art system.


18


Table of Contents

 
We may initiate lawsuits to protect or enforce our patents or other intellectual property rights, which could be expensive and, if we lose, could cause us to lose some of our intellectual property rights.
 
There may be companies that are currently marketing or may, in the future, market products that compete with the Hi Art system in a direct challenge to our intellectual property position. In such cases, we may initiate litigation in order to stop them. We may not prevail in any lawsuits that we initiate and the damages or other remedies awarded, if any, may not be commercially valuable. Even if successful, litigation to enforce our intellectual property rights or to defend our patents against challenge could be expensive and time consuming and could divert our management’s attention from our core business. Litigation also puts our patents at risk of being invalidated or interpreted narrowly and our patent applications at risk of not issuing. Additionally, we may provoke third parties to assert claims against us.
 
In addition, we may become involved in litigation to protect our trademark rights associated with our company name or the names used with the Hi Art system. Third parties may assert that our company name and names used with the Hi Art system infringe rights held by others or are ineligible for proprietary protection. If we have to change the name of our company or the Hi Art system, we may experience a loss in goodwill associated with our brand name, customer confusion and a loss of sales.
 
We may become subject to costly intellectual property litigation, which could affect our future business and financial performance.
 
The medical device industry has been characterized by frequent intellectual property litigation. In particular, the field of radiation therapy for cancer is well-established and crowded with the intellectual property of competitors and others. A number of companies in our market, as well as universities and research institutions, have intellectual property, including patents and patent applications, that relate to the use of radiation therapy to treat cancer. We have not conducted an extensive search of patents pending or issued to third parties, and no assurance can be given that third party patents containing claims covering the Hi Art system, technology or methods do not exist, have not been filed or could not be filed or issued. Because of the number of patents issued and patent applications filed in our technical areas or fields, our competitors or other third parties may assert that the Hi Art system and the methods we employ in the use of our product are covered by United States or foreign patents held by them. As the number of competitors in the market for less invasive cancer treatment alternatives grows, and as the number of patents issued in this area grows, the possibility of patent infringement claims against us increases. Any such claim or litigation, regardless of merit, could cause us to incur substantial expenses and delay or materially disrupt the conduct of our business. We could also be required to pay a substantial damage award, develop non-infringing technology, enter into royalty-bearing licensing agreements, if such licenses are available on terms reasonable to us or at all, or stop selling our products. Some of our competitors may be able to sustain the costs of complex patent litigation more effectively than we can because they have substantially greater resources. In addition, any uncertainties resulting from the initiation and continuation of any litigation could have a material adverse effect on our ability to raise the funds necessary to continue our operations.
 
We may be subject to claims that our employees have wrongfully used or disclosed alleged trade secrets of their former employers.
 
As is common in the medical device industry, we employ individuals who were previously employed at other medical equipment or biotechnology companies, including our competitors or potential competitors. Although no claims against us are currently pending, we may be subject to claims that these employees or we have inadvertently or otherwise used or disclosed trade secrets or other proprietary information of their former employers. Litigation may be necessary to defend against these claims. Even if we are successful in defending against these claims, litigation could result in substantial costs and be a distraction to management.


19


Table of Contents

Risks Related to Regulatory Matters
 
Modifications, upgrades and future products related to the Hi Art system or new indications may require new FDA premarket approvals or 510(k) clearances, and such modifications, or any defects in design or manufacture may require us to recall or cease marketing the Hi Art system until approvals or clearances are obtained.
 
The Hi Art system is a medical device that is subject to extensive regulation in the United States and elsewhere, including by the FDA and its foreign counterparts. Before a new medical device, or a new use of or claim for an existing medical device, can be marketed in the United States, it must first receive either premarket approval or 510(k) clearance from the FDA, unless an exemption exists. Either process can be expensive and lengthy. The FDA’s 510(k) clearance process usually takes from three to twelve months, but can last longer. The process of obtaining premarket approval is much more costly and uncertain than the 510(k) clearance process and generally takes from one to three years, or even longer, from the time the application is filed with the FDA. Despite the time, effort and cost, there can be no assurance that any particular device will be approved or cleared by the FDA through either the premarket approval process or 510(k) clearance process. We have obtained 510(k) clearance from the FDA to market the Hi Art system for the treatment of tumors or other targeted tissues anywhere in the body where radiation therapy is indicated. An element of our strategy is to continue to upgrade the Hi Art system to incorporate new software and hardware enhancements that may require the approval of or clearance from the FDA or its foreign counterparts. Certain upgrades previously released by us required 510(k) clearance before we were able to offer them for sale. We expect that certain of our future upgrades to the Hi Art system will also require 510(k) clearance; however, future upgrades may be subject to the substantially more time-consuming and uncertain premarket approval process.
 
The FDA requires device manufacturers to determine whether or not a modification requires an approval or clearance. Any modification to an FDA approved or cleared device that would significantly affect its safety or efficacy or that would constitute a major change in its intended use would require a new premarket approval or 510(k) clearance. We have made modifications to the Hi Art system in the past and may make additional modifications in the future that we believe do not or will not require additional approvals or clearances. If the FDA disagrees and requires us to obtain additional premarket approvals or 510(k) clearances for any modifications to the Hi Art system and we fail to obtain such approvals or clearances or fail to secure approvals or clearances in a timely manner, we may be required to cease manufacturing and marketing the modified device or to recall modified devices until we obtain FDA approval or clearance. In addition, we may be subject to significant regulatory fines or penalties.
 
The FDA and its foreign counterparts regulate virtually all aspects of a medical device’s design, development, testing, manufacturing, labeling, storage, record keeping, reporting, sale, promotion, distribution and shipping. Medical devices may be marketed only for those indications for which they are approved or cleared. The FDA and its foreign counterparts also may change these policies, adopt additional regulations, or revise existing regulations, each of which could prevent or delay premarket approval or 510(k) clearance of our device, or could impact our ability to market our currently cleared device.
 
The Hi Art system is subject to recalls even after receiving FDA clearance or approval, which would harm our reputation, business and financial results.
 
We are subject to the medical device reporting regulations, which require us to report to the FDA if the Hi Art system causes or contributes to a death or serious injury, or malfunctions in a way that would likely cause or contribute to a death or serious injury. The FDA and similar governmental bodies in other countries have the authority to require the recall of the Hi Art system if we fail to comply with relevant regulations pertaining to manufacturing practices, labeling, advertising or promotional activities, or if new information is obtained concerning the safety or efficacy of the Hi Art system. A government-mandated or voluntary recall by us could occur as a result of manufacturing defects, labeling deficiencies, packaging defects or other failures to comply with applicable regulations. Any recall would divert management attention and financial resources and could harm our reputation with customers. A recall involving the Hi Art system could be particularly harmful to our business, financial condition and results of operations because it is currently our only product.


20


Table of Contents

 
If we or our distributors do not obtain and maintain the necessary regulatory approvals in a specific country, we will not be able to market and sell the Hi Art system in that country.
 
To be able to market and sell the Hi Art system in a specific country, we or our distributors must comply with the regulations of that country. While the regulations of some countries do not impose barriers to marketing and selling the Hi Art system or only require notification, others require that we or our distributors obtain the approval of a specified regulatory body. These regulations, including the requirements for approvals, and the time required for regulatory review vary from country to country. Obtaining regulatory approvals is expensive and time-consuming, and we cannot be certain that we or our distributors will receive regulatory approvals in each country in which we plan to market the Hi Art system. If we modify the Hi Art system, we or our distributors may need to apply for additional regulatory approvals before we are permitted to sell it. We may not continue to meet the quality and safety standards required to maintain the authorizations that we or our distributors have received. If we or our distributors are unable to maintain our authorizations in a particular country, we will no longer be able to sell the Hi Art system in that country, and our ability to generate revenue will be materially adversely affected.
 
We must manufacture the Hi Art system in accordance with federal and state regulations and we could be forced to recall our installed systems or terminate production if we fail to comply with these regulations.
 
We are required to comply with the FDA’s quality system regulations, which is a complex regulatory scheme that covers the procedures and documentation of the design, testing, production, control, quality assurance, labeling, packaging, sterilization, storage and shipping of the Hi Art system. Furthermore, we are required to verify that our suppliers maintain facilities, procedures and operations that comply with our quality requirements. The FDA enforces the Quality System Regulation through periodic inspections. Our quality system has passed several third-party audits, but has not yet been inspected by the FDA. The Hi Art system is also subject to similar state regulations and various worldwide laws and regulations. If in the future we fail a Quality System Regulation inspection, our operations could be disrupted and our manufacturing operations delayed. Failure to take adequate corrective action in response to a Quality System Regulation inspection could force a shutdown of our manufacturing operations and a recall of the Hi Art system. If any of these events occurs, our reputation could be harmed, and we could lose customers and suffer reduced revenue and increased costs.
 
If we are found to have violated laws protecting the confidentiality of patient health information, we could be subject to civil or criminal penalties, which could increase our liabilities and harm our reputation or our business.
 
There are a number of federal and state laws protecting the confidentiality of certain patient health information, including patient records, and restricting the use and disclosure of that protected information. In particular, the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services has promulgated patient privacy rules under the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act of 1996, or HIPAA. These privacy rules protect medical records and other personal health information by limiting their use and disclosure, giving individuals the right to access, amend and seek accounting of their own health information and limiting most uses and disclosures of health information to the minimum amount reasonably necessary to accomplish the intended purpose. Although we are not a covered entity under HIPAA, we have entered into agreements with certain covered entities under which we are considered to be a “business associate” under HIPAA. As a business associate, we are required to implement policies, procedures and reasonable and appropriate security measures to protect individually identifiable health information we receive from covered entities. Our failure to protect health information received from customers could subject us to liability and adverse publicity, and could harm our business and impair our ability to attract new customers.
 
In addition, if the firewall software protecting the information contained in the Hi Art system’s database fails or someone is successful in hacking into the database, we could face damage to our business reputation and possible litigation and regulatory action. Certain governmental agencies, such as the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services and the Federal Trade Commission, have the authority to protect against the misuse of consumer information by targeting companies that collect, disseminate or maintain personal information in an unfair or deceptive manner. We are also subject to the laws of those foreign jurisdictions in which we sell the Hi Art system,


21


Table of Contents

some of which currently have more protective privacy laws. If we fail to comply with applicable regulations in this area, our business and prospects could be harmed.
 
We are subject to federal and state laws prohibiting “kickbacks” and false or fraudulent claims, which, if violated, could subject us to substantial penalties. Additionally, any challenge to or investigation into our practices under these laws could cause adverse publicity and be costly to respond to, and thus could harm our business.
 
A federal law commonly referred to as the Medicare/Medicaid anti-kickback law, and several similar state laws, prohibit persons from knowingly and willfully soliciting, offering, receiving or providing remuneration, directly or indirectly, in cash or in kind, to induce either the referral of an individual, or furnishing or arranging for a good or service, for which payment may be made under federal healthcare programs, such as Medicare and Medicaid.
 
These laws constrain our sales, marketing and other promotional activities by limiting the kinds of financial arrangements, including sales programs, we may have with hospitals, physicians or other potential purchasers of medical devices. We have a variety of arrangements with our customers that could implicate these laws. For example, we provide research grants to some of our customers to support customer studies related to protocols in using the Hi Art system. Due to the breadth of some of these laws, and the range of interpretations to which they are subject to, it is possible that some of our current or future practices might be challenged under one or more of these laws. Other federal and state laws generally prohibit individuals or entities from knowingly presenting, or causing to be presented, claims for payment from Medicare, Medicaid or other third-party payors that are false or fraudulent, or for items or services that were not provided as claimed. While we do not give our customers advice on coding or billing procedures performed using the Hi Art system, we may inadvertently or informally provide billing or code information in response to customer inquiries regarding reimbursement for procedures. We cannot provide any assurance that the government will not view our inadvertent or informal statements regarding billing or coding to be advice, in which case we could be liable for providing erroneous advice. Anti-kickback and false claims laws prescribe civil and criminal penalties for noncompliance, which can be substantial. Even an unsuccessful challenge or investigation into our practices could cause adverse publicity, and be costly to respond to, and thus could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.
 
Risks Related to Our Common Stock and This Offering
 
Our common stock has not been publicly traded and we expect that the price of our common stock will fluctuate substantially.
 
Prior to this offering, there has been no public market for shares of our common stock. An active public trading market may not develop following completion of this offering or, if developed, may not be sustained. The price of the shares of common stock sold in this offering will be determined by negotiation between the underwriters and us. This price will not necessarily reflect the market price of our common stock following this offering. The market price of our common stock following this offering will be affected by a number of factors, including:
 
  •      fluctuations in quarterly revenue and net income;
 
  •      regulatory developments related to the manufacturing, marketing or sale of the Hi Art system;
 
  •      announcements of technological innovations, new services or service enhancements, strategic alliances or significant agreements by us or by our competitors;
 
  •      recruitment or departure of key personnel;
 
  •      changes in the estimates of our operating results or changes in recommendations by any securities analyst that elects to follow our common stock;
 
  •      sales of large blocks of our common stock; and
 
  •      changes in accounting principles or changes in interpretations of existing principles, which could affect our financial results.
 
Share price fluctuations may be exaggerated if the trading volume of our common stock is too low. The lack of a trading market may result in the loss of research coverage by securities analysts. Moreover, we cannot


22


Table of Contents

provide any assurance that any securities analysts will initiate or maintain research coverage of our company and our ordinary shares. If our future quarterly operating results are below the expectations of securities analysts or investors, the price of our common stock would likely decline. Securities class action litigation has often been brought against companies following periods of volatility. Any securities litigation claims brought against us could result in substantial expense and divert management’s attention from our business.
 
Sales of a substantial number of shares of our common stock in the market by our existing shareholders, or the perception that such sales could occur, could result in a decline in our stock price.
 
Upon completion of this offering, we will have 48,345,337 shares outstanding. The 10,937,500 shares of our common stock we and the selling shareholders are selling in this offering will be freely tradable without restriction immediately following this offering. Holders of approximately 99.5% our outstanding shares, including all of our directors and officers, have signed lock-up agreements for a period of 180 days following the date of this prospectus, subject to extension in the case of an earnings release or material news or a material event relating to us. In addition, the holders of options to purchase 1,450,463 shares, out of a total of vested options to purchase 2,069,862 shares as of March 31, 2007, have signed lock-up agreements. Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated may, in its sole discretion and without notice, release all or any portion of the shares subject to lock-up agreements. As restrictions on resale end, the market price of our common stock could drop significantly if the holders of these restricted shares sell them or are perceived by the market as intending to sell them. These factors could also make it more difficult for us to raise additional funds through future offerings of our shares or other securities. The following chart shows when we expect that the remaining 37,407,837 shares that are not being sold in this offering will be available for resale in the public markets.
 
     
Number of Shares/
   
Percentage of Total
   
Outstanding
  Date of Availability for Resale into the Public Market
 
169,848/0.4%
  Upon the effectiveness of this prospectus.
250,875/0.7%
  90 days after the date of this prospectus.
33,199,580/88.8%
  between 90 and 180 days after the date of this prospectus of which 18,245,256, or 48.8%, are subject to volume limitations under Rule 144.
3,787,534/10.1%
  More than 180 days after the date of this prospectus.
 
In addition, upon completion of this offering, subject to certain conditions, holders of an aggregate of approximately 24,939,356 shares of common stock will have the right to require us to file registration statements relating to their shares or to include their shares in registration statements that we may file for ourselves or other shareholders with the Securities and Exchange Commission, or SEC. We also intend to register approximately 9,533,677 shares of our common stock that are authorized for issuance under our equity compensation plans. Once we register these shares, they can be freely sold in the public market upon issuance, subject to the lock-up agreements described above and the restrictions imposed on our affiliates under Rule 144.
 
Our executive officers, directors and current and principal shareholders own approximately 37.8% of our outstanding common stock and could limit new shareholders’ influence on corporate decisions or could delay or prevent a change in corporate control.
 
Following the closing of this offering, the largest beneficial owners of our shares, Venture Investors, Avalon Technology and Endeavors Group, each of which currently beneficially owns more than 10.0% of our outstanding shares, will beneficially own in the aggregate 32.8% of our shares, or 30.7% if the underwriters exercise their overallotment option. As a result, these shareholders, if acting together, could exercise significant influence over the outcome of all matters submitted to our shareholders for approval. This concentration of ownership could have the effect of:
 
  •      delaying, deferring or preventing a change in control of our company;
 
  •      entrenching our management and/or board;
 
  •      impeding a merger, consolidation, takeover or other business combination involving our company; or


23


Table of Contents

 
  •      discouraging a potential acquiror from making a tender offer or otherwise attempting to obtain control of our company.
 
This concentration of ownership may also adversely affect our share price.
 
You will experience immediate and substantial dilution in the net tangible book value of the shares of our common stock you purchase in this offering.
 
The initial public offering price of our common stock is expected to exceed substantially the net tangible book value per share of our common stock immediately after this offering. Therefore, based on the midpoint of the range set forth on the cover of this prospectus of $16.00 per share, if you purchase our common stock in this offering, you will suffer immediate dilution of $12.13 per share. As a result of this dilution, investors purchasing 10,200,000 shares from us will have contributed 79.2% of the total amount of our total funding to date but will only own 22.2% of our equity. If outstanding options and warrants to purchase our shares are exercised in the future, you will experience additional dilution.
 
We have broad discretion in the use of the net proceeds from this offering and may not obtain a favorable return on the use of these proceeds.
 
We cannot specify with certainty the particular uses of the net proceeds we will receive from this offering. Our management will have broad discretion in the application of the net proceeds, including for any of the purposes described in “Use of Proceeds.” Accordingly, you will have to rely upon the judgment of our management with respect to the use of the net proceeds, with only limited information concerning management’s specific intentions. Our management may spend a portion or all of the net proceeds we receive from this offering in ways that our shareholders may not desire or that may not yield a favorable return. The failure by our management to apply these funds effectively could harm our business. Pending their use, we may invest the net proceeds we receive from this offering in a manner that does not produce income or that loses value.
 
We do not anticipate paying cash dividends on our common stock in the future.
 
We have never declared or paid cash dividends on our common stock. We currently intend to retain all available funds and any future earnings for use in the operation and expansion of our business and do not anticipate paying any cash dividends in the foreseeable future. The payment of dividends will be at the discretion of our board of directors and will depend on our results of operations, capital requirements, financial condition, prospects, contractual arrangements, any limitations on payments of dividends present in our current and future debt agreements, and other factors our board of directors may deem relevant. We are subject to a covenant under our line of credit agreement that places restrictions on our ability to pay dividends. As a result, capital appreciation, if any, of our common stock will be your sole source of potential gain for the foreseeable future.
 
Anti-takeover provisions included in our amended and restated articles of incorporation and bylaws could delay or prevent a change of control of our company, which could adversely impact the value of our common stock and may prevent or frustrate attempts by our shareholders to replace or remove our current management.
 
Our amended and restated articles of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws, which are to become effective at the closing of this offering, contain provisions that could delay or prevent a change of control of our company or changes in our board of directors that our shareholders might consider favorable. These provisions include the following:
 
  •      our board of directors is authorized to issue preferred stock in series, with the designation, powers, preferences and rights of each series to be fixed by our board of directors;
 
  •      a board of directors divided into three classes serving staggered three-year terms, such that not all members of the board will be elected at one time;
 
  •      a requirement that special meetings of shareholders be called only by a majority of our board of directors or our Chief Executive Officer upon demand of the holders of record of shares representing ten percent or as otherwise required by law;
 
  •      advance notice requirements for shareholder proposals and nominations; and


24


Table of Contents

 
  •      our bylaws may be amended by approval of either our shareholders or our board of directors, except where: (i) our articles of incorporation or the Wisconsin Business Corporation Law reserve the power exclusively to the shareholders, or (ii) the shareholders, in adopting, amending or repealing a particular bylaw, provide within the bylaws that the board of directors may not amend, repeal or readopt such bylaw.
 
In addition, a change of control of our company may be discouraged, delayed or prevented by Sections 180.1140 to 180.1144 of the Wisconsin Business Corporations Law. These provisions generally restrict a broad range of business combinations between a Wisconsin corporation and a shareholder owning 10% or more of our outstanding voting stock. These and other provisions in our amended and restated articles of incorporation, amended and restated bylaws and Wisconsin law could make it more difficult for shareholders or potential acquirors to obtain control of our board of directors or initiate actions that are opposed by the then-current board of directors, including to delay or impede a merger, tender offer or proxy contest involving our company. Any delay or prevention of a change of control transaction or changes in our board of directors could cause the market price of our common stock to decline.


25


Table of Contents

 
SPECIAL NOTE REGARDING FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS
 
This prospectus contains forward-looking statements. We have based these forward-looking statements on our current expectations and projections about future events. These statements include, but are not limited to:
 
  •      statements regarding the adoption of IGRT and adaptive radiation therapy as the standard treatment technique for treatment of most cancer patients;
 
  •      statements regarding the anticipated change in clinician perception as to the appropriateness of using the Hi Art system to treat certain tumors;
 
  •      statements regarding planned technological advancements and expanded capabilities of the Hi Art system;
 
  •      statements regarding the increase in the number of sales, marketing and support personnel we expect to employ;
 
  •      statements as to our ability to meet our anticipated cash needs for working capital and capital expenditure based on our current business plan;
 
  •      statements regarding the lack of need for additional FDA approvals or clearances for modifications to the Hi Art system;
 
  •      statements as to the increasing global demand for advanced medical treatments; and
 
  •      our intended uses of the proceeds from this offering.
 
These statements may be found primarily in the sections of this prospectus entitled “Summary,” “Risk Factors,” “Use of Proceeds,” “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and “Business” and in this prospectus generally, including the section of this prospectus entitled “Business — Overview” and “Business — Market Overview,” which contain information obtained from independent industry sources. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in these forward-looking statements as a result of various factors, including all the risks discussed in “Risk Factors” and elsewhere in this prospectus.
 
In addition, statements that use the terms “believe,” “expect,” “plan,” “intend,” “estimate,” “anticipate” and similar expressions are intended to identify forward-looking statements. All forward-looking statements in this prospectus reflect our current views about future events and are based on assumptions and are subject to risks and uncertainties that could cause our actual results to differ materially from future results expressed or implied by the forward-looking statements. Many of these factors are beyond our ability to control or predict. You should not put undue reliance on any forward-looking statements. Unless we are required to do so under U.S. federal securities laws or other applicable laws, we do not intend to update or revise any forward-looking statements.
 
The safe harbor provisions of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995 and Section 27A of the Securities Act do not apply to the forward-looking statements that are made in this prospectus.


26


Table of Contents

 
USE OF PROCEEDS
 
We estimate that we will receive net proceeds of approximately $150.0 million from the sale of common stock offered in this offering, assuming an initial public offering price of $16.00 per share, the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover of this prospectus, and after deducting the underwriting discount and estimated offering expenses payable by us. Each $1.00 increase or decrease in the assumed public offering price of $16.00 per share would increase or decrease the net proceeds to us from this offering by approximately $9.5 million, assuming the number of shares offered by us, as set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, remains the same and after deducting the underwriting discount and estimated offering expenses payable by us.
 
We intend to use the net proceeds from this offering to finance expanding our selling and marketing efforts, increasing our research and development programs, expanding our international service and support group, and for working capital and other general corporate purposes. We may also use a portion of the net proceeds to acquire or invest in complementary businesses, products or technologies, although we currently do not have any acquisitions or investments planned.
 
We will have broad discretion in the way that we use the net proceeds of this offering. The amounts that we actually spend for the purposes described above may vary significantly and will depend, in part, on the timing and amount of our future revenue.
 
Pending the application of the net proceeds of the offering as described above, we intend to invest the net proceeds of this offering in short-term, interest-bearing, investment-grade securities.
 
We will not receive any of the proceeds from the sale of shares by the selling shareholders.
 
DIVIDEND POLICY
 
We have never declared or paid any cash dividends on our common stock. We currently intend to retain any future earnings to finance our research and development efforts, the development of our proprietary technologies and the expansion of our business and do not intend to declare or pay dividends on our common stock in the foreseeable future. Any future determination to pay dividends will be at the discretion of our board of directors and will depend upon a number of factors, including our results of operations, financial condition, future prospects, growth plans, legal and contractual restrictions, restrictions imposed by applicable law and other factors our board of directors deems relevant.


27


Table of Contents

 
CAPITALIZATION
 
The following table sets forth our capitalization as of December 31, 2006:
 
  •      on an actual basis; and
 
  •      on a pro forma basis to give effect to: (1) the automatic conversion upon the closing of this offering of all of our shares of preferred stock outstanding as of December 31, 2006 on a one-for-one basis into shares of common stock, and (2) the issuance of 1,288,669 shares of common stock issuable for no consideration pursuant to the Series A Investment Agreement; and
 
  •      on a pro forma as adjusted basis to give effect to: (1) the automatic conversion upon the closing of this offering of all of our shares of preferred stock outstanding as of December 31, 2006 on a one-for-one basis into shares of common stock, (2) the issuance of 1,288,669 shares of common stock issuable for no consideration pursuant to the Series A Investment Agreement, and (3) the receipt of estimated net proceeds of $150.0 million from our sale of 10,200,000 shares of common stock in this offering at an assumed public offering price of $16.00 per share, the mid-point of the price range set forth on the cover of this prospectus, less the underwriting discount and estimated offering expenses payable by us.
 
You should read this information together with our consolidated financial statements and the related notes, “Use of Proceeds”, “Description of Capital Stock” and “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” included elsewhere in this prospectus.
 
                         
    As of December 31, 2006  
                Pro forma as
 
    Actual     Pro forma     adjusted  
          (unaudited)     (unaudited)  
    (in thousands)  
 
Temporary equity:
                       
Redeemable convertible preferred stock, $1 par value: 25,686,898 shares authorized, actual and zero authorized, pro forma and pro forma as adjusted; 25,221,239 shares issued and outstanding, actual and zero shares issued and outstanding pro forma and pro forma as adjusted
  $ 212,663     $     $  
Shareholders’ equity (deficit):
                       
Preferred stock, $0.01 par value: zero authorized, issued and outstanding, actual and pro forma; and 10,000,000 authorized, zero issued and outstanding, pro forma as adjusted.
                 
Common stock, $0.01 par value: 47,689,147 shares authorized, actual and pro forma; and 200,000,000 shares authorized, pro forma as adjusted; 9,264,291 shares issued and outstanding, actual; 35,774,199 shares issued and outstanding pro forma; and 45,974,199 shares issued and outstanding pro forma as adjusted
    93       358       460  
Additional paid-in capital
    1,771       214,169       364,043  
Treasury stock, 1,632 shares at cost
                 
Accumulated deficit
    (185,981 )     (185,981 )     (185,981 )
                         
Total shareholders’ equity (deficit)
    (184,117 )     28,546       178,522  
                         
Total capitalization
  $ 28,546     $ 28,546     $ 178,522  
                         


28


Table of Contents

The preceding table excludes as of December 31, 2006:
 
  •      11,449,199 shares of common stock reserved for issuance under our stock option plans, of which options to purchase 9,155,925 shares of common stock at a weighted average exercise price of $3.30 per share have been granted; and
 
  •      465,654 shares issuable upon the exercise of outstanding warrants at a weighted average exercise price of $1.16 per share.


29


Table of Contents

 
DILUTION
 
If you invest in our common stock, your interest will be immediately diluted to the extent of the difference between the public offering price per share of our common stock and the pro forma net tangible book value per share of our common stock after this offering. The pro forma net tangible book value of our common stock as of December 31, 2006 was $28.1 million or $0.78 per share of common stock outstanding. Net tangible book value per share represents the amount of all total tangible assets minus our total liabilities, divided by shares of common stock outstanding at that date. Tangible assets represent total assets excluding goodwill and other intangible assets. Net tangible book value dilution per share to new investors represents the difference between the amount per share paid by purchasers of common stock in this offering and the pro forma net tangible book value per share of common stock immediately after completion of this offering.
 
Our pro forma net tangible book value as of December 31, 2006 would have been $28.1 million, or approximately $0.78 per share, after giving effect to:
 
  •  the conversion of all of our shares of preferred stock on a one-for-one basis into shares of common stock; and
 
  •  the issuance of 1,288,669 shares of common stock issuable for no consideration to certain holders of our Series A preferred stock, including certain members of our management and entities affiliated with our directors, pursuant to the Series A Investment Agreement.
 
Our pro forma as adjusted net tangible book value as of December 31, 2006 would have been $178.1 million, or approximately $3.87 per share, after giving effect to the conversion of all of our shares of preferred stock on a one-for-one basis into shares of common stock and the sale by us of 10,200,000 shares in this offering at the assumed initial public offering price of $16.00 per share, the midpoint of the estimated initial public offering price range, and the receipt by us of the estimated net proceeds of $150.0 million, after deducting the underwriting discount and estimated offering expenses payable by us.
 
This represents an immediate increase in pro forma consolidated net tangible book value of $3.09 per share of common stock to existing shareholders and immediate dilution of $12.13 per share of common stock to new investors purchasing shares in this offering. Dilution per share represents the difference between the price per share to be paid by new investors for the shares sold in this offering and the pro forma consolidated net tangible book value per share immediately after this offering. The following table illustrates this per share dilution:
 
                 
Assumed initial public offering price per share
          $ 16.00  
Pro forma consolidated net tangible book value per share as of December 31, 2006
  $ 0.78          
Increase in pro forma consolidated net tangible book value per share attributable to new investors in this offering
    3.09          
                 
Pro forma consolidated net tangible book value per share after this offering
            3.87  
                 
Dilution per share to new investors
          $ 12.13  
                 
 
The following table presents the differences between the total consideration paid to us and the average price per share paid by existing shareholders and by new investors purchasing shares in this offering, before deducting the estimated underwriting discounts and estimated offering expenses payable by us:
 
                                         
    Shares of Common Stock Purchased     Total Consideration     Average Price
 
    Number     Percent     Amount     Percent     per Share  
    (in thousands)        
 
Existing shareholders
    35,774       77.8 %   $ 42,735       20.8 %   $ 1.19  
New investors
    10,200       22.2       163,200       79.2       16.00  
                                         
Total
    45,974       100.0 %   $ 205,935       100.0 %   $ 4.48  
                                         


30


Table of Contents

The preceding table excludes as of December 31, 2006:
 
  •      11,449,199 shares of common stock reserved for issuance under our stock option plans, of which options to purchase 9,155,925 shares of common stock at a weighted average exercise price of $3.30 per share have been granted; and
 
  •      465,654 shares issuable upon the exercise of outstanding warrants with a weighted average exercise price of $1.16 per share.
 
The number of shares of common stock outstanding in the table on the previous page is based on the pro forma number of shares outstanding as of December 31, 2006 and assumes no exercise of the underwriters’ option to purchase additional shares. If the underwriters’ option to purchase additional shares is exercised in full, the number of shares of common stock held by existing stockholders will be reduced to 33,396,074 shares or 72.6% of the total number of shares of common stock to be outstanding after this offering, and the number of shares of common stock held by investors participating in this offering will be increased to 12,578,125 shares or 27.4% of the total number of shares of common stock to be outstanding after this offering.
 
The following table presents, on a pro forma basis as of December 31, 2006, after giving effect to the issuance of 1,288,669 shares of common stock issuable pursuant to the Series A Investment Agreement (see “Transactions with Related Parties, Promoters and Control Persons — Issuance of Contingent Common Stock”), the exercise of all vested stock options and warrants outstanding as of December 31, 2006, the differences between the number of shares of common stock purchased from us, the total consideration and the weighted average price per share paid by existing shareholders and by investors participating in this offering at an assumed initial public offering price of $16.00 per share, before deducting underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses:
 
                                         
    Shares of Common Stock Purchased     Total Consideration     Average Price
 
    Number     Percent     Amount     Percent     per Share  
    (in thousands)        
 
Existing shareholders
    37,063       78.4 %   $ 42,735       20.8 %   $ 1.15  
New Investors
    10,200       21.6       163,200       79.2       16.00  
                                         
Total
    47,263       100.0 %   $ 205,935       100.0 %   $ 4.36  
                                         
 
The preceding table excludes as of December 31, 2006:
 
  •      11,449,199 shares of common stock reserved for issuance under our stock option plans, of which options to purchase 9,155,925 shares of common stock at a weighted average exercise price of $3.30 per share have been granted; and
 
  •      465,654 shares issuable upon the exercise of outstanding warrants with a weighted average exercise price of $1.16 per share.
 
The number of shares of common stock outstanding in the table above is based on the pro forma number of shares outstanding as of December 31, 2006, and assumes no exercise of the underwriters’ option to purchase additional shares. If the underwriters’ option to purchase additional shares is exercised in full, the number of shares of common stock held by existing shareholders will be reduced to 34,684,743 shares or 73.4% of the total number of shares of common stock to be outstanding after this offering, and the number of shares of common stock held by investors participating in this offering will be increased to 12,578,125 shares or 26.6% of the total number of shares of common stock to be outstanding after this offering.


31


Table of Contents

 
SELECTED CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL DATA
 
You should read the following selected consolidated financial data in conjunction with “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and our consolidated financial statements and the related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus. The consolidated statements of operations data for the years ended December 31, 2004, 2005 and 2006 and the consolidated balance sheet data as of December 31, 2005 and 2006 are derived from our audited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus, which have been prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles in the United States. The consolidated statements of operations for the years ended December 31, 2002 and 2003 and the consolidated balance sheet data as of December 31, 2002, 2003 and 2004 have been derived from our audited consolidated financial statements which are not included in this prospectus.
 
                                         
    Year Ended December 31,  
    2002     2003     2004     2005     2006  
    (in thousands, other than share and per share data)  
 
Consolidated statements of operations data:
                                       
Revenue
  $     $ 11,778     $ 45,460     $ 75,754     $ 156,102  
Cost of revenue
          9,158       28,078       50,047       102,653  
                                         
Gross profit
          2,620       17,382       25,707       53,449  
                                         
Operating expenses:
                                       
Research and development
    8,723       5,530       6,492       11,372       21,397  
Selling, general and administrative
    4,125       4,856       7,827       14,197       23,119  
                                         
Total operating expenses
    12,848       10,386       14,319       25,569       44,516  
                                         
Income (loss) from operations
    (12,848 )     (7,766 )     3,063       138       8,933  
Other income (expense), net
    9       (399 )     (31 )     179       (1,202 )
                                         
Income (loss) before income tax and cumulative effect of change in accounting principle
    (12,839 )     (8,165 )     3,032       317       7,731  
Income tax expense (benefit)
                151       78       (7,184 )
                                         
Income (loss) before cumulative effect of change in accounting principle
    (12,839 )     (8,165 )     2,881       239       14,915  
Cumulative effect of change in accounting principle(1)
                            (2,140 )
                                         
Net income (loss)
    (12,839 )     (8,165 )     2,881       239       12,775  
Accretion of redeemable convertible preferred stock(2)
    (155 )     (11,421 )     (41,960 )     (68,075 )     (46,253 )
                                         
Net loss attributable to common shareholders
  $ (12,994 )   $ (19,586 )   $ (39,079 )   $ (67,836 )   $ (33,478 )
                                         
Basic and diluted net loss per share attributable to common shareholders
  $ (1.99 )   $ (2.89 )   $ (5.40 )   $ (8.48 )   $ (3.78 )
                                         
Weighted average common shares used in computing basic and diluted net loss per share attributable to common shareholders
    6,527,995       6,766,299       7,234,229       7,995,629       8,855,870  
                                         
Pro forma basic net income per share(3)
                                  $ 0.36  
                                         
Pro forma diluted net income per share(3)
                                  $ 0.32  
                                         
Pro forma weighted average number of shares used in computing basic net income per share(3)
                                    35,365,778  
                                         
Pro forma weighted average number of shares used in computing diluted net income per share(3)
                                    40,130,383  
                                         
 
 
(1) Represents impact of the adoption of Staff Position 150-5, Issuer’s Accounting under FASB Statement No. 150 for Freestanding Warrants and Other Similar Instruments on Shares That Are Redeemable (“FSP 150-5”). Pursuant to FSP 150-5, we are required to classify our outstanding warrants to purchase


32


Table of Contents

preferred stock as a liability on our balance sheet and record adjustments to their fair value in our statements of operations at the end of each reporting period. For the year ended December 31, 2006, the impact of the change in accounting principle was to decrease net income by $3.1 million, consisting of a $2.2 million cumulative effect adjustment for the change in accounting principle as of January 1, 2006, when the Company adopted FSP 150-5, and $0.9 million of expense that was recorded in other income (expense), net to reflect the increase in fair value between January 1, 2006 and December 31, 2006. The warrants will be subject to revaluation at each balance sheet date and any change in fair value will be recognized as a component of other income (expense), net, until the earlier of the exercise of the warrants or the closing of this offering.
 
(2) Accretion of redeemable convertible preferred stock represents the impact attributable to the increase in the fair market value of such shares. The holders of Series A, B, C and D preferred stock have the option to put their shares back to us at the greater of (i) the original purchase price plus accrued dividends, or (ii) the current fair market value of the shares. The holders of Series E preferred stock have the option to put their shares back to us at the original purchase price plus accrued dividends. The put option and the related accretion of the preferred shares will terminate upon the closing of this offering.
 
(3) Pro forma net income per share gives effect to the conversion upon the closing of this offering of all of our issued and outstanding shares of preferred stock on a one-for-one basis into shares of common stock. See Note A to our consolidated financial statements for an explanation of the number of shares used in computing per share data.
 
                                         
    As of December 31,  
    2002     2003     2004     2005     2006  
    (in thousands)  
 
Consolidated balance sheet data:
                                       
Cash and cash equivalents
  $ 2,474     $ 7,524     $ 1,950     $ 30,396     $ 20,137  
Inventories
    3,791       8,179       15,740       28,283       40,026  
Working capital (deficit)
    (3,065 )     (10,973 )     (4,187 )     7,792       7,446  
Total assets
    9,428       20,796       29,069       82,303       109,314  
Deferred revenue and customer deposits
    9,010       21,566       16,133       49,281       43,307  
Redeemable convertible preferred stock
    24,176       35,597       84,234       166,402       212,663  
Total shareholders’ deficit
    (25,488 )     (44,704 )     (83,720 )     (151,406 )     (184,117 )


33


Table of Contents

 
MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF
FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS
 
The following discussion of our consolidated financial condition and results of operations should be read together with our consolidated financial statements and related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus. This discussion contains forward-looking statements based upon current expectations that involve risks, uncertainties and assumptions. Our actual results may differ materially from those anticipated in these forward-looking statements as a result of various factors. We discuss factors that we believe could cause or contribute to these differences below and elsewhere in this prospectus, including those set forth under “Risk Factors” and “ Information Regarding Forward-looking Statements.”
 
Overview
 
We have developed, manufacture and sell the Hi Art system, one of the most advanced and versatile radiation therapy systems commercially available for the treatment of a wide variety of cancers. The Hi Art system precisely delivers radiation with sub-millimeter accuracy to kill cancer cells while reducing radiation exposure to surrounding healthy tissue, which we believe can lead to improved patient outcomes.
 
We obtained 510(k) clearance from the FDA to market the Hi Art system in January 2002. We installed the first Hi Art system and the first patient was treated in 2003. Since receiving the initial clearance to market the Hi Art system in the United States, we have expanded our regulatory clearances to include Canada (2003), Japan (2004) and the European Union (2005). We have also received marketing clearance in Australia, Singapore, South Korea and Taiwan. During 2003 and 2004, we focused our sales and marketing efforts primarily in North America. Beginning in 2005, we expanded our sales and marketing efforts to include markets in Western Europe and Asia. In April 2006, we opened a European office in Brussels, Belgium, which includes sales, service and call center operations. We also expanded our Asian distributor network, adding distributors in India and China. We now have six distributors in Asia. In July 2006, we expanded our manufacturing operations into a 64,000 square foot facility in Madison, Wisconsin.
 
We market the Hi Art system to hospitals and cancer treatment centers in North America, Europe and Asia and offer, either directly or through distributors, customer support services in each region. The North American, European and Asian markets accounted for 57%, 22% and 21%, respectively, of our revenue for the year ended December 31, 2006. As of December 31, 2006, we had installed 108 systems at customer sites, consisting of 78 in North America, 16 in Asia and 14 in Europe. As of December 31, 2006, we had a total of 49 employees and 13 distributor or agent organizations in our worldwide sales and marketing group.
 
Since commercial introduction of the Hi Art system in 2003, we have experienced rapid revenue growth and have invested significantly in our manufacturing and service and support infrastructure. Our revenue was $75.8 million in 2005 and $156.1 million in 2006. We had net income of $2.9 million in 2004, $0.2 million in 2005 and $12.8 million in 2006. Net income for 2006 included a $7.8 million benefit from deferred income taxes and an expense of $3.1 million reflecting the fair value of outstanding warrants. As of December 31, 2006, we had a backlog of $164 million, the significant majority of which we expect to deliver in 2007. We define backlog as the total contractual value of all firm orders received for the Hi Art system and optional related products. Such orders must be evidenced by a signed quotation or purchase order from the customer, including the required down payment, if any.
 
Financial Operations
 
Revenue
 
Almost all of our revenue is generated from sales of the Hi Art system. We negotiate the actual purchase price with each customer and, historically, the purchase price has varied significantly. Generally, our international pricing has been higher than our domestic pricing.
 
We recognize revenue from sales of the Hi Art system when:
 
  •  there is persuasive evidence that an arrangement exists;


34


Table of Contents

 
  •  the title and risk of loss have been transferred to the customer, as evidenced by the customer’s signature on our acceptance test procedure document;
 
  •  the sales price is fixed or determinable; and
 
  •  collection is reasonably assured.
 
Our sales price includes a warranty covering replacement components and service for a one-year period. We record a reserve to cost of revenue at the time of revenue recognition for the expected cost of warranty claims based on our historical experience.
 
The balance of our revenue is generated from post-warranty service contracts and options purchased by our end customers. Our post-warranty service contracts may be purchased with one-year or multiple-year terms, giving our customers the option to contract for the level of equipment support they require. Currently, our most popular service plan is our Total TLC Service Package, or Total TLC, which is a comprehensive care package providing complete system coverage. Under Total TLC, we provide customers with full spare parts coverage, including installation service by a TomoTherapy field service engineer and full planned maintenance. We recognize service contract revenue ratably over the term of the contract. We recognize optional equipment and software revenue upon shipment to the customer. For arrangements with multiple elements, we recognize revenue for each element based on fair value of the element provided when all other criteria for revenue recognition have been met. The fair value for each element provided in multiple element arrangements is determined by referencing historical pricing policies applicable when the element is sold separately. See “Critical Accounting Policies and Estimates — Revenue Recognition.”
 
Customer concentration.   In the years ended December 31, 2005 and 2006, no single customer accounted for more than 10% of our revenue in each period.
 
Geographic breakdown.   The following table sets forth the geographic breakdown of our revenue for the periods indicated:
 
                         
    Year Ended December 31,  
    2004     2005     2006  
 
North America
    94 %     78 %     57 %
Europe
    6       7       22  
Asia (excluding Japan)
          7       11  
Japan
          8       10  
                         
Total
    100 %     100 %     100 %
 
Distributor sales.   In certain Asian countries, we sell the Hi Art system through distributors, who, in turn, sell the system directly to end customers. Our standard distributor agreement requires us to assist the distributor with the initial four installations of Hi Art systems within that distributor’s region. Following these first four installations, the distributor is obligated to perform all post-shipment services required under the purchase agreement, including installation, testing, training and post-installation warranty service. Distributors do not have a contractual right of return if the sale to an end customer is not completed. We have developed a certification procedure to ensure distributors can fulfill these obligations, which includes an evaluation of the distributor’s financial stability. Upon completion of our certification program, the certified distributor is deemed by us to be qualified to install and service the Hi Art system and our personnel are no longer involved in the installation or acceptance test procedures. During the fourth quarter of 2006, our Japanese distributor, Hi Art Co., Ltd., became the first distributor to achieve certification. Prior to a distributor achieving certification, we recognize revenue upon receipt of the signed acceptance procedure document from the end customer. After certification, we recognize revenue upon shipment to the distributor.
 
Sales agents.   In Europe, we use sales agents to identify potential end customers and assist our sales and marketing personnel with negotiations and closing sales of the Hi Art system to end customers. Our standard sales agent agreement provides for payment of our sales agents on a commission basis.


35


Table of Contents

 
Cost of revenue
 
Cost of revenue consists of material, labor and overhead costs incurred in the manufacture of the Hi Art system. It also includes the cost of shipping the system to the customer site, installation costs, a warranty accrual and a royalty payment to WARF. A significant component of cost of revenue is the customer support and service infrastructure required to service and repair the equipment during the warranty period and thereafter, when covered by a service contract. The cost of replacement parts makes up a significant portion of repair costs.
 
In future periods, we expect our cost of revenue to decrease as a percentage of total revenue due to improved absorption of manufacturing overhead costs and reduced material costs associated with increased volumes. We also plan to introduce several component design changes that should result in lower costs and higher reliability than our current components.
 
Most of our existing service contracts currently have negative gross profit margins. We recorded a reserve for the estimated losses on these service contracts. We expect to narrow these negative margins and begin to generate positive margins over time by increasing the price for our annual service contracts and leveraging our fixed service infrastructure costs over a larger installed base. We also expect a decline in our service costs due to improved training of our field service engineers combined with a larger number of systems in each engineer’s territory. Finally, we believe that the introduction of several component design changes should also improve system performance which should in turn reduce our service costs.
 
Research and development expenses
 
Research and development expenses consist primarily of salary and benefits for research and development personnel. Research and development also includes expenses associated with product design and development, customer research collaborations and third parties who furnish services related to these activities.
 
We expect research and development expenses will continue to increase in absolute terms in the next 12 months as we increase the total number of employees performing research and development activities.
 
Selling, general and administrative expenses
 
Selling, general and administrative expenses consist of salary and benefits for executive management, sales, marketing and other corporate functions. Also included in these expenses are travel, sales commissions, promotional and marketing materials and expenses related to accounting, legal, tax and other consulting fees. We expect selling, general and administrative expenses will continue to increase in the next 12 months both in absolute dollars and as a percentage of revenue as we hire the staff necessary to meet the reporting requirements of a public company, increase the total number of employees and incur additional costs related to the overall growth of our business.
 
Other income (expense), net
 
Other income is primarily interest income earned on our cash and cash equivalents. Other expense is primarily the expense related to the increase in fair value of the convertible preferred stock warrant liability beginning January 1, 2006, banking fees related to standby letters of credit required to support some of our international orders and interest expense on borrowings. This category also includes foreign currency gain and losses on customer deposits made on sales contracts denominated in Euros. We currently do not hedge these foreign currency contracts.


36


Table of Contents

 
Key Factors Affecting our Performance
 
Our business, financial position and results of operations, as well as the period-to-period comparability of our financial results, are significantly affected by a number of factors, some of which are beyond our control, including the following:
 
Extended sales cycle and fluctuations.   The Hi Art system has a lengthy sales cycle, with the time from initial customer contact to execution of a purchase order generally lasting up to one year or more. Following execution of a contract, it may take several months for a customer to renovate a facility to house the Hi Art system and between nine and twelve months for new bunker construction. Upon delivery of the Hi Art system, it generally takes three to four weeks to complete the installation and testing of the system, including the completion of acceptance test procedures with the customer. With the exception of our Japanese distributor, we recognize revenue from the sale of the Hi Art system upon receipt of a signed acceptance test procedure document from the customer. We recognize sales of the Hi Art system upon shipment to our Japanese distributor pursuant to our distributor certification program. Due to the high unit price of the Hi Art system and the relatively small number of units installed each quarter, each installation represents a significant component of our revenue for a particular period. Therefore, if a small number of customers defer installation of the Hi Art system for even a short time, recognition of a significant amount of revenue may be deferred to a subsequent period. As a result of these factors, our revenue could fluctuate significantly from period to period and may not represent an accurate measure of the overall performance of our business. We believe that our quarterly results of operations should be viewed in light of our backlog of orders, which provides a better measure at any particular point in time of the long-term performance prospects of our business.
 
Customer mix and gross margins.   Our mix of customers impacts our average selling prices and our gross margins:
 
  •  Sales outside of the United States accounted for 22% of our revenue in 2005 and 43% of our revenue in 2006. Increased sales of the Hi Art system outside of the United States have tended to impact our gross margins favorably due to higher average selling prices in these markets. We intend to continue to expand our international selling efforts although we cannot be certain that favorable pricing trends will continue.
 
  •  The majority of our sales to date have been to university research centers, hospitals and cancer treatment centers that are early adopters of new technologies and that tend to replace equipment regularly in order to upgrade their treatment capabilities. Our sales strategy includes increasing sales to community hospitals and smaller treatment centers, which have traditionally been slower in their adoption of new technologies primarily due to cost-based purchasing decisions. Our efforts to penetrate this market may require us to lower the price of the Hi Art system. Similarly, we may be required to lower the price of the Hi Art system in order to sell to national chains or large volume purchasers.
 
  •  Our ability to demonstrate the clinical benefits of the Hi Art system compared to competing systems is likely to be a factor in our ability to maintain the selling price of the Hi Art system. We may need to demonstrate increased clinical benefits and offer additional features in order to compete favorably with our competitors in the medium to long term.
 
Component supply and cost.   Our cost of revenue as a percentage of total revenue was 61.8% for 2004, 66.1% for 2005 and 65.8% for 2006. Our gross margins have been impacted by higher component costs and higher failure rates than we originally anticipated, resulting in increased warranty expense and negative profit margins on many service contracts. We believe that these higher component costs and failure rates resulted both from smaller initial production volumes and from our reliance on sole-source suppliers for a number of key components. We are investing in developing alternate components and in implementing enhancements to increase the performance of components currently used in the Hi Art system. We will also seek to identify lower priced components of comparable and improved performance and quality, as well as make engineering improvements to the Hi Art system in order to reduce costs. We believe that achieving these goals should result in improved gross margins in the long term.


37


Table of Contents

 
Operating expenses.   We have significantly expanded our total number of employees over the last three years from 171 at December 31, 2004, to 327 as of December 31, 2005, and to 492 as of December 31, 2006, due primarily to expansion of our research and development, service and support and sales and marketing capabilities. Our operating expenses are relatively fixed, consisting primarily of salaries, benefits and related overhead. Accordingly, we cannot generally make significant adjustments in response to short-term fluctuations in quarterly revenue. We also expect that our operating expenses will increase in absolute terms, but decrease as a percentage of our total revenue as we leverage our existing infrastructure.
 
Results of Operations
 
The following table sets forth our statements of operations as a percentage of revenue for the periods indicated:
 
                         
    Year Ended December 31,  
    2004     2005     2006  
 
Revenue
    100.0 %     100.0 %     100.0 %
Cost of revenue
    61.8       66.1       65.8  
                         
Gross profit
    38.2       33.9       34.2  
                         
Operating expenses:
                       
Research and development
    14.3       15.0       13.7  
Selling, general and administrative
    17.2       18.7       14.8  
                         
Total operating expenses
    31.5       33.7       28.5  
                         
Income from operations
    6.7       0.2       5.7  
Other income (expense), net
          0.2       (0.7 )
                         
Income before income tax
    6.7       0.4       5.0  
Income tax expense (benefit)
    0.4       0.1       (4.6 )
                         
Income before cumulative effect of change in accounting principle and accretion of redeemable convertible preferred stock
    6.3 %     0.3 %     9.6 %
                         
 
The results for the year ended December 31, 2006 include a $7.8 million benefit from deferred income taxes.
 
Year Ended December 31, 2005 Compared to Year Ended December 31, 2006
 
Revenue
 
Revenue increased from $75.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2005 to $156.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2006, an increase of $80.3 million or 106.1%. This increase resulted primarily from an increase in the number of Hi Art systems accepted. We received acceptances on 89% more systems during the year ended December 31, 2006, than were received during the year ended December 31, 2005. In addition, the average selling price per system increased by approximately 5% due primarily to our international expansion. During the year ended December 31, 2005, 78% of our revenue was generated in North America compared to 57% during the year ended December 31, 2006, as we expanded our presence in international markets.
 
Service revenue increased from $1.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2005 to $6.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2006, as more systems reached the end of their warranty period and customers elected to enter into service contracts with us.
 
Cost of revenue
 
Cost of revenue increased from $50.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2005 to $102.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2006, an increase of $52.6 million or 105.1%. This increase was attributable


38


Table of Contents

to the number of systems accepted and the growth in our service infrastructure. Gross margins were 33.9% and 34.2% for the years ended December 31, 2005 and 2006, respectively. The increase in gross margins was due to our higher sales volume which resulted in improved absorption of manufacturing overhead costs. This increase was partially offset by higher service costs due to our continued investment in building service infrastructure and negative margins on service contract revenue.
 
Research and development expenses
 
Research and development expenses increased from $11.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2005 to $21.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2006, an increase of $10.0 million or 88.2%. The increase was primarily attributable to $6.1 million in additional employee costs due to an increase in the total number of employees engaged in research and development activities from 90 at December 31, 2005 to 139 at December 31, 2006, as we accelerated the work on future product initiatives. We also incurred an additional $3.0 million in external consulting expenses for development projects in 2006. As a percentage of revenue, total research and development expenses were 15.0% and 13.7% for the years ended December 31, 2005 and 2006, respectively.
 
Selling, general and administrative expenses
 
Selling, general and administrative expenses increased from $14.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2005 to $23.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2006, an increase of $8.9 million or 62.8%. The increase was primarily due to an increase of $4.4 million in employee costs as the total number of employees engaged in selling, general and administrative activities increased from 74 at December 31, 2005 to 111 at December 31, 2006, due to the expansion of our business. In addition, we incurred a $1.5 million increase in commissions as a result of the increased sales and slightly higher commission rates, and an additional $1.2 million expense for accounting, tax and legal services. We also incurred a $0.7 million increase in travel-related expenses due to the increase in size and geographical spread of our operations. As a percentage of revenue, selling, general and administrative expenses were 18.7% and 14.8% for the years ended December 31, 2005 and 2006, respectively.
 
Other income (expense), net
 
We had other income of $0.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2005, and other expense of $1.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2006, a change of $1.4 million. The primary reason for this change was an expense of $0.9 million for the increase in fair value of the convertible preferred stock warrants. We also incurred foreign currency losses on customer deposits made on sales contracts denominated in Euros, which was largely offset by higher revenue on those orders. We have not hedged these foreign currency contracts.
 
Income tax expense (benefit)
 
Income tax expense changed from a provision of $0.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2005 to a $7.2 million benefit for the year ended December 31, 2006, a change of $7.3 million. This change resulted from the reversal of a portion of our deferred tax asset valuation allowance. As of December 31, 2006, we had federal and state net operating loss carryforwards of $15.6 million and $19.1 million, respectively. These federal and state net operating loss carryforwards are available to offset future taxable income, if any, and will begin to expire in varying amounts beginning in 2022 and 2016 for federal and state purposes, respectively. While we had income in 2005, based on the objective evidence and history of losses, we maintained a full valuation allowance on our net deferred tax assets as we concluded that it was more likely than not that such benefits would not be realized. As of December 31, 2006, based on our analysis of all positive and negative factors, including the fact that we had realized net income during three successive fiscal years, we determined that approximately $10.5 million of the deferred tax assets were more likely than not to be realized. This assessment was based on a determination that we would utilize our net operating loss carryforwards in approximately two years based on our current taxable income level. Offsetting this tax benefit was a $1.9 million reduction in deferred tax assets related to an excess tax benefit stock option deduction.


39


Table of Contents

This tax benefit will be accounted for directly in equity as additional paid in capital as the stock option-related deduction reduces taxes payable.
 
For the year ended December 31, 2006, we completed a similar analysis and found considerably more positive evidence. The number of systems sold had increased substantially, profit margins increased, three years of cumulative profit and significant growth year over year in taxable income. In addition, we had more visibility into our 2007 projected performance due to the number of orders we received in 2006 and the final backlog numbers. As a result of these developments, we determined that the majority of the valuation allowance could be released.
 
The weight given to the potential effect of negative and positive evidence was commensurate with our ability to objectively verify it. For the years ended December 31, 2004 and 2005, we had a significant three-year cumulative loss. Although we had net income in each of those years, we were only marginally profitable. These factors were given greater weighting since they could be measured objectively. Conversely, there was not enough positive evidence to conclude that the valuation allowance could be reduced at that time.
 
Our taxable income in 2006 was $8.7 million. If we maintain this level of taxable income in future fiscal years, we would expect to utilize our federal net operating loss carryforwards in two years or a shorter period if our net income increases further.
 
Year Ended December 31, 2004 Compared to Year Ended December 31, 2005
 
Revenue
 
Revenue increased from $45.5 million for the year ended December 31, 2004 to $75.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2005, an increase of $30.3 million or 66.6%. This growth resulted from both an increase in the number of systems accepted and an increase in the average selling price. We had 40% more systems accepted during the year ended December 31, 2005, compared to the year ended December 31, 2004. In addition, the average selling price of the Hi Art system increased 17% during the period as we raised prices and further penetrated international markets, which produced higher prices than in the United States. During the year ended December 31, 2004, 94% of our revenue was generated in North America compared to 78% in 2005, as we expanded our presence in international markets.
 
Service revenue was less than $0.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2004 compared to $1.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2005, an increase of $1.7 million. The first of our post-warranty service contracts became effective in the second half of 2004 as the first installed Hi Art systems reached the end of their warranty periods and customers elected to enter into service agreements with us.
 
Cost of revenue
 
Cost of revenue increased from $28.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2004 to $50.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2005, an increase of $22.0 million or 78.2%. Gross margins were 38.2% and 33.9% for the years ended December 31, 2004 and 2005, respectively. The decrease was attributable to an increase in the number of systems accepted and our higher investment in our service infrastructure.
 
Research and development expenses
 
Research and development expenses increased from $6.5 million for the year ended December 31, 2004 to $11.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2005, an increase of $4.9 million or 75.2%. The increase was primarily attributable to an increase of $3.3 million in additional employee costs due to an increase in the number of employees engaged in research and development activities from 50 at December 31, 2004 to 90 at December 31, 2005, in connection with an increased number of development projects. We also incurred an additional $1.2 million in external consulting expenses for engineering related projects in 2005. As a percentage of revenue, research and development expenses were 14.3% and 15.0% for the years ended December 31, 2004 and 2005, respectively.


40


Table of Contents

 
Selling, general and administrative expenses
 
Selling, general and administrative expenses increased from $7.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2004 to $14.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2005, an increase of $6.4 million or 81.4%. The increase primarily resulted from an increase of $2.7 million in employee costs related to increasing the number of employees in sales, marketing and other corporate activities from 44 at December 31, 2004 to 74 at December 31, 2005. In addition, we incurred a $1.0 million increase in commission expense as a result of increasing sales and slightly higher commission rates, a $0.7 million increase in travel-related expenses related to the growth of the company, a $0.6 million increase in accounting, tax and legal services, and a $0.5 million increase in expenses related to trade shows and other meetings. As a percentage of revenue, selling, general and administrative expenses were 17.2% and 18.7% for the years ended December 31, 2004 and 2005, respectively.
 
Other income (expense), net
 
Other expense was $31,000 during the year ended December 31, 2004 compared to other income of $179,000 during the year ended December 31, 2005, a change of $210,000. The primary reason for this increase was an increase in interest earned on higher cash and cash equivalents from the receipt of more customer deposits due to a higher number of orders. This cash was invested in a money market account throughout the year.
 
Income tax expense (benefit)
 
Income tax expense decreased from $151,000 for the year ended December 31, 2004 to $78,000 for the year ended December 31, 2005, a decrease of $73,000. This decrease was due to a decrease in earnings which was partially offset by the filing of tax returns in additional states and the impact of the federal alternative minimum tax.


41


Table of Contents

 
Quarterly Results of Operations
 
The table below sets forth selected unaudited consolidated statements of operations data for each of the eight consecutive quarters in the period ended December 31, 2006. In management’s opinion, these unaudited consolidated statements of operations have been prepared on the same basis as our audited consolidated financial statements contained elsewhere in this prospectus and include all adjustments, consisting of normal recurring adjustments, necessary for a fair presentation of such financial information. This information should be read in conjunction with the audited consolidated financial statements and notes thereto appearing elsewhere in this prospectus.
 
                                                                 
    Three Months Ended,  
    Mar. 31,
    June 30,
    Sept. 30,
    Dec. 31,
    Mar. 31,
    June 30,
    Sept. 30,
    Dec. 31,
 
    2005     2005     2005     2005     2006     2006     2006     2006  
    (unaudited)
 
    (in thousands)  
 
Revenue
  $ 10,174     $ 29,581     $ 14,111     $ 21,888     $ 27,462     $ 31,869     $ 37,173     $ 59,598  
Cost of revenue
    6,921       17,721       10,857       14,548       19,320       22,880       23,651       36,802  
                                                                 
Gross profit
    3,253       11,860       3,254       7,340       8,142       8,989       13,522       22,796  
Gross profit as a percentage of revenue
    32.0 %     40.1 %     23.1 %     33.5 %     29.6 %     28.2 %     36.4 %     38.2 %
Total operating expenses
    4,839       6,555       6,727       7,448       7,441       9,396       12,069       15,610  
                                                                 
Income (loss) from operations
  $ (1,586 )   $ 5,305     $ (3,473 )   $ (108 )   $ 701     $ (407 )   $ 1,453     $ 7,186  
                                                                 
Backlog (in millions)
  $ 69     $ 69     $ 69     $ 99     $ 104     $ 139     $ 146     $ 164  
Quarterly revenue as a percentage of annual revenue
    13.5 %     39.0 %     18.6 %     28.9 %     17.6 %     20.4 %     23.8 %     38.2 %
Quarterly gross profit as a percentage of annual gross profit
    12.6 %     46.1 %     12.7 %     28.6 %     15.2 %     16.8 %     25.3 %     42.7 %
 
Our quarterly revenue and results of operations have varied significantly in the past and can be expected to vary in the future due to numerous factors. Many of our operating expenses are relatively fixed and we expect them to increase over time as we continue to make the investments necessary for future growth, yet our quarterly revenue depends on the timing of the installation and receipt of the customers’ acceptance of the Hi Art system in their facilities. Therefore, our operating results have fluctuated from quarter to quarter and we have incurred quarterly losses even during years when we reported profits on an annual basis. Many of these factors are discussed in “Key Factors Affecting our Performance.”
 
We believe that our backlog levels provide a better measure at any particular point in time of the long-term performance prospects of our business. A significant portion of our revenue each quarter is derived from our backlog. The level of backlog will fluctuate based on our customers’ ordering patterns and the timing of the completion of the acceptance test procedures necessary for revenue recognition. However, the majority of our backlog has historically been converted to revenue within twelve months of order placement. Accordingly, our backlog has been a general indicator of the revenue expected to be recognized over the next year, when combined with the new sales contracts entered into early in the year.
 
As a result of these factors, we believe that quarter-over-quarter comparisons of our results of operations are not necessarily meaningful and should not be relied upon as indications of future performance.
 
Recent Developments
 
Although our financial statements for the quarter ended March 31, 2007 are not yet complete, the following revenue and backlog information reflects our estimate of our results based on currently available information. We estimate that revenues for the three months ended March 31, 2007 were between $50.0 million and $52.0 million, compared with revenues of $27.5 million for the three months ended March 31, 2006, and


42


Table of Contents

$59.6 million for the three months ended December 31, 2006. The increase in year-over-year quarterly revenues resulted primarily from increased Hi Art system sales. The decrease in revenues from the most recent prior quarter resulted primarily from the timing of installation and receipt of customers’ acceptance of the Hi Art system in their facilities. As of March 31, 2007, we estimate that our backlog was approximately $162 million, the significant majority of which we expect to deliver within the next 12 months.
 
The foregoing revenue and backlog information is not a comprehensive statement of our financial results for the quarter ended March 31, 2007. The foregoing information should therefore be considered together with our full results of operations when published. The foregoing information is subject to adjustment based upon, among other things, the finalization of our quarter-end closing and reporting processes. The estimates for any interim period are not necessarily indicative of our operating results for a full year or any future period, and are qualified in their entirety by, and should be read in conjunction with our consolidated financial statements.
 
Liquidity and Capital Resources
 
To date, we have funded our working capital needs and our capital expenditure requirements using cash from sales of equity securities and from our operations, including customer advance payments, and, to a lesser extent, through grants and borrowings. Since our inception and through December 31, 2006, we have obtained financing of $42.7 million primarily through private placements of equity securities, and the exercise of stock options. At December 31, 2006, we had $20.1 million in cash and cash equivalents, and our working capital, which is calculated by subtracting our current liabilities from our current assets, was $7.4 million.
 
Cash Flows
 
Cash flows from operating activities.   Net cash provided by operating activities was $3.9 million for the year ended December 31, 2006. This included net income of $12.8 million, a $7.8 million benefit from deferred income taxes, a non-cash charge of $3.1 million representing the increase in the fair value of outstanding convertible preferred stock warrants and $3.1 million of depreciation and amortization. Changes in our current assets and liabilities included an increase in deferred revenue of $9.1 million, offset by a decrease in customer deposits of $15.1 million, an increase in inventory of $11.7 million and an increase in accounts receivable of $4.8 million. In addition, accounts payable, accrued expenses and accrued warranties increased by approximately $6.6 million, $6.4 million and $2.4 million, respectively. The increase in deferred revenue resulted from more systems delivered to customers that had not received customer acceptance notification at December 31, 2006 compared to December 31, 2005. The decrease in customer deposits resulted from variations in the timing of receipt of customer advance payments. Inventory increased significantly as we added more spare part depots around the world in order to better service our installed base of Hi Art systems. The increase in accounts receivable is a result of the higher shipments and acceptances at the end of the year as compared to the prior year. The increase in accounts payable was primarily due to the timing of payments, increased purchases of inventory and the overall growth of our business. Accrued expenses increased due to higher commission and bonus accruals from the prior year. Accrued warranty increased due to a higher number of units under warranty at the end of 2006 compared to the end of 2005.
 
Net cash provided by operating activities was $18.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2005. We had $26.6 million in additional customer deposits during the year due to our increasing order volume. Deferred revenue also increased by $6.6 million due to more units awaiting final acceptance at the end of the year. We also experienced an increase of $5.4 million in trade payables and other accruals due to timing of payments and overall growth in the company. These increases were offset by an increase in accounts receivable of $9.2 million due to overall growth and the timing of several shipments and acceptances at the end of the year. We also increased inventory by $12.5 million due to a larger number of units awaiting final acceptance, growth in our production quantities and an increase in our service inventory.
 
Net cash used by operating activities was $6.9 million for the year ended December 31, 2004. Our income of $2.9 million was offset by a $7.4 million reduction in customer deposits. This decrease was due to a reduction in backlog from the previous year as the acceptances exceeded our orders for the year. In addition,


43


Table of Contents

the reduction in the level of customer deposits was primarily due to the timing of such payments. We also experienced an increase in accounts receivable of $3.3 million and inventory of $7.6 million. These were both largely due to more Hi Art systems being shipped close to the end of the year and waiting final acceptance.
 
Cash flows from investing activities.   During the year ended December 31, 2006, we used net cash of $11.0 million to purchase capital equipment as we (1) completed the build-out of our new leased manufacturing facility, (2) completed the build-out of our European office in Brussels, Belgium, and (3) implemented our new enterprise resource planning system from SAP. We also invested $4.7 million in test systems for internal development, training and testing of manufacturing components.
 
Net cash used in investing activities was $3.6 million and $4.2 million for the years ended December 31, 2004 and 2005, respectively. The net cash used in investing activities was primarily for the purchase of furniture and equipment related to expanding our office space and hiring new employees in Madison, Wisconsin.
 
Cash flows from financing activities.   Net cash from financing activities was $1.9 million for the year ended December 31, 2006. We entered into two loans during this period: $0.5 million from the State of Wisconsin Technology Development Fund and $0.4 million from Madison Development Corporation for capital improvements to our new leased manufacturing facility in Madison, Wisconsin. We also received $1.0 million in proceeds from the exercise of employee stock options.
 
Net cash provided from financing activities was $4.9 million and $14.2 million for the years ended December 31, 2004 and 2005, respectively. Net cash provided from financing activities for fiscal years 2004 and 2005 were proceeds received from the issuance of preferred stock. We sold 2.8 million shares of Series D preferred stock for $4.9 million in 2004, net of the conversion of $1.8 million of notes payable, and 1.7 million shares of our Series E preferred stock for $13.9 million in 2005.
 
Loans and Available Borrowings
 
We maintain an unsecured $30.0 million line of credit with a bank, which bears interest at the London Interbank Offered Rate plus 2.5% or at the prime rate plus 0.25% and is adjusted based on the ratio of our total liabilities to tangible net worth. Among other requirements, the line of credit contains several covenants, the primary ones being a requirement to maintain a backlog of at least $60.0 million and tangible net worth of at least $17.0 million. We are in compliance with all such covenants. There were no outstanding borrowings under the line for any of the periods included in this prospectus.
 
On February 13, 2006, we entered into a $0.4 million note payable with Madison Development Corporation. The note payable bears interest at 4.0%, is payable in monthly installments of $4,050 and the remaining unpaid principal is due on March 1, 2011. The note payable is secured by a second position in all of our equipment, fixtures, inventory, general intangibles and contract rights. The outstanding principal balance at December 31, 2006 was approximately $0.4 million.
 
On November 28, 2005, we entered into a $0.5 million note payable agreement with the Wisconsin Department of Commerce and received the principal balance in June 2006 in accordance with the requirements of the agreement. The note payable bears interest at 2.0%, is payable in monthly installments of $8,647 and the remaining unpaid principal is due on March 1, 2013. The outstanding principal balance at December 31, 2006 was $0.5 million.


44


Table of Contents

 
Contractual Obligations and Commitments
 
The following table is a summary of our long-term contractual obligations as of December 31, 2006:
 
                                         
    Payment Due by Period  
          Less Than
    1-3
    3-5
    More Than
 
Contractual Obligations
  Total     1 Year     Years     Years     5 Years  
    (in thousands)  
 
Operating lease obligations
  $ 19,188     $ 1,962     $ 4,101     $ 4,180     $ 8,945  
Notes payable
    875       34       247       467       127  
                                         
Total
  $ 20,063     $ 1,996     $ 4,348     $ 4,647     $ 9,072  
                                         
 
The table of contractual obligations and commitments does not include royalty payments payable to the Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation under a license agreement, dated February 22, 1999. The amount of royalty payments is based on the number of units of the Hi Art system sold and therefore cannot be determined accurately in advance. Our royalty expenses under the license agreement are currently significantly in excess of minimum required payments and were $504,000 in 2004, $672,000 in 2005 and $1.3 million in 2006.
 
Operating Capital and Capital Expenditure Requirements
 
Our future capital requirements depend on numerous factors. These factors include, but are not limited to, the following:
 
  •  revenue generated by sales of the Hi Art system and service plans;
 
  •  costs associated with our sales and marketing initiatives and manufacturing activities;
 
  •  the level of investment needed in our service and support infrastructure;
 
  •  costs of our research and development activities; and
 
  •  effects of competing technological and market developments.
 
We believe that our current cash and cash equivalents, along with the cash we expect to generate from operations and our net proceeds from this offering, will be sufficient to meet our anticipated cash needs for working capital and capital expenditures for at least the next 12 months. If our estimates of revenue, expenses, or capital or liquidity requirements change or are inaccurate, or if cash generated from operations is insufficient to satisfy our liquidity requirements, we may seek to sell additional equity or arrange additional debt financing. In the future, we may also seek to sell additional equity or arrange debt financing to give us financial flexibility to pursue attractive acquisition or investment opportunities that may arise, although we currently do not have any acquisitions or investments planned. We may also seek to sell additional equity or arrange debt financing to provide us with additional financial flexibility if market opportunities exist.
 
Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements
 
As of December 31, 2006, we had no off-balance sheet arrangements as defined in Item 303(a)(4) of Regulation S-K.
 
Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk
 
Market risk is the risk of loss related to changes in market prices, including interest rates and foreign exchange rates, of financial instruments that may adversely impact our consolidated financial position, results of operations or cash flows.
 
Interest Rate Risk
 
Our investments consist primarily of investments in money market funds. While the instruments we hold are subject to changes in the financial standing of the issuer of such securities, we do not believe that we are subject to any material risks arising from changes in interest rates, foreign currency exchange rates,


45


Table of Contents

commodity prices, equity prices or other market changes that affect market risk sensitive instruments. It is our policy not to enter into interest rate derivative financial instruments. As a result, we do not currently have any significant interest rate exposure.
 
The interest rate under our line of credit is subject to change based on the London Interbank Offered Rate or the prime rate. We do not currently have any borrowings under our line of credit.
 
Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Risk
 
A significant portion of our sales and expenses historically have been denominated in U.S. dollars. As a result, we have not experienced significant foreign exchange gains or losses to date. For the year ended December 31, 2006, 15% and 1% of our revenue was from contracts denominated in Euros and Canadian dollars, respectively. During 2006, we opened and staffed an office in Brussels, Belgium and began incurring Euro-denominated expenses, which were paid directly from the U.S. We currently do not hedge our foreign currency since the exposure has not been material to our historical operating results. To date, our Euro-denominated sales orders have included high down payments, limiting the need to hedge the related currency risk. Future fluctuations in the value of the U.S. dollar may affect the price competitiveness of the Hi Art system outside the United States. To the extent that we can predict the timing of payments under these contracts, we may engage in hedging transactions to mitigate such risks in the future.
 
Inflation
 
Our operations have not been, and we do not expect them to be, materially affected by inflation. Historically, we have been successful in adjusting prices to our customers to reflect changes in our material and labor costs.
 
Critical Accounting Policies and Estimates
 
This discussion and analysis of our financial condition and results of operations is based on our consolidated financial statements, which have been prepared in accordance with U.S. GAAP. The preparation of these consolidated financial statements requires management to make estimates and judgments that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and the disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the consolidated financial statements, as well as revenue and expenses during the reporting periods. We evaluate our estimates and judgments on an ongoing basis. We base our estimates on historical experience and on various other factors we believe are reasonable under the circumstances, the results of which form the basis for making judgments about the carrying value of assets and liabilities that are not readily apparent from other sources. Actual results could therefore differ materially from those estimates under different assumptions or conditions. Our significant accounting policies are more fully described in the notes to our consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus. We believe the following are our critical accounting policies including the more significant estimates and assumptions used in preparation of our consolidated financial statements. With respect to our policies on revenue recognition, inventories and warranty costs, our historical experience is based principally on our operations since 2003 when we commenced selling the Hi Art system.
 
Revenue Recognition
 
We recognize revenue from system product sales and related services when earned in accordance with Staff Accounting Bulletin, or SAB, No. 104, Revenue Recognition , and Emerging Issues Task Force Issue (“EITF”) No. 00-21, Revenue Arrangements with Multiple Deliverables. Revenue is recognized when the following four criteria are met:
 
  •  Persuasive evidence of an arrangement exists.   We require evidence of a purchase order with a customer specifying the terms and conditions of the product or services to be delivered, typically in the form of a signed quotation or purchase order from the customer.


46


Table of Contents

 
  •  Title and risk of loss have been transferred to the customer.   During the installation phase, each Hi Art system is fully tested to confirm that it functions within operating specifications. Upon completion of the test procedures, the customer signs the acceptance test procedures document, or ATP, acknowledging acceptance of the system. Revenue for the sale of systems is recognized upon receipt of the signed ATP.
 
  •  The sales price is fixed or determinable.   All contract terms are fixed in the signed quotation or purchase order received from the customer. The contracts do not contain rights of cancellation, return, exchanges or refunds.
 
  •  Collection is reasonably assured.   Due to the fact that our sales are to hospitals and cancer treatment centers with significant resources, we consider accounts receivable to be fully collectible. In addition, contracts generally require staged payments as follows: 20% to 30% down payment, 60% to 70% due upon shipment and 10% due upon final acceptance by the customer.
 
Payments received for products or services prior to shipment or prior to completion of the related services are recorded as customer deposits. Once a system has been shipped, the related deposits are transferred to deferred revenue until the criteria for revenue recognition are satisfied.
 
We recognize revenue in connection with distributor sales of the Hi Art system based on the distributor’s certification status. Once a distributor is certified by us to provide installation, testing, training and post-installation warranty services to end customers, we recognize revenue upon shipment to that certified distributor as we no longer have any obligations to the distributor or the end customer. Prior to a distributor achieving certification, we recognize revenue upon receipt of the signed acceptance procedure document from the end customer. Our distributors do not have any contractual right to return and we have not accepted any returns to date. As of December 31, 2006, we had only certified our Japanese distributor.
 
We frequently enter into sales arrangements with customers that contain multiple elements or deliverables such as hardware and post-warranty maintenance services. Judgments as to the allocation of the proceeds received from an arrangement to the multiple elements, the determination of whether the undelivered elements are essential to the functionality of the delivered elements and the appropriate timing of revenue recognition are critical to ensure compliance with U.S. GAAP. The ability to establish the fair value of those elements could affect the timing of revenue recognition. For arrangements with multiple elements, we recognize revenue for each element based on the fair value of the element provided when all other criteria for revenue recognition have been met. The fair value for each element provided in multiple element arrangements is typically determined by referencing historical pricing policies when the element is sold separately. Changes in our ability to establish the fair value for each element in multiple element arrangements could affect the timing of revenue recognition.
 
Revenue allocated to maintenance and support on the Hi Art system is recognized ratably over the term of the service agreement, which ranges from twelve to thirty-six months.
 
In 2006, we began selling an optional software package separately from the Hi Art system. The selling price, cost and functionality of this software is incidental to the operation of the Hi Art system itself. We recognize revenue for this software in accordance with SOP No. 97-2, Software Revenue Recognition , as amended by SOP No. 98-9, Software Revenue Recognition with Respect to Certain Agreements. We recognize license revenue when all of the following criteria are met: persuasive evidence of an arrangement exists, the fee is fixed or determinable, collection of the related receivable is reasonably assured and delivery of the product has occurred, provided that all other criteria for revenue recognition under SOP No. 97-2 have been met. Revenue earned on software arrangements involving multiple elements are allocated to each element based on vendor specific objective evidence of fair value, which is based on the price charged when the same element is sold separately. In instances when evidence of fair value of all undelivered elements exists, but evidence does not exist for one or more delivered elements and the fair value of all the undelivered elements is less than the arrangement fee, revenue is recognized using the residual method. Under the residual method, the fair value of the undelivered elements is deferred and the remaining portion of the arrangement fee is recognized as revenue.


47


Table of Contents

 
Inventories
 
Inventories are valued at the lower of cost or market, determined by the FIFO method. We regularly review our inventory quantities on hand and record a provision for excess or obsolete inventory primarily based on our estimated forecast of product demand and existing product configurations. Our inventories are subject to rapid technological change. As changes to the product are released, a determination must be made to identify any parts that are no longer useful. If a part is determined to be obsolete, a reserve is recorded for the value of the inventory on hand. We also forecast usage and compare this with the quantity of parts on hand. If it is determined we have excess inventory, a reserve is established for the excess.
 
Warranty Obligations
 
We warrant the Hi Art system for a period of twelve months following customer acceptance. We record a current liability for the expected cost of warranty obligations in cost of revenue at the time when each sale is recognized. The accrued warranty costs represent the best estimate of the total costs that we will incur to repair or replace parts that fail while the system is under warranty. An analysis is completed on a regular basis to update the historical trend data and to determine if the accrued balance is sufficient to meet our outstanding warranty obligations. The amount of our estimated warranty liability currently is approximately 6% of the sales value of the Hi Art system and may be adjusted as the costs incurred increase or decrease in the future.
 
Income Taxes
 
We account for federal and state income taxes in accordance with Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (SFAS) No. 109, Accounting for Income Taxes. Under the liability method specified by SFAS No. 109, a deferred tax asset or liability is determined based on the difference between the financial statement and tax basis of assets and liabilities, as measured by the enacted tax rates. As of December 31, 2006, we had federal and state net operating loss carryforwards of $15.6 million and $19.1 million, respectively. These federal and state net operating loss carryforwards are available to offset against future taxable income, if any, and will begin to expire in varying amounts beginning in 2022 and 2016 for federal and state purposes, respectively. Utilization of the net operating loss carryforwards may be subject to an annual limitation due to the ownership percentage change limitations provided by the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, and similar state provisions. The annual limitation may result in the expiration of the net operating loss carryforwards before utilization.
 
The valuation allowance was determined in accordance with SFAS No. 109, which requires an assessment of both positive and negative evidence when determining whether it is more likely than not that deferred tax assets are recoverable. During 2005, we fully reserved all net deferred tax assets, which were predominantly net operating loss and tax credit carryforwards. During 2006, however, it was determined the deferred tax assets were more likely than not realizable based upon our history of and future projections of earnings. We reversed $10.5 million of the deferred tax asset valuation allowance during the year ended December 31, 2006.
 
Stock-Based Compensation
 
Effective January 1, 2006, we adopted SFAS 123(R), Share-Based Payment , which is a revision of SFAS Statement No. 123 (SFAS 123), Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation. SFAS 123(R) requires all share-based payments to employees, including grants of employee and director stock options, to be recognized in our income statement based on their fair values. Pro forma disclosure is no longer an alternative.
 
As permitted by SFAS 123, we historically accounted for share-based payments to employees using SFAS 123 using the minimum value method and are required to apply the prospective transition method of SFAS 123(R). Under the prospective method, only new awards (or awards modified, repurchased, or cancelled after the effective date) are accounted for under the provisions of SFAS 123(R).
 
We selected the Black-Scholes pricing model to determine the fair value of stock options. The determination of the fair value of stock-based payment awards on the date of grant using an option-pricing model will be affected by assumptions regarding a number of complex and subjective variables. These


48


Table of Contents

variables include our expected stock volatility over the term of the awards, actual and projected employee stock option exercise behaviors, risk-free interest rates, forfeitures and expected dividends.
 
The expected term represents the weighted-average period that our stock options are expected to be outstanding. The expected term is based on a simplified or “plain vanilla” approach as we do not feel our historical experience is reasonable or supportable. In order to qualify for the simplified approach, SAB 107 provides five criteria the stock option must meet. Our stock options meet those criteria and therefore, we used this approach for all stock options granted in 2006. As we have been operating as a private company since inception, we are unable to use our actual price volatility data. Therefore, we estimate the volatility of our common stock based on volatility of similar entities over the expected term of our stock options. We base the risk-free interest rate that we use in the option pricing model on U.S. Treasury zero-coupon issues with remaining terms similar to the expected term on the options. We do not anticipate paying any cash dividends in the foreseeable future and, therefore, use an expected dividend yield of zero in the option pricing model. We are required to estimate forfeitures at the time of grant and revise those estimates in subsequent periods if actual forfeitures differ from those estimates. The current forfeiture rate was based on our past history of pre-vesting forfeitures.
 
We had a choice of two attribution methods for allocating compensation costs under SFAS No. 123(R) the “straight-line method,” which allocates expense on a straight-line basis over the requisite service period of the last separately vesting portion of an award, or the “graded vesting attribution method,” which allocates expense on a straight-line basis over the requisite service period for each separately vesting portion of the award as if the award was, in substance, multiple awards. We chose the former method and amortized the fair value of each option on a straight-line basis over the service period.
 
Based on the variables affecting the valuation of our common stock and the method used for allocating compensation costs, we recognized $232,000 in stock compensation expense during the year ended December 31, 2006.
 
Calculating stock-based compensation expense requires the input of highly subjective assumptions, which represent our best estimates and involve inherent uncertainties and the application of management’s judgment. Estimates of stock-based compensation expenses are significant to our financial statements, but these expenses are based on the Black-Scholes pricing model and will not result in the payment of cash by us.
 
The guidance in SFAS No. 123(R) and Staff Accounting Bulletin No. 107 is relatively new, and best practices are not well established. The application of these principles may be subject to further interpretation and refinement over time. There are significant differences among option valuation models, and this may result in a lack of comparability with other companies that use different models, methods and assumptions. If factors change and we employ different assumptions in the application of SFAS No. 123(R) in future periods, or if we decide to use a different valuation model, the compensation expense that we record in the future under SFAS No. 123(R) may differ significantly from what we have recorded in the current period and could materially affect our operating loss, net loss and net loss per share.
 
With respect to each option grant date, we determine the deemed fair value of our common stock. As there is no public market for our common stock, this determination was necessarily subjective. In making this determination, we considered a number of factors, including:
 
  •  the issuance price of our series of preferred shares to third parties;
 
  •  recent third-party transactions in our common stock;
 
  •  valuations performed by independent valuation firms;
 
  •  the liquidation preference and other rights of the preferred shares;
 
  •  our revenue backlog and financial performance;
 
  •  trends in the market for public companies involved in similar lines of business; and
 
  •  the fact that the option grants involved illiquid securities of a private company.
 
We have reviewed the methodologies used in making these determinations in light of the AICPA’s Practice Aid Valuation of Privately-Held-Company Equity Securities Issued as Compensation , which we refer to as the practice aid. We took into consideration the market and income approaches to valuation as set forth


49


Table of Contents

in the practice aid. We believe that the valuation methodologies that we have used are consistent with the practice aid.
 
In connection with the preparation of our financial statements for the years ended December 31, 2005 and 2006, we assessed the valuations of our common and preferred shares as of the applicable grant dates primarily by considering recent third-party transactions in our common stock and the issuance price of our preferred stock in sales to third parties. Because all of such transactions were negotiated by the parties on an arms’-length basis, we determined that the prices paid in those transactions reflected a reliable determination of the fair value of our securities. When no such recent stock activity occurred, we engaged an independent valuation firm, Virchow Krause Valuation, LLC (Virchow Krause), to perform independent valuations of our common stock.
 
Valuation Methodologies Employed by Virchow Krause
 
The valuation methodologies employed by Virchow Krause in connection with the independent valuation studies were based on various generally accepted valuation methods. Specifically, at each valuation date Virchow Krause analyzed the value of our securities based on three potential scenarios: a public offering, a sale or merger and remaining a private company.
 
In each of Virchow Krause’s reports, each of these scenarios was analyzed using a different valuation methodology. Specifically, (i) valuation in connection with the public offering scenario was calculated by reference to the public market prices of companies in our industry or industries deemed by Virchow Krause to be similar, reviewing various valuation multiples implied by the trading prices of such companies, and applying those multiples to our financial performance; (ii) valuation in connection with the sale or merger scenario was calculated by reference to recent transactions involving businesses in our industry or industries determined by Virchow Krause to be similar, reviewing various valuation multiples implied by the prices in those transactions, and applying those multiples to our financial performance; and (iii) valuation in connection with the private company scenario was calculated using the discounted cash flow valuation method, applying a forecast of future cash flows (determined by our management and Virchow Krause to be reasonable), an appropriate discount rate (calculated to be our weighted average cost of capital) and a residual value (determined by capitalizing our stabilized cash flow). Following these analyses, Virchow Krause allocated the values so determined to our preferred stock and our common stock based on the economic impact of the conversion rights and liquidation preferences of the preferred stock, and assigning probabilities to each of these events that varied depending upon our stage of development and our financial condition. In making its valuations, Virchow Krause applied discounts based on a number of factors that it determined impacted the value of our common stock. First, it applied a discount with respect to the sale or merger scenario and the private company scenario to reflect the fact that the common stock being valued did not represent a controlling interest in our company. Second, it applied a discount to reflect the lack of marketability of our common stock. As of March 31, 2006, the discount applied for each of the lack of control and the lack of marketability was 10% respectively. As of December 31, 2007 no discount was applied for either factor due to the increased likelihood of an initial public offering or a sale or merger. Third, it applied a discount to reflect the lesser rights of the common stock compared to the preferred stock. As of March 31, 2006, the discount applied was 22% and as of December 13, 2006, the discount applied was 3%, reflecting the increased probability of an exit event that would result in conversion of the preferred stock. Finally, for the December 31, 2006 valuation it applied a discount of 7.5% with respect to the public company scenario to reflect the fact that an initial public offering was not expected to occur until June 1, 2007.
 
In addition, for each valuation report Virchow Krause reviewed our historical financial performance, conducted a visit of our facilities and interviewed our management concerning our business and its prospects. Virchow Krause also researched our industry, customers, competitors, suppliers and prospects, and analyzed the economic outlook of the industry and the community in which we operate.
 
Determining the fair value of our common stock involves complex and subjective judgments involving estimates of revenue, earnings, assumed market growth rates and estimated costs, as well as appropriate discount rates. At the time of each valuation, the significant estimates used in the discounted cash flow approach included estimates of our revenue and revenue growth rates for several years into the future. Although each time we prepared such forecasts for use by Virchow Krause in the preparation of a valuation


50


Table of Contents

report, we did so based on assumptions that we believed to be reasonable and appropriate, there can be no assurance that any such estimates for earlier periods have come to pass or that any such estimates for future periods will prove to be accurate.
 
The aggregate intrinsic value of our options outstanding at December 31, 2006 was $116.3 million of which $50.3 million related to vested options. The aggregate intrinsic value is calculated as the difference between the exercise price of the underlying stock options and $16.00 per share, the midpoint of the estimated initial public offering price range.
 
Significant Factors in Determining the Fair Value as of Each Grant Date
 
The following table sets forth option grants made during 2006:
 
                                 
    Number of
          Fair Value
    Intrinsic
 
    Options
    Exercise
    Estimate
    Value per
 
Date of Grant
  Granted     Price     per Share     Share  
 
January 26, 2006
    34,000     $ 4.99     $ 4.99     $  
May 16, 2006
    46,920       5.35       5.35        
July 1, 2006
    108,800       5.35       5.35        
October 23, 2006
    190,313       6.75       6.75        
November 14, 2006
    3,400       6.75       6.75        
December 7, 2006
    1,958,400       6.75       6.75        
 
Intrinsic value per share is the difference, as of the grant date, between the fair value estimate and the exercise price.
 
The major pricing factors which supported the valuations used at each of the grant dates were as follows:
 
  •  On December 29, 2005, we sold 2,356,435 shares of Series E convertible preferred stock at $5.94 per share, representing net proceeds of $13.9 million. We engaged Virchow Krause to perform an independent valuation of our common stock based on this preferred stock transaction. Virchow Krause determined that our common stock was valued at $4.99 per share as of December 29, 2005. This valuation was then used for the option grants made in January 2006.
 
  •  In the second quarter of 2006, our board of directors determined that an updated independent valuation should be obtained. Therefore, we engaged Virchow Krause to perform a valuation of all classes of our capital stock. Virchow Krause issued a report dated May 16, 2006, which concluded that our common stock was valued at $5.35 per share as of March 31, 2006. This valuation was then used for the option grants made in May and July 2006. We believe that there were no material events and no material changes in our financial condition or prospects during this period that would have resulted in a change in the valuation of a share of our common stock. The principal reasons for the difference in the fair value of our common stock at these dates compared to the price of $16.00 per share, the mid-point of the estimated initial public offering price range, was our improved financial results that materialized in December 2006, the lack of marketability of our common stock and the improved prospects since the grant date for our initial public offering due to a successful public offering of another company in our segment.
 
  •  On October 23, 2006, the Chairman of our board of directors, T. Rockwell Mackie, sold an aggregate of 190,400 shares of common stock to two independent investors, and our President, Paul Reckwerdt, sold 190,400 common shares to a single independent investor. The purchase price of all these shares was $6.75 per share resulting in aggregate proceeds of $1.3 million to each seller. Given the significant size of the transactions and the fact that these shares were sold to independent third parties, we concluded that our common stock should be valued at $6.75 per share as of October 23, 2006. Both the buyers and sellers had knowledge of the possibility that we would undertake an initial public offering. Stock option grants were made based on this price in October, November and early December 2006. The principal reasons for the difference in the fair value of our common stock at these dates compared to the price of $16.00 per share, the mid-point of the estimated initial public offering price range, was our improved financial results that materialized in


51


Table of Contents

  December 2006, the lack of marketability of our common stock and the improved prospects since the grant date for our initial public offering due to a successful public offering of another company in our segment.
 
  •  We believe that there were no material events and no material charges in our financial condition or prospects between October 23, 2006 (the date of the most recent third-party sale of our common stock) and December 7, 2006 (the date on which we granted options) that would have resulted in a change in the valuation of a share of our common stock. Therefore, we believe that the appropriate valuation to use for the grants dated December 7, 2006 was $6.75, the price paid in the third-party sales of our common stock that occurred on October 23, 2006. The principal reasons for the difference in the fair value of our common stock at these dates compared to the price of $16.00 per share, the mid-point of the estimated initial public offering price range, was our improved financial results as evidenced by the higher than expected orders received by us between December 7 and December 31, 2006 resulting in improved backlog, the lack of marketability of our common stock and the improved prospects since the grant date for our initial public offering due to a successful public offering of another company in our segment.
 
Convertible Preferred Stock Warrant Liability
 
Effective January 1, 2006, we accounted for warrants that are exercisable into redeemable preferred shares issued in connection with financing arrangements in accordance with FSP 150-5. Pursuant to FSP 150-5, an evaluation of specifically identified conditions is made to determine whether the fair value of warrants issued is required to be classified as a liability. The fair value of warrants classified as liabilities is adjusted for changes in fair value at each reporting period, and the corresponding non-cash gain or loss is recorded in current period earnings. We selected the Black-Scholes option pricing model to determine the fair value of warrants. The determination of the fair value using this model will be affected by assumptions regarding a number of complex and subjective variables. These variables include our expected stock volatility over the expected term of the warrant, risk-free interest rates, and the estimated fair value of the underlying preferred stock. The expected term used was equal to the remaining contractual term of the warrants. As we have been operating as a private company since inception, we were unable to use our actual stock price volatility data. Therefore, we estimated the volatility of the underlying stock based on historical stock prices of companies which we consider to be members of our peer group. Historical price volatilities of these companies were evaluated over a period of time equal to the expected term of the warrants. The risk-free interest rates were based on U.S. Treasury zero-coupon rates in effect at each reporting period with terms consistent with the expected term of the warrants. The fair value of the underlying preferred stock at January 1, 2006 was determined based upon the sale by us of 2,356,435 shares of Series E preferred stock at $5.94 per share on December 29, 2005 and an independent third-party valuation performed by Virchow Krause which allocated our enterprise value, determined based upon the sale of the Series E preferred stock, to each of our existing classes of stock including the Series A and D preferred stock. The fair value of the underlying Series A and D preferred stock at December 31, 2006 was determined based upon an independent third-party valuation performed by Virchow Krause. This valuation, as of December 31, 2006, was prepared utilizing the probability weighted expected return method as prescribed by the AICPA Practice Aid Valuation of Privately-Held-Company Equity Securities Issued as Compensation. This valuation took into consideration the following scenarios: (i) completion of an initial public offering; (ii) sale or merger; and (iii) remaining private. The valuation amounts determined under each scenario were then probability weighted based upon our management’s best estimates of the occurrence of each scenario. The resulting value was then allocated to our common and each series of preferred stock based upon the economic impact of the conversion rights and liquidation preferences of the preferred stock.
 
Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock
 
We have issued various classes of preferred stock. The holders of Series A, B, C and D preferred stock have the option to put their shares back to us at the greater of the original purchase price plus accrued dividends, or the current fair market value of the shares. The holders of Series E preferred stock have the option to put their shares back to us at the original purchase price plus accrued dividends. As a result, the


52


Table of Contents

carrying value of the preferred stock has been increased by an accretion each period so that the carrying amounts will equal the greater of fair value or the defined redemption value for the Series A, B, C and D preferred stock. The Series E preferred stock has been increased to its redemption value, including accrued dividends. The accreted amounts are recorded to accumulated deficit. The put option and the related accretion of the preferred shares will terminate upon the closing of this offering. The fair value of the underlying preferred stock at January 1, 2006 and the fair value of the underlying Series A and D preferred stock at December 31, 2006 was determined as described in “— Convertible Preferred Stock Warrant Liability” above.
 
Recent Accounting Pronouncements
 
In May 2005, the FASB issued Statement 154, Accounting Changes and Error Corrections  — a replacement of APB Opinion No. 20 and Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) Statement No. 3.   Statement 154 requires that all voluntary changes in accounting principles and changes required by a new accounting pronouncement that do not include specific transition provisions be applied retrospectively to prior periods’ financial statements, unless it is impracticable to do so. This Statement is effective for accounting changes and corrections of errors made in fiscal years beginning after December 15, 2005. Our adoption of SFAS No. 154 did not have a significant effect on our consolidated financial statements.
 
In June 2006, the FASB issued FASB Interpretation No. 48 , Accounting for Uncertainty in Income Taxes  — an Interpretation of FASB Statement No. 109 (FIN 48). FIN 48 clarifies the accounting for uncertainty in income taxes recognized in an enterprise’s financial statements in accordance with FASB Statement No. 109, Accounting for Income Taxes , and prescribes a recognition threshold and measurement attribute for the financial statement recognition and measurement of a tax position taken or expected to be taken in a tax return. FIN 48 also provides guidance on derecognition, classification, interest and penalties, accounting in interim periods, disclosure and transition. We are required to adopt the provisions of FIN 48 beginning in 2007. We are currently in the process of assessing what impact FIN 48 may have on our consolidated financial position, results of operations or cash flows.
 
In September 2006, the Securities and Exchange Commission issued Staff Accounting Bulletin (SAB) No. 108, “Considering the Effects of Prior Year Misstatements when Quantifying Misstatements in Current Year Financial Statements,” which states that registrants should use both a balance sheet approach and an income statement approach when quantifying and evaluating materiality of a misstatement. The interpretations in SAB No. 108 contain guidance on correcting errors under the dual approach as well as provide transition guidance for correcting errors. This interpretation does not change the requirements within SFAS No. 154 for the correction of an error in financial statements. SAB No. 108 is effective for annual financial statements covering the first fiscal year ending after November 15, 2006. We adopted this interpretation in the fourth quarter of 2006 and it did not have a material impact on our financial results.
 
In September 2006, the FASB issued SFAS No. 157, Fair Value Measurements (SFAS No. 157) . This Statement defines fair value, establishes a framework for measuring fair value in generally accepted accounting principles, and expands disclosures about fair value measurements. This Statement applies under other accounting pronouncements that require or permit fair value measurements, the Board having previously concluded in those accounting pronouncements that fair value is the relevant measurement attribute. Accordingly, this Statement does not require any new fair value measurements. This Statement is effective for financial statements issued for fiscal years beginning after November 15, 2007, and interim periods within those fiscal years. We do not expect the adoption of SFAS No. 157 in 2008 to have a material impact on our results of operations or financial position.
 
In February 2007, the FASB issued SFAS No. 159, The Fair Value Option for Financial Assets and Financial Liabilities (SFAS No. 159). SFAS No. 159 permits entities to choose to measure at fair value some financial instruments and certain other items that are not currently required to be measured at fair value. Subsequent changes in fair value for designated items will be required to be reported in earnings in the current period. SFAS No. 159 also establishes presentation and disclosure requirements for similar types of assets and liabilities measured at fair value. SFAS No. 159 is effective for fiscal years beginning after November 15, 2007. We are currently assessing the effect of implementing this guidance, which directly depends on the nature and extent of eligible items elected to be measured at fair value, upon initial application of the standard on January 1, 2008.


53


Table of Contents

 
BUSINESS
 
Overview
 
We have developed, manufacture and sell the Hi Art system, an advanced and versatile radiation therapy system for the treatment of a wide variety of cancers. The Hi Art system precisely delivers radiation with sub-millimeter accuracy to kill cancer cells while reducing radiation exposure to surrounding healthy tissue, which we believe can lead to improved patient outcomes. The Hi Art system contains a linear accelerator, which is a device that generates external beam radiation that is used both to capture high quality, quantitative images and to deliver therapeutic radiation in a helical, or spiral, delivery pattern 360 degrees around the body. The linear accelerator rotates around a rigid circular frame, or ring gantry, that is housed in a protective closing. This integrated design contrasts with traditional radiation therapy systems, which utilize a single, rotating arm referred to as a “C-arm”, that can deliver radiation from only a limited number of angles. Generating CT images with traditional C-arm systems typically requires the addition of auxiliary devices that generally lack the quantitative imaging capabilities necessary to accurately image the location, size and shape and density of tumors and internal anatomy. The Hi Art system’s helical delivery pattern and imaging capabilities, combined with the system’s advanced treatment planning software and ability to precisely shape the beam delivering radiation, allow clinicians to locate and define the size, shape and density of tumors, maximize radiation delivered to diseased tissue, minimize radiation delivered to healthy tissue and measure the radiation dose actually received by the patient. We believe these capabilities allow the Hi Art system to deliver sophisticated radiation treatments with speed and precision.
 
The Hi Art system’s combination of technologies allows clinicians to make modifications to a patient’s cancer treatment plan as changes in the location, size, shape and density of tumors or in the patient’s internal anatomy are detected over the course of treatment. To deliver radiation therapy, the Hi Art system first optimizes a patient’s treatment plan by calculating the radiation dose pattern that maximizes the radiation dose to the tumor and minimizes exposure of healthy tissue. A quantitative CT image of the treatment area is taken to identify the location, size, shape and density of the tumor and is used to position the patient on the treatment couch. The optimized radiation dose is then delivered using a proprietary device called a multi-leaf collimator, or MLC, that consists of a series of tungsten leaves that open and close to modulates the shape of radiation beams produced by the linear accelerator as the patient passes horizontally through the ring gantry. The data acquired for the accurate positioning of the patient can also be used to compute the dose received by the patient. Data regarding the dose distribution is used by the clinician to evaluate and, if necessary, adjust the treatment plan in subsequent treatment sessions to address changes in patient anatomy, such as tumor shrinkage or weight loss, as well as any previous errors accumulated in treatment delivery and planning. We believe that the process of making iterative adjustments to a patient’s treatment plan, referred to as adaptive radiation therapy, should become a standard technique for the treatment of most cancer patients receiving radiation therapy. The Hi Art system has the ability to provide daily, quantitative imaging and to incorporate adaptive radiation therapy easily and efficiently into clinicians’ regular clinical workflow distinguishes the Hi Art system from other radiation therapy systems.
 
We market the Hi Art system to hospitals and cancer treatment centers in North America, Europe and Asia, and offer customer support services in each region. Since commercial introduction of the Hi Art system in 2003, we have experienced significant revenue growth and have invested extensively in our manufacturing capabilities, and customer service and support infrastructure. For the years ended December 31, 2005 and 2006, we had revenue of $75.8 million and $156.1 million, respectively, representing growth of 106%. For the years ended December 31, 2005 and 2006, we had net income of $0.2 million and $12.8 million, respectively. Net income for 2006 included a $7.8 million benefit from deferred income taxes and an expense of $3.1 million reflecting the fair value of outstanding warrants. As of December 31, 2006, we had an installed base of 108 Hi Art systems worldwide and had a backlog of $164 million, the significant majority of which we expect to deliver before the end of 2007.


54


Table of Contents

 
Market Overview
 
According to the World Health Organization, in 2005 there were approximately 24.6 million people worldwide living with cancer and an estimated 7.6 million cancer deaths, accounting for 13% of all deaths worldwide. The World Health Organization estimates that approximately 10.9 million new cases of cancer are diagnosed globally each year. The instances of diagnosed cancer are expected to continue to rise as a result of increased life expectancy, aging populations and technological improvements, which are leading to more sophisticated screening techniques and earlier detection of cancer.
 
The three primary methods of treating cancer are radiation therapy, chemotherapy and surgery, each of which can be used alone or in combination, depending on the type of cancer being treated. Radiation therapy is a proven, effective and widely accepted form of treatment for many types of cancer. The National Cancer Institute estimates that nearly 50% of cancer patients in the United States are treated using radiation therapy. Currently, the most common type of radiation therapy is external beam radiation therapy, in which patients are treated with high-energy radiation generated by medical equipment external to the patient. Approximately 90% of patients treated with radiation therapy in the United States receive external beam radiation generated by a device called a linear accelerator. Linear accelerators have been widely used for radiation therapy for over 30 years. According to the August 2006 Radiation Therapy Equipment Report by Global Industry Analysts, Inc., there are over 7,500 linear accelerator-based radiation therapy systems in use for medical purposes worldwide. Linear accelerators represent the largest product segment by expenditure within the global radiation therapy equipment market, which totaled approximately $2.0 billion in 2006.
 
While radiation therapy is widely available in the United States and Western Europe, many developing countries currently do not have a sufficient number of linear accelerators to adequately treat their domestic cancer patient populations. For example, there are currently approximately 13 linear accelerators per million population in the United States compared to less than one per million population in India or China. We believe that increasing demand for advanced medical treatments in many international markets, growth in cancer cases worldwide and improvements in the sophistication of radiation therapy techniques will continue to drive demand for more advanced linear accelerators that integrate additional clinical functionality to make treatments more efficient and effective.
 
Radiation Treatment
 
Radiation energy is an effective method for killing cells and is used to treat various cancers. External beam radiation therapy works by exposing clusters of cancer cells, or tumors, to a dose of high energy radiation sufficient to alter their genetic structure, thereby causing cell death. When the radiation therapy process begins, the clinician targets radiation delivery to the tumor as precisely as possible in order to maximize the radiation dose delivered to cancerous tissue and minimize the exposure of healthy tissue. While the goal of radiation therapy is to selectively deliver radiation solely to cancer cells, radiation therapy can result in healthy tissue outside of the intended treatment area being exposed to significant doses of radiation. Damage to healthy tissue and structures can cause side effects ranging in severity from superficial burns, nausea and vomiting, to more serious side effects, such as damage to vital organs. Over time, the exposure of healthy tissue to radiation energy can result in accumulated damage to healthy tissue in the patient’s body and limit the patient’s future radiation therapy possibilities. In order to minimize such damage and exposure, clinicians divide the prescribed radiation dose into staged treatments, or fractions. Prescribed treatments typically consist of 25 to 35 fractions, and are administered over periods ranging from a few days to several weeks. Such fractions are intended to deliver a cumulative dose of radiation sufficient to kill cancer cells, while allowing healthy tissue to recover sufficiently between treatments.
 
Recent advances in radiation therapy technologies have focused on further improving the ability to target the radiation dose more precisely at cancer cells, while minimizing the exposure of healthy tissue. These advances include the following:
 
  •      Intensity modulated radiation therapy.   Intensity modulated radiation therapy, or IMRT, involves varying, or modulating, the radiation beam intensity across the treatment area. This technique attempts to conform the high dose region of the radiation beam more closely with the


55


Table of Contents

  shape of the tumor, enabling the delivery of higher doses of radiation to tumors with a reduced impact on surrounding healthy tissue. Using IMRT, medical professionals can design a more individualized treatment plan for each patient.
 
  •      Image guided radiation therapy.   Image guided radiation therapy, or IGRT, involves delivering IMRT guided by images of the treatment area taken shortly before treatment using CT, x-ray, ultrasound or other imaging technologies. By combining imaging with radiation treatment, clinicians can adjust the patient’s position relative to the radiation source prior to each treatment to target the tumor more precisely. However, the precision and effectiveness of IGRT depends largely on the quality of the images and the degree to which the radiation delivery system is integrated with the images. Compared to traditional IMRT without image guidance, accurate image guidance enables clinicians to improve patient outcomes by concentrating higher doses of radiation at tumors and further reducing the exposure of healthy tissues to radiation. According to a 2006 report by the Advisory Board Company, a provider of research and analysis on the healthcare industry, 33% of radiation therapy facilities offered IGRT and 43% planned to do so within the subsequent three years. The survey was based on 267 radiation therapy facilities in the United States.
 
  •      Dose escalation.   Dose escalation, or hypofractionation, is an evolving radiation therapy technique that involves reducing the number of fractions and delivering larger doses of radiation per fraction. The benefits of hypofractionation include fewer patient visits and more efficient use of radiation therapy systems. Stereotactic radiation therapy and stereotactic radiosurgery procedures, in which treatment is provided in one to five sessions, are extreme examples of hypofractionation. Hypofractionation has been used to date to treat only a limited number of tumor types. These tumors are generally small and are located in a few specific, sensitive regions of the body, such as the head and neck, spinal cord, lung and prostate, where the very high intensity radiation involved in dose escalation increases the need for a radiation delivery system that is capable of locating tumors and delivering radiation with high precision.
 
  •      Adaptive radiation therapy.   Adaptive radiation therapy involves adjusting a patient’s radiation therapy plan between fractions to account for changes in the patient’s anatomy, the amount and location of the radiation received by the patient, and the size, shape and location of the tumor. While there is no widely accepted definition of adaptive radiation therapy, it has been characterized to include as little as an adjustment to the physical position of the patient relative to the radiation source prior to treatment, as occurs during IGRT, rather than adjustment to the treatment plan. We believe that adaptive radiation therapy requires continual adjustments to the treatment plan facilitated by both the regular acquisition of updated quantitative images showing the location, geometry and density of the tumor, as well as verification of the actual radiation dose received by the patient throughout the entire course of treatment. We believe that achieving truly adaptive radiation therapy currently represents the most significant challenge for existing radiation therapy systems.
 
Despite advances in radiation therapy techniques, most commercially available radiation therapy systems still present significant limitations that restrict clinicians’ ability to provide the most effective treatment possible. These limitations include:
 
  •      Limited versatility and precision.   The C-arm configuration of traditional radiation therapy systems has a limited range and speed of motion due to its size and mechanical structure. Most existing MLCs, which modulate or shape the radiation beams, also have mechanical limitations that reduce their beam-shaping ability and the speed at which they operate. These design elements limit the motion and dynamic range of IMRT intensities capable of being delivered by traditional radiation therapy systems and often make it impractical to deliver radiation from more than five to nine treatment angles during a typical treatment session. These limited treatment angles reduce the ability to deliver precisely targeted radiation that avoids healthy tissue. Such imprecision may prevent clinicians from treating tumors near sensitive structures,


56


Table of Contents

  such as the eye or the spinal cord, or from retreating patients in an area of the body that was previously exposed to radiation and may be unable to tolerate additional exposure.
 
  •      Limited ability to provide frequent, quantitative images.   Precise radiation therapy requires frequent capture of images that accurately depict the size, shape, location and density of the tumor, which we refer to as quantitative images. Many traditional radiation therapy systems either do not incorporate CT imaging functionality or use imaging technologies that do not have the ability to generate quantitative images. Lacking this data, traditional radiation therapy systems measure the amount of radiation emitted by the device based on the system’s performance specifications. This calculation does not provide the clinician with data regarding the amount of radiation that was actually received by the patient or what tissue within the patient’s body received any particular amount of radiation. In addition, most radiation therapy systems that have imaging capabilities are not capable of performing daily imaging of the patient due to concerns about the additional radiation exposure associated with most imaging technologies. Since it is common for internal organs to shift and for the size of the tumor to change during the course of treatment, failure to obtain updated images and adapt the treatment plan throughout the course of treatment may result in a portion, or potentially all, of the radiation dose missing the tumor and instead being absorbed by healthy tissue.
 
  •      Failure to integrate multiple functions.   Many traditional radiation therapy systems were designed solely for the purpose of delivering radiation and therefore do not possess integrated imaging, treatment planning, dose verification or quality assurance capabilities necessary for more advanced treatment protocols. Some systems have subsequently been adapted to include certain elements of this functionality by incorporating modular add-on devices to legacy linear accelerator designs. These separate modular components can provide imaging, treatment planning, quality assurance procedures or post-treatment analysis functionality. However, this modular approach often requires the clinician to reconfigure and recalibrate the system between patient imaging, treatment planning, radiation delivery and quality assurance, which can increase the time required to plan and deliver treatments.
 
The TomoTherapy Solution
 
The Hi Art system is an advanced and versatile radiation therapy system for the treatment of a wide variety of cancers. We have designed the Hi Art system to offer clinicians and patients the following benefits:
 
  •      More versatile treatment capabilities.   The Hi Art system’s high-speed ring gantry and MLC allow treatment to be delivered continuously in a helical pattern 360 degrees around the patient’s body, allowing radiation delivery from thousands of angles to improve radiation dose distribution without extending the time it takes to complete comparable procedures using other systems. In addition, the versatility of the Hi Art system enables an operator to provide IMRT, IGRT or stereotactic treatments anywhere within a cylindrical volume of 80 centimeters (2.6 feet) in diameter and up to 160 centimeters (5.3 feet) long. This broad treatment field allows large areas of the body to be treated in a single session and facilitates complex treatments, such as total bone irradiation, which specifically irradiates bone marrow, and the treatment of widely distant tumors. The Hi Art system’s precision and range of treatment angles also enable the treatment of hard to reach tumors, such as spinal tumors, as well as treatments that can be challenging or impractical to treat with other traditional radiation therapy systems because of the need to avoid or minimize radiation delivery to critical structures.
 
  •      Daily, quantitative imaging for better identification of tumors, dose verification and treatment planning.   The Hi Art system is the only commercially available radiation therapy system offering integrated quantitative CT imaging capabilities, which depict the density of tumors and healthy tissue more accurately than traditional radiation therapy systems. Our integrated mega-voltage computerized tomography, or MVCT, which we market as our CTrue technology, enables quantitative imaging and delivers less radiation during the imaging process compared to


57


Table of Contents

  the imaging technologies used by other commercially available radiation therapy systems. This lower dose allows the clinician to collect daily, quantitative images, which can be used to monitor changes in the patient’s internal anatomy and quickly and accurately quantify the amount of radiation absorbed by specific areas of the patient’s body, including both tumors and healthy tissue. We believe that daily, quantitative images are essential to optimizing patient treatment by enabling clinicians to adapt the treatment plan in response to anatomical changes and the cumulative amount of radiation received by specific areas within the patient over time. We believe that both of these factors can have a significant impact on the targeting and amount of the radiation dose to be delivered.
 
  •      Fully integrated treatment system for more precise radiation delivery.   We believe that the integration of our CTrue imaging technology, treatment planning and helical delivery of radiation beams shaped by the MLC enables highly precise radiation delivery. Our planned adaptive software allows clinicians to establish at the time of treatment the precise contours of a tumor and any sensitive structures at risk. The Hi Art system uses a highly efficient dose computation algorithm to ensure that the radiation beam conforms to the patient’s tumor and avoids sensitive structures, providing a highly-targeted dose distribution. These features significantly benefit patients by maximizing the radiation delivered to cancerous tissues and minimizing damage to nearby healthy tissues. In addition, because the Hi Art system can precisely deliver a high dose of targeted radiation, we believe that our system reduces the temporary side effects and permanent damage to healthy tissue associated with traditional radiation therapy systems. This capability allows clinicians to accelerate the treatment regimen by maximizing the radiation delivered to tumor cells in fewer fractions.
 
  •      Efficient clinical workflow for IGRT and adaptive radiation therapy.   The Hi Art system integrates into a single system all of the key elements for radiation therapy, including treatment planning, CT image-guided patient positioning, treatment delivery, quality assurance and adaptive planning. The imaging and treatment planning capabilities of many traditional systems are more modular or require cumbersome add-ons or separate treatment planning systems that result in clinicians taking more steps between scanning, planning and treatment of patients, and may reduce the precision of treatment. Conversely, the integrated imaging and treatment features of the Hi Art system allow clinicians to scan, plan and treat cancer patients easily and efficiently. This capability enables healthcare providers to increase patient throughput for sophisticated IGRT and adaptive radiation therapy procedures using the Hi Art system. Daily images can be easily accessed remotely, via our TomoPortal web-enabled interface, to verify patient positioning and define patient treatment strategies due to anatomical changes.
 
  •      Low barriers to installation and implementation.   All external beam radiation systems must be housed in rooms which have special radiation shielding to capture any radiation not absorbed by the patient. The Hi Art system’s size and self-contained design allow customers to retrofit the Hi Art system into existing treatment rooms previously used for legacy radiation therapy systems and avoid, or reduce, the significant construction costs that can be associated with building new, larger treatment rooms, which are required to install many other radiation therapy systems. With both imaging and radiation delivery capabilities in its ring gantry, the Hi Art system requires less space than other systems, which use large moving arms to position the linear accelerator or incorporate adjacent imaging equipment used for treatment planning. In addition, because the Hi Art system has an integrated radiation beam stop, which captures radiation that passes through the patient, it requires less radiation shielding in treatment room walls as compared to the shielding required by a traditional system. We also preassemble, test and commission each Hi Art system at our manufacturing facility, and ship the system almost fully assembled. This assembly process allows radiation “beam on” within four days and treatments to begin within 45 days after delivery in most cases.
 
  •      Platform for further technological advancements in adaptive radiation therapy.   We believe that the Hi Art system is the only commercially available treatment device that enables adaptive


58


Table of Contents

  radiation therapy because of its unique ability to provide daily, quantitative images, high speed delivery of radiation helically from 360 degrees around the body and real-time verification of the dose received by the patient. We believe that the combination of these design features and our integrated treatment planning and optimization software will allow us to continue to enhance the Hi Art system’s adaptive capabilities to a point where clinicians will routinely and easily adjust a patient’s treatment as needed.
 
In deciding whether to use the Hi Art system for a particular treatment, we understand that clinicians may weigh the benefits that the Hi Art system offers their patients, especially those with more easily treatable tumors, against the additional time required to implement the Hi Art system’s quantitative imaging functionality. As a result, clinicians may decide that certain tumors can be adequately treated using traditional radiation therapy systems notwithstanding the greater precision and functionality enabled by the Hi Art system. We believe that this perception will change as clinicians and patients become more aware of the benefits of IGRT and adaptive radiation therapy, and as we continue to educate clinicians on the use of the Hi Art system and implement software enhancements to improve patient throughput, especially for those cases that are more easily treatable, and as speed and throughput improvements in the Hi Art system render the time differentials insignificant.
 
Our Strategy
 
Our goal is to become a leading provider of radiation therapy systems and the technology of choice for radiation therapy providers around the world. We are pursuing the following strategies to achieve this goal:
 
  •      Increase market awareness of the Hi Art system’s clinical and economic benefits.   In order to expand our installed base of Hi Art systems, we intend to continue to position the Hi Art system as the most advanced radiation therapy system for treating a wide range of cancers effectively and efficiently. We intend to accomplish this through traditional sales and marketing efforts, such as tradeshows, educational symposia, e-business avenues, marketing collateral, case studies and direct mail campaigns. An important aspect of our sales and marketing efforts is also to raise awareness of the Hi Art system among patient populations who are increasingly educated about treatment options and therefore help to drive adoption of new technologies by clinicians. We also intend to educate clinicians about using the Hi Art system to treat tumors that they may currently believe can be adequately treated using competing technologies in order to drive sales to smaller treatment centers that may only have one treatment system.
 
  •      Expand our worldwide sales presence.   Our early sales and marketing efforts were primarily focused on North America. As of December 31, 2006, we had 78 systems installed in North America out of a total of 108 systems installed globally. In the last two years, we began to establish both direct and indirect sales capabilities in Western Europe and Asia where we believe that there is significant potential to expand our installed base. We intend to add additional direct sales representatives to further penetrate the United States market, while investing in direct and indirect sales and marketing capabilities in international markets. In particular, we plan to expand our sales and marketing capabilities in India, China, the Middle East and Eastern Europe during 2007.
 
  •      Increase our profitability through cost reductions and improved operating leverage.   Over the last two years our operating margins have been impacted by our decision to invest in our global service and support infrastructure, including the establishment of spare part depots and the addition of personnel to support our international operations and anticipated future growth. In addition, we incurred increased costs due to higher component costs during early production and the higher failure rates of certain components. In order to increase our profitability, we will seek to decrease our reliance on single-source suppliers of key components in order to enable us to negotiate better prices with a wider range of suppliers and to improve component reliability. In addition, a number of opportunities exist to reduce costs through re-engineering higher cost components. We will also seek to increase our profitability by leveraging our investments in our


59


Table of Contents

  global service and support infrastructure, which we believe positions us to better absorb the costs associated with increased sales volumes.
 
  •      Continue to enhance our customer service and support capabilities.   We believe that an important differentiating feature of our business is our strong customer support. We have invested heavily in our customer service and support infrastructure in the United States and internationally. We provide comprehensive customer support beginning with a dedicated site-planning and installation team and continuing through training, product technical support, access to physicist support, field service engineering and value-added maintenance services. We intend to build upon our infrastructure and technology advantages by hiring additional support personnel, implementing regional training programs and expanding the number of local spare parts depots to continually augment and refine our customer service.
 
  •      Enhance the Hi Art system’s treatment capabilities through on-going research and development initiatives.   In order to increase patient throughput and increase our customers’ return on their investment, our research and development initiatives are focused on more fully automating the treatment optimization and adaptive therapy processes thereby decreasing the time necessary for clinicians to develop and adapt treatment plans. For example, we recently released pilot versions of our RTstat software, which allows clinicians to generate a treatment plan in three to five minutes while the patient is positioned on the Hi Art system’s treatment couch. We expect to release the RTstat software to customers in 2007. We are also engaged in initiatives to accommodate real-time patient movements during treatment. We believe that these developments will further improve the precision of treatment offered by the Hi Art system and increase patient throughput. In addition, we believe that our work in remote and automatic quality assurance should reduce the amount of time and resources needed to perform system verification and maintenance. We believe that these developments will improve the precision of treatment and increase patient throughput.
 
  •      Continue to expand and protect our intellectual property portfolio.   The Hi Art system is comprised of multiple sophisticated proprietary components. We hold or license 21 U.S. patents, 29 pending U.S. patent applications, 61 foreign patents and 77 foreign patent applications, including 16 U.S. patents, 61 foreign patents and 19 foreign patent applications licensed from the Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation, or WARF. These patents cover various components and techniques incorporated into the Hi Art system, such as the MLC and aspects of the helical delivery of therapeutic radiation, that we believe will allow us to maintain a competitive advantage in the field of radiation treatment. We will continue to seek patent protection for our new inventions and seek licensing rights for inventions of others that can add substantial value to our products and services.
 
  •      Increase our commercial opportunities and growth through acquisitions, investments, or third party collaborations.   We believe that we can increase our commercial opportunities through a combination of strategic acquisitions, investments and collaborations with third parties. We seek to identify opportunities to acquire or collaborate in the development of new technologies that leverage our existing operational infrastructure and distribution, provide our customers with improved or additional capabilities or expand our growth opportunities into new markets. For example, we currently have research and development collaborations for the development of a compact, lower-cost, intensity modulated proton therapy system, a new patient treatment couch and new accessories for use with the Hi Art system. We will continue to evaluate opportunities to vertically integrate through acquisition or investment in suppliers of key components.
 
The Hi Art System
 
We have developed the Hi Art system to be a platform that includes the components necessary to deliver the most advanced adaptive radiation therapy currently available while maintaining the flexibility to incorporate future advancements in diagnostic imaging and radiation treatment.


60


Table of Contents

 
Clinical Workflow
 
The Hi Art system’s typical workflow process consists of the following steps:
 
Patient imaging.   Each Hi Art treatment program begins by collecting a quantitative CT image of the patient. The clinician then evaluates the image to identify regions of interest, such as tumors or sensitive structures to be avoided. Once these structures are identified, the clinician determines the desired maximum and minimum radiation dose and defines the other parameters of the treatment plan, including the number of fractions.
 
Treatment planning and optimization.   Optimization consists of repeatedly calculating the dose and updating the radiation beam shape and intensity based on the plan parameters and data related to the dosage already delivered. The Hi Art system automatically optimizes the treatment plan by calculating the best dose pattern to maximize the dose to the tumor and minimize the dose to healthy tissue.
 
Patient positioning and treatment delivery.   During each treatment session, the patient is positioned on a treatment table, or patient couch and an image of the patient is taken with the CTrue system. This 3D quantitative CT image is then used to automatically align the patient’s internal anatomy to assure the accurate delivery of radiation. Once the treatment area is aligned correctly, and the clinician is assured of a correct treatment, the patient on the couch moves horizontally through the ring gantry at variable speed while the linear accelerator rotates around the patient to deliver radiation therapy in a spiral, or helical, pattern 360 degrees around the patient. The optimized radiation dose is delivered using the Hi Art system’s proprietary MLC which modulates and shapes the radiation beam as the linear accelerator rotates around the patient and the patient moves through the gantry.
 
Dose verification.   Dose verification is the process in which the daily dose received by the patient is computed for each fraction. The data acquired for the accurate positioning of the patient can also be used to compute the dose received by the patient. This dose distribution is used by the clinician to evaluate and, if necessary, to adjust the treatment plan in subsequent treatment sessions to address changes in patient anatomy, such as tumor shrinkage or weight loss, as well as any previous errors accumulated in treatment delivery and treatment planning. The Hi Art system’s imaging detector, which is positioned in the ring gantry directly opposite the linear accelerator, records the amount of radiation that passes through the patient during treatment and can be used to verify that the planned dose was accurately delivered.
 
The repetition of these steps during each session allows the clinician to provide dose-guided adaptive radiation therapy by continuously adjusting the treatment plan to account for changes in patient anatomy and the location and amount of radiation accumulated in the patient during previous sessions. We believe that such adjustments to the treatment plan should become a regular part of the clinical workflow, and that the Hi Art system’s ability to allow daily, quantitative imaging and more easily and efficiently incorporate adaptive radiation therapy into clinician’s regular clinical workflow distinguishes the Hi Art system from other radiation therapy systems.
 
Technology
 
The following are the key components and technologies of the Hi Art system:
 
Ring gantry.   The Hi Art system’s rigid ring gantry houses a linear accelerator that circles the patient and enables both CT imaging and radiation therapy to be provided from the same integrated source. The ring architecture enables more precise and more efficient treatments by eliminating the need for the repeated adjustment and re-calibration steps necessitated by imaging and treating the patient on different systems and mechanically adjusting the C-arm to treat from different angles.
 
Quantitative fan beam CT.   The Hi Art system uses a low-intensity, fan beam CT to collect quantitative images prior to each treatment. These images allow lung tissue, fat, muscle and bone to be clearly distinguished. In addition, because of the low dose involved, clinicians can safely take daily images, which aid in treatment planning. These daily images allow patient positioning based on highly accurate images of the tumor and soft-tissue anatomy at the time of treatment. Competing image-guided radiation therapy systems


61


Table of Contents

rely on non-quantitative cone beam radiation detectors which do not depict cell density and internal tissue anatomy as accurately as, and can be more sensitive to patient movement compared to, fan beam images. The higher doses of radiation associated with the imaging devices in many competing radiation systems may also lead clinicians to avoid daily imaging, making those imaging systems less useful for identifying subtle changes to the tumor or internal patient anatomy.
 
Multi-leaf collimator.   The Hi Art system’s MLC is attached in front of the linear accelerator and consists of 64 individual tungsten leaves that move across the beam in less than 20 milliseconds to either block or allow the passage of radiation, effectively shaping the beam as it is emitted. Each leaf’s binary movement from open to closed defines a beamlet of radiation, and the intensity of the beamlet is modulated based on the length of time the leaf is open. The shape of the treatment field is defined by the pattern of all of the beamlets. A typical Hi Art treatment delivers tens of thousands of beamlets.
 
Treatment planning system.   The treatment planning station allows the user to develop and later modify a prescriptive outline for the radiation therapy treatment. CT images of the patient are imported and stored within the planning station and the clinician can develop or adjust a prescriptive outline by establishing dose constraints and objectives for both tumor cells and sensitive structures surrounding the tumor. These constraints and objectives are then used as input for optimized dose calculations. The treatment planning system also creates a fractionation schedule for the treatment delivery.
 
Optimizer.   After the prescriptive dose is developed, the Hi Art system optimizer calculates the MLC delivery pattern that most closely meets the prescribed radiation objectives and constraints. By adjusting specific plan parameters, the clinician can maximize the radiation dose to the tumor and minimize the exposure of healthy tissue. Using parameters specific to the treatment plans, an intensity pattern is created that controls the MLC leaves. The plan also specifies the optimized treatment field size, couch speed, and gantry speed to be used for treatment.
 
Integrated database server.   All data generated or used by the Hi Art system throughout all phases of treatment is stored in a single database which contains patient information and machine data used by the entire system. The integrated database stores initial planning images, images taken during the course of treatment, dose verification and quality assurance data collected during treatment delivery. No other radiation therapy treatment system makes use of a single database server to store data from all phases of treatment from the first prescriptive treatment outline until the last fraction of radiation has been delivered. The integration of this data in one server allows the clinician to more quickly and more easily assess the accuracy of the treatment delivery, and develop and adjust the treatment plan. We believe that this comprehensive data, including the radiation actually received by patients, will facilitate clinical studies of the efficacy of treatments which will help improve the standard of care.
 
Primary beam stop and radiation beam shielding.   We believe that the Hi Art system contains more radiation shielding, which absorbs radiation, around the linear accelerator than any other linear accelerator currently available. This shielding protects the patient from receiving unwanted radiation leakage to the parts of the body not being treated. The Hi Art system also contains a lead beam stop on the opposite side of the ring gantry from the linear accelerator that absorbs the primary radiation beam after it has passed through the patient. The increased shielding and beam stop limit the amount of radiation that leaks from the system into the treatment room, reduces the shielding required in the walls of the facility in which the Hi Art system is located and protects the patient from unwanted radiation.
 
Marketing and Sales
 
Our sales and marketing activities are focused on selling the Hi Art system to university research centers, community hospitals, private and governmental institutions and cancer care centers worldwide. These facilities routinely replace cancer treatment equipment at the end of the equipment’s life and upgrade or expand their treatment capabilities. Representative customers in the United States include: M.D. Anderson Cancer Center (Orlando, FL), City of Hope Comprehensive Cancer Center (Los Angeles, CA) and The Johns Hopkins Sidney Kimmel Comprehensive Cancer Centre (Baltimore, MD). Representative foreign customers include: UCL-St-Luc University Hospital (Brussels, Belgium), L’Institut Curie (Paris, France), Charité Berlin


62


Table of Contents

(Berlin, Germany), Hong Kong Sanatorium and Hospital (Hong Kong, China) and Aichi Cancer Center Hospital and Research Institute (Aichi, Japan).
 
We divide the global market into three regions: North America, Europe and Asia. During the last two years we have expanded our sales and marketing efforts from focusing on North America to include Europe and Asia. These markets accounted for 57%, 22% and 21%, respectively, of our revenue during fiscal year 2006; 78%, 7% and 15%, respectively, of our revenue during fiscal year 2005; and 94%, 6% and 0%, respectively, of our revenue during fiscal year 2004. As of December 31, 2006, we had a total of 49 employees in our sales and marketing groups, six distributors and seven sales agents. We intend to expand our global sales and marketing capabilities in 2007 in order to further penetrate these geographic regions.
 
Under our standard sales agent agreement, our sales agents identify potential end customers and assist our sales and marketing personnel with promotion and sales of the Hi Art system. Under our standard distribution agreement, we appoint an exclusive distributor for a specific country for a period of three years. We agree each year to annual sales targets and are entitled to terminate the agreement if the distributor fails to meet these sales targets. Our distributor agreements require us to assist with the initial four installations of Hi Art systems within each distributor’s region. Following these first four installations, the distributor is obligated to perform any post-shipment work, including installation, testing, training and post-installation warranty work. We have developed a certification procedure to ensure that distributors can fulfill these obligations. Upon completion of this certification, the distributor is deemed by us to be qualified and our personnel are no longer involved in the installation procedures.
 
Our sales and marketing operations in each global region are as follows:
 
North America.   In the United States and Canada, we market the Hi Art system through an experienced team of direct sales personnel consisting of regional sales managers and sales directors. As of December 31, 2006, our sales force in the United States and Canada consisted of ten regional sales managers and two sales directors. Each regional sales manager is responsible for all sales targets and customer relations within an assigned geographic region. Their responsibilities include achievement of orders, sales and margin budgets, forecasting, market coverage and penetration, expense management and ongoing customer satisfaction. Sales directors, in turn, are responsible for assisting the regional sales managers in delivering the financial targets for each geographic region. In addition, we have three product managers who are responsible for developing market strategies, establishing pricing, determining strategic market fit, identifying data and trends supporting clinical efficacy, and developing sales support materials and promotions.
 
Europe.   In Europe, we market the Hi Art system through a sales force consisting of two direct sales employees and seven sales agents as of December 31, 2006. We support our European marketing and sales activities from both our U.S. headquarters in Madison, Wisconsin and our European headquarters in Brussels, Belgium. We intend to continue to build upon our European marketing efforts by adding more direct sales personnel and sales agents in key markets.
 
Asia.   We market and sell the Hi Art system in Asian countries primarily through distributors. As of December 31, 2006, our sales force in Asian countries consisted of two employees and six distributors. We support our Asian marketing and sales activities from our U.S. headquarters in Madison, Wisconsin. We intend to build a stronger presence in the Asian region, which may include the addition of direct sales personnel in key markets.
 
We also assist our customers in their marketing of the Hi Art system. We provide customers with a public relations kit and marketing materials, such as brochures and a model press release in order to assist them in raising the public awareness of the technological differences of the Hi Art system compared to traditional radiation therapy systems.
 
Customer Service and Support
 
We consider service and support to be key components of our marketing strategy. We believe that the availability and responsiveness of our highly-trained service organization has played an important role in increasing the market penetration of the Hi Art system. Service revenue comprises a small, but growing


63


Table of Contents

portion of our total revenue due to the sophistication and relative newness of our product, as well as the growth in our installed base. Our service team first has contact with a customer during the initial phases of site planning and continues to be available throughout the lifecycle of the system.
 
Site planning and installation.   We offer site planning services to all of our customers. Each installation is assigned a dedicated project manager and installation team with local design experts. The team assists customers in retrofitting existing bunkers or in the construction of new bunkers. The team dedicated to the installation of a unit oversees each project from start to finish, ensuring that the Hi Art system unit functions according to specifications and meets the customer’s expectations. We thoroughly test each Hi Art system prior to releasing it from our manufacturing facility to ensure that the system is fully operational. As a result, installations typically require only approximately 45 days from the time the system is delivered on site until the system is ready for treatment of the first patient.
 
Training.   We offer comprehensive training for physicists, dosimetrists and therapists. Courses include technical, physics and application training. Initial training is included in the base system price of a Hi Art system and typically requires three weeks to complete. This training is conducted at both the customer’s site and our facilities in Madison, Wisconsin. Ongoing training related to system upgrades is available at both our North American Customer Training Center in Madison, Wisconsin and our European Customer Training Center in Antwerp, Belgium, which will commence operations in the first-half of 2007. Technical training courses are available for our field service engineers and for those customers participating in our post-warranty service contracts.
 
Standard warranty and support services.   We provide a standard warranty on each of our systems for parts and labor for a period of one year. We have a worldwide team of over 100 experienced field service engineers and maintain more than 20 regional spare parts depots to facilitate rapid response to requests for parts or service. Kuehne + Nagel stores almost all of our spare parts inventory in our regional spare parts depots and performs a significant portion of our logistics and shipping activities in connection with our customer support. The majority of our field service engineers are TomoTherapy employees, but in select countries in Asia, field service engineers are employees of our distributors. To support our field service engineers we maintain two call centers, which our customers can access by dialing a single telephone number from anywhere in the world. Our call centers operate 24 hours a day, seven days a week, and are staffed with trained technical personnel, including physicists. We provide additional procedural support to customers through our technical experts in the United States, Europe and Asia. We also have key logistics and training operations in Madison, Wisconsin and Brussels, Belgium. Our call centers and procedural support services work together seamlessly to serve our customers on a simultaneous and integrated basis.
 
Tomo Lifecycle Care.   In addition to our standard one-year warranty, we also offer a range of Tomo Lifecycle Care, or TLC, post-warranty equipment service agreements that permit customers to contract for the level of equipment maintenance they require. Our most popular TLC service agreement is the Total TLC Service Package, or Total TLC, which is a comprehensive care package providing complete system coverage. Total TLC ensures the highest levels of performance, with the lowest risk to the customer. Under Total TLC, we provide customers with full spare parts coverage, including installation, service by a TomoTherapy field service engineer and full planned maintenance. As of December 31, 2006, approximately 75% of our customers had elected to participate in Total TLC. We also offer the Partnership TLC Service Package, or Partnership TLC, pursuant to which we provide customers with technical training, remote support, full spare parts coverage and semi-annual planned maintenance and the Support TLC Service Package, or Support TLC, pursuant to which we provide customers with technical training, remote support and a 10% discount on all spare parts. For both the Partnership TLC Service Package and the Support TLC Service Package, we provide on-site repair and parts installation services on a billable basis, as required.
 
Online resources.   Our customers can also take advantage of the following on-line resources to obtain support at anytime:
 
  •      TomoGateway.   TomoGateway links our customer call centers directly to a customer’s Hi Art system over a secure connection. Using this direct connection, our support staff can perform online diagnostics, examine system log files and look at real-time data to assist customers in


64


Table of Contents

  identifying and addressing problems with their units. Such real-time data allows us to provide our customers with continual support and enables our customers to maintain high levels of system operability. Access to TomoGateway is included at no additional charge during the standard one-year warranty period and with Total TLC and Partnership TLC.
 
  •      TomoExchange.   TomoExchange is a secure, web-based tool that is designed to provide a communication portal between TomoTherapy and our customers and to facilitate communication and collaboration among all end users of Hi Art. The platform features e-mail integration and a product feedback tool as well as an on-line forum that allows customers to share information about the Hi Art system, learn about relevant upcoming events and review important announcements. TomoExchange is available to all customers operating the Hi Art system.
 
Competition
 
The Hi Art system enables users to deliver IMRT, IGRT or stereotactic treatments. All of our customers use the Hi Art system for IMRT or IGRT treatments and, based on a recent survey that we conducted of existing customers, approximately 68% of our customers also use the Hi Art system for stereotactic treatments. Stereotactic treatments use an external beam radiation device to treat in one to five sessions, compared to 25 to 35 sessions for radiation therapy. Typically stereotactic treatments target tumors that are smaller than those treated with radiation therapy and are located in a few specific, sensitive regions of the body, such as the head and neck, spinal cord, lung and prostate.
 
We consider our primary competition to be radiation therapy systems manufactured or distributed by Varian Medical Systems, Inc., Siemens Medical Solutions, Inc., a division of Siemens AG and Elekta AB. We consider as secondary competition devices that are dedicated to delivering stereotactic treatments, such as those manufactured or distributed by Accuray Incorporated, BrainLAB AG, and other companies. To the extent that customers seek a device that performs stereotactic treatments, we may compete with these companies. We have placed more emphasis on marketing the Hi Art system as a radiation therapy device than as a stereotactic device. While the Hi Art system is capable of performing stereotactic treatments, we have placed less emphasis on these capabilities in marketing the Hi Art system. If the Hi Art system nonetheless becomes more broadly accepted as a stereotactic device, competition between the Hi Art system and the stereotactic device vendors will increase. Many of our competitors have greater financial, marketing and management resources and service infrastructure than we do, as well as more established reputations and significant market share.
 
Our customers’ equipment purchase considerations typically include reliability, service capabilities, patient throughput, treatment quality, price and payment terms. We believe that we compete favorably with our competitors based upon the technology offered by the Hi Art system. We strive to provide a technologically superior product that covers substantially all aspects of radiation therapy to deliver more precise, high-quality clinical outcomes that meet or exceed customer expectations.
 
In addition to competition from technologies performing similar functions as the Hi Art system, competition also exists for the limited capital expenditure budgets of our customers. For example, the Hi Art system may compete with other equipment required by a radiation therapy department for financing under the same capital expenditure budget, which is typically limited. A purchaser, such as a hospital or cancer treatment center, may be required to select between the two items of capital equipment. Our ability to compete may also be adversely affected when purchase decisions are based solely upon price, since our product is a premium-priced system due to its higher level of functionality. This outcome may occur if hospitals and clinics give purchasing decision authority to group purchasing organizations that focus primarily on pricing when making purchase decisions.
 
Research and Development
 
The radiation therapy equipment market has been significantly impacted by the introduction of new technologies. We continuously conduct research and development to enhance the reliability and performance of the Hi Art system and to develop innovative technologies so that we can maintain and improve upon our market position.


65


Table of Contents

 
We maintain research and product development staffs responsible for basic research, software enhancements, system integration and development, product design and engineering. Research and product development expenditures totaled $21.4 million in 2006, $11.4 million in 2005 and $6.5 million in 2004. As of December 31, 2006, we had a total of 139 employees in our research and product development groups. We believe the quality and expertise of our research and development team of medical physicists, computer scientists and engineers, together with our external research collaborations, distinguishes us from our competitors.
 
A key component of our research and development program is our collaboration with research programs at selected hospitals, cancer treatment centers, academic institutions and research institutions worldwide. Our agreements with these third-party collaborators generally require us to make milestone-based payments during the course of a particular project and often also require that we make up-front payments to fund initial activities. Generally, we own or have a right to license any inventions resulting from the collaboration. Our third-party collaborators are generally granted a royalty-free license for the purpose of continuing their research and development and, from time to time, we also grant broader licenses. Our research collaboration programs include work on clinical protocols and hardware and software developments. Current research initiatives include increasing patient throughput using a simplified radiation delivery process, automating the adaptive radiation therapy process, providing real time accommodation of moving targets with superior treatment margins, improving on equipment diagnosis and maintenance tools, such as remote machine quality assurance and other applications, and developing a more affordable and accessible proton therapy system than currently available. Proton therapy is based upon the theory of depositing radiation within tumors at specific depths while minimizing radiation to adjacent healthy tissues. The successful development, if at all, of products for some of these projects, including for proton therapy, is expected to take a number of years. We also work with suppliers to develop new components in order to increase the reliability and performance of the Hi Art system and seek opportunities to acquire or invest in the research of other parties where it is likely to benefit the Hi Art system or future products.
 
Manufacturing and Supplies
 
We manufacture each Hi Art system in a newly-constructed 64,000 square foot facility in Madison, Wisconsin. The facility employs state-of-the-art manufacturing techniques and equipment. Our company-wide quality system is certified and compliant to the internationally-recognized quality system standard, International Standards Organization, or ISO, 13485:2003. We believe that this manufacturing facility will be adequate for our expected growth and foreseeable future demands for the next three to five years.
 
The manufacturing processes at our facility include subassembly, assembly, system integration and final testing. Our manufacturing personnel consist of highly trained assemblers and technicians supported by production engineers as well as planning and supply chain managers. Our quality assurance program includes various quality control measures from inspection of raw material, purchased parts and assemblies through on-line inspection. We are currently in the process of incorporating lean manufacturing techniques to improve manufacturing flow and efficiency. Lean manufacturing techniques include reducing wasteful and extraneous activities, balancing assembly and test flow as well as better utilizing production assets and resources.
 
Unlike most of our competitors, we assemble, test and fully commission each Hi Art system in our manufacturing facility before shipment to the customer. Our product is partially disassembled for shipment to allow the system to fit through most doors, which facilitates installation. This method allows the system to be installed at the customer site with radiation “beam-on” within four days. It further enhances our ability to make the Hi Art system treatment ready for patient treatment approximately 45 days after installation, commission and training.
 
We purchase material, subassemblies and components from third-party suppliers that are either standard products or customized to our specifications and integrate them into the finished system. Supplier quality and delivery performance are closely monitored to meet all product specifications and suppliers are also expected to contribute to our continuous improvement efforts.


66


Table of Contents

 
Some of the components used in the Hi Art system are obtained from single- or limited-source suppliers. These components include the gantry, linear accelerator, couch, magnetron and solid state modulator. We purchase these components from major industry suppliers, but we do not have long-term supply contracts with the supplier of our magnetron and solid state modulator. An affiliate of one of our competitors, Siemens Medical Solutions, Inc., is our supplier for the linear accelerator used in the Hi Art system. The management of these supply relationships is conducted with scheduled business reviews and periodic program updates. However, since our products have been designed to incorporate these specific components, any change in our ability to obtain such components on a timely basis would require significant engineering changes in our product should we need to incorporate substitute components. As a result, we submit long-term orders and forecasts to our single-source suppliers so that our demand can be satisfied and any capacity problem can be mitigated. Although inventory levels fluctuate from time to time, our goal is to carry approximately three months of inventory of key components.
 
Reimbursement
 
United States Reimbursement Regulation
 
In the United States, healthcare providers that purchase medical devices generally rely on third-party payors, such as Medicare, Medicaid, private health insurance plans and health maintenance organizations, to reimburse all or a portion of the cost of the devices, as well as any related healthcare services. Our ability to market and sell the Hi Art system successfully depends in part upon the extent to which appropriate coverage and reimbursement for procedures and treatment planning using the Hi Art system are obtained from third-party payors. We cannot guarantee that a particular third-party payor will provide coverage or reimbursement for procedures and treatment planning using the Hi Art system or the adequacy of such coverage or reimbursement.
 
Medicare reimbursement for operating costs for radiation therapy performed on hospital inpatients generally is set under the Medicare prospective payment system, or PPS, diagnosis-related group, or DRG, regulations. Under PPS, Medicare pays hospitals a fixed amount for services provided to an inpatient based on his or her DRG, rather than reimbursing for the actual costs incurred by the hospital. Patients are assigned to a DRG based on their principal and secondary diagnoses, procedures performed during the hospital stay, age, gender and discharge status. Medicare also reimburses pursuant to PPS for capital costs which incorporates an add-on to the DRG-based payment to cover capital costs.
 
Hospital outpatient services are also covered by PPS. Under the outpatient PPS system, Medicare reimburses outpatient services according to rates calculated by Medicare for groups of covered services known as “ambulatory payment classification,” or APC, groups. Approximately 15 APC groups involve radiation oncology services. The reimbursement for each APC group is derived from a complicated calculation that incorporates historical cost information, including capital acquisition costs.
 
Medicare reimburses all physicians based on two separate practice expense values for each physician service, one when a service is furnished in a facility setting and another when the service is performed in a physician’s office. Typically, for a service that could be provided in either setting, the practice expense value would be higher when the service is performed in a physician’s office, because it would cover a physician’s costs such as equipment, supplies and overhead. If the physician provides the service in a hospital, the reimbursement paid to the physician for professional services is lower, because the expense for overhead associated with the services is borne by the hospital and is included in the hospital’s reimbursement by Medicare.
 
The U.S. Congress from time to time considers various Medicare and other healthcare reform proposals that could affect both private and public reimbursement for healthcare services in hospitals and freestanding clinics. In addition, the U.S. federal government reviews and adjusts reimbursement rates for medical procedures, including radiation treatment, on an annual basis. Private insurers often establish payment levels and policies based on reimbursement rates and guidelines established by the government. As a result, changes in reimbursement levels or coverage determinations may result in changes in coverage or reimbursement by private insurers.


67


Table of Contents

 
Reimbursement for services rendered to Medicaid beneficiaries is determined pursuant to each state’s Medicaid plan, which is established by state law and regulations, subject to requirements of federal law and regulations. The Balanced Budget Act of 1997 revised the Medicaid program to allow each state more control over coverage and payment issues. In addition, the Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services, or CMS, has granted many states waivers to allow for greater control of the Medicaid program at the state level. The impact on our business of this greater state control on Medicaid payment for diagnostic services remains uncertain.
 
CMS has published a modest increase in Medicare and Medicaid reimbursement rates for radiation therapy procedures, such as daily treatments, planning, positioning of patients and quality assurance, in U.S. hospitals, effective as of January 1, 2007. Radiation therapy procedures using the Hi Art system qualify for reimbursement under these increased rates. Under current CMS rates, hospitals receive reimbursement of $336 and $849 for IMRT treatment and IMRT planning, respectively. Free-standing clinics receive reimbursement of $708 and $1,909 for IMRT treatment and IMRT planning, respectively.
 
Included in the new CMS rates is a new code to reimburse IGRT using radiographic, fluoroscopic or computed tomography CT x-ray images for the purpose of properly positioning patients to ensure accurate delivery of radiation doses. The new code, 77014, includes a physician’s fee of approximately $43 per day in addition to technical fees for hospitals or clinics. The daily technical reimbursement adjusted by the geographical wage index for these imaging procedures is $95 at hospitals. The global fee for free-standing clinics is approximately $142, including both the technical and professional components. We believe, based on information provided by our end customers, that, at these reimbursement levels, a positive return on investment in the Hi Art system can occur within 18 to 24 months of initiating patient treatment. We do not expect these new rates to have a material impact on a clinician’s decision whether or not to purchase the Hi Art system for IGRT.
 
Foreign Reimbursement Regulations
 
Internationally, reimbursement and healthcare payment systems vary from country to country and include single-payor, government managed systems as well as systems in which private payors and government-managed systems exist side-by-side. In general, the process of obtaining coverage approvals has been slower outside of the United States. Our ability to achieve adoption of the Hi Art system as well as significant sales volume in international markets we enter will depend in part on the availability of reimbursement for procedures performed using our product.
 
Government Regulation
 
United States Medical Device Regulation
 
As a manufacturer and seller of medical devices and devices that generate ionizing x-ray radiation, we and some of our suppliers and distributors are subject to extensive regulation by federal and state governmental authorities. In the United States, our products are primarily regulated by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration, or FDA. Regulations promulgated by the FDA relating to medical device and radiation producing devices govern:
 
  •      design, development, testing and clinical investigations involving humans;
 
  •      manufacturing;
 
  •      packaging, labeling, marketing and sales;
 
  •      distribution, including importing and exporting;
 
  •      possession and disposal; and
 
  •      recalls and replacements.
 
These FDA regulations require that manufacturers adhere to certain standards to ensure that the medical devices are safe and effective.
 
FDA Quality System Regulation
 
Our manufacturing operations for medical devices must comply with the FDA’s Quality System Regulation, or QSR. The QSR requires that each manufacturer establish and implement a quality system by


68


Table of Contents

which the manufacturer monitors the manufacturing process and maintains records that show compliance with FDA regulations and the manufacturer’s written specifications and procedures relating to the devices. Compliance with the QSR is necessary to receive FDA clearance or approval to market new products and is necessary for a manufacturer to be able to continue to market cleared or approved product offerings. Among other things, these regulations require that manufacturers establish performance requirements before production. The FDA makes announced and unannounced inspections of medical device manufacturers and may issue reports, known as Form FDA 483 reports, listing instances where the manufacturer has failed to comply with applicable regulations and/or procedures, or warning letters. If the manufacturer does not adequately respond to such reports or letters, the FDA may take enforcement action against the manufacturer, including the imposition of fines, total shutdown of production facilities and criminal prosecution. Inspections usually occur every two years. We have not received any Form FDA 483 reports to date.
 
FDA Clearance and Regulation of Future Products
 
The FDA requires that the manufacturer of a new medical device or a new indication for use of, or other significant change in, an existing medical device obtain either clearance via a 510(k) pre-market notification or approval via a premarket approval application, or PMA, before the manufacturer may take orders and distribute the product in the United States.
 
510(k) clearance process.   The 510(k) clearance process is applicable when the new product being developed is substantially equivalent to an existing commercially available product. The process of obtaining 510(k) clearance can take from three to twelve months from the date the application is filed and generally requires submitting supporting design and test data, which can be extensive and can prolong the process for a considerable period of time beyond three months. After a product receives 510(k) clearance, any modification that could significantly affect its safety or effectiveness, or that would constitute a major change in the intended use of the device, technology, materials, packaging or manufacturing process may require a new 510(k) clearance. The FDA requires each manufacturer to make this determination in the first instance, but the FDA can review any such decision. If the FDA disagrees with the manufacturer’s decision, it may retroactively require the manufacturer to submit a request for 510(k) pre-market notification clearance and can require the manufacturer to cease marketing and/or recall the product until 510(k) clearance is obtained.
 
De novo classification.   If the FDA denies 510(k) clearance of a product because it is novel and an adequate predicate product does not exist, the “de novo classification” procedure can be invoked based upon reasonable assurance that the product is safe and effective for its intended use. This procedure approximates the level of scrutiny in the 510(k) process but may add several months to the clearance process. If the FDA grants the request, the product is permitted to enter commercial distribution in the same manner as if 510(k) clearance had been granted.
 
Premarket application approval process.   If the FDA denies 510(k) clearance for a product and denies de novo classification, the product must follow the premarket application approval, or PMA, process. Under the PMA process, the applicant must generally conduct at least one clinical protocol and submit extensive supporting data and clinical information in the PMA to prove the safety and effectiveness of the product. This process typically takes at least one to two years from the date the pre-market approval is accepted for filing, but can take longer for the FDA to review.
 
To date, all of our products have been classified as Class II medical devices. Class II medical devices are those for which general controls alone are insufficient to assure safety and effectiveness, and existing methods are required to provide such assurances. These methods include, but may not be limited to, additional product labeling, compliance with industry and product safety standards and additional scrutiny in 510(k) reviews. Class II medical devices require only 510(k) clearance. We received our initial 510(k) clearance for the Hi Art system in 2002.
 
Advertising regulation.   The FDA and the Federal Trade Commission, or FTC, also regulate the promotion and advertising of our products. In general, we may not promote or advertise our products for uses not within the scope of our clearances or approvals or make unsupported safety and effectiveness claims.
 
Radiological health.   We are also regulated under the Electronic Product Radiation Control Provisions of the Federal Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act because the Hi Art system contains X-ray components and is used


69


Table of Contents

in conjunction with a laser positioning system, and because we assemble these components during manufacturing and service activities. The Electronic Product Radiation Control Provisions require laser and X-ray products to comply with certain regulations and applicable performance standards. Manufacturers are required to certify in product labeling and reports to the FDA that their products comply with all necessary standards as well as maintain manufacturing, testing and sales records for their products. The Electronic Product Radiation Control Provisions also require manufacturers to report product defects and affix appropriate labeling to covered products. Failure to comply with these requirements could result in enforcement action by the FDA, which can include injunctions, civil penalties, and the issuance of warning letters. We have developed and implemented procedures to ensure compliance with the Electronic Product Radiation Control Provisions.
 
United States Privacy and Security Laws
 
The Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act of 1996 sets national standards for some types of electronic health information transactions and the data elements used in those transactions and standards to ensure the integrity and confidentiality of patient health information. These privacy rules protect medical records and other personal health information by limiting their use and disclosure, giving individuals the right to access, amend and seek accounting of their protected health information and limiting most use and disclosure of health information to the minimum amount reasonably necessary to accomplish the intended purpose. State privacy laws have their own penalty provisions, which could apply in a given case.
 
United States Fraud and Abuse Laws and Regulations
 
The healthcare industry is also subject to a number of “fraud and abuse” laws and regulations, including physician self-referral prohibitions, anti-kickback laws, and false claims laws. Violations of these laws can lead to civil and criminal penalties, including exclusion from participation in federal healthcare programs. These laws constrain the sales, marketing and other promotional activities of manufacturers of medical products, such as us, by limiting the kinds of financial arrangements we may have with hospitals, physicians and other potential purchasers of medical products who may seek reimbursement from a federal or state health care program such as Medicare or Medicaid.
 
Physician self-referral laws.   The federal Ethics in Patient Referral Law, also known as the Stark Law, prohibits a physician from referring Medicare or Medicaid patients to an entity with which the physician (or a family member) has a financial relationship. The Stark Law specifically prohibits physicians from making such referrals for “designated health services,” including radiology and radiation therapy services.
 
Anti-kickback laws.   The federal Anti-Kickback Statute makes it a criminal offense to knowingly and willingly solicit, offer, receive or pay any remuneration in exchange for, or to induce, the referral of items, services or business, including the purchase of medical devices from a particular manufacturer or the referral of patients to a particular supplier of diagnostic services utilizing such devices that are reimbursable by a state or federal health care program, such as Medicare or Medicaid. There are established regulatory “safe harbors” that define certain financial transactions and practices that are not subject to the Anti-Kickback Statute.
 
Federal False Claims Act.   The federal False Claims Act prohibits anyone from knowingly and willfully presenting, or causing to be presented, claims for payment, that are false or fraudulent, for services not provided as claimed or for medically unnecessary services.
 
The Office of the Inspector General of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services prosecutes violations of the above mentioned fraud and abuse laws. Any violation of such laws may result in criminal and/or civil sanctions including, imprisonment and exclusion from participation in federal healthcare programs such as Medicare and Medicaid. In addition, these fraud and abuse laws, which exist in a number of states and apply regardless of whether Medicare or Medicaid patients are involved, may result in lower utilization of certain diagnostic or therapeutic procedures, which may affect the demand for our products.
 
The laws and regulations and their enforcement are constantly undergoing change, and we cannot predict what effect, if any, changes may have on our business. In addition, new laws and regulations may be adopted which adversely affect our business. There has been a trend in recent years, both in the United States and internationally, toward more stringent regulation and enforcement of requirements applicable to medical device manufacturers and requirements regarding protection and confidentiality of personal data.


70


Table of Contents

 
State Certificate of Need Laws
 
In some states, a certificate of need or similar regulatory approval is required prior to the acquisition of high-cost capital items or the provision of new services. These laws generally require appropriate state agency determination of public need and approval prior to the acquisition of such capital items or addition of new services. Certificate of need regulations may preclude our customers from acquiring the Hi Art system and from performing procedures using the Hi Art system. Certificate of need laws are the subject of ongoing legislative activity, and a significant increase in the number of states regulating the acquisition and use of the Hi Art system through certificate of need or similar programs could adversely affect us.
 
Foreign Regulation of Medical Devices
 
Our operations outside the United States are subject to regulatory requirements that vary from country to country and frequently differ significantly from those in the United States. Failure to obtain and maintain regulatory approval or clearance in any foreign country in which we market or plan to market the Hi Art system may have a negative effect on our ability to generate revenue and harm our business. In all of the countries in which we are currently selling the Hi Art system we have either received regulatory approval, directly or through our agents, or been informed that approval is not required.
 
In general, our products are regulated outside the United States as medical devices by foreign governmental agencies similar to the FDA and the FTC. In addition, in foreign countries where we have operations or sell products, we are subject to laws and regulations applicable to manufacturers of medical devices, radiation producing devices and to the healthcare industry, and laws and regulation of general applicability relating to environmental protection, safe working conditions, manufacturing practices and other matters. These laws and regulations are often comparable to or more stringent than U.S. laws and regulations. Our sales of products in foreign countries are also subject to regulation of matters such as product standards, packaging requirements, labeling requirements, import restrictions, tariff regulations, duties and tax requirements. We rely in some countries on our foreign distributors to assist us in complying with applicable regulatory requirements.
 
Regulation in Europe
 
In the European Union, or EU, we are required under the European Medical Device Directive to affix the Conformité Européene, or CE, mark to our products in order to sell the products in member countries of the EU. The CE mark is an international symbol that represents adherence to certain essential principles of safety and effectiveness mandated in the European Medical Device Directive. Once affixed, the CE mark enables a product to be sold in member countries of the EU.
 
The method of assessing conformity with the European Medical Device Directive depends on the type and class of the product, but normally involves both a self-assessment by the manufacturer and a third-party assessment by an institution appointed by a European Union member state to conduct the conformity assessment. We received authorization to affix the CE mark to the Hi Art system in February 2005, allowing us to sell it throughout the EU.
 
If we modify the Hi Art system, we may need to apply for permission to affix the CE mark to the modified product. Additionally, we will need to apply for a CE mark for any new products that we may develop in the future. We cannot be certain that we will be able to obtain permission to affix the CE mark for modified or new products or that we will continue to meet the quality and safety standards required to maintain the permissions that we receive. In addition, if we are unable to obtain permission to affix the CE mark to our future products, we would be unable to sell them in EU member countries.
 
Regulation in Other Countries
 
We are subject to regulation in Japan, where we sell our product through Hi Art Co., Ltd., our Japanese distributor. We received government approval to market the Hi Art system from the Ministry of Health and Welfare in December 2004.
 
We are subject to additional regulations in other foreign countries in which we market and sell the Hi Art system. These countries include Canada, China, Singapore, Japan, India, Taiwan and South Korea. We


71


Table of Contents

or our distributors will receive all necessary approvals or clearance prior to marketing our products in those international markets.
 
The International Standards Organization promulgates internationally recognized standards, including those for the requirements of quality systems. We are certified to the ISO 13485:2003 standard, which specifies the quality system requirements for medical device manufacturers.
 
Intellectual Property
 
The proprietary nature of, and protection for, our product implementations, processes and know-how are important to our business. We rely on patents, trademarks, copyrights, trade secrets, other intellectual property and continuing innovation to develop and maintain our competitive position.
 
We seek patent protection in the United States and in foreign jurisdictions for our product implementations, components and other technology where available and when appropriate. We hold or license 21 U.S. patents, 29 pending U.S. patent applications, 61 foreign patents and 77 foreign patent applications, including 16 U.S. patents, 61 foreign patents and 19 foreign patent applications licensed from the Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation, or WARF. In addition, we have the right to license patents and other intellectual property pursuant to our third-party research collaborations.
 
Assuming that all maintenance fees and annuities continue to be paid, our patents will expire on various dates between 2012 and 2021. We cannot provide any assurance that any patents will be issued from any of our pending patent applications, nor can we provide any assurance that any of our existing patents or any patents that may be granted to us in the future will be commercially useful in protecting our technology. We intend to aggressively defend the patents we hold, and we intend to vigorously contest claims other patent holders may bring against us.
 
In addition to our patents and pending patent applications, we use trade secrets and proprietary know-how in our products. Any of our know-how or trade secrets not protected by a patent could be disclosed to, or independently developed by, a competitor.
 
We have periodically monitored and continue to monitor the activities of our competitors and other third parties with respect to their use of intellectual property. In addition, we require our employees, consultants and outside scientific collaborators to execute confidentiality, invention assignment and, where appropriate, non-competition agreements upon commencing employment or consulting relationships with us.
 
Employees
 
As of December 31, 2006, we had approximately 492 full-time and part-time employees worldwide, 458 of which are in the United States and 34 elsewhere. None of our employees based in the United States are unionized or subject to collective bargaining agreements. We believe that our current relationship with our employees is good.
 
Properties and Facilities
 
Our principal executive offices are located in Madison, Wisconsin, where we lease three buildings:
 
  •      an office building totaling approximately 61,000 square feet under a lease expiring 2014;
 
  •      a manufacturing facility totaling approximately 64,000 square feet under a lease expiring 2018; and
 
  •      a portion of an office building totaling approximately 17,000 square feet under a lease expiring 2008.
 
In addition, we lease office space totaling approximately 5,000 square feet in Brussels, Belgium under a lease expiring in 2014. We believe that our existing facilities are adequate for our current needs and that suitable additional or alternative space will be available on commercially reasonable terms to meet our future needs.
 
Legal Proceedings
 
We are subject to various claims and legal proceedings arising in the ordinary course of our business. We believe that the ultimate resolution of these matters, whether individually or in the aggregate, will not have a material adverse effect on our business, prospects, financial condition and results of operations.


72


Table of Contents

 
MANAGEMENT
 
The following table sets forth the names, ages and positions held by our executive officers and directors as of the date of this prospectus.
 
             
Name
 
Age
 
Position
 
Frederick A. Robertson
  51   Chief Executive Officer and Director
Paul J. Reckwerdt
  55   President, Co-Founder and Director
Stephen C. Hathaway
  51   Chief Financial Officer and Treasurer
Steven G. Books
  57   Chief Operating Officer
John H. Hughes
  57   Vice President of Business Development
Gustavo H. Olivera
  41   Vice President of Research
Mary Elizabeth Klein
  50   Vice President of Global Sales
Delwin T. Coufal
  45   Vice President of Marketing
Kenneth D. Buroker
  57   Vice President of Regulatory Affairs and Quality
Shawn D. Guse
  37   Vice President, Secretary and General Counsel
T. Rockwell Mackie(1)
  52   Chairman of the Board of Directors and Co-Founder
Michael J. Cudahy
  82   Director
John J. McDonough(2)
  70   Director
John P. Neis(1)(2)(3)
  51   Director
Cary J. Nolan(1)(3)
  64   Director
Carlos A. Perez(1)
  72   Director
Sam R. Leno(2)
  61   Director
Frances S. Taylor(3)
  61   Director
 
(1) Member of the nominating and corporate governance committee.
 
(2) Member of our audit committee.
 
(3) Member of our compensation committee.
 
Frederick A. Robertson , M.D. has served as our Chief Executive Officer and a director since January 2005. Prior to joining TomoTherapy, from 2000 through 2004, Dr. Robertson served as an Assistant Professor of Anesthesiology at the Medical College of Wisconsin. From 1998 to 2000, Dr. Robertson served as President and Chief Executive Officer of GE Marquette Medical Systems, and later as Chief Clinical Officer of GE Medical Systems. Dr. Robertson previously held management positions with Marquette Medical Systems, including President and Chief Executive Officer, President-Patient Monitoring Division and Medical Director. Dr. Robertson also serves as a director of Access Genetics, LLC, a molecular diagnostics and interpretation company, and InnerWireless, Inc., a wireless infrastructure and radio frequency location system business. Dr. Robertson has an M.B.A. from San Diego State University and an M.D. from the University of Wisconsin Medical School.
 
Paul J. Reckwerdt co-founded our company in 1997 and has served as a director since December 1997. Mr. Reckwerdt has served as our President since 1999, and served as our Treasurer from 2000 until 2003, as our Secretary from 1997 until 2003 and as our Vice-President from 1997 until 1999. Mr. Reckwerdt was a researcher at the University of Wisconsin from 1986 to 1999. From 1988 to 1999, Mr. Reckwerdt conducted research focusing on advanced cancer therapy. From 1986 to 1988, Mr. Reckwerdt worked on the X-ray microbeam project and the Speech Motor Control lab, which are international research facilities designing tools for research in ALS, Parkinson’s disease, dementia and Alzheimer’s disease. In 1992, Mr. Reckwerdt co-founded Geometrics Corporation, a radiation treatment planning company. Mr. Reckwerdt serves on the board of the WAVE Entrepreneur program at the University of Wisconsin. Mr. Reckwerdt has a B.S. in mathematics from Northern Illinois University.


73


Table of Contents

 
Stephen C. Hathaway has served as our Chief Financial Officer and Treasurer since joining us in 2003. Prior to joining us, Mr. Hathaway served from 1996 to 2003 as Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of SurModics, Inc., a coatings supplier to the medical device industry. From 1995 to 1996, Mr. Hathaway served as Director of Finance with Ceridian Employer Services, a payroll processing company. From 1988 to 1995, Mr. Hathaway served as Vice President Finance and Operations with Wilson Learning Corporation, and from 1977 to 1988, Mr. Hathaway was employed by Arthur Andersen LLP, finishing as an Audit Manager. Mr. Hathaway has a B.S. in Accounting from Miami University.
 
Steven G. Books joined us as Vice President of Operations in April 2005 and has served as our Chief Operating Officer since July 2006. From 2004 to 2005, Mr. Books was President of Hawk Visions LLC, a leadership consulting organization. From 2001 to 2004, he was President and Executive Director of Pier Wisconsin Ltd., a not-for-profit educational association. From 1998 to 2000, Mr. Books served as Vice-President, Worldwide Manufacturing, Supply Chain and Logistics at GE Medical, from 1997 to 1998 as Senior Vice-President, Worldwide Manufacturing and Monitoring Engineering, Marquette Medical Systems, and from 1994 to 1997 as Vice-President and General Manager, Cardiology Division at Marquette Medical Systems. Mr. Books has a B.A. in Philosophy and History from the University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee.
 
John H. Hughes has served as Vice President of Business Development since January 2007. Mr. Hughes previously served as our Vice President of International Commercial Operations from July 2006 to January 2007, as Vice President of Global Sales from March 2005 to July 2006, as Director of Sales and Marketing from September 2003 to March 2005 and as Director of Product Programs from September 2002 to September 2003. Prior to joining us, Mr. Hughes worked at Siemens Medical Systems, Oncology Division, in various marketing positions from 1995 to 2002. Mr. Hughes has an Associate Degree in Electrical Electronics from the British Columbia Institute of Technology, Canada.
 
Gustavo H. Olivera has served as our Vice President of Research since 2005. Dr. Olivera joined TomoTherapy’s research group in 1999. Currently an Adjunct Professor at the Department of Medical Physics of the University of Wisconsin-Madison, Dr. Olivera has worked as professor and researcher in institutions around the world, including the Physics Institute of Rosario (IFIR), Argentina; National Council of Science (CONICET), Argentina; Secondary Laboratory of Dosimetry, Atomic Energy Agency of Argentina (CNEA); Instituto Balseiro and Centro Atomico Bariloche, Atomic Energy Agency of Argentina (CNEA); Centre Interdisciplinaire de Recherches avec les Ions Lourds (CIRIL), French Atomic Energy Agency (CEA) and National Council of Science of France (CNRS); International Center for Theoretical Physics (ICTP), Trieste, Italy. Dr. Olivera earned his Licenciado in Physics and his Ph.D. in Atomic Physics from the National University of Rosario, Argentina.
 
Mary Elizabeth Klein has served as our Vice President of Global Sales since joining us in November 2006. Prior to joining us, Ms. Klein served from 2003 to 2006 as a Commercial Leader for GE Rail Services. From 2001 to 2003, Ms. Klein served as President and Chief Executive Officer of GE Medical Systems Americas, from 1998 to 2001 as Global General Manager with GE’s Functional and Molecular Imaging Business, and from 1997 to 1998 as General Manager of GE Computerized Tomography and Radiation Oncology for Europe, the Middle East and Africa. Prior to that, Ms. Klein served from 1997 to 1992 as National Ultrasound Sales Manager/General Manager of GE’s Americas Ultrasound Sales/Marketing, and from 1979 to 1992 as CT Product Sales Manager for GE Medical Systems. Ms. Klein has a B.S. in Biology from the University of Notre Dame, a foreign language studies degree from Franz Leopold Universität in Austria and an M.B.A. from Northeastern University.
 
Delwin T. Coufal has served as our Vice President of Marketing since joining us in April 2005. Prior to joining us, Mr. Coufal served from 2003 to 2005 as Vice President of Marketing of VIASYS Healthcare, a medical technology company. From 2001 to 2003, Mr. Coufal served as Chief Executive Officer of Appleton Cardiology Associates, S.C., a cardiology healthcare services provider, from 1996 to 2001 as General Manager with GE Healthcare/Marquette Medical, and from 1990 to 1996 as Marketing Product Manager with Ohmeda, Inc. (now a part of GE Medical Systems), a manufacturer of anesthesia systems and monitors. Mr. Coufal has a B.S. in Biomedical Engineering from Duke University and an M.B.A. from the University of Michigan.


74


Table of Contents

 
Kenneth D. Buroker has served as our Vice President of Regulatory Affairs and Quality since 2005 and previously served as our Director of Regulatory Affairs and Quality from 2000 to 2005. Prior to joining us, Mr. Buroker served from 1996 to 2000 as Director of Regulatory Affairs of Lunar Corporation (now a part of GE Medical Systems), a manufacturer of bone densitometry equipment. Prior to that, from 1989 to 1996, Mr. Buroker served in Regulatory and Standards management positions with Ohmeda, Inc. (now a part of GE Medical Systems), a manufacturer of anesthesia systems and monitors. Mr. Buroker has a B.S. in Electrical Engineering from the University of Wisconsin.
 
Shawn D. Guse , J.D. has served as Vice President and General Counsel since July 2005. Prior to joining us, Mr. Guse was a partner with Michael Best & Friedrich LLP, where he practiced from October 2004 to 2005. Prior to Michael Best & Friedrich, Mr. Guse was an attorney at Quarles & Brady, LLP from October 2001 to September 2004. His background includes substantial experience in structuring and executing corporate sales and acquisitions, debt and equity financing, technology licensing and transfer, employment matters, and international distribution and sales. Mr. Guse is a member of the State Bar of Wisconsin. Mr. Guse has a B.A. in Economics from the University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee and a J.D. from the University of Wisconsin Law School.
 
Thomas Rockwell Mackie, Ph.D. co-founded our company in 1997 and has served as Chairman of our Board of Directors since December 1999. Dr. Mackie also served as President of TomoTherapy from 1997 until 1999 and as Treasurer from 1997 until 2000. Since 1987, Dr. Mackie has been a professor in the departments of Medical Physics and Human Oncology at the University of Wisconsin, where he established the TomoTherapy research program. Dr. Mackie also co-founded Geometrics Corporation (now merged with ADAC Corp.), which developed a radiotherapy treatment planning system. Dr. Mackie currently serves as President of the Medical Physics Foundation, and as a member on the boards of Cellectar Inc., a drug development company, Bioionix Inc., a water treatment company, and the University of Wisconsin-Madison Calibration Laboratory. Dr. Mackie has a B.Sc. in Physics from the University of Saskatchewan and a Ph.D. in Physics from the University of Alberta, Canada.
 
Michael J. Cudahy has served as a director since October 2002 and was appointed by our shareholder, Endeavors Group, LLC. Mr. Cudahy is the retired Chair, Founder and Chief Executive Officer of Marquette Medical Systems, a medical electronics equipment manufacturer. Mr. Cudahy is also a director of X-Ray Optical Systems, Inc., a global provider of advanced X-ray optics for material analysis systems, Nextec Applications, Inc., an advanced materials manufacturer that is leading the field of high-performance fabric technology, Access Genetics, LLC, a molecular diagnostics and interpretation company, Granite Microsystems, a provider of complete, turnkey applied computing solutions, and Cyclics Corporation, a company which expands the use of thermoplastics to make plastics parts that cannot be made using thermoplastics today.
 
John J. McDonough has served as a director since August 2004. Mr. McDonough co-founded McDonough Medical Products Corporation, one of the largest independent suppliers of x-ray tubes, medical imaging components and dental x-ray systems in the United States, in 2001 and has served as its Chairman since that date. Prior to that, Mr. McDonough served as Vice Chairman of DENTSPLY International Inc., a manufacturer of artificial teeth and consumable dental products, in 1995. Mr. McDonough also served as Vice Chairman and Chief Executive officer of DENTSPLY from 1993 to 1995, and as Chairman and Chief Executive Officer of GENDEX Corporation, a manufacturer and distributor of dental x-ray equipment, from 1983 until 1993 when GENDEX merged with DENTSPLY. Mr. McDonough has a B.S. in Accounting from the University of Notre Dame and is a CPA.
 
John P. Neis has served as a director since June 1999 and was appointed by Venture Investors LLC, one of the holders of our Series A preferred stock. Mr. Neis is co-founder and Managing Director of Venture Investors LLC. He also serves as a director of Venture Investors of Wisconsin, Inc., NimbleGen Systems, Inc., a supplier of flexible high-density microarray products and services for the biotech research market, Deltanoid Pharmaceuticals, Inc., a developer of vitamin D based pharmaceuticals, and Wisconsin Technology Council, Inc., an independent non-profit formed by bipartisan legislation in Wisconsin to serve as a science and technology advisor to the governor and legislature of Wisconsin. Mr. Neis has a B.S. in Finance from the


75


Table of Contents

University of Utah, an M.S. in Marketing and Finance from the University of Wisconsin and is a chartered financial analyst.
 
Cary J. Nolan has served as a director since July 2001 and was appointed by the holders of a majority of our outstanding preferred shares. Mr. Nolan served as President and Chief Executive Officer of Picker International from 1989 to 1999. Prior to that, from 1987 to 1989 Mr. Nolan served as President and CEO of Cooper Surgical, a division of Cooper Companies, and from 1978 to 1987 as President of Xerox Medical, a division of Xerox Corp. Mr. Nolan also serves as a director of Premier Farnell plc and of Toshiba Medical Corporation. Mr. Nolan has a B.A. in Engineering and a B.S. in Electrical Engineering from the University of Notre Dame.
 
Carlos A. Perez, M.D. has served as a director since May 2005. Dr. Perez is a former President of the American Society of Therapeutic Radiation and has more than 40 years of experience in radiation oncology. Dr. Perez is Professor Emeritus in the Department of Radiation Oncology at Mallinckrodt Institute of Radiology, Siteman Cancer Center, Washington University Medical Center, having joined the staff in 1964. He received his training in Radiology and Radiation Oncology at Mallinckrodt Institute of Radiology, Washington University Medical School and was a Fellow in the Department of Radiation Therapy at M. D. Anderson Cancer Center in Houston, Texas. Dr. Perez received a B.S. and his M.D. from Universidad de Antioquia, Medellín, Colombia, S.A.
 
Sam R. Leno has served as a director since July 2006 and was appointed by Avalon Technology LLC, one of the holders of our Series B, Series C, Series D and Series E preferred stock. Mr. Leno has served as the Executive Vice President, Finance and Corporate Services and Chief Financial Officer for Zimmer Holdings, Inc. since 2001. From March 1999 to 2001, Mr. Leno was Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of Arrow Electronics, Inc., a global distributor of electronic components. Mr. Leno served from 1971 to 1994 in financial management roles at Baxter International and its predecessor, American Hospital Supply, ultimately serving as Vice President Finance and Information Technology Hospital Business. Mr. Leno holds a B.S. in Accounting from Northern Illinois University and an M.B.A. from Roosevelt University.
 
Frances S. Taylor has served as a director since July 2006 and was appointed by Open Prairie Ventures I, Limited Partnership, one of the holders of our Series A, Series B, Series C, and Series D preferred stock. Ms. Taylor has more than 28 years experience in corporate and investment banking both within the United States and internationally. From December 2005 to December 2006, Ms. Taylor served as the Interim General Manager of Builders World, Inc. a distributor of building materials. From 1977 to 1998, she was employed by Bank of America primarily in the areas of distribution of corporate debt within and outside the United States, ultimately serving as Executive Vice President and CEO of Bank of America Asia, Ltd. From 1970 to 1977, she was employed by Smith Barney in New York, ultimately serving as a Second Vice President in the corporate syndicate department, focusing on initial public offerings and secondary offerings of corporate securities. Ms. Taylor is retired and serves on the boards of the University of Wisconsin Foundation, Oak Financial, Oak Bank, Wisconsin Chamber Orchestra, and she is an Interim Director of Builders World, Inc. She holds a B.S. in Education from the University of Wisconsin.
 
Board of Directors
 
Our board of directors immediately following this offering will consist of ten members divided into three classes. The members of each class of directors hold office for a staggered three-year term. Upon expiration of the term of a class of directors, directors of that class will be elected for three-year terms at the annual meeting of shareholders in the year in which their term expires. Following the closing of this offering, the terms of office of the Class III directors, consisting of Paul J. Reckwerdt, Michael J. Cudahy and Carlos A Perez, will expire upon our 2008 annual meeting of shareholders. The terms of office of the Class II directors, consisting of T. Rockwell Mackie, John J. McDonough and Frances S. Taylor, will expire upon our 2009 annual meeting of shareholders. The terms of office of the Class I directors, consisting of Frederick A. Robertson, John P. Neis, Cary J. Nolan and Sam R. Leno, will expire upon our 2010 annual meeting of shareholders.


76


Table of Contents

 
Our amended and restated bylaws provide that any vacancies in our board of directors and newly-created directorships may be filled only by our remaining board of directors and the authorized number of directors may be changed only by our board of directors.
 
Ms. Taylor, Messrs. Cudahy, Leno, McDonough, Neis and Nolan and Dr. Perez are independent directors under the independence standards applicable to us under Nasdaq Global Market rules.
 
Each executive officer is appointed by, and serves at the discretion of, the board of directors. Other than Dr. Mackie, each of our executive officers devotes his or her full time to our affairs. Dr. Mackie continues to serve as a professor in the departments of Medical Physics and Human Oncology at the University of Wisconsin. All of our non-employee directors were initially appointed to our board of directors pursuant to an investment agreement. The investment agreements, including the provisions relating to the nomination and election of directors, will terminate upon the closing of this offering. There are no family relationships among any of our directors or officers.
 
Committees of the Board of Directors
 
Our board has three committees: the audit committee, the compensation committee and the nominating and corporate governance committee.
 
Audit Committee.   The members of our audit committee are John J. McDonough, John P. Neis, and Sam R. Leno. Mr. McDonough chairs the audit committee and is a financial expert (as defined under Securities and Exchange Commission rules implementing Section 407 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002). Our audit committee, among other duties:
 
  •      appoints and oversees a firm to serve as independent auditor to audit our consolidated financial statements;
 
  •      is responsible for reviewing the independence, qualifications, performance and quality control procedures of the independent auditor;
 
  •      discusses the scope and results of the audit with the independent auditor;
 
  •      reviews and considers the adequacy of our internal accounting controls, financial reporting processes, critical accounting policies and audit procedures;
 
  •      pre-approves all audit and non-audit services to be performed by the independent auditor;
 
  •      reviews our annual and quarterly financial statements with our management and independent auditor;
 
  •      reviews and resolves any disagreements between our management and our independent auditor in connection with the preparation of our financial statements;
 
  •      establishes procedures for the confidential, anonymous submission by our employees of concerns or complaints regarding questionable accounting or auditing matters;
 
  •      reviews and approves all related party transactions involving us and our directors and executive officers; and
 
  •      prepares the report that the Securities and Exchange Commission requires us to include in our annual proxy statement.
 
We believe that the composition of our audit committee meets the requirements for independence under the current Nasdaq Global Market and Securities and Exchange Commission rules and regulations, as Messrs. McDonough and Leno are independent directors for such purposes. Mr. Neis is not considered independent for the purpose of audit committee membership under the rules of the Nasdaq Global Market and the Securities and Exchange Commission. We intend to appoint a new independent director to our audit committee within twelve months of the closing of this offering, at which time Mr. Neis will cease to be a


77


Table of Contents

member of our audit committee. The written charter of our audit committee will be posted on our website on or before the completion of this offering.
 
Compensation Committee.   The members of our compensation committee are John P. Neis, Cary J. Nolan and Frances S. Taylor. Mr. Neis chairs the compensation committee. The purpose of our compensation committee is to discharge the responsibilities of our board of directors relating to compensation of our executive officers. Specific responsibilities of our compensation committee include:
 
  •      reviewing and recommending approval of compensation of our executive officers and compensation plans in which our executive officers and directors participate;
 
  •      reviewing and administering our stock incentive plans;
 
  •      reviewing and making recommendations to our board with respect to incentive compensation and equity plans;
 
  •      approving the compensation paid to our chief executive officer and directors; and
 
  •      preparing the report that the Securities and Exchange Commission requires us to include in our annual proxy statement.
 
We believe that the composition of our compensation committee meets the requirements for independence under the current Nasdaq Global Market and Securities and Exchange Commission rules, as Ms. Taylor and Messrs. Neis and Nolan are independent directors for such purposes. No interlocking relationship exists between our board of directors or compensation committee and the board of directors or compensation committee of any other company, nor has any interlocking relationship existed in the past. The written charter of our compensation committee will be posted on our website on or before the completion of this offering.
 
Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee.   The members of our nominating and corporate governance committee are Cary J. Nolan, John P. Neis, T. Rockwell Mackie and Carlos A. Perez. Mr. Nolan chairs the nominating and corporate governance committee. Our nominating and corporate governance committee identifies, evaluates and recommends nominees to our board of directors and committees of our board of directors, conducts searches for appropriate directors, and evaluates the performance of our board of directors and of individual directors. The nominating and corporate governance committee is also responsible for reviewing developments in corporate governance practices, evaluating the adequacy of our corporate governance practices and reporting, reviewing compliance with our code of ethics and making recommendations to the board concerning corporate governance matters. We believe that the composition of our nominating and corporate governance committee meets the requirements under the current Nasdaq Global Market rules, as Messrs. Neis and Nolan and Dr. Perez are independent for such purposes. The written charter of our nominating and corporate governance committee will be posted on our website on or before the completion of the offering.
 
Limitations of Directors’ Liability and Indemnification Agreements
 
Upon completion of this offering, our amended and restated bylaws will provide that we shall indemnify our directors and officers and may indemnify our employees to the fullest extent permitted by Wisconsin law.
 
Wisconsin law requires us to indemnify a director or officer, to the extent such person is successful on the merits or otherwise in the defense of a proceeding, for all reasonable expenses incurred in the proceeding, if such person was a party to such proceeding because he or she was our director or officer, unless it is determined that he or she breached or failed to perform a duty owed to us and such breach or failure to perform constitutes:
 
  •      a willful failure to deal fairly with us or our shareholders in connection with a matter in which the director or officer has a material conflict of interest;


78


Table of Contents

 
  •      a violation of criminal law, unless the director or officer had reasonable cause to believe his or her conduct was unlawful;
 
  •      a transaction from which the director or officer derived an improper personal profit; or
 
  •      a willful misconduct.
 
Wisconsin law provides that subject to certain limitations, these mandatory indemnification provisions do not preclude any additional right to indemnification or allowance of expenses that a director or officer may have under our articles of incorporation or bylaws, a written agreement between the director or officer and us or a resolution of our board of directors or shareholders.
 
Reasonable expenses incurred by a director or officer who is a party to a proceeding may be reimbursed by us pursuant to Wisconsin law, at such time as the director or officer furnishes to us a written good-faith affirmation that he or she has not breached or failed to perform his or her duties, and a written undertaking to repay any amounts advanced if it is determined that indemnification by us is not required.
 
Wisconsin law further provides that it is the public policy of the State of Wisconsin to require or permit indemnification, allowance of expenses and insurance to the extent required or permitted under Wisconsin law for any liability incurred in connection with a proceeding involving a federal or state statute, rule or regulation regulating the offer, sale or purchase of securities.
 
Under Wisconsin law, a director is not personally liable for breach of any duty resulting solely from his or her status as a director, unless it is proved that the director’s conduct constituted conduct described in the bullet points above. In addition, we intend to obtain directors’ and officers’ liability insurance that will insure against certain liabilities, subject to applicable restrictions.
 
The indemnification provisions contained in our amended and restated bylaws are not exclusive. In addition to the indemnification provided for in our amended and restated bylaws, we intend to enter into indemnification agreements with each of our directors and executive officers. Each indemnification agreement will provide that we indemnify the director or executive officer to the fullest extent permitted by law for claims arising in his or her capacity as our director, officer, employee or agent, provided that he or she acted in good faith and in a manner that he or she reasonably believed to be in, or not opposed to, our best interests and, with respect to any criminal proceeding, had no reasonable cause to believe that his or her conduct was unlawful. If the claim is brought by us or on our behalf, we will not be obligated to indemnify the director or executive officer if he or she is found liable to us, unless the court determines that, despite the adjudication of liability, in view of all the circumstances of the case the director or executive officer is fairly and reasonably entitled to be indemnified. In the event that we do not assume the defense of a claim against a director or executive officer, we will be required to advance his or her expenses in connection with his or her defense, provided that he or she undertakes to repay all amounts advanced if it is ultimately determined that he or she is not entitled to be indemnified by us.


79


Table of Contents

 
COMPENSATION DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS
 
Overview
 
This compensation discussion describes the material elements of the compensation awarded to, earned by, or paid to our officers who are considered to be “named executive officers” during our last fiscal year. Named executive officers consist of the individual who served as our Chief Executive Officer in 2006, the individual who served as our Chief Financial Officer in 2006, and the three other executive officers who received the highest amount of total compensation in 2006. For purposes of this section, “named executive officers” refers to Frederick A. Robertson, Chief Executive Officer, Stephen C. Hathaway, Chief Financial Officer, Paul J. Reckwerdt, President and Co-Founder, John H. Hughes, Vice President of Business Development, and Gustavo H. Olivera, Vice President of Research and Development.
 
Compensation Committee
 
We established a compensation committee in June 1999 as a privately-held company. In 2006, the compensation committee approved all compensation paid to the named executive officers. Our board of directors has determined that each compensation committee member is independent under the listing standards of the Nasdaq Global Market and the Securities and Exchange Commission rules and that each member is an “outside director” as defined in Section 162(m) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended. The compensation committee met five times in 2006.
 
Role of Compensation Experts
 
Our compensation committee reviews the compensation of our named executive officers on an annual basis during the first quarter of the year and makes adjustments, if any, effective April 1 of each year. Bonus targets are generally determined during the first two months of each year and are based on calendar year performance. We do not have a fixed date for equity-based compensation awards and such awards are approved by the compensation committee at times it determines to be appropriate.
 
In 2005, we engaged Strategic Consulting Group (SCG) to undertake a review of executive compensation trends at comparable companies in connection with our 2006 compensation. For the purpose of this review, SCG considered approximately 340 comparable companies in both general industry and the medical device industry, excluding financial services companies and any company with less than $175 million in annual revenues, and generally and used data from those companies based on similar job responsibilities and revenue levels. The compensation committee considered data regarding comparable positions in other medical device companies of similar size for those executives where the required education, training and experience in the medical device industry was relevant, which are all the executive officers other than the Chief Financial Officer, the General Counsel and the Director of Human Resources. In the case of those positions, where the required education, training and experience are more easily transferable to other industry sectors, the compensation committee considered general industry survey data as well. SCG’s study addressed in detail only those individuals for whom compensation information was disclosed publicly, which was generally limited to the five most highly compensated officers at each such comparable company. This generally correlated to the Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer and the three most highly compensated individuals, typically corresponding to vice presidents. For 2006, compensation for our officers, including our named executive officers, was determined in large part based on the SCG’s report. Our compensation committee also considered (1) our historical and expected performance, (2) alignment of individual performance with our goals and operational priorities and (3) the anticipated level of difficulty in replacing our Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer and other officers with persons of comparable experience, skill and knowledge.
 
In 2007, we engaged Hewitt Associates, a global human resources consulting firm, to advise our compensation committee with respect to named executive officer compensation and a variety of other compensation matters. In 2007, we have asked Hewitt to provide its analysis based on 2006 data prepared by SCG with respect to our named executive officers.


80


Table of Contents

Role of Our Executive Officers in Compensation Process
 
In 2006, the compensation committee, without the participation of Dr. Robertson, our Chief Executive Officer, reviewed Dr. Robertson’s performance and qualifications and the SCG study in order to determine his compensation. For the remaining named executive officers, the compensation committee considered the report prepared by SCG, together with recommendations made by Dr. Robertson regarding the performance and qualifications of each named executive officer. Dr. Robertson’s recommendations encompassed both base salary and stock options for named executive officers and were made after Dr. Robertson had considered the report by SCG. In 2006, the compensation committee approved Dr. Robertson’s recommendations with only minor adjustments. We followed the same protocol and general considerations for 2007 recommendations.
 
General Compensation Philosophy
 
One of our core objectives is to be the employer of choice in the upper Midwest region of the United States. To this end, our compensation programs are designed to attract, retain, and reward top talent. Our compensation committee considered the demand for talent in the various positions, the ability to attract candidates to our location for those positions where a national search is conducted, and the competitive environment for attracting local and regional talent. To attract that type of talent in our market, the compensation committee concluded that it needed to provide market-competitive base pay, which the compensation committee considered in its business judgement to be the 50th percentile for the given function as benchmarked against peer data (including both similar company and similar position) or general industry survey data.
 
Our compensation program is designed to drive shareholder value by fostering teamwork throughout our company by tying incentive compensation to company-wide financial performance measures. In order to balance our company-wide financial measures, we are considering adopting in the future individualized performance measures for named executive officers in specific areas that we believe are most important to the success of our company. All senior management members, including the named executive officers, have a significant element of compensation at risk in the form of equity compensation and bonuses tied to the creation of shareholder value. Each year our incentive plans are established to ensure that the specific criteria and measures for awards are based on relevant market-driven needs, as well as driving continued improvement in the creation of shareholder value.
 
Elements of Compensation
 
The principal elements of our compensation program have been base salaries, bonuses, long-term equity incentives in the form of stock options, and, with respect to Mr. Hughes, commissions. An additional potential element of compensation is post-termination severance and acceleration of stock option vesting for certain named executive officers upon a change of control. In 2007, we made additional cash incentive payments to named executive officers tied to the achievement of certain performance goals, which we describe below under “Bonuses”. We do not currently have any specific targets for the percentage of compensation represented by salary, equity and/or bonus. As a general matter, subject only to limited exceptions that we believe are job-related, we do not provide perquisites for our named executive officers on a basis that is different from other eligible employees.
 
Base salaries
 
In 2006, our compensation committee used as an approximate benchmark for the base salary of our named executive officers the median level in the report prepared by SCG. SCG’s report compared the base salaries paid to the named executive officers to the median salaries of such officers among the 50th to 75th percentile of the comparable companies. The compensation committee concluded that the median among the 50th percentile was appropriate in accordance with our stated philosophy above. The compensation committee also gave significant weight to the recommendations of Dr. Robertson. In addition, we agreed to pay Mr. Hughes a commission based on the number of Hi Art systems sold by us during 2006. The amount of the commission was adjusted incrementally based on the dollar amount for each Hi Art system order received above a designated minimum order requirement and the average selling price of each Hi Art system ordered. The incentive arrangement between us and Mr. Hughes terminated on December 31, 2006.


81


Table of Contents

Bonuses
 
In 2006, the target bonus levels were $198,000 for our Chief Executive Officer and $87,360 for our Chief Financial Officer. In 2006, a target bonus level was established for each executive officer. In establishing the target bonuses for our executives, we examined data from the comparable companies in the medical device industry and general industry based on the qualifications of our executives as described above. Under our bonus plan, the actual amount of the bonus paid varied depending upon the actual amount of revenue and operating income achieved. Under the plan, no bonus was paid if either revenue or operating income fell below certain minimum thresholds. The actual bonus payment was determined using a two-step process. First, a percentage of the target bonus was calculated based on the 2006 revenue ranges set forth below. Second, that percentage was adjusted by a multiplier based on the operating income earned in 2006, as set forth below.
 
                     
Bonus Based on 2006 Revenue   Bonus Multiplier Based on 2006 Operating Income
    Percent of Target
  2006
   
2006
  Bonus Amount to
  Operating
  Bonus
Revenue  
be Paid
  Income   Multiplier
(in millions)       (in millions)    
Less than $105
    0 %   Less than $2     0  
$105
    60 %   Greater than $2 and less than $4     .50  
$115
    80 %   Greater than $4 and less than $6     .75  
$125
    100 %   Greater than $6 and less than $10     1.00  
$145
    120 %   Greater than $10     1.25  
$150 or greater
    160 %            
 
For 2006, the target bonus levels for our other named executive officers were $99,840 for our President and Co-Founder, $91,520 for our Vice President of Business Development and $83,200 for our Vice President of Research. In 2006, the other named executive officers were subject to the same revenue and operating income thresholds as described above for the Chief Financial Officer and their individual targets were modified accordingly.
 
In 2006, all of our executive officers received 160% of their target bonuses because our revenue exceeded $150 million and our operating income was greater than $6 million but less than $10 million.
 
Variable Pay Plan
 
In April 2007, we adopted the TomoTherapy Incorporated Variable Pay Plan. Every active, full-time employee is eligible to participate in the program except those non-executive employees who participate in a sales commission plan. The Variable Pay Plan is administered by our compensation committee.
 
The plan is intended to permit eligible employees to receive a cash payment based on our achievement of anticipated performance levels that are determined at the start of each year, which payment is adjusted upward or downward depending on the precise performance level achieved. The amount to be paid under the plan will depend upon our operating income and the reliability of the Hi Art system as a percentage “up-time” of all our systems during a given year. We view operating income as a general measure of the payment that we can afford to make. We focus on the reliability of the Hi Art system because it is fundamental to our sales strategy and significantly impacts our future growth. In the future, we may use other measurements as performance goals. In addition, our board and management may exercise discretion in adjusting payouts made under the plan.
 
The actual cash payout under the plan will be determined in 2007 using a three-step process. First, the target incentive payment has been calculated as a percentage of each employee’s base salary based upon their position at the Company. Second, each target incentive payment will be multiplied by 50%, 100% or 150%, respectively, depending on whether we fall short of a predetermined target operating income by 25%, meet our target or exceed the target by 20%. Third, the adjusted target incentive payment will be multiplied by a modifier of between 0.95x, 1.00x or 1.10x based on the predetermined reliability targets for the Hi Art system.


82


Table of Contents

We have set our operating income and reliability performance goals for 2007 at levels based on our fiscal 2006 performance and our internal fiscal 2007 projections. Based on our performance in 2006 and our current expectations for 2007, we believe that our named executive officers will be able to achieve the target incentive payments set forth below corresponding to 100% of our target operating income and a 1.00x modifier for reliability of the Hi Art system.
 
The following table sets forth the target incentive payments for our named executive officers as well as the maximum incentive payment achievable under the plan in 2007:
 
                 
    Target
    Maximum
 
    Incentive
    Incentive
 
    Payment     Payment  
 
Frederick A. Robertson
  $ 255,000     $ 420,750  
Stephen C. Hathaway
    96,000       158,400  
John H. Hughes
    91,520       151,008  
Paul J. Reckwerdt
    103,534       170,831  
Gustavo H. Olivera
    110,367       182,106  
 
Stock options
 
We believe that positive long-term performance is achieved in part by providing our named executive officers with incentives that align their financial interests with the interests of our shareholders. The compensation committee believes that the use of stock option awards offers the best approach to achieving our compensation goals. Other than stock options, no other stock-based awards have been utilized by us. In 2006, our compensation committee used as an approximate benchmark the median among the 50th percentile of equity incentive awards in the SCG report. Nevertheless, due to the early stage of our business, we expect to provide a greater portion of total compensation to our executives through our stock compensation plans than through cash-based compensation. We have not yet adopted stock ownership guidelines.
 
Our stock option plans authorize the compensation committee to grant options to purchase shares of common stock to our employees, directors and consultants. Stock option grants are made at the commencement of employment and occasionally following a significant change in job responsibilities or to meet other special retention or performance objectives. The compensation committee reviews and approves stock option awards to executive officers based upon a review of competitive compensation data, its assessment of individual performance, a review of each executive’s existing long-term incentives and retention considerations. Periodic stock option grants are made at the discretion of the compensation committee to eligible employees based on the recommendation of our Chief Executive Officer. Stock options granted by us have an exercise price equal to the fair market value of our common stock on the day of grant, typically vest 25% per annum based upon continued employment over a four-year period, and generally expire six years after the date of grant. For the most recent options granted on December 7, 2006, the vesting schedule was changed slightly as a retention tool. Those options vest 50% on the date two years after the grant date and then 25% per annum based upon continued employment over a four-year period, and generally expire six years after the date of grant.
 
We have awarded all stock options to purchase our common stock to named executive officers at or above the fair market value of our common stock at the grant date. We have not back-dated any option awards. We assessed the valuations of our common stock as of the applicable grant dates in 2006 primarily by considering recent third-party transactions in our common stock and the issuance price of sales of preferred stock to third parties. When no such recent stock activity occurred, we engaged an independent valuation firm, Virchow Krause, to perform independent valuations of our common stock.
 
As a privately owned company, there has been no market for our common stock. Accordingly, in 2006, we had no program, plan or practice pertaining to the timing of stock option grants to executive officers coinciding with the release of material non-public information. The compensation committee is expected to adopt a formal policy regarding the timing of grants.


83


Table of Contents

Following this offering, new employees will generally be awarded stock options at the next regularly scheduled meeting of the compensation committee following their hire dates, and the grant will have an exercise price equal to the closing market price of our common stock on the date of the meeting.
 
Our compensation committee may also make grants of restricted stock to senior management, though no grants of restricted stock have been made to date.
 
Perquisites and other benefits
 
In the United States, we maintain health, dental and life insurance plans for the benefit of eligible employees, including named executive officers. Each of these benefit plans requires the employee to pay a portion of the premium, and we pay the remainder of the premiums. These benefits are offered on the same basis to all employees. We also maintain a 401(k) retirement plan that is available to all eligible U.S. employees. We currently match elective employee-participant contributions on a basis of 50% of the employee’s contribution up to 6.0% of their compensation. Life, accidental death, dismemberment and disability, and short and long-term disability insurance coverage is also offered to all eligible employees and premiums are paid in full by us. Other voluntary benefits, such as vision insurance, supplemental life and specific coverage insurance supplements, tuition assistance and work-life balance programs are also made available and paid for by the employee. The above benefits are available to the named executive officers on the same basis as all other eligible employees.
 
Severance and Change of Control Provisions
 
Our employment agreements with each of our named executive officers contain severance and change-in-control provisions.
 
In determining the severance terms, we engaged Hewitt Associates, which examined key contract terms and provided us with data on the frequency of occurrence in similar companies of typical severance period lengths, which components of base salary and variable pay were included, and how the terms of severance differ under differing circumstances including change of control. The review included consideration of common practices for handling options upon a departure, the continuation of certain benefits upon departure, and the correlation to the length of non-compete agreements. The goal was to provide a contract that was competitive, that would enable us to retain key people if we encountered turbulent periods, that guarded against the loss of intellectual leadership to competitors, that provided an incentive to remain with the company through a transition if a change of control occurred, but that did not unjustly reward an employee in the event of a termination without cause.
 
If we terminate Dr. Robertson’s employment agreement “without cause” or if Dr. Robertson terminates his employment agreement for “good reason,” (as each term is defined in the agreement), then he is entitled to receive a severance payment equal to the sum of: (i) 18 months’ base salary; (ii) 1.5 times the average annual bonus payment received by Dr. Robertson during the two previous years; (iii) 18 months of COBRA continuation coverage of health insurance benefits if he elects such coverage upon termination; and (iv) up to $10,000 payable to an outplacement consultant. As of the date of this prospectus, this amount would equal $1,041,553.
 
In the event Dr. Robertson’s employment agreement is terminated “without cause” or by Dr. Robertson for good reason within three months before or 24 months following a “change of control” of our company (as defined in the agreement), then Dr. Robertson will instead be entitled to a severance payment equal to the sum of: (i) 36 months’ base salary; (ii) 3.0 times the greater of the average annual bonus paid to Dr. Robertson during the two previous years or the target bonus for the current year; (iii) 36 months of COBRA continuation coverage of health insurance benefits if he elects such coverage upon termination or health insurance premiums of equal value to the extent COBRA continuation coverage is unavailable; and (iv) up to $10,000 payable to an outplacement consultant. As of the date of this prospectus, this amount would equal $2,073,106.
 
Further, our board of directors will consider and decide in its sole discretion, whether to accelerate any unvested stock options that Dr. Robertson has as of the date of such termination.


84


Table of Contents

 
If we terminate any of the other named executive officer’s employment agreement “without cause” or if such officer terminates his employment agreement for “good reason,” (as each term is defined in the agreement), then he is entitled to receive a severance payment equal to the sum of: (i) 12 months’ base salary; (ii) the average annual bonus payment paid to him during the two previous years; (iii) 12 months of COBRA continuation coverage of health insurance benefits if he elects such coverage upon termination; and (iv) up to $10,000 payable to an outplacement consultant. As of the date of this prospectus, that amount would be as follows for each of the named executive officers other than Dr. Robertson:
 
         
Name
  Amount  
 
Paul J. Reckwerdt
  $ 380,409  
John H. Hughes
    348,552  
Stephen C. Hathaway
    353,702  
Gustavo H. Olivera
    371,226  
 
In the event any of the other named executive officer’s employment agreement is terminated without cause or by such officer for good reason within three months before or 24 months following a “change of control” of our company (as defined in the agreement), then he will instead be entitled to a severance payment equal to the sum of: (i) 24 months base salary; (ii) a payment equal to 2.0 times the greater of the average annual bonus paid to him during the two previous years or the target bonus for the current year; (iii) 24 months of COBRA continuation coverage of health insurance benefits if he elects such coverage upon termination or health insurance premiums of equal value to the extent COBRA continuation coverage is unavailable; and (iv) up to $10,000 payable to an outplacement consultant. As of the date of this prospectus, that amount would be as follows for each of the named executive officers other than Dr. Robertson:
 
         
Name
  Amount  
 
Paul J. Reckwerdt
  $ 750,818  
John H. Hughes
    687,104  
Stephen C. Hathaway
    697,404  
Gustavo H. Olivera
    732,532  
 
In addition, if any payments or benefits payable to any of the named executive officers would be subject to any excise tax under Section 4999 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, such payments and/or other benefits shall be reduced to the extent necessary so that no amount will be subject to such excise tax, provided that such reduction shall only occur if the named executive officer will be in a more favorable after-tax position than if no such reduction was made.
 
Tax Consequences of Equity Incentive Plans.
 
Our annual tax aggregate deductions for each named executive officer’s compensation are potentially limited by Section 162(m) of the Internal Revenue Code to the extent the aggregate amount paid to an executive officer exceeds $1.0 million per year, unless it is paid under a predetermined objective performance plan meeting certain requirements, or satisfies one of various other exceptions provided under Section 162(m) of the Internal Revenue Code. At our current named executive officer compensation levels, we do not presently anticipate that Section 162(m) of the Internal Revenue Code should be applicable, and accordingly, our compensation committee did not consider its impact in determining compensation levels for our named executive officers in 2006.
 
Summary Compensation Table
 
The following table sets forth the compensation earned by our named executive officers. No other executive officers who would have otherwise been includable in the following table on the basis of salary and


85


Table of Contents

bonus earned for the year ended December 31, 2006 have been excluded by reason of their termination of employment or change in executive status during that year.
 
SUMMARY COMPENSATION TABLE
 
                                                 
                Option
  All other
   
Name and Principal Position
  Year   Salary   Bonus(1)   Awards(2)   Compensation(3)   Total
 
Frederick A. Robertson
    2006     $ 322,500     $ 316,800     $ 9,189     $ 14,302     $ 662,791  
Chief Executive Officer
                                               
Stephen C. Hathaway
    2006       216,300       139,776       4,142       14,191       374,409  
Chief Financial Officer
                                               
John H. Hughes
    2006       406,600 (4)     146,432       3,108       22,462       578,602  
Vice President of
                                               
Business Development
                                               
Paul J. Reckwerdt
    2006       247,200       159,744             16,985       423,929  
President & Co-Founder
                                               
Gustavo H. Olivera
    2006       206,000       133,120       6,631       11,139       356,890  
Vice President of Research
                                               
 
(1) Consists of bonuses earned in 2006 which are payable in 2007.
 
(2) The value of option awards granted to our named executive officers has been estimated pursuant to SFAS No. 123(R) for 2006. All options awarded had exercise prices equal to the valuation of our stock performed by independent valuation firms. For a discussion of assumptions made in the valuation, see Note A to our financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2006 included elsewhere in this prospectus.
 
(3) Includes contributions made to a 401(k) plan, insurance premiums, vehicle allowance and patent awards.
 
(4) Salary includes commissions paid under earned commission arrangement.
 
Grants of Plan-Based Awards
 
The following table lists each grant of stock options during the year ended December 31, 2006 to the named executive officers. No stock appreciation rights have been granted to these individuals.
 
GRANTS OF PLAN-BASED AWARDS
 
                                 
        All other
       
        Option Awards:
  Exercise or Base
  Grant Date Fair
    Grant
  Number of Securities
  Price of Option
  Market Value of
Name
  Date   Underlying Options (#)(1)   Awards ($/Sh)(2)   Option Awards
 
Frederick A. Robertson
    12/7/2006       136,000     $ 6.75     $ 485,190  
Stephen C. Hathaway
    12/7/2006       54,400       6.75       194,080  
John H. Hughes
    12/7/2006       40,800       6.75       145,565  
Paul J. Reckwerdt
                       
Gustavo H. Olivera
    12/7/2006       108,800       6.75       388,159  
 
(1) Stock options vest 50% on December 7, 2008, and 25% each year thereafter.
 
(2) Represents the fair value per share of common stock as valued by our board of directors on the date of grant.
 
Stock Option and Equity Incentive Plans
 
2007 Equity Incentive Plan
 
Our board of directors and shareholders have approved the 2007 Equity Incentive Plan for the benefit of our employees and consultants and members of our board of directors. No determination has been made as to


86


Table of Contents

the types or amounts of awards that will be granted to specific individuals pursuant to the plan. The following is a description of the material features and provisions of the 2007 Equity Incentive Plan.
 
Shares Available for Awards
 
Subject to certain adjustments set forth in the plan, the maximum number of shares of our common stock that may be issued or awarded under the 2007 Equity Incentive Plan is 2,302,488 shares. If any shares covered by an award granted under the plan are forfeited, or if an award expires or terminates, the shares covered by the award will again be available for grant under the plan. With respect to the exercise of stock appreciation rights, only the number of shares actually issued upon such exercise will be counted against the shares available under the plan.
 
Awards
 
The 2007 Equity Incentive Plan provides for the grant of incentive stock options, nonqualified stock options, restricted stock, stock appreciation rights, performance shares, performance stock units, dividend equivalents, stock payments, deferred stock, restricted stock units, performance bonus awards and performance-based awards to eligible individuals. Except as otherwise provided by the plan administrator, no award granted under the plan may be assigned, transferred or otherwise disposed of by the grantee, except by will or the laws of descent and distribution.
 
Stock Options
 
Stock options, including both nonqualified stock options and incentive stock options, within the meaning of Section 422 of the Code, may be granted under the 2007 Equity Incentive Plan. The option exercise price of all stock options granted pursuant to the plan will not be less than 100% of the fair market value of our stock on the date of grant. No incentive stock option may be granted to a grantee who owns more than 10% of our stock unless the exercise price is at least 110% of the fair market value at the time of grant. Notwithstanding whether an option is designated as an incentive stock option, to the extent that the aggregate fair market value of the shares with respect to which such option is exercisable for the first time by any optionee during any calendar year exceeds $100,000, such excess will be treated as a nonqualified stock option.
 
Payment of the exercise price of an option may be made in cash or, with the consent of the plan administrator, shares of our stock with a fair market value on the date of delivery equal to the exercise price of the option or exercised portion thereof or other property acceptable to the plan administrator (including the delivery of a notice that the participant has placed a market sell order with a broker with respect to shares then issuable upon exercise of the option, and that the broker has been directed to pay a sufficient portion of the net proceeds of the sale to us in satisfaction of the option exercise price). However, no participant who is a member of our board of directors or an “executive officer” of TomoTherapy within the meaning of Section 13(k) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, or Exchange Act, will be permitted to pay the exercise price of an option in any method which would violate Section 13(k) of the Exchange Act.
 
Stock options may be exercised as determined by the plan administrator, but in no event after the tenth anniversary of the date of grant. However, in the case of an incentive stock option granted to a person who owns more than 10% of our stock on the date of grant, such term will not exceed five years.
 
Restricted Stock
 
Eligible employees, consultants and directors may be issued restricted stock in such amounts and on such terms and conditions as determined by the plan administrator. Restricted stock will be evidenced by a written restricted stock agreement. The restricted stock agreement will contain restrictions on transferability and other such restrictions as the plan administrator may determine, including, without limitation, limitations on the right to vote restricted stock or the right to receive dividends on the restricted stock. These restrictions may lapse separately or in combination at such times, pursuant to such circumstances, in such installments, or otherwise, as the plan administrator determines at the time of grant of the award or thereafter.


87


Table of Contents

Stock Appreciation Rights
 
A stock appreciation right, or SAR, is the right to receive payment of an amount equal to the excess of the fair market value of a share of our stock on the date of exercise of the SAR over the fair market value of a share of our stock on the date of grant of the SAR. The plan administrator may issue SARs in such amounts and on such terms and conditions as it may determine, consistent with the terms of the plan. The plan administrator may elect to pay SARs in cash, in our stock or in a combination of cash and our stock.
 
Other Awards Under the Plan
 
The 2007 Equity Incentive Plan provides that the plan administrator may also grant or issue performance shares, performance stock units, dividend equivalents, stock payments, deferred stock, restricted stock units, performance bonus awards and performance-based awards or any combination thereof to eligible employees, consultants and directors. The term of each such grant or issuance will be set by the plan administrator in its discretion. The plan administrator may establish the exercise price or purchase price, if any, of any such award.
 
Payments with respect to any such award will be made in cash, in our stock or in a combination of cash and our stock, as determined by the plan administrator. Any such award will be subject to such additional terms and conditions as determined by the plan administrator and will be evidenced by a written award agreement.
 
Performance shares.   Awards of performance shares are denominated in a number of shares of our stock and may be linked to any one or more performance criteria determined appropriate by the plan administrator, in each case on a specified date or dates or over any period or periods determined by the plan administrator.
 
Performance stock units.   Awards of performance stock units are denominated in unit equivalent of shares of our stock and/or units of value, including dollar value of shares of our stock, and may be linked to any one or more performance criteria determined appropriate by the plan administrator, in each case on a specified date or dates or over any period or periods determined by the plan administrator.
 
Dividend equivalents.   Dividend equivalents are rights to receive the equivalent value (in cash or our stock) of dividends paid on our stock. They represent the value of the dividends per share paid by us, calculated with reference to the number of shares that are subject to any award held by the participant.
 
Stock payments.   Stock payments include payments in the form of our stock, options or other rights to purchase our stock made in lieu of all or any portion of the compensation that would otherwise be paid to the participant. The number of shares will be determined by the plan administrator and may be based upon specific performance criteria determined appropriate by the plan administrator, determined on the date such stock payment is made or on any date thereafter.
 
Deferred stock.   Deferred stock may be awarded to participants and may be linked to any performance criteria determined to be appropriate by the plan administrator. Stock underlying a deferred stock award will not be issued until the deferred stock award has vested, pursuant to a vesting schedule or performance criteria set by the plan administrator, and unless otherwise provided by the plan administrator, recipients of deferred stock generally will have no rights as a stockholder with respect to such deferred stock until the time the vesting conditions are satisfied and the stock underlying the deferred stock award has been issued.
 
Restricted stock units.   Restricted stock units may be granted to any participant in such amounts and subject to such terms and conditions as determined by the plan administrator. At the time of grant, the plan administrator will specify the date or dates on which the restricted stock units will become fully vested and nonforfeitable, and may specify such conditions to vesting as it deems appropriate. At the time of grant, the plan administrator will specify the maturity date applicable to each grant of restricted stock units which will be no earlier than the vesting date or dates of the award and may be determined at the election of the


88


Table of Contents

participant. On the maturity date, we will transfer to the participant one unrestricted, fully transferable share of our stock for each restricted stock unit scheduled to be paid out on such date and not previously forfeited.
 
Performance bonus awards.   Any participant selected by the plan administrator may be granted a cash bonus payable upon the attainment of performance goals that are established by the plan administrator and relate to any one or more performance criteria determined appropriate by the plan administrator on a specified date or dates or over any period or periods determined by the plan administrator. Any such cash bonus paid to a “covered employee” within the meaning of Section 162(m) of the Code may be a performance-based award as described below.
 
Performance-Based Awards
 
The plan administrator may grant awards other than options and stock appreciation rights to employees who are or may be “covered employees,” as defined in Section 162(m) of the Code, that are intended to be performance-based awards within the meaning of Section 162(m) of the Code in order to preserve the deductibility of these awards for federal income tax purposes. Participants are only entitled to receive payment for a performance-based award for any given performance period to the extent that pre-established performance goals set by the plan administrator for the period are satisfied. With regard to a particular performance period, the plan administrator will have the discretion to select the length of the performance period, the type of performance-based awards to be granted, and the goals that will be used to measure the performance for the period. In determining the actual size of an individual performance-based award for a performance period, the plan administrator may reduce or eliminate (but not increase) the award. Generally, a participant will have to be employed by us or any of our qualifying subsidiaries on the date the performance-based award is paid to be eligible for a performance-based award for any period.
 
Administration
 
With respect to stock option grants and other awards granted to our independent directors, the 2007 Equity Incentive Plan will be administered by our full board of directors. With respect to all other awards, the plan will be administered by our compensation committee. In addition, our board may at any time exercise any rights and duties of the committee under the plan except with respect to matters which under Rule 16b-3 under the Exchange Act or Section 162(m) of the Code are required to be determined in the sole discretion of the committee.
 
The plan administrator will have the exclusive authority to administer the plan, including, but not limited to, the power to determine award recipients, the types and sizes of awards, the price and timing of awards and the acceleration or waiver of any vesting restriction. Only our employees and employees of our qualifying corporate subsidiaries are eligible to be granted options that are intended to qualify as “incentive stock options” under Section 422 of the Code.
 
Eligibility
 
Persons eligible to participate in the 2007 Equity Incentive Plan include all members of our board of directors and all of our and our subsidiaries’ employees and consultants, as determined by the plan administrator.
 
Foreign Participants
 
In order to comply with the laws in other countries in which we and our subsidiaries operate or have persons eligible to participate in the plan, the plan administrator will have the power to determine which of our subsidiaries will be covered by the plan, determine which of our directors, employees and consultants outside the United States are eligible to participate in the plan, modify the terms and conditions of any award granted to such eligible individuals to comply with applicable foreign laws, establish subplans and modify any terms and procedures (with certain exceptions), and take any action that it deems advisable with respect to local governmental regulatory exemptions or approvals.


89


Table of Contents

Adjustments
 
If there is any stock dividend, stock split, combination or exchange of shares, merger, consolidation, spin-off, recapitalization or other distribution (other than normal cash dividends) of our assets to stockholders, or any other change affecting the shares of our stock or the share price of our stock, the plan administrator will make proportionate adjustments to any or all of the following in order to reflect such change: (i) the aggregate number and type of shares that may be issued under the plan, (ii) the terms and conditions of any outstanding awards (including, without limitation, any applicable performance targets or criteria with respect thereto), and (iii) the grant or exercise price per share for any outstanding awards under the plan. Any adjustment affecting an award intended as “qualified performance-based compensation” will be made consistent with the requirements of Section 162(m) of the Code. The plan administrator also has the authority under the 2007 Equity Incentive Plan to take certain other actions with respect to outstanding awards in the event of a corporate transaction, including provision for the cash-out, termination, assumption or substitution of such awards.
 
Change of Control
 
Except as may otherwise be provided in any written agreement between the participant and us, in the event of a change of control of our company in which awards are not converted, assumed, or replaced by the successor, such awards will become fully exercisable and all forfeiture restrictions on such awards will lapse. Upon, or in anticipation of, a change of control, the plan administrator may cause any and all awards outstanding under the 2007 Equity Incentive Plan to terminate at a specific time in the future and will give each participant the right to exercise such awards during a period of time as the plan administrator, in its sole and absolute discretion, determines.
 
Termination or Amendment
 
With the approval of our board of directors, the plan administrator may terminate, amend, or modify the 2007 Equity Incentive Plan at any time. However, shareholder approval will be required for any amendment to the extent necessary and desirable to comply with any applicable law, regulation or stock exchange rule, to increase the number of shares available under the plan, to permit the grant of options with an exercise price below fair market value on the date of grant, or to extend the exercise period for an option beyond ten years from the date of grant. In addition, absent shareholder approval, no option may be amended to reduce the per share exercise price of the shares subject to such option below the per share exercise price as of the date the option was granted and, except to the extent permitted by the plan in connection with certain changes in capital structure, no option may be granted in exchange for, or in connection with, the cancellation or surrender of an option having a higher per share exercise price. The plan will expire on, and no award may be granted pursuant to the plan after, April 5, 2017. Any awards outstanding on that date shall remain in force according to the terms of the plan and the applicable award agreement.
 
2002 Stock Option Plan
 
Our 2002 Stock Option Plan was originally adopted by our board of directors and approved by our shareholders in 2002 and was amended four times thereafter, on February 13, 2004, November 15, 2004, June 29, 2005 and December 7, 2006. As of March 31, 2007, options to purchase 6,885,777 shares of our common stock were outstanding under this plan. We will not grant any additional awards under the 2002 Stock Option Plan after the consummation of this offering. The following is a description of the material features and provisions of the 2002 Stock Option Plan.
 
Awards.   The 2002 Stock Option Plan, provides for grants of incentive stock options intended to qualify for special tax treatment under Section 422 of the Internal Revenue Code and non-qualified stock options. The plan provides that the exercise price shall be determined by the compensation committee; provided however, that the incentive stock option may not have an exercise price less than the fair market value of a share of common stock on the date of grant. If the grantee of an incentive stock option plan owns more than ten percent of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock on the date of grant, then the


90


Table of Contents

incentive stock option may not have an exercise price less than 110% of the fair market value of a share of common stock on such date. Subject to the grantee’s continued employment, each option will expire after a term determined at the time of grant by the administrator. Such term, however, shall not exceed ten years and in the case of an incentive stock option plan granted to a person who owns more than ten percent of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock on the date of grant, such term shall not exceed five years. An option is considered granted on the date the committee acts to grant the option or such later date as the committee shall specify.
 
The 2002 Stock Option Plan provides if the aggregate fair market value of the shares with respect to which such designated incentive stock option is exercisable for the first time by the grantee during any calendar year under this plan exceeds $100,000, then that portion which equals the first $100,000 is allocated to the incentive stock option and the remaining portion is deemed a non-qualified stock option. For this purpose, the fair market value of the shares is determined based on the date the option was granted.
 
The 2002 Stock Option Plan provides that if a grantee’s employment or service relationship terminates, other than for cause, death or disability, then the unvested options shall terminate immediately. Options that have vested but remain unexercised, deferred, or unpaid as of the date of such termination shall terminate on the date specified in the option agreement; provided however, that such time is not more than three months. The administrator has the authority to extend the termination for these options. If a grantee’s employment or service relationship terminates due to death or disability, then vested options shall terminate on the date specified in the option agreement. Pursuant to stock option agreements under the 2002 Stock Option Plan, a grantee’s options will vest upon the grantee’s death or disability. If a grantee’s employment relationship terminates for cause, then none of the options may be exercised and all of the grantee’s rights in the options are forfeited upon termination.
 
Administration.   The 2002 Stock Option Plan is currently administered by our compensation committee. The compensation committee has the authority to make all determinations and to take all other actions necessary or advisable for the administration of the plan.
 
The compensation committee is authorized to adopt, amend and rescind rules relating to the administration of this plan, subject to the express provisions of the plan. Our board can amend, alter, suspend or discontinue this plan at any time, although certain amendments may require shareholder approval and an amendment cannot adversely affect any rights under an outstanding grant without the grantee’s consent.
 
Eligibility.   Under the terms of the 2002 Stock Option Plan, a non-qualified option may be granted to those current or prospective employees, directors and advisors deemed eligible to participate in the plan by the committee. Incentive stock options may only be granted to our employees.
 
Adjustments.   In the event of any change in the outstanding common stock by reason of a stock split, reverse stock split, stock dividend, combination or reclassification of our common stock, recapitalization, merger, or similar event, then the compensation committee may make an equitable adjustment in the number of shares authorized for issuance under this plan and the purchase price per share thereof. In the event of a corporate merger, consolidation, acquisition of property or stock, separation, reorganization or liquidation, the administrator is authorized to issue or assume stock options by means of substitution of new stock options for previously issued stock options or an assumption of previously issued stock options.
 
Effects of Merger or Asset Sale.   Pursuant to stock option agreements under the 2002 Stock Option Plan, in the event of a merger of us with or into another business entity, or the sale of substantially all of our assets, the stock options will be assumed by the successor entity or its parent or subsidiary by substitution of an equivalent option or right. If the successor does not assume the stock options, the stock options will vest. Grantees will have fifteen days to exercise their options from the date the committee gives written notice to grantees. The committee must give grantees notice of their right to exercise the stock options at least fifteen days before the closing of such merger or asset sale.
 
Change of Control.   Pursuant to stock option agreements under the 2002 Stock Option Plan, stock options will vest upon a grantee’s involuntary termination (as defined in the Stock Option Agreement) within three months before or twelve months after a change in control (as defined in the Stock Option Agreement).


91


Table of Contents

Termination or Amendment.   Unless earlier terminated by our board of directors, the 2002 Stock Option Plan will terminate on August 16, 2012.
 
2000 Stock Option Plan
 
Our 2000 Stock Option Plan was originally adopted by our board of directors and approved by our shareholders in 2000 and was amended and restated as of May 23, 2001. As of March 31, 2007, options to purchase 146,989 shares of our common stock were outstanding under this plan. We will not grant any additional awards under the 2000 Stock Option Plan after the consummation of this offering. The following is a description of the material features and provisions of the 2000 Stock Option Plan.
 
Awards.   The 2000 Stock Option Plan provides for the grant of incentive stock options intended to qualify for special tax treatment under Section 422 of the Internal Revenue Code and non-qualified stock options. The plan provides that the exercise price shall be determined by the administrator; provided however, that the incentive stock option may not have an exercise price less than the fair market value of a share of common stock on the date of grant. If the grantee of an incentive stock option owns more than ten percent of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock on the date of grant, then the incentive stock option may not have an exercise price less than 110% of the fair market value of a share of common stock on such date. Subject to the grantee’s continued employment, each option will expire after a term determined at the time of grant by the administrator. Such term, however, may not exceed ten years and in the case of an incentive stock option granted to a person who owns more than ten percent of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock on the date of grant, such term shall not exceed five years.
 
The 2000 Stock Option Plan provides that if the aggregate fair market value of the shares with respect to which a designated incentive stock option is exercisable for the first time by the grantee during any calendar year under this plan exceeds $100,000, then that portion which equals the first $100,000 is allocated to the incentive stock option and the remaining portion is deemed to be a non-qualified stock option. For this purpose, the fair market value of the shares is determined based on the date the option was granted.
 
The 2000 Stock Option Plan provides that with respect to incentive stock options, if a grantee’s employment relationship terminates, other than for death, disability or for cause, then the grantee’s unvested options shall terminate immediately. Options that have vested but remain unexercised, deferred, or unpaid as of the date of such termination shall terminate three months after such termination, unless the term is extended by the administrator; provided, however, that options will not be exercisable after the end of the term set out in the option agreement. If a grantee’s employment relationship terminates for death or disability then the options are governed in accordance with the term and conditions as specified at the time of the grant in the grantee’s Stock Option Agreements. Pursuant to stock option agreements under the 2000 Stock Option Plan, a grantee’s stock options will vest upon the grantee’s death or disability. If a grantee’s employment relationship terminates for cause, then none of the options may be exercised and all of the grantee’s rights in the options are forfeited upon termination.
 
Administration.   The 2000 Stock Option Plan is currently administered by our compensation committee. The compensation committee has the authority to make all determinations and to take all other actions necessary or advisable for the administration of the plan.
 
Eligibility.   Under the terms of the 2000 Stock Option Plan, a non-qualified option may be granted to those current or prospective employees, directors and advisors deemed eligible to participate in the plan by the administrator. Incentive stock options may only be granted to our employees.
 
The compensation committee is authorized to adopt, amend and rescind rules relating to the administration of the plan, subject to the express provisions of the plan. Our board can amend, alter, suspend or discontinue this plan at any time, although certain amendments may require shareholder approval and an amendment cannot adversely affect any rights under an outstanding grant without the grantee’s consent.
 
Adjustments.   In the event of any change in our outstanding common stock by reason of a stock split, reverse stock split, stock dividend, combination or reclassification of our common stock, recapitalization,


92


Table of Contents

merger, or similar event, then the administrator may make an equitable adjustment in the number of shares authorized for issuance under this plan and the purchase price per share thereof.
 
Effects of Merger or Asset Sale.   Pursuant to stock option agreements under the 2000 Stock Option Plan, in the event of a merger of us with or into another business entity, or the sale of substantially all of our assets, the stock options will be assumed by the successor entity or its parent or subsidiary by substitution of an equivalent option or right. If the successor does not assume the stock options, the stock options will vest. Grantees will have fifteen days to exercise their options from the date the committee gives written notice to grantees. The committee must give grantees notice of their right to exercise the stock options at least fifteen days before the closing of such merger or asset sale.
 
Change of Control.   Pursuant to stock option agreements under the 2000 Stock Option Plan, stock options will vest upon a grantee’s involuntary termination (as defined in the stock option agreement) within three months before or twelve months after a change in control (as defined in the Stock Option Agreement).
 
Termination or Amendment.   Unless earlier terminated by our board, the 2000 Stock Option Plan will terminate on the August 15, 2010.
 
Incentive Stock Option Plan
 
As of March 31, 2007, options to purchase 198,424 shares of our common stock were outstanding under this plan. We will not grant any additional awards under this Plan after the consummation of this offering. The following is a description of the material features and provisions of this Plan.
 
Awards.   This Plan provides for the grant of incentive stock options. The plan provides that an option may not have an exercise price less than the fair market value of a share of common stock at the time of grant. If the grantee owns more than ten percent of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock on the date of grant, then the option may not have an exercise price less than 110% of the fair market value of a share of common stock at the time of grant. Subject to the grantee’s continued employment, each option will expire after a term determined at the time of grant. Such term, however, shall not exceed ten years and in the case of options granted to a person who owns more than ten percent of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock on the date of grant, such term shall not exceed five years.
 
The Incentive Stock Option Plan provides that the aggregate fair market value of the shares with respect to which such designated incentive stock option is exercisable for the first time under this plan or any other plan offered by us, shall not exceed $100,000. The fair market value of stock subject to an option shall be determined by the committee based on the date the option was granted.
 
This Plan provides that if a grantee’s employment relationship with us terminates due to disability, the grantee has one year to exercise this option. If the termination of employment results from the death of the grantee, then the grantee’s estate has three years to exercise the option. In both cases, however, the option may not be exercised beyond the option period. Pursuant to stock option agreements under this Plan, stock options will vest upon the grantee’s death or disability. If termination of employment results from the deliberate, willful or gross misconduct of a grantee or the grantee’s unreasonable neglect of or refusal to perform the duties and responsibilities of the grantee, then the grantee forfeits vested and unvested options.
 
Administration.   This Plan is currently administered by our compensation committee. Subject to the terms and conditions of the plan, the compensation committee has the authority to make all determinations and to take all other actions necessary or advisable for the administration of the plan.
 
The compensation committee is authorized to adopt, amend and rescind rules relating to the administration of the plan, subject to the express provisions of the plan. Our board can amend, alter, suspend or discontinue this plan at any time, although certain amendments may require shareholder approval and an amendment cannot adversely affect any rights under an outstanding grant without the grantee’s consent.
 
Eligibility.   Under the terms of this Plan, an option may be granted to any employee, including employees of subsidiaries.


93


Table of Contents

 
Adjustments.   In the event of any change in the outstanding common stock by reason of stock dividends, recapitalizations, reorganizations, mergers, consolidations, split-ups, combinations or exchange of shares in a similar event, then the compensation committee may make an equitable adjustment in the number of shares authorized for issuance under this plan and the purchase price per share thereof.
 
Effects of Merger or Asset Sale.   Pursuant to stock option agreements under this Plan, in the event of a merger of us with or into another business entity, or the sale of substantially all of our assets, the stock options will be assumed by the successor entity or its parent or subsidiary by substitution of an equivalent option or right. If the successor does not assume the stock options, the stock options will vest. Grantees will have fifteen days to exercise their options from the date the committee gives written notice to grantees. The committee must give grantees notice of their right to exercise the stock options at least fifteen days before the closing of such merger or asset sale.
 
Change of Control.   Pursuant to stock option agreements under this Plan, stock options will vest upon a grantee’s involuntary termination (as defined in the Stock Option Agreement) within three months before or twelve months after a change in control (as defined in the Stock Option Agreement).
 
Termination or amendment.   Unless earlier terminated by our board of directors, the Incentive Stock Option Plan will terminate on February 7, 2009.
 
2007 Employee Stock Purchase Plan
 
Our board of directors and our shareholders have adopted our 2007 Employee Stock Purchase Plan. The plan will become effective upon the closing of this offering. The following is a description of the material features and provisions of the plan.
 
Administration.   The 2007 Employee Stock Purchase Plan will be administered by our compensation committee, each member of whom is a “non-employee director” for purposes of Rule 16b-3 under the Exchange Act. Subject to the terms and conditions of the plan, the committee has the authority to make all determinations and to take all other actions necessary or advisable for the administration of the plan. The committee is also authorized to adopt, amend and rescind rules relating to the administration of the plan. Our board of directors may at any time exercise the rights and duties of the committee to administer the plan.
 
Eligibility.   Our employees and the employees of our designated subsidiaries who customarily work more than 20 hours per week and more than five months per calendar year are eligible to participate in the 2007 Employee Stock Purchase Plan. Each eligible employee who is employed by us or any of our designated subsidiaries on the day immediately preceding the effective date of this prospectus will automatically become a participant in the plan with respect to the first purchase period. Each person who, during the course of a purchase period, becomes an eligible employee subsequent to the enrollment date will be eligible to become a participant in the plan on the first day of the first purchase period following the day on which he or she becomes an eligible employee. However, no employee is eligible to participate in the plan if, immediately after the election to participate, such employee would own stock (including stock such employee may purchase under outstanding rights under the plan) representing 5% or more of the total combined voting power or value of all classes of our stock or the stock of any of our parent or subsidiary corporations. In addition, no employee is permitted to participate if the rights of the employee to purchase our common stock under the plan and all similar purchase plans maintained by us or our subsidiaries would accrue at a rate which exceeds $25,000 of the fair market value of such stock (determined at the time the right is granted) for each calendar year, subject to an annual increase based on a predetermined formula.
 
Shares reserved.   Subject to certain adjustments set forth in the plan, the maximum number of shares of our common stock that may be issued under the 2007 Employee Stock Purchase Plan is 400,000 shares.
 
Enrollment.   Except with respect to the first offering period, eligible employees become participants in the 2007 Employee Stock Purchase Plan by executing a subscription agreement and filing it with us 15 days (or such shorter or longer period as may be determined by the plan administrator) prior to the applicable enrollment date. By enrolling in the plan, a participant is deemed to have elected to purchase the maximum


94


Table of Contents

number of whole shares of our common stock that can be purchased with the compensation withheld during each purchase period for which the participant is enrolled.
 
Offerings; exercise dates.   Under the 2007 Employee Stock Purchase Plan, the first purchase period will begin on the effective date of this Registration Statement and will continue until November 30, 2007. After the first purchase period, a new twelve-month purchase period will begin on each December 1st thereafter during the term of the plan. Under the plan, purchases will be made once during each purchase period on the last trading day of such purchase period, and the dates of such purchases will be “exercise dates”. The plan administrator may change the duration and timing of purchase periods and exercise dates under the plan.
 
Price and payment.   Employees electing to participate in the 2007 Employee Stock Purchase Plan will authorize payroll deductions made on each pay day during each purchase period until the employee instructs us to stop the deductions or until the employee’s employment is terminated. Participants may contribute up to 10% of their compensation through payroll deductions, and the accumulated deductions will be applied to the purchase of shares on each exercise date. Compensation for purposes of the plan means an employee’s base straight time gross earnings and commissions, but excludes payments for overtime, shift premium, incentive compensation, incentive payments, bonuses, expense reimbursements, fringe benefits and other compensation. The purchase price per share will be equal to 85% of the fair market value of a share of our common stock on the first trading day of the applicable purchase period or, if lower, 85% of the fair market value of a share of our common stock on the last trading day of the applicable purchase period. Unless an employee terminates his or her participation in the 2007 Employee Stock Purchase Plan, his or her accumulated payroll deductions under the 2007 Employee Stock Purchase Plan on any exercise date will be used to purchase the maximum number of shares of common stock that can be purchased with the employee’s accumulated payroll deductions at the purchase price per share established for that purchase period, subject to limitations on the maximum number of shares that can be purchased.
 
The fair market value of a share of our common stock on any date will equal the mean closing sales price of a share of common stock on NASDAQ for such date and the four trading days immediately following such date, or if no sale occurred on such date, the first trading date immediately prior to such date during which a sale occurred and the four trading days immediately following such date, as reported in The Wall Street Journal or such other source as the plan administrator may deem reliable for such purposes.
 
Termination of participation.   Employees may end their participation in an offering at any time during the purchase period, and participation ends automatically on failure to qualify as an eligible employee for any reason. Upon such termination of the employee’s participation in the 2007 Employee Stock Purchase Plan, such employee’s payroll deductions not already used to purchase stock under the plan will be returned to the employee.
 
Adjustments.   In the event of a stock split, reverse stock split, stock dividend or similar change in our capitalization, the number of shares available for issuance under the plan and the purchase price and number of shares covered by options outstanding under the plan will be appropriately adjusted.
 
In the event we merge with or into another corporation or sell all or substantially all of our assets, the outstanding rights under the plan will be assumed or an equivalent right substituted by the successor company or its parent or subsidiary. If the successor company or its parent or subsidiary refuses to assume the outstanding rights or substitute an equivalent right, then the purchase period then in progress will be shortened by setting a new exercise date prior to the effective date of the transaction and all outstanding purchase rights will automatically be exercised on the new exercise date. The purchase price will be equal to 85% of the fair market value of a share of our common stock on the first trading day of the applicable purchase period in which an acquisition occurs or, if lower, 85% of the fair market value of a share of our common stock on the date the purchase rights are exercised.
 
Termination or amendment.   Our board of directors may at any time and for any reason terminate or amend the 2007 Employee Stock Purchase Plan. Generally, no amendment may make any change in any option previously granted which adversely affects the rights of any participant without such participant’s consent, provided that an offering period may be terminated by our board of directors if it determines that the


95


Table of Contents

termination of the offering period or the plan is in the best interests of our company and our shareholders. To the extent necessary to comply with Section 423 of the Code, we will obtain shareholder approval of any amendment to the plan.
 
Without shareholder consent and without regard to whether any participant rights may be considered to have been “adversely affected,” the plan administrator may change the offering periods, limit the frequency and/or number of changes in the amount withheld during an offering period, and establish such other limitations or procedures as it determines consistent with the plan. In addition, in the event our board of directors determines that the ongoing operation of the plan may result in unfavorable financial accounting consequences, our board may, in its discretion and, to the extent necessary or desirable, modify or amend the plan to reduce or eliminate such accounting consequence. Such modifications or amendments will not require shareholder approval or the consent of any plan participants.
 
Unless earlier terminated by our board of directors, the 2007 Employee Stock Purchase Plan will terminate on the tenth anniversary of the date of its initial adoption by our board.
 
 
Registration of shares on Form S-8.   We intend to file one or more registration statements with the SEC on Form S-8 covering the shares of common stock issuable under the Incentive Stock Option Plan, the 2000 Equity Incentive Plan, the 2002 Equity Incentive Plan, the 2007 Equity Incentive Plan and the 2007 Employee Stock Purchase Plan.
 
Outstanding Equity Awards at Fiscal Year-End
 
The following table sets forth information for the named executive officers regarding the number of shares subject to both exercisable and unexercisable stock options, as well as the exercise prices and expiration dates thereof, as of December 31, 2006. There was no public trading market for our common stock as of December 31, 2006:
 
OUTSTANDING EQUITY AWARDS AT FISCAL YEAR-END
 
                                         
          Number of
    Number of
             
          Securities
    Securities
             
          Underlying
    Underlying
             
    Option
    Unexercised
    Unexercised
    Option
    Option
 
    Grant
    Options (#)
    Options (#)
    Exercise
    Expiration
 
Name
  Date     Exercisable     Unexercisable     Price ($)     Date(1)  
 
Frederick A. Robertson
    1/3/2005       89,015       1,180,511     $ 2.82       1/3/2011  
      11/17/2005       51,000       153,000       3.46       11/17/2011  
      12/7/2006             136,000       6.75       12/7/2012  
Stephen C. Hathaway
    3/1/2003       326,400             0.29       3/1/2013  
      3/17/2005       20,400       61,200       2.82       3/17/2015  
      11/17/2005       13,770       41,310       3.46       11/17/2011  
      12/7/2006             54,400       6.75       12/7/2012  
John H. Hughes
    6/17/2003       68,000             0.29       6/17/2013  
      6/1/2004       102,000       34,000       0.61       6/1/2014  
      3/17/2005       40,800       122,400       2.82       3/17/2011  
      11/17/2005       13,770       41,310       3.46       11/17/2011  
      12/7/2006             40,800       6.75       12/7/2012  
Paul J. Reckwerdt
    11/17/2005       34,000       102,000       3.46       11/17/2011  
Gustavo H. Olivera
    6/1/1999       348,432             0.08       6/1/2009  
      5/23/2001       6,800             0.10       5/23/2011  
      11/26/2003       32,640             0.29       11/26/2013  
      11/17/2005       17,000       51,000       3.46       11/17/2011  
      12/7/2006             108,800       6.75       12/7/2012  
 
(1) Stock options vest 25% each year beginning one year after the date of grant, except for the options granted on December 7, 2006, which vest 50% at December 7, 2008 and 25% each year thereafter.


96


Table of Contents

Option Exercises and Stock Vested
 
The following table sets forth information for each of the named executive officers regarding the number of shares acquired in exercise of stock options during 2006 and the value realized upon such exercise. With the exception of Dr. Robertson’s holdings, there have been no exercises of stock options or vesting of stock, restricted stock, restricted stock units or similar instruments, by our named executive officers during our last fiscal year. The value realized upon exercise of the option by Dr. Robertson was determined by subtracting the option cost from the value of the shares on the date of exercise.
 
OPTION EXERCISES AND STOCK VESTED
 
                 
    Option Awards  
    Number of Shares
       
    Acquired on
    Value Realized
 
Name
  Exercise (#)     on Exercise ($)  
 
Frederick A. Robertson
    304,489     $ 1,146,884  
 
Employment Agreements
 
In addition to the severance and change of control provisions discussed above under “— Compensation Disclosure and Analysis — Elements of Compensation — Severance and Change of Control Provisions,” our employment agreements with each of our named executive officers contain the following terms.
 
Frederick A. Robertson.   Under Dr. Robertson’s agreement, he will be entitled to receive an initial annual base salary of $425,000. Dr. Robertson’s agreement will be for a term of three years and, at the end of the second year, will be automatically renewed for an additional one-year period unless either party gives notice to the contrary prior to the second anniversary of the agreement or within 60 days of expiration of the agreement. Dr. Robertson will be eligible to earn incentive bonuses based upon achievement of objectives set by our compensation committee.
 
Stephen C. Hathaway.   Under Mr. Hathaway’s agreement, he will be entitled to receive an initial annual base salary of $240,000. Mr. Hathaway’s agreement will be for a term of twelve months and will be automatically renewed for successive twelve-month periods unless either party gives notice to the contrary within 60 days of expiration of the agreement. Mr. Hathaway will be eligible to earn incentive bonuses based upon achievement of objectives set by our compensation committee.
 
Paul J. Reckwerdt.   Under Mr. Reckwerdt’s agreement, he will be entitled to receive an initial annual base salary of $258,835. Mr. Reckwerdt’s agreement will be for a term of twelve months and will be automatically renewed for successive twelve-month periods unless either party gives notice to the contrary within 60 days of expiration of the agreement. Mr. Reckwerdt will be eligible to earn incentive bonuses based upon achievement of objectives set by our compensation committee.
 
John H. Hughes.   Under Mr. Hughes’ agreement, he will be entitled to receive an initial annual base salary of $228,800. Mr. Hughes’ agreement will be for a term of twelve months and will be automatically renewed for successive twelve-month periods unless either party gives notice to the contrary within 60 days of expiration of the agreement. Mr. Hughes will be eligible to earn incentive bonuses based upon achievement of objectives set by our compensation committee.
 
Gustavo H. Olivera.   Under Mr. Olivera’s agreement, he will be entitled to receive an initial annual base salary of $245,260. Mr. Olivera’s agreement will be for a term of twelve months and will be automatically renewed for successive twelve-month periods unless either party gives notice to the contrary within 60 days of expiration of the agreement. Mr. Olivera will be eligible to earn incentive bonuses based upon achievement of objectives set by our compensation committee.
 
Other Agreements
 
Each of our named executive officers has also entered into a Confidentiality Agreement, an Assignment of Inventions Agreement and a Noncompetition Agreement. The Confidentiality Agreement restricts the officer from disclosing confidential information during his employment and for a period of two


97


Table of Contents

years thereafter. The Assignment of Inventions Agreement provides that all inventions and new ideas developed by the officer during employment or for a period of six months thereafter shall belong to us. The Noncompetition Agreement provides that such officers shall not compete with us during employment and thereafter for the longer of 18 months or any applicable severance period under the employment agreements.
 
Director Compensation
 
The following table sets forth a summary of the compensation we paid to our directors in 2006.
 
DIRECTOR COMPENSATION
 
                                 
    Fees Earned or
    Option
    All Other
       
Name
  Paid in Cash ($)     Awards ($)(3)     Compensation ($)     Total ($)  
 
Thomas R. Mackie(1)
  $     $     $ 123,817     $ 123,817  
Paul J. Reckwerdt(2)
                       
Frederick A. Robertson(2)
                       
Michael J. Cudahy
    16,000                   16,000  
Sam R. Leno
    15,000       19,565             34,565  
John J. McDonough
    23,500                   23,500  
John P. Neis
    29,500                   29,500  
Cary J. Nolan
    25,900             12,000 (4)     37,900  
Carlos A. Perez
    20,000                   20,000  
Frances S. Taylor
    16,500       19,565             36,065  
 
(1) Thomas R. Mackie is paid by the company as a part-time employee. His other compensation includes his salary, insurance, 401(k) and bonus that was accrued in 2006.
 
(2) Paul J. Reckwerdt and Frederick A. Robertson are full-time employees and their compensation is set forth in the preceding tables.
 
(3) The value of option awards granted to our executive officers has been estimated pursuant to SFAS No. 123(R) for 2006.
 
(4) Consists of fees paid for services pursuant to a consulting agreement. The agreement was terminated in 2006.
 
Effective July 1, 2006, each of our non-employee/non-affiliated directors, whom we refer to as our non-employee directors, is paid a $20,000 annual retainer in four equal quarterly payments, $2,000 for each board meeting attended and $500 for each telephonic update board meeting. Prior to July 2006, our non-employee directors received payments for attendance at board meetings and for committee participation, however, they received no annual retainer.
 
In addition to the annual board retainer, each member of a board committee receives a $2,000 annual retainer and the chairperson of each committee receives a $5,000 annual retainer. All such retainers are paid quarterly. We also reimburse each member of our board of directors who is not a company employee for reasonable travel and other expenses in connection with attending meetings of the board of directors. Following the closing of this offering, the annual retainer for committee members will be increased to $3,000 and the annual retainer for the audit committee chairperson will be increased to $7,500.
 
Our board of directors has approved a revised director compensation plan for our non-employee directors. Historically, each non-employee director received an option to purchase 54,400 shares of our common stock upon his or her appointment to our board of directors. Thereafter, each non-employee director will be considered for an additional stock option award in the discretion of the compensation committee. Each non-employee director stock option will terminate upon the earlier to occur of six years from the date of grant and three months after the director ceases to be a director, adviser, consultant or employee. The exercise price


98


Table of Contents

of these options will equal the closing price of our common stock on the date of grant. The grants vest 25% per annum upon the date of grant and 25% per annum thereafter.
 
401(k) Plan
 
We maintain a tax-qualified retirement plan in the United States that provides all regular employees an opportunity to save for retirement on a tax advantaged basis. The plan is designed to meet the requirements of a tax-qualified defined contribution profit-sharing plan under Sections 401(a) and 401(k) of the Internal Revenue Code. Under the plan, participants may elect to defer a portion of their compensation on a pre-tax basis and have it contributed to the plan subject to applicable annual Internal Revenue Code limits. Pre-tax contributions are allocated to each participant’s individual account and are then invested in selected investments alternatives according to the participants’ directions. Employee elective deferrals are 100% vested at all times. Our 401(k) plan allows for matching contributions to be made by us. Currently, 50% of the amount of a participant’s salary deferrals are matched, but only up to 6% of the participant’s compensation for any payroll period. We also may make discretionary profit-sharing contributions to the plan. As a tax-qualified retirement plan, contributions to the 401(k) plan and earnings on those contributions are not taxable to the employees until distributed from the 401(k) plan and all contributions are deductible by us when made.


99


Table of Contents

 
PRINCIPAL AND SELLING SHAREHOLDERS
 
The following table sets forth information about the beneficial ownership of our common stock at March 31, 2007, and as adjusted to reflect the sale of the shares of common stock in this offering, for:
 
  •      each person known to us to be the beneficial owner of more than 5% of our common stock;
 
  •      each of our executive officers;
 
  •      each of our directors;
 
  •      all of our executive officers and directors as a group; and
 
  •      each selling shareholder.
 
Beneficial ownership is determined in accordance with the rules of the Securities and Exchange Commission and generally includes any shares over which a person exercises sole or shared voting or investment power. Under these rules, beneficial ownership also includes any shares as to which the individual or entity has the right to acquire beneficial ownership within 60 days of March 31, 2007, through the exercise of any warrant, stock option or other right. Shares subject to such warrants, stock options or other rights are deemed to be outstanding for the purpose of computing the ownership percentage of the person beneficially holding these warrants, stock option or other rights, but are not deemed to be outstanding for the purpose of computing the ownership percentage of any other person. Except as noted by footnote, and subject to community property laws where applicable, we believe that the shareholders named in the table below have sole voting and investment power with respect to all shares of common stock shown as beneficially owned by them. The table assumes 38,145,337 shares outstanding as of the date of this prospectus and 48,345,337 shares outstanding upon the completion of this offering.
 
Except as set forth below, the address of all shareholders is c/o TomoTherapy Incorporated, 1240 Deming Way, Madison, Wisconsin 53717.
 
                                                                 
                            Assuming Exercise of
 
                                  Overallotment Option  
    Number of Shares
                      Number of
    Percentage of
 
    Beneficially Owned     Percentage of Shares Beneficially Owned           Shares
    Shares
 
    Before
    Number of
    After
    Before
    After
    Number of
    Beneficially
    Beneficially
 
Name and Address
  Offering     Shares Offered     Offering     Offering     Offering     Shares Offered     Owned     Owned  
 
Principal shareholders:
                                                               
Venture Investors, LLC(1)
    6,597,135       185,800       6,411,335       17.3 %     13.3 %     417,724       5,993,611       12.4 %
Avalon Technology, LLC(2)
    4,918,857       129,659       4,789,198       12.9       9.9       291,506       4,497,692       9.3  
The Endeavors Group, LLC(3)
    4,792,656       138,243       4,654,413       12.6       9.6       310,803       4,343,610       9.0  
Open Prairie Ventures I, L.P.(4)
    2,318,460       66,382       2,252,078       6.1       4.7       149,242       2,102,836       4.3  
Ascension Health Ventures LLC(5)
    2,080,125       60,815       2,019,310       5.5       4.2       136,726       1,882,584       3.9  
Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation(6)
    2,019,779       59,051       1,960,728       5.3       4.1       132,760       1,827,968       3.8  
Directors and executive officers:
                                                               
Frederick A. Robertson(7)
    838,007             838,007       2.2       1.7             838,007       1.7  
Paul J. Reckwerdt(8)
    2,449,093             2,449,093       6.4       5.1             2,449,093       5.1  
Stephen C. Hathaway(9)
    403,022             403,022       1.1 %     *             403,022       *  
Steven G. Books(10)
    68,170             68,170       *       *             68,170       *  
John H. Hughes(11)
    265,370             265,370       *       *             265,370       *  
Gustavo H. Olivera(12)
    404,872             404,872       1.1       *             404,872       *  
Mary Elizabeth Klein
                                               
Delwin T. Coufal(13)
    68,170             68,170       *       *             68,170       *  


100


Table of Contents

                                                                 
                            Assuming Exercise of
 
                                  Overallotment Option  
    Number of Shares
                      Number of
    Percentage of
 
    Beneficially Owned     Percentage of Shares Beneficially Owned           Shares
    Shares
 
    Before
    Number of
    After
    Before
    After
    Number of
    Beneficially
    Beneficially
 
Name and Address
  Offering     Shares Offered     Offering     Offering     Offering     Shares Offered     Owned     Owned  
 
Kenneth D. Buroker(14)
    202,266             202,266       *       *             202,266       *  
Shawn D. Guse (15)
    40,970             40,970       *       *             40,970       *  
T. Rockwell Mackie(16)
    2,430,439             2,430,439       6.4       5.0             2,430,439       5.0  
Michael J. Cudahy(17)
    4,792,656       138,243       4,654,413       12.6       9.6       310,803       4,343,610       9.0  
John J. McDonough(18)
    54,827               54,827       *       *             54,827       *  
John P. Neis(19)
    6,597,135       185,800       6,411,335       17.3       13.3       417,724       5,993,611       12.4  
Cary J. Nolan(20)
    281,902       8,242       273,660       *       *       5,358       268,302       *  
Carlos A. Perez(21)
    27,200             27,200       *       *             27,200       *  
Sam R. Leno(22)
    13,600             13,600       *       *             13,600       *  
Frances S. Taylor(23)
    13,600             13,600       *       *             13,600       *  
All directors and executive officers as a group
    18,951,299       332,285       18,619,014       48.6 %     37.9 %     733,885       17,885,129       36.4 %
Other selling shareholders:
                                                               
780 TomoTherapy Partners(24)
    389,017       11,273       377,744       1.0       *       25,342       352,402       *  
AKRA Investments, LLC(25)
    16,831       492       16,339       *       *       1,107       15,232       *  
Baird Venture Partners I Limited Partnership(26)
    287,358       8,401       278,957       *       *       18,888       260,069       *  
BVP I Affiliates Fund Limited Partnership(27)
    200,762       5,870       194,892       *       *       13,196       181,696       *  
James Hanson(28)
    128,846       3,767       125,079       *       *       8,470       116,609       *  
Terry F. and Mary W. Kelly(29)
    82,519       2,391       80,128       *       *       5,376       74,752       *  
Grey Ghost, LLC(30)
    131,003       3,830       127,173       *       *       4,330       122,843       *  
Michael G. Laskis(31)
    97,934       2,784       95,150       *       *       6,257       88,893       *  
Mayo Foundation for Medical Education and Research(32)
    746,433       21,707       724,726       2.0       1.5       48,804       675,922       1.4  
Anne E. Ross(33)
    81,221       2,353       78,868       *       *       5,292       73,576       *  
SKL Investment Group, LLC(34)
    50,494       1,476       49,018       *       *       3,320       45,698       *  
State of Wisconsin Investment Board(35)
    506,467       14,808       491,659       1.3       1.0       33,290       458,369       *  
David Walsh(36)
    174,387       5,018       169,369       *       *       11,284       158,085       *  
Allan A. Weissburg(37)
    77,062       2,254       74,808       *       *       5,065       69,743       *  
David Weissburg(38)
    25,840       755       25,085       *       *       1,699       23,386       *  
David and Leslie Weissburg, as tenants in common(39)
    46,974       1,374       45,600       *       *       3,087       42,513       *  
Leslie Weissburg(40)
    25,840       755       25,085       *       *       1,699       23,386       *  
 
* Less than 1%
 
(1) Consists of 3,143,678 shares of common stock issuable upon the conversion of Series B, C and D convertible preferred stock held by Venture Investors Early Stage Fund III Limited Partnership,
footnotes continued on following page

101


Table of Contents

1,615,076 shares of common stock issuable upon the conversion of Series A and D convertible preferred stock held by Venture Investors Early Stage Fund II Limited Partnership, 1,596,389 shares of common stock issuable upon the conversion of Series B, C, D and E convertible preferred stock held by Advantage Capital Wisconsin Partners I Limited Partnership, 214,794 shares of common stock held by Venture Investors Early Stage Fund II Limited Partnership, 14,438 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of options held by Venture Investors Early Stage Fund III Limited Partnership, 6,620 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of options held by Advantage Capital Wisconsin Partners I Limited Partnership and 6,140 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of options held by Venture Investors Early Stage Fund II Limited Partnership. Venture Investors, LLC is the general partner of Advantage Capital Wisconsin Partners I Limited Partnership, Venture Investors Early Stage Fund II Limited Partnership and Venture Investors Early Stage Fund II Limited Partnership. The investment decisions of Venture Investors, LLC are generally made collectively by its managers, John P. Neis, Roger Ganser, Scott Button, George Arida, Winslow Sargeant and Paul Weiss. Each such manager disclaims beneficial ownership of the shares held by the foregoing entities except to the extent of his or her pecuniary interest therein. The address of the foregoing individuals and entities is c/o Venture Investors, LLC 505 South Rosa Road, #201, Madison, Wisconsin 53719.
 
(2) Consists of 429,541 shares of common stock, 4,462,116 shares of common stock issuable upon the conversion of Series A, B, C and D convertible preferred stock, and 27,200 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of options. Avalon Technology LLC is controlled by Avalon Capital Group Inc. The controlling shareholder of Avalon Capital Group Inc. is Theodore Waitt and, as such, Mr. Waitt is considered to be the beneficial owner of these securities. Mr. Waitt disclaims beneficial ownership of the shares held by the foregoing entity except to the extent of his pecuniary interest therein. The address of the foregoing individual and entities is Post Office Box 2409, La Jolla, California 92038, c/o Avalon Capital Group.
 
(3) Consists of 4,765,456 shares of our common stock issuable to Endeavors Group, LLC upon the conversion of Series C, D and E convertible preferred stock and 27,200 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of options. Michael J. Cudahy is the managing member of The Endeavors Group, LLC and, by virtue of his position, may be deemed to be the beneficial owner of these securities. Each of the managing member and other members of Endeavors Group, LLC disclaims beneficial ownership of the shares held by Endeavors Group, LLC except to the extent of any pecuniary interest therein. The address of the foregoing individual and entity is c/o Endeavors Groups, LLC, 9100 N. Swan Road, Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53224.
 
(4) Consists of 2,291,260 shares of common stock issuable upon the conversion of Series B, C, D and E convertible preferred stock and 27,200 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of options. The investment decisions of Open Prairie Ventures I, L.P. are made collectively by its Investment Committee, the members of which are James M. Schultz, Michael D. Peck, Dennis Beard, Jason Wrone and Lisa Probst. Each member of the Investment Committee disclaims beneficial ownership of the shares held by Open Prairie Ventures I, L.P., except to the extent of his or her pecuniary interest therein. The address of Open Prairie Ventures I, L.P. and the foregoing individuals is 400 East Jefferson, Effingham, Illinois 62401.
 
(5) The investment decisions of Ascension Health Ventures LLC are made by Anthony J. Speranzo, Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer. Mr. Speranzo disclaims beneficial ownership of the shares held by Ascension Health Ventures LLC, except to the extent of his pecuniary interest therein. The address of Ascension Health Ventures, LLC and Mr. Speranzo is 4600 Edmundson Road, Post Office Box 45998, St. Louis, Missouri 63145.
 
(6) The investment decisions of the Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation are made by Carl Gulbrandsen, Managing Director. Mr. Gulbrandsen disclaims beneficial ownership of the shares held by the Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation except to the extent of his pecuniary interest therein. The address of the foregoing individual and entity and Mr. Gulbrandsen is 614 Walnut Street, 13 th  Floor, Madison, Wisconsin 53705.
footnotes continued on following page


102


Table of Contents

(7) Consists of 475,951 shares of common stock and 362,056 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of options.
 
(8) Consists of 1,140,224 shares of common stock held by Cosmic Debris, LP, 952,702 shares of common stock held by Mr. Reckwerdt, 322,167 shares of common stock issuable to Mr. Reckwerdt under our Series A investment agreement and 34,000 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of options.
 
(9) Consists of 382,622 shares of common stock and 20,400 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of options.
 
(10) Consists of 27,200 shares of common stock and 40,970 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of options.
 
(11) Consists of 170,000 shares of common stock and 95,370 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of options.
 
(12) Consists of 387,872 shares of common stock and 17,000 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of options.
 
(13) Consists of 27,200 shares of common stock and 40,970 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of options.
 
(14) Consists of 188,666 shares of common stock and 13,600 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of options.
 
(15) Consists of 40,970 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of options.
 
(16) Consists of 2,074,272 shares of common stock, 322,167 shares of common stock issuable to Mr. Mackie under our Series A Investment Agreement and 34,000 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of options.
 
(17) Consists of 4,765,456 shares of our common stock issuable to Endeavors Group, LLC upon the conversion of Series C, D and E convertible preferred stock and 27,200 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of options. Mr. Cudahy is the managing member of The Endeavors Group, LLC and, by virtue of his position, may be deemed to be the beneficial owner of the securities. Mr. Cudahy disclaims such beneficial ownership except to the extent of his pecuniary interest therein.
 
(18) Consists of 40,800 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of options and 14,027 shares of common stock.
 
(19) Consists of 3,143,678 shares of common stock issuable upon the conversion of Series B, C and D convertibles preferred stock held by Venture Investors Early Stage Fund III Limited Partnership, 1,615,076 shares of common stock issuable upon the conversion of Series A and D convertible preferred stock held by Venture Investors Early Stage Fund II Limited Partnership, 1,596,389 shares of common stock issuable upon the conversion of Series B, C, D and E convertible preferred stock held by Advantage Capital Wisconsin Partners Limited Partnership, 214,794 shares of common stock held by Venture Investors Early Stage Fund II Limited Partnership, 14,438 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of options held by Venture Investors Early Stage Fund III Limited Partnership, 6,620 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of options held by Advantage Capital Wisconsin Partners I Limited Partnership and 6,140 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of options held by Venture Investors Early Stage Fund II Limited Partnership. Venture Investors LLC is the general partner of Advantage Capital Wisconsin Partners I Limited Partnership, Venture Investors Early Stage Fund II Limited Partnership and Venture Investors Early Stage Fund III Limited Partnership. The investment decisions of Venture Investors, LLC are taken collectively by six managers, including Mr. Neis. Each such manager and Mr. Neis disclaim such beneficial ownership except to the extent of his pecuniary interest therein. The address of Mr. Neis is c/o Venture Investors, LLC, 505 South Rosa Road, #201, Madison, Wisconsin 53719.
 
(20) Consists of 197,744 shares of common stock and 84,158 shares of common stock issuable upon the conversion of Series E convertible preferred stock.
footnotes continued on following page


103


Table of Contents

(21) Consists of 27,200 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of options.
 
(22) Consists of 13,600 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of options.
 
(23) Consists of 13,600 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of options.
 
(24) Consists of 389,017 shares of common stock issuable upon the conversion of Series B, C, D and E convertible preferred stock. The investment decisions of 780 TomoTherapy Partners are made by Michael E. Skindrud, managing partner and Richard J. Bliss, managing partner. Each of Mr. Skindrud and Mr. Bliss disclaims such beneficial ownership, except to the extent of his pecuniary interest therein. The address of the foregoing individuals and entity is c/o Godfrey & Kahn, S.C., 1 East Main Street, Suite 500, Madison, WI 53703.
 
(25) Consists of 16,831 shares of common stock issuable upon the conversion of Series E convertible preferred stock. The investment decisions of AKRA Investments, LLC are made by Robert F. Schultz, President. Mr. Schultz disclaims such beneficial ownership except to the extent of his pecuniary interest therein. The address of the foregoing individual and entity is Post Office Box 1225, Effingham, Illinois 62401.
 
(26) Consists of 66,118 shares of common stock, 221,240 shares of common stock issuable upon the conversion of Series B, C, D and E convertible preferred stock. Baird Venture Partners I Limited Partnership is an affiliate of Robert W. Baird & Co. Incorporated, a registered broker-dealer. Robert W. Baird & Co. is an underwriter of this offering. The shares were acquired in the ordinary course of the selling shareholder’s investment business and not for the purposes of resale or distribution. Based on information provided by or on behalf of Baird Venture Partners I Limited Partnership, at the time of the purchase of the securities to be resold, it had no agreements, plans or understandings, directly or indirectly, with any person to distribute the securities. The investment decisions of Baird Venture Partners I Limited Partnership are made by Paul Purcell, Paul Carbone, Bob Venable, Peter Shagory and William Filip. The foregoing individuals disclaim such beneficial ownership except to the extent of any pecuniary interest therein. The address of the foregoing individuals and entity is 777 East Wisconsin Avenue, Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53202.
 
(27) Consists of 46,137 shares of common stock, 154,625 shares of common stock issuable upon the conversion of Series B, C, D and E convertible preferred stock. BVP I Affiliates Fund Limited Partnership is an affiliate of Robert W. Baird & Co. Incorporated, a registered broker-dealer. Robert W. Baird & Co. is an underwriter of this offering. The shares were acquired in the ordinary course of the selling shareholder’s investment business and not for the purposes of resale or distribution. Based on information provided by or on behalf of BVP I Affiliates Fund Limited Partnership, at the time of the purchase of the securities to be resold, it had no agreements, plans or understandings, directly or indirectly, with any person to distribute the securities. The investment decisions of BVP I Affiliates Fund Limited Partnership are made by Paul Purcell, Paul Carbone, Bob Venable, Peter Shagory and William Filip. The foregoing individuals disclaim such beneficial ownership except to the extent of any pecuniary interest therein. The address of the forgoing individuals and entity is 777 East Wisconsin Avenue, Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53202.
 
(28) Consists of 128,846 shares of common stock issuable upon the conversion of Series B, C and D convertible preferred stock. The address of Mr. Hanson is 3440 High Point Road, Madison, Wisconsin, 53719.
 
(29) Consists of 81,785 shares of common stock issuable upon the conversion of Series B, C, D and E convertible preferred stock and 734 conversion of Series D convertible preferred stock underlying Series D warrants. The address of Mr. Kelly is 1007 Hillside Avenue, Madison, Wisconsin, 53705.
 
(30) Consists of 131,003 shares of common stock issuable upon the conversion of Series B, C, D and E convertible preferred stock. The investment decisions of Grey Ghost, LLC are made by Max G. Lagally, Member. Mr. Lagally disclaims such beneficial ownership except to the extent of his pecuniary interest therein. The address of the foregoing individual and entity is 5110 Juneau Road, Madison, Wisconsin 53705.
footnotes continued on following page


104


Table of Contents

(31) Consists of 97,934 shares of common stock issuable upon the conversion of Series B, C, D and E convertible preferred stock. The address of Mr. Laskis is 150 East Gilman, Post Office Box 1497, Madison, Wisconsin, 53701.
 
(32) Consists of 742,484 shares of common stock issuable upon the conversion of Series B, C and D convertible preferred stock and 3,949 shares of common stock issuable upon the conversion of Series D convertible preferred stock underlying Series D warrants. The investment decisions of Mayo Foundation for Medical Education and Research are made by Jeffrey G. Torborg, New Ventures Manager. Mr. Torborg disclaims such beneficial ownership, except to the extent of his pecuniary interest therein. The address of the foregoing individual and entity is Mayo Clinic Health Solutions, 200 First Street SW, Rochester, Minnesota 55905.
 
(33) Consists of 80,498 shares of common stock issuable upon the conversion of Series B, C, D and E convertible preferred stock and 723 shares of common stock issuable upon the conversion of Series D convertible preferred stock underlying Series D warrants. The address of Ms. Ross is 150 East Gilman, Post Office Box 1497, Madison, Wisconsin, 53701.
 
(34) Consists of 50,494 shares of common stock issuable upon the conversion of Series E convertible preferred stock. The investment decisions of SKL Investment Group, LLC are made by Steven L. Grissom, Administrative Officer. Mr. Grissom disclaims such beneficial ownership, except to the extent of his pecuniary interest therein. The address of the foregoing individual and entity is 121 South 17th Street, Post Office Box 1097, Mattoon, Illinois 61938.
 
(35) Consists of 506,467 shares of common stock issuable upon the conversion of Series D and E convertible preferred stock. The investment decisions of State of Wisconsin Investment Board are made by Chris Prestigiacomo, Portfolio Manager. Mr. Prestigiacomo disclaims such beneficial ownership, except to the extent of his pecuniary interest therein. The address of the foregoing individual and entity is 121 E. Wilson St., Madison, Wisconsin 53703.
 
(36) Consists of 174,387 shares of common stock issuable upon the conversion of Series B, C, D and E convertible preferred stock. The address of Mr. Walsh is 150 East Gilman, Post Office Box 1497, Madison, Wisconsin, 53701.
 
(37) Consists of 77,062 shares of common stock issuable upon the conversion of Series B, C, D and E convertible preferred stock. The investment decisions of Allan A. Weissburg Revocable Trust are made by Allan A. Weissburg, Trustee. Mr. Weissburg disclaims such beneficial ownership, except to the extent of his pecuniary interest therein. The address of the foregoing individual and entity is 11502 Hemingway Drive, Reston, VA 20194. The address of Mr. Weissburg is 11502 Hemingway Drive, Reston, Virginia, 20194.
 
(38) Consists of 25,840 shares of common stock issuable upon the conversion of Series B convertible preferred stock. The address of Mr. Weissburg is 4213 Winnequah Road, Monona, Wisconsin, 53716.
 
(39) Consists of 46,974 shares of common stock issuable upon the conversion of Series B and C convertible preferred stock. The address of Mr. Weissburg is 4213 Winnequah Road, Monona, Wisconsin, 53716.
 
(40) Consists of 25,840 shares of common stock issuable upon the conversion of Series B convertible preferred stock. The address of Mr. Weissburg is 4213 Winnequah Road, Monona, Wisconsin, 53716.


105


Table of Contents

 
TRANSACTIONS WITH RELATED PERSONS, PROMOTERS AND CERTAIN CONTROL PERSONS
 
Our policy is to enter into transactions with related parties on terms that, on the whole, are no more favorable, and no less favorable, than those available from unaffiliated third parties. Based on our experience in the business sectors in which we operate and the terms of our transactions with unaffiliated third parties, we believe that all of the transactions described below met this policy standard at the time they occurred.
 
License Agreement with Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation
 
We license significant technology incorporated in the Hi Art system from Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation, or WARF, under a license agreement dated February 22, 1999. As of the date of this prospectus, WARF beneficially owns 5.3% of our outstanding shares of common stock on an as-converted basis. Under the license agreement, WARF granted us an exclusive license to use various patents related to methods and apparatus for radiation therapy to produce medical applications of all types. At the time of the execution of our license, WARF had an existing license agreement with NOMOS Corporation for several of the same patents. Our license with WARF is exclusive except for these prior rights granted to NOMOS. Under its agreement with WARF, NOMOS is only permitted to exploit the licensed technology to create products in the medical imaging field, and produce add-on accessories and software designed to operate in conjunction with a constrained rotation linear accelerator made by a third party. NOMOS is not permitted to use the licensed patents to produce and sell their own fully integrated radiation therapy system and does not directly compete with us. NOMOS may, however, produce add-on devices that can be incorporated into an existing system, which may reduce the need for a customer to upgrade to the Hi Art System and adversely affect our business in the future. Under the license agreement, we agreed to establish and actively pursue a development plan (previously submitted to and approved by WARF) to use the licensed patents to create products for sale in the retail market.
 
In consideration for the license, we agreed to pay a license fee, a portion of which was already paid under the terms of a prior license agreement. In addition, we agreed to reimburse WARF for 80% of the actual costs WARF incurred in filing, prosecuting and maintaining the licensed patents. For the balance of the license fee and in respect of our reimbursement obligations, in lieu of a cash payment, we issued 644,640 shares of our common stock to WARF under the terms of a separate equity agreement entered into concurrently with the license agreement. In addition to the license fees above, we agreed to pay earned royalties based on the number of products we sell or lease that use the inventions claimed in the licensed patents. We also agreed to a minimum royalty payment if a certain number of sales are not made each year. Since 2004, we have sold enough machines each year such that the earned royalty has exceeded the minimum royalty. We expensed payments to WARF totaling $504,000 in 2004, $672,000 in 2005 and $1,272,000 in 2006.
 
The license agreement will terminate if either (1) no licensed patent remains an enforceable patent, or (2) the earned royalties cease for more than eight consecutive quarters. We may also terminate the agreement at any time by giving at least 90 days prior written notice to WARF. If we default in the timely payment of any fees due or the timely submission of a development report, fail to actively pursue the development plan, or commit any breach of any other covenant, and fail to remedy any such breach of default within 90 days, or if we commit any act of bankruptcy or become insolvent, WARF may terminate the agreement.
 
WARF is primarily responsible for enforcing and defending the licensed patents. In the event that we believe there is an infringement of any of the licensed patents, we may provide WARF with written notice of such infringement and WARF has the right to determine the best course of action. If WARF reaches a settlement that includes granting a license for the relevant patents, the terms may be no more favorable than those contained in our license agreement and WARF is required to share the income from any such license with us. If we are asked by WARF to take or join in any action against a potential infringer, we are entitled to reimbursement of our reasonable expenses only after WARF has been reimbursed for its reasonable expenses. If WARF does not take any action within six months of receiving our notice, we may request that WARF do so and WARF is obligated to comply if we reimburse WARF for half of its actual expenses incurred in bringing any action.


106


Table of Contents

Financing Transactions
 
Original rounds of financing.   Since our founding, we have raised capital through multiple rounds of financing. Between 1999 and 2005, we raised capital through sales of our Series A, B, C and D shares of preferred stock. Each share of preferred stock will automatically convert into shares of common stock upon the closing of this offering. Prior to the issuance of the Series D preferred stock, we instituted a 50-to-1 stock split applicable to all outstanding shares. Prior to the issuance of Series E preferred stock, described in detail below, we instituted a four-to-one stock split applicable to all outstanding shares.
 
Issuance of Series E preferred stock.   In December 2005, we sold an aggregate of 2,356,435 shares of Series E preferred stock at a price per share of $5.94 for an aggregate purchase price of $14.0 million. Each shares of Series E preferred stock will automatically convert into one share of common stock upon the closing of this offering. Of these 2,356,435 shares of Series E preferred stock, an aggregate of 1,308,010 shares were sold to the following directors, officers and holders of more than five percent of our voting securities:
 
                 
          Shares of Common
 
          Stock Issuable
 
          Upon Conversion
 
    Aggregate
    of the Series E
 
    Purchase Price     Preferred Stock  
 
Ascension Health
  $ 399,992       67,325  
The Endeavors Group, LLC
    5,767,600       970,784  
Open Prairie Ventures I, L.P. 
    999,996       168,316  
Stephen C. Hathaway
    20,200       3,400  
John J. McDonough
    83,337       14,027  
Cary J. Nolan
    499,998       84,158  
 
Issuance of Contingent Common Stock
 
Under the investment agreement for our Series A preferred stock, our founders and the holders of the Series A preferred stock were entitled to receive an aggregate of 1,288,669 shares of common stock upon the closing of an initial public offering. This number is based on the original number of shares of Series A preferred stock issued multiplied by 2.86. In February 2007, our board of directors approved the issuance of these shares in full satisfaction of this right. Based on the allocation set forth in the investment agreement, the shares were issued in April 2007 as follows:
 
  •  429,541 shares issuable to Avalon Technology, LLC;
 
  •  214,794 shares issuable to Venture Investors Early Stage Fund II Limited Partnership;
 
  •  322,167 shares issuable to T. Rockwell Mackie; and
 
  •  322,167 shares issuable to Paul J. Reckwerdt.
 
Sales of our Equity Securities
 
In October 2006, the Chairman of our Board, T. Rockwell Mackie, sold an aggregate of 190,400 shares of common stock to two individuals, and our President, Paul Reckwerdt, sold 190,400 common shares to one individual, in each case, at a price per share of $6.75 resulting in an aggregate proceeds of $1.3 million to each seller. All necessary waivers from us and holders of our preferred stock were obtained prior to these transactions.
 
Rights of Appointment
 
Our current board of directors consists of ten directors. The bylaws in effect prior to this offering require that our board have not less than nine and not more than eleven members. Under the investment


107


Table of Contents

agreements in effect prior to this offering the following shareholders or groups of shareholders have the right to appoint directors to our board:
 
         
    Number of
  Name of
Shareholder or Group of Shareholders
  Directors   Director
 
Avalon Technology LLC(1)
  One director   Sam R. Leno
Open Prairie Ventures I, L.P.(1)
  One director   Frances S. Taylor
The Endeavors Group, LLC(1)
  One director   Michael J. Cudahy
Majority vote of Venture Investors Early Stage Fund III, LP, Venture Investors Early Stage Fund II Limited Partnership, and Advantage Capital Wisconsin Partners I Limited Partnership(1)
  One director   John P. Neis
Majority vote of all preferred shareholders
  One director   Cary J. Nolan
T. Rockwell Mackie and Paul J. Reckwerdt(1)
  Two directors   T. Rockwell Mackie
Paul J. Reckwerdt
 
(1) Holder of 5% or more of our equity securities.
 
Our Chief Executive Officer also serves as a director and the remaining one to three directors, depending on the number of directors then serving on our board, are appointed by holders of all or our issued and outstanding stock, including our preferred stock on an as-converted basis.
 
Under the investment agreements for our Series A, B, C and D preferred stock each of Venture Investors Early Stage Fund II LP, Avalon Technology, LLC, Baird Venture Partners I LP, BVP Affiliates I Fund LP, Open Prairie Ventures I L.P., Ascension Health, holders of at least 256,496 shares of Series B preferred stock and holders of at least 95,200 shares of Series C preferred stock were each granted the right to appoint one observer to attend meetings of our board of directors. All rights to appoint directors and observers will terminate upon the closing of this offering, although currently serving directors that were appointed prior to this offering will continue to serve pursuant to their appointment until the annual meeting of shareholders at which the term of their class of director expires.
 
We are not a party to, and are not aware of, any voting agreements among our shareholders.
 
Registration Rights
 
Certain of our shareholders have registration rights under our amended and restated investment agreement, which will become effective upon completion of this offering. After giving effect to the conversion of outstanding preferred stock into shares of common stock upon completion of this offering, 24,939,356 shares of common stock will be entitled to registration rights described below. In addition, 10,039 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of warrants to purchase our preferred stock will be entitled to registration rights when issued. The security holders entitled to registration rights include the following directors, officer and holders of more than five percent of our voting securities and their affiliates: Ascension Health; Avalon Technology, LLC; The Endeavors Group, LLC; entities affiliated with Venture Investors LLC; Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation; Paul J. Reckwerdt; and Stephen C. Hathaway.
 
Demand registration rights.   Subject to the limitations agreed to by substantially all of our shareholders of the lock-up agreements described in “Underwriting — Lock-Up Agreements”, at any time following the closing of this offering, we may be required to file a registration statement in respect in respect of shares of common stock held by our former preferred shareholders. Under our investment agreement, a majority of such shareholders may require us to register shares of common stock held by them up to three times, except that such shareholders may demand an unlimited number of registrations on Form S-3.
 
Following a request to effect a registration by our shareholders as described above, we are required to offer the other shareholders that are entitled to registration rights an opportunity to include their shares in the registration statement. In the event that the managing underwriter advises the registering shareholders in


108


Table of Contents

writing that marketing factors require a limitation on the number of shares that can be included in the registration statement, the number of shares that may be included in the underwriting will be allocated among all the shareholders seeking to include shares in the registration statement on a pro rata basis based on the number of registrable securities sought to be registered by all such shareholders. The number of shares to be included by our shareholders entitled to registration rights shall not be reduced unless all other securities held by our other shareholders are first entirely excluded from the underwriting and registration.
 
Piggyback registration rights.   Under our investment agreement, holders of registrable securities are entitled to 30 days’ prior notice before we file any registration statement in the future and have the right to request that we include their shares in such registration statement. If the managing underwriter advises in writing that marketing factors require a limitation on the number of shares that can be included in the registration statement, the number of common shares that may be included in the registration and underwriting shall be allocated among all registration right holders in proportion to the respective amounts of common shares held by such registration right holders at the time of the filing of the registration statement.
 
Termination.   All registration rights granted to holders of registrable securities terminate on such date after the closing of this offering as all common shares held or entitled to be held upon conversion by such holder may immediately be sold under Rule 144 under the Securities Act during any 90-day period.
 
Expenses.   We will pay all expenses in carrying out the above registrations, including the fees and expenses of one counsel to the selling shareholders.
 
Agreements with Directors and Officers and Certain Shareholders
 
Cudahy Aircraft Agreement
 
We entered into an agreement for the periodic use of aircraft and flight crew services with Cozzens and Cudahy Air Inc., a company owned in part by Michael Cudahy, one of our directors. The agreement became effective on April 25, 2005, and provides for an initial term of one year and automatically renews on a month-to-month basis, unless terminated by either party upon thirty days’ written notice. Under the agreement, we make use of Mr. Cudahy’s aircraft and are required to pay all relevant expenses in connection with our use and operation of the aircraft. In connection with this agreement, we paid $25,000 in 2004, $38,000 in 2005 and $18,550 in 2006. In 2007, we have incurred no payment obligations under the agreement through March 31, 2007.
 
Stock Option Grant.
 
We have granted options to purchase shares of our common stock to certain employees, directors, and advisors. See “Management — Director Compensation,” “Compensation Discussion and Analysis” and “Management — Option Grants in Last Fiscal Year.”
 
Exculpation, Indemnification and Insurance.
 
We intend to enter into indemnification agreements with each of our directors and executive officers prior to the completion of this offering. See “Management — Limitations of Directors’ Liability and Indemnification Agreements.”
 
Review and Approval of Related Transactions
 
We have adopted a policy providing that all material transactions between us and our officers, directors and other affiliates must be:
 
  •      approved by a majority of the members of our board of directors and by a majority of the disinterested members of our board of directors; and
 
  •      on terms no less favorable to us than those that we believe could be obtained from unaffiliated third parties.


109


Table of Contents

 
In general, our policy is to enter into transactions with related parties on terms that, on the whole, are no more favorable and no less favorable, than those available from unaffiliated third parties. Based on our experience in the business sectors in which we operate and the terms of our transactions with unaffiliated third parties, we believe that all of the transactions described below met this policy standard at the time they occurred.


110


Table of Contents

 
DESCRIPTION OF CAPITAL STOCK
 
Upon the completion of this offering and the effectiveness of our amended and restated articles of incorporation, we will be authorized to issue up to 200,000,000 shares of common stock, par value $.01 per share, and up to 10,000,000 shares of preferred stock, par value $.01 per share. The description below summarizes the material terms of our common stock and preferred stock, as well as options and warrants to purchase our common stock and provisions of our amended and restated articles of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws. This description is only a summary. For more detailed information, you should refer to our amended and restated articles of incorporation and bylaws that will be effective upon closing of this offering, and to the applicable provisions of Wisconsin law. Copies of our amended and restated articles of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws will be filed with the SEC as exhibits to the registration statement of which this prospectus forms a part.
 
Common Stock
 
Holders of our common stock are entitled to one vote for each share held on all matters submitted to a vote of shareholders. Our outstanding shares of common stock are, and the shares offered by us in this offering will be, when issued and paid for, fully paid and nonassessable. Under the Wisconsin Business Corporation Law, however, shareholders of a Wisconsin corporation, such as us, are personally liable for claims of employees for services prior to June 14, 2006, not to exceed six months services in any one case. The rights, preferences and privileges of holders of common stock are subject to, and may be adversely affected by, the rights of the holders of shares of any series of preferred stock that we may designate and issue in the future.
 
Preferred Stock
 
Effective immediately upon closing of this offering, there will be no shares of preferred stock outstanding because all our outstanding shares of preferred stock will have been converted automatically into shares of common stock at such time. Upon the completion of this offering and the effectiveness of our amended and restated articles of incorporation, our board of directors will be authorized to issue from time to time shares of preferred stock in one or more series without shareholder approval. Our board of directors will have the discretion to determine the designation, powers, privileges and rights, including voting rights, dividend rights, conversion rights, redemption privileges and liquidation preferences, of each series of preferred stock.
 
The purpose of authorizing our board of directors to issue preferred stock and determine its rights and preferences is to eliminate delays associated with a shareholder vote on specific issuances. It is not possible to state the actual effect of the issuance of any shares of preferred stock on the rights of holders of common stock until the board of directors determines the specific rights attached to that preferred stock.
 
The effects of issuing preferred stock could include one or more of the following:
 
  •      decreasing the amount of earnings and assets available for distribution to holders of common stock;
 
  •      restricting dividends on the common stock;
 
  •      diluting the voting power of the common stock;
 
  •      impairing the liquidation rights of the common stock; or
 
  •      delaying, deferring or preventing changes in our control or management.
 
Warrants
 
As of March 31, 2007, there were outstanding warrants to purchase 10,039 shares of our Series D preferred stock at an exercise price of $1.84 per share. The warrants expire on February 18, 2009. These warrants provide for adjustments in the event of stock dividends, stock splits, reclassifications or other changes in our corporate structure. Certain of the holders of these warrants have registration rights that are outlined


111


Table of Contents

below under the heading “Transactions with Related Persons, Promoters and Control Persons — Registration Rights.”
 
Anti-Takeover Effects of Provisions of Wisconsin Law, Our Amended and Restated Articles of Incorporation and Amended and Restated Bylaws
 
Our amended and restated articles of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws, which are to become effective at the closing of this offering, and Wisconsin law contain provisions that could delay or prevent a change of control of our company or changes in our board of directors that our shareholders might consider favorable. The following is a summary of these provisions.
 
Authorized but Unissued Shares of Preferred Stock and Common Stock
 
The ability to issue authorized but unissued shares of preferred stock and to establish the relative designation, powers, preferences and rights of each series of preferred stock makes it possible for our board of directors to issue preferred stock with voting or other rights or preferences that could impede the success of any attempt to acquire us. These and other provisions may have the effect of deferring hostile takeovers or delaying changes in control of our company or removal of our incumbent directors or management.
 
Our board of directors also may approve the issuance of authorized but unissued shares of our common stock without further action by our shareholders, unless such action is required in a particular case by applicable laws or regulations or by the Nasdaq Stock Market, Inc. or any other stock exchange upon which our common stock may then be listed. Our shareholders do not have the preemptive right to purchase or subscribe to any additional shares of common stock that we may issue. Authorized but unissued shares may be used for a variety of corporate purposes, including future public or private offerings to raise additional capital or to facilitate acquisitions of other businesses. One of the effects of the existence of authorized but unissued shares may be to enable our board of directors to issue shares to persons friendly to our management, which could render more difficult or discourage an attempt to obtain control of us by means of a merger, tender offer, proxy contest or otherwise, and thereby protect the continuity of our management and possibly deprive our shareholders of opportunities to sell their shares of common stock at prices higher than prevailing market prices.
 
Advance Notification of Shareholder Nominations and Proposals
 
Our bylaws establish an advance notice procedure for shareholder proposals to be brought before an annual meeting of our shareholders, including proposed nominations of candidates for election to the board of directors, other than nominations made by us. In most circumstances, a shareholder must provide notice of any proposed business or director nominations at least 90 calendar days and not more that 120 calendar days before the one-year anniversary date of our proxy statement in connection with the previous year’s annual meeting of shareholders. The notice must also include descriptions of certain matters as set forth in our bylaws. Although our bylaws do not give the board of directors the power to approve or disapprove shareholder nominations or candidates or proposals regarding other business to be conducted at an annual or special meeting, our bylaws may have the effect of precluding certain actions at a meeting if the proper procedures are not followed or may discourage or deter a potential acquiror from conducting a solicitation of proxies to elect the acquiror’s own slate of directors or otherwise attempting to obtain control of our company.
 
Inability of Shareholders to Act by Less than Unanimous Written Consent; Special Meetings
 
Our shareholders may act only by unanimous written consent in lieu of a meeting. Our amended and restated bylaws further provide that special meetings of shareholders may be called only by a majority of our board of directors or our Chief Executive Officer upon demand of the holders of record of shares representing ten percent of our outstanding shares of common stock or as otherwise required by law. These provisions may lengthen the amount of time required to take shareholder actions. As a result, a shareholder or group of shareholders that controls a majority of our common stock would not be able to amend our bylaws or remove directors except at a shareholders’ meeting.


112


Table of Contents

Classified Board of Directors and Related Provisions
 
Our amended and restated bylaws provide that our board of directors will be divided into three classes of directors (each class containing approximately one-third of the total number of directors) serving staggered three-year terms. As a result, approximately one-third of our board of directors will be elected each year. This classified board provision will prevent a third party who acquires control of a majority of our outstanding voting stock from obtaining control of our board of directors until the second annual shareholder meeting following the date the acquiror obtains the controlling interest. The number of directors constituting our board of directors is determined from time to time by resolution of our board of directors. Our amended and restated bylaws also provides that directors may be removed only for “cause” and by the shareholders entitled to vote generally in the election of directors. This provision, in conjunction with the provisions of our amended and restated bylaws authorizing our board of directors to fill vacancies on the board by majority vote, will prevent shareholders from removing incumbent directors without cause and filling the vacancies with other persons.
 
Voting Requirements on Amending our Amended and Restated Bylaws or our Amended and Restated Articles of Incorporation
 
Our amended and restated bylaws provide that amendments of our bylaws must be approved by either our shareholders at a regular or special shareholders’ meeting or our board of directors. Our amended and restated articles of incorporation can be amended in accordance with the Wisconsin Business Corporation Law.
 
Wisconsin Business Corporation Law
 
We are subject to the provisions of the Wisconsin Business Corporation Law.
 
Business Combination Statute.   Wisconsin law regulates a broad range of business combinations between a “resident domestic corporation” and an “interested shareholder.”
 
A business combination is defined to include any of the following transactions:
 
  •      a merger or share exchange;
 
  •      a sale, lease, exchange, mortgage, pledge, transfer or other disposition of assets equal to 5% or more of the market value of the stock or consolidated assets of the resident domestic corporation or 10% of its consolidated earning power or income;
 
  •      the issuance of stock or rights to purchase stock with a market value equal to 5% or more of the outstanding stock of the resident domestic corporation;
 
  •      the adoption of a plan of liquidation or dissolution; or
 
  •      certain other transactions involving an interested shareholder.
 
A “resident domestic corporation” is defined to mean a Wisconsin corporation that has a class of voting stock that is registered or traded on a national securities exchange or that is registered under Section 12(g) of the Exchange Act and that, as of the relevant date, satisfies any of the following:
 
  •      its principal offices are located in Wisconsin;
 
  •      it has significant business operations located in Wisconsin;
 
  •      more than 10% of the holders of record of its shares are residents of Wisconsin; or
 
  •      more than 10% of its shares are held of record by residents of Wisconsin.
 
Following completion of this offering, we will be considered a resident domestic corporation for purposes of these statutory provisions.
 
An “interested shareholder” is defined to mean a person who beneficially owns, directly or indirectly, 10% or more of the voting power of the outstanding voting stock of a resident domestic corporation or who is


113


Table of Contents

an affiliate or associate of the resident domestic corporation and beneficially owned 10% or more of the voting power of its then outstanding voting stock within the last three years.
 
Under Wisconsin law, a resident domestic corporation cannot engage in a business combination with an interested shareholder for a period of three years following the date such person becomes an interested shareholder, unless the board of directors approved the business combination or the acquisition of the stock that resulted in the person becoming an interested shareholder before such acquisition. A resident domestic corporation may engage in a business combination with an interested shareholder after the three-year period with respect to that shareholder expires only if one or more of the following conditions is satisfied:
 
  •      the board of directors approved the acquisition of the stock prior to such shareholder’s acquisition date;
 
  •      the business combination is approved by a majority of the outstanding voting stock not beneficially owned by the interested shareholder; or
 
  •      the consideration to be received by shareholders meets certain fair price requirements of the statute with respect to form and amount.
 
Fair Price Statute.   The Wisconsin law also provides that certain mergers, share exchanges or sales, leases, exchanges or other dispositions of assets in a transaction involving a significant shareholder and a resident domestic corporation require a supermajority vote of shareholders in addition to any approval otherwise required, unless shareholders receive a fair price for their shares that satisfies a statutory formula. A “significant shareholder” for this purpose is defined as a person or group who beneficially owns, directly or indirectly, 10% or more of the voting stock of the resident domestic corporation, or is an affiliate of the resident domestic corporation and beneficially owned, directly or indirectly, 10% or more of the voting stock of the resident domestic corporation within the last two years. Any such business combination must be approved by 80% of the voting power of the resident domestic corporation’s stock and at least two-thirds of the voting power of its stock not beneficially owned by the significant shareholder who is party to the relevant transaction or any of its affiliates or associates, in each case voting together as a single group, unless the following fair price standards have been met:
 
  •      the aggregate value of the per share consideration is equal to the highest of:
 
  •      the highest price paid for any common shares of the corporation by the significant shareholder in the transaction in which it became a significant shareholder or within two years before the date of the business combination;
 
  •      the market value of the corporation’s shares on the date of commencement of any tender offer by the significant shareholder, the date on which the person became a significant shareholder or the date of the first public announcement of the proposed business combination, whichever is higher; or
 
  •      the highest preferential liquidation or dissolution distribution to which holders of the shares would be entitled; and
 
  •      either cash, or the form of consideration used by the significant shareholder to acquire the largest number of shares, is offered.
 
Control share voting restrictions.   Under Wisconsin law, unless otherwise provided in the articles of incorporation, the voting power of shares of a resident domestic corporation held by any person or group of persons acting together in excess of 20% of the voting power in the election of directors is limited (in voting on any matter) to 10% of the full voting power of those shares. This restriction does not apply to shares acquired directly from the resident domestic corporation, in certain specified transactions, or in a transaction in which the corporation’s shareholders have approved restoration of the full voting power of the otherwise restricted shares.


114


Table of Contents

Defensive action restrictions.   Wisconsin law provides that, in addition to the vote otherwise required by law or the articles of incorporation of a resident domestic corporation, the approval of the holders of a majority of the shares entitled to vote is required before such corporation can take certain action while a takeover offer is being made or after a takeover offer has been publicly announced and before it is concluded. This statute requires shareholder approval for the corporation to do either of the following:
 
  •      acquire more than 5% of its outstanding voting shares at a price above the market price from any individual or organization that owns more than 3% of the outstanding voting shares and has held such shares for less than two years, unless a similar offer is made to acquire all voting shares and all securities which may be converted into voting shares; or
 
  •      sell or option assets of the corporation which amount to 10% or more of the market value of the corporation, unless the corporation has at least three independent directors (directors who are not officers or employees) and a majority of the independent directors vote not to have this provision apply to the corporation.
 
Transfer Agent and Registrar
 
The transfer agent and registrar for our common stock is Wells Fargo Bank, National Association.
 
Nasdaq Global Market
 
We have applied for the quotation of our common stock on The Nasdaq Global Market under the symbol “TTPY.”


115


Table of Contents

 
SHARES ELIGIBLE FOR FUTURE SALE
 
Prior to this offering, there has been no market for our common stock and a significant public market for our common stock may not develop or be sustained after this offering. Future sales of substantial amounts of our common stock in the public market, or the perception that such sales may occur, could adversely affect prevailing market prices of our common stock. Furthermore, since only a limited number of shares will be available for sale shortly after this offering because of certain contractual and legal restrictions on resale described below, sales of substantial amounts of our common stock in the public market after the restrictions lapse could also adversely affect the trading price of our common stock and our ability to raise equity capital in the future.
 
Eligibility of Restricted Shares for Resale in the Public Markets
 
Upon completion of this offering, we will have outstanding an aggregate of 48,345,337 shares of common stock, assuming no exercise of options or warrants that were outstanding as of March 31, 2007. Of these shares, the 10,937,500 shares sold in this offering will be freely transferable without restriction or registration under the Securities Act, except for any shares purchased by one of our existing “affiliates,” as that term is defined in Rule 144 under the Securities Act, who may sell only the volume of shares described below and whose sales would be subject to additional restrictions described below. The remaining 37,407,837 shares of common stock will be held by our existing shareholder and will be considered “restricted securities” as defined in Rule 144. Restricted securities may be sold in the public market only if registered or if they qualify for an exemption from registration under Rules 144, 144(k) or 701 of the Securities Act, as described below.
 
Taking into account the lock-up agreements described below and the provisions of Rules 144, 144(k) and 701, the number of shares of common stock that will be available for sale in the public market is as follows:
 
  •      169,848 shares, which are not subject to the 180-day lock-up period described below, may be sold immediately upon the date of this prospectus;
 
  •      250,875 shares, which are not subject to the 180-day lock-up period described below, may be sold beginning 90 days after the date of this prospectus;
 
  •      33,199,580 additional shares may be sold upon expiration of the 180-day lock-up period described below, 18,245,256 of which would be subject to volume, manner of sale and other limitations under Rule 144; and
 
  •      the remaining 3,787,534 shares will be eligible for resale pursuant to Rule 144 upon the expiration of various one year holding periods during the six months following the expiration of the 180-day lock-up period.
 
In addition, the shares underlying options and warrants will become available for resale into the public markets as described below under “— Stock Options” and “— Warrants”.
 
Lock-up Agreements
 
The holders of approximately 99.5% of our outstanding shares of common stock, including all of our executive officers and directors, have signed lock-up agreements under which they have agreed not to transfer or dispose of, directly or indirectly, any shares of our common stock or any securities convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for shares of our common stock for 180 days after the date of this prospectus. In addition, the holders of options to purchase 1,450,463 shares, out of a total of vested options to purchase 2,069,862 shares as of March 31, 2007, have signed lock-up agreements. We have also agreed that we will not issue, sell or offer to sell any shares of common stock or any securities convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for shares of common stock for a period of 180 days after the date of this prospectus, other than (1) the shares of common stock sold in this offering, and (2) shares of common stock or stock options issued under our incentive stock plans and the filing of a registration statement on Form S-8 with respect to such


116


Table of Contents

plans. Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated may, in its sole discretion, at any time and without prior notice or announcement, release all or any portion of shares subject to the lock-up agreements.
 
The 180-day restricted period described above will be extended if during the last 17 days of the 180-day restricted period we issue an earnings release or material news or a material event relating to us occurs; or prior to the expiration of the 180-day restricted period, we announce that we will release earnings results during the 16-day period beginning on the last day of the 180-day period. In either case, the restrictions described above will continue to apply until the expiration of the 18-day period beginning on the issuance of the earnings release, the announcement of the material news or the occurrence of a material event, unless such extension is waived in writing by Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated.
 
The transfer restrictions in the lock-up agreements by our officers, directors and certain other shareholders described above are subject to the following exceptions:
 
  •      transactions relating to shares of common stock or other securities acquired in open market transactions, unless such transaction would result in the filing of any reports pursuant to Section 16 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934;
 
  •      bona fide gifts (which shall include, in the case of an individual, a gift occurring at death by will or intestacy, and transfers during lifetime to a trust or other entity for bona fide estate planning or tax purposes); and
 
  •      distributions to limited partners or shareholders or transfers to controlled or controlling entities or entities under common control, provided that in the case of any transfer or distribution pursuant to this or the immediately preceding bullet point, each donee, distributee or other transferee shall enter into a similar lock-up agreement.
 
Rule 144
 
In general, under Rule 144 as currently in effect, beginning 90 days after the effective date of the prospectus, a person, or persons whose shares are aggregated, who owns shares that were purchased from us or an affiliate of us at least one year previously, is entitled to sell within any three-month period a number of shares that does not exceed the greater of:
 
  •      one percent of our then-outstanding shares of common stock, which is expected to equal approximately 483,453 shares immediately after this offering; and
 
  •      the average weekly trading volume of our common stock on the Nasdaq Global Market during the four calendar weeks preceding the filing of a notice of the sale on Form 144.
 
Sales under Rule 144 are also subject to manner of sale provisions, notice requirements and the availability of current public information about us. Rule 144 also provides that our affiliates that are selling shares of our common stock that are not restricted shares must nonetheless comply with the same restrictions applicable to restricted shares, other than the holding period requirement. We are unable to estimate the number of shares that will be sold under Rule 144 since this will depend on the market price for our common stock, the personal circumstances of the shareholder and other factors.
 
Rule 144(k)
 
Under Rule 144(k), a person who is not deemed to have been one of our affiliates at any time during the 90 days preceding a sale and who has beneficially owned the shares proposed to be sold for at least two years, including the holding period of any prior owner other than an affiliate, is entitled to sell those shares without complying with the manner of sale, public information, volume limitation or notice provisions of Rule 144.


117


Table of Contents

Rule 701
 
In general, under Rule 701, any of our employees, directors, officers, consultants or advisors who acquire common stock from us in connection with a compensatory stock or option plan or other written agreement before the effective date of this offering are, to the extent not subject to lock-up agreements, entitled to resell such shares 90 days after the effective date of this offering in reliance on Rule 144.
 
The Securities and Exchange Commission has indicated that Rule 701 will apply to typical stock options granted by an issuer before it becomes subject to the reporting requirements of the Securities Exchange Act, along with the shares acquired upon exercise of such options, including exercises after the date of this prospectus. Securities issued in reliance on Rule 701 are restricted securities and, subject to the lock-up agreements described below, beginning 90 days after the date of this prospectus, may be sold by persons other than affiliates, as defined in Rule 144, subject only to the manner of sale provisions of Rule 144 and by affiliates under Rule 144 without compliance with its one-year minimum holding period requirement.
 
Stock Options
 
As of March 31, 2007, we had granted options to purchase a total of 7,231,189 shares of common stock, of which 2,069,862 shares were vested and exercisable. An additional 2,302,488 shares of common stock were available for future option grants under our 2007 Equity Incentive Plan. Upon the closing of this offering, the shares issuable upon exercise of these options will no longer be restricted by our right of repurchase and approximately 619,399 shares will not be subject to lock-up agreements and will be eligible for sale in the public market in accordance with Rule 701 under the Securities Act beginning 90 days after the date of this prospectus.
 
We intend to file one or more registration statements on Form S-8 under the Securities Act following this offering to register all shares of our common stock which have been issued or are issuable upon exercise of outstanding stock options or other rights granted under our equity plans. These registration statements are expected to become effective upon filing. Subject to Rule 144 volume limitations applicable to affiliates, the amount of shares referenced above, once registered under any registration statements, will be immediately available for sale in the open market, except to the extent that the shares are subject to vesting restrictions with us or the lock-up agreements described below.
 
Warrants
 
As of March 31, 2007, there were outstanding warrants to purchase 10,039 shares of our Series D preferred stock at an exercise price of $1.84 per share. The warrants provide for adjustments in the event of stock dividends, stock splits, reclassifications or other changes in our corporate structure. Following the closing of this offering, the warrants will be exercisable for common stock. Certain of the holders of the warrants have registration rights that are outlined below under the heading “Registration Rights.”
 
Registration Rights
 
Following the completion of this offering, the holders of 24,949,395 shares of common stock and warrants to purchase shares of common stock are entitled to request that we register their shares for resale under the Securities Act and these shareholders and warrant holders also have the right to include their shares in a registration statement for any public offering we undertake in the future subject, in each case, to cutback for marketing reasons. Registration of such shares under the Securities Act would result in such shares becoming freely tradable without restriction under the Securities Act, except for shares purchased by affiliates, immediately upon the effectiveness of such registration. Any sales of securities by these shareholders could have a material adverse effect on the trading price of our ordinary shares.


118


Table of Contents

 
MATERIAL U.S. FEDERAL TAX CONSIDERATIONS FOR
NON-U.S. HOLDERS OF OUR COMMON STOCK
 
The following is a general discussion of the material United States federal income and estate tax considerations applicable to a non-U.S. holder with respect to such holder’s acquisition, ownership and disposition of shares of our common stock. This discussion is for general information only and is not tax advice. Accordingly, all prospective non-U.S. holders of our common stock should consult their own tax advisors with respect to the United States federal, state, local and non-U.S. tax consequences of the acquisition, ownership and disposition of our common stock. In general, a non-U.S. holder means a beneficial owner of our common stock who is not for United States federal income tax purposes:
 
  •      an individual who is a citizen or resident of the United States;
 
  •      a corporation, partnership or any other organization taxable as a corporation or partnership for U.S. federal tax purposes, created or organized in the United States or under the laws of the United States or of any state thereof or the District of Columbia;
 
  •      an estate, the income of which is included in gross income for United States federal income tax purposes regardless of its source; or
 
  •      a trust (A) if (i) a United States court is able to exercise primary supervision over the trust’s administration and (ii) one or more United States persons have the authority to control all of the trust’s substantial decisions or (B) that has a valid election in effect under applicable United States Treasury Regulations to be treated as a United States person.
 
If a partnership (or any other entity treated as a partnership for United States federal income tax purposes) holds shares of our common stock, the tax treatment of a partner in such partnership will generally depend on the status of the partner and the activities of the partnership. Such a partner or partnership should consult its tax advisor as to its tax consequences.
 
This discussion is based on current provisions of the United States Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, existing, proposed and temporary United States Treasury Regulations promulgated thereunder, current administrative rulings and judicial decisions, in each case as in effect and available as of the date of this prospectus, all of which are subject to change or to differing interpretation, possibly with retroactive effect. Any change could alter the tax consequences to non-U.S. holders described in this prospectus.
 
This description addresses only the United States federal income tax considerations of non-U.S. holders that are initial purchasers of our common stock pursuant to the offering and that will hold our common stock as capital assets. This discussion does not address all aspects of United States federal income and estate taxation that may be relevant to a particular non-U.S. holder in light of that non-U.S. holder’s individual circumstances nor does it address any aspects of United States state, local or non-U.S. taxation. This discussion also does not consider any specific facts or circumstances that may apply to a non-U.S. holder and does not address the special tax rules applicable to particular non-U.S. holders, such as:
 
  •      insurance companies;
 
  •      real estate investment companies, regulated investment companies or grantor trusts;
 
  •      tax-exempt organizations;
 
  •      financial institutions;
 
  •      brokers or dealers in securities or currencies;
 
  •      partnerships or other pass-through entities;
 
  •      regulated investment companies;
 
  •      pension plans;
 
  •      holders that own or are deemed to own more than 5% of our common stock;


119


Table of Contents

 
  •      owners that hold our common stock as part of a straddle, hedge, conversion transaction, synthetic security or other integrated investment;
 
  •      persons that received our common stock as compensation for performance of services;
 
  •      persons that have a functional currency other than the United States dollar; and
 
  •      certain former citizens or residents of the United States.
 
Moreover, except as set forth below, this description does not address the United States federal estate and gift or alternative minimum tax consequences of the acquisition, ownership and disposition of our common stock.
 
There can be no assurance that the Internal Revenue Service, referred to as the IRS, will not challenge one or more of the tax consequences described herein, and we have not obtained, nor do we intend to obtain, an opinion of counsel or ruling from the IRS with respect to the U.S. federal income or estate tax consequences to a non-U.S. holder of the acquisition, ownership, or disposition of our common stock.
 
We urge you to consult with your own tax advisor regarding the U.S. federal, state, local and non-U.S. income and other tax considerations of acquiring, holding and disposing of shares of our common stock.
 
Distributions on Our Common Stock
 
We have not declared or paid distributions on our common stock since our inception and do not intend to pay any distributions on our common stock in the foreseeable future. In the event we do pay distributions on our common stock, however, these distributions generally will constitute dividends for U.S. federal income tax purposes to the extent paid from our current or accumulated earnings and profits, as determined under U.S. federal income tax principles. If a distribution exceeds our current and accumulated earnings and profits as determined under U.S. federal income tax principles, the excess will be treated first as a tax-free return of your adjusted tax basis in our common stock and thereafter as capital gain, subject to the tax treatment described below in “Gain on Sale, Exchange or Other Taxable Disposition of Our Common Stock.”
 
Generally, but subject to the discussions below under “Status as United States Real Property Holding Corporation” and “Backup Withholding and Information Reporting,” if you are a non-U.S. holder, distributions of cash or property (other than certain distributions of our common stock, if any, distributed pro rata to all our common stock holders) paid to you will be subject to withholding of U.S. federal income tax at a 30% rate or such lower rate as may be provided by an applicable United States income tax treaty. U.S. holders are urged to consult your own tax advisor regarding your entitlement to benefits under a relevant United States income tax treaty. If we determine, at a time reasonably close to the date of payment of a distribution on our common stock, that the distribution will not constitute a dividend because we do not anticipate having current or accumulated earnings and profits as determined under U.S. federal income tax principles, we intend not to withhold any U.S. federal income tax on the distribution as permitted by U.S. Treasury Regulations.
 
Except as may be otherwise provided in an applicable United States income tax treaty, if you are a non-U.S. holder and conduct a trade or business within the United States, you generally will be taxed at ordinary United States federal income tax rates (on a net income basis) on dividends that are effectively connected with the conduct of such trade or business and such dividends will not be subject to the withholding described above. If you are a foreign corporation, you may also be subject to a 30% “branch profits tax” unless you qualify for a lower rate under an applicable United States income tax treaty.
 
To claim the benefit of any applicable United States tax treaty or an exemption from withholding because the income is effectively connected with the conduct of a trade or business in the United States, you must provide a properly executed IRS Form W-8BEN for treaty benefits or IRS Form W-8ECI for effectively connected income (or such successor form as the IRS designates), before the distributions are made. These forms must be periodically updated. If you are a non-U.S. holder, you may obtain a refund of any excess amounts withheld by timely filing an appropriate claim for refund with the IRS.


120


Table of Contents

Sale, Exchange or Other Taxable Disposition of Our Common Stock
 
Generally, but subject to the discussions below under “Status as United States Real Property Holding Corporation” and “Backup Withholding and Information Reporting,” if you are a non-U.S. holder, you will not be subject to U.S. federal income tax or withholding tax on any gain realized on the sale, exchange or other taxable disposition of shares of our common stock unless:
 
  •      the gain is effectively connected with your conduct of a trade or business in the United States (and if an applicable United States income tax treaty so provides, is also attributable to a permanent establishment or a fixed base maintained by you), in which case you generally will be taxed at the graduated U.S. federal income tax rates applicable to U.S. persons and, if you are a foreign corporation, the additional branch profits tax described above in “Distributions on Our Common Stock” may apply; or
 
  •      you are an individual who is present in the United States for 183 days or more in the taxable year of the sale, exchange or disposition and certain other conditions are met, in which case you will be subject to a 30% tax on the net gain derived from the disposition, which may be offset by your U.S. source capital losses, if any.
 
Status as a United States Real Property Holding Corporation
 
If you are a non-U.S. holder, under certain circumstances, gain recognized on the sale, exchange or other disposition of, and certain distributions in excess of basis with respect to, our common stock would be subject to United States federal income tax, notwithstanding your lack of other connections with the United States, if we are or have been, at any time during the shorter of (i) your holding period of our common stock or (ii) the five-year period ending on the date of such sale, exchange or other disposition (or distribution in excess of basis) a “United States real property holding corporation” for United States federal income tax purposes, unless our common stock is regularly traded on an established securities market and you hold no more than 5% of our outstanding common stock, directly or indirectly. If we are determined to be a United States real property holding corporation and the foregoing exception does not apply, then, if you are a non-U.S. holder, a purchaser may withhold 10% of the proceeds payable to you from a sale of our common stock, and you generally will be taxed on the net gain derived from the disposition at the graduated United States federal income tax rates applicable to United States persons. Generally, a corporation is a United States real property holding corporation only if the fair market value of its United States real property interests equals or exceeds 50% of the sum of the fair market value of its worldwide real property interests plus its other assets used or held for use in a trade or business. Although there can be no assurance, we do not believe that we are, or have been, a United States real property holding corporation, or that we are likely to become one in the future. Furthermore, no assurance can be provided that our stock will be regularly traded on an established securities market for purposes of the rules described above.
 
U.S. Federal Estate Tax
 
Shares of our common stock owned or treated as owned at the time of death by an individual who is not a citizen or resident of the United States, as specifically defined for United States federal estate tax purposes, will be considered United States situs assets and will be included in the individual’s gross estate for United States federal estate tax purposes. Such shares, therefore, may be subject to United States federal estate tax, unless an applicable estate tax or other treaty provides otherwise.
 
Backup Withholding and Information Reporting
 
United States backup withholding tax and information reporting requirements generally apply to certain payments to certain noncorporate holders of stock. Information reporting generally will apply to payments of dividends on, and to proceeds from the sale or redemption of, common stock made within the United States, or by a United States payor or United States middleman, to a holder of common stock, other than an exempt recipient, including a corporation, a payee that is not a United States person that provides an


121


Table of Contents

appropriate certification and certain other persons. A payor will be required to withhold backup withholding tax from any payments of dividends on, or the proceeds from the sale or redemption of, common stock within the United States, or by a United States payor or United States middleman, to a holder, other than an exempt recipient, if such holder fails to furnish its correct taxpayer identification number or otherwise fails to comply with, or establish an exemption from, such backup withholding tax requirements. The backup withholding tax rate currently is 28%.
 
Backup withholding tax is not an additional tax. Any amounts withheld under the backup withholding tax rules from a payment to a non-U.S. holder can be refunded or credited against the non-U.S. holder’s United States federal income tax liability, if any, provided that the required information is furnished to the IRS in a timely manner.
 
The above description is not intended to constitute a complete analysis of all tax consequences relating to acquisition, ownership and disposition of our common stock. You should consult your own tax advisor concerning the tax consequences of your particular situation.


122


Table of Contents

 
UNDERWRITING
 
Subject to the terms and conditions described in a purchase agreement among us, the selling shareholders and the underwriters, we and the selling shareholders have agreed to sell to the underwriters, and the underwriters severally have agreed to purchase from us and the selling shareholders, the number of shares listed opposite their names below.
 
         
    Number
 
Underwriter
  of Shares  
 
Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith
       
 Incorporated
             
Piper Jaffray & Co. 
       
Thomas Weisel Partners LLC
       
Robert W. Baird & Co. Incorporated
       
William Blair & Company
       
         
Total
       
         
 
The underwriters have agreed to purchase all of the shares sold under the purchase agreement if any of these shares are purchased. If an underwriter defaults, the purchase agreement provides that the purchase commitments of the nondefaulting underwriters may be increased or the purchase agreement may be terminated. The closings for the sale of shares to be purchased by the underwriters are conditioned on one another.
 
We and the selling shareholders have agreed to indemnify the underwriters against certain liabilities, including liabilities under the Securities Act, or to contribute to payments the underwriters may be required to make in respect of those liabilities.
 
The underwriters are offering the shares, subject to prior sale, when, as and if issued to and accepted by them, subject to approval of legal matters by their counsel, including the validity of the shares, and other conditions contained in the purchase agreement, such as the receipt by the underwriters of officer’s certificates and legal opinions. The underwriters reserve the right to withdraw, cancel or modify offers to the public and to reject orders in whole or in part.
 
Commissions and Discounts
 
The underwriters have advised us and the selling shareholders that they propose initially to offer the shares to the public at the initial public offering price on the cover page of this prospectus and to dealers at that price less a concession not in excess of $      per share. The underwriters may allow, and the dealers may allow, a discount not in excess of $      per share to other dealers. After the initial public offering, the public offering price, concession and discount may be changed.
 
The following table shows the public offering price, underwriting discount and proceeds before expenses to TomoTherapy Incorporated and the selling shareholders. The information assumes either no exercise or full exercise by the underwriters of their over-allotment option.
 
                         
    Per Share     Without Option     With Option  
 
Public offering price
  $       $       $    
Underwriting discount
  $       $       $    
Proceeds, before expenses, to TomoTherapy Incorporated 
  $       $       $    
Proceeds, before expenses, to the selling shareholders
  $       $       $  
 
The expenses of this offering, not including the underwriting discount, are estimated at $1.8 million and are payable by TomoTherapy Incorporated.


123


Table of Contents

Overallotment Option
 
The selling shareholders have granted an option to the underwriters to purchase up to           additional shares at the public offering price less the underwriting discount. The underwriters may exercise this option for 30 days from the date of this prospectus solely to cover any over allotments. If the underwriters exercise this option, each will be obligated, subject to conditions contained in the purchase agreement, to purchase a number of additional shares proportionate to that underwriter’s initial amount reflected in the above table.
 
Reserved Shares
 
At our request, the underwriters have reserved for sale, at the initial public offering price, up to 2.7% of the shares offered by this prospectus for sale to certain of our directors, officers and employees. The number of shares of common stock available for sale to the general public will be reduced to the extent such persons purchase such reserved shares. Any reserved shares that are not so purchased will be offered by the underwriters to the general public on the same terms as the other shares offered by this prospectus.
 
No Sales of Similar Securities
 
We and the holders of approximately 99.5% of our outstanding shares of common stock, including all of our executive officers and directors, have agreed, with exceptions, not to sell or transfer any common stock for 180 days after the date of this prospectus without first obtaining the written consent of Merrill Lynch. In addition, the holders of options to purchase 1,450,463 shares, out of a total of vested options to purchase 2,069,862 shares as of March 31, 2007, have signed lock-up agreements. Specifically, we and these other individuals have agreed, with certain exceptions, not to directly or indirectly:
 
  •      offer, pledge, sell or contract to sell any common stock;
 
  •      sell any option or contract to purchase any common stock;
 
  •      purchase any option or contract to sell any common stock;
 
  •      grant any option, right or warrant for the sale of any common stock;
 
  •      lend or otherwise dispose of or transfer any common stock;
 
  •      request or demand that we file a registration statement related to the common stock; or
 
  •      enter into any swap or other agreement that transfers, in whole or in part, the economic consequence of ownership of any common stock whether any such swap or transaction is to be settled by delivery of shares or other securities, in cash or otherwise.
 
This lockup provision applies to common stock and to securities convertible into or exchangeable or exercisable for or repayable with common stock. It also applies to common stock owned now or acquired later by the person executing the agreement or for which the person executing the agreement later acquires the power of disposition. The 180-day restricted period will be automatically extended if (1) during the last 17 days of the 180-day restricted period we issue an earning release or material news or a material event relating to its business occurs or (2) prior to the expiration of the 180-day restricted period, we announce that we will release earnings results or we become aware that material news or a material event will occur during the 16-day period beginning on the last day of the 180-day restricted period, in which case the restrictions described above will continue to apply until the expiration of the 18-day period beginning on the issuance of the earnings release or the occurrence of the material news or material event.
 
NASDAQ Listing
 
We expect the shares to be approved for listing on the Nasdaq Global Market under the symbol “TTPY”. In order to meet the requirements for listing on that exchange, the underwriters have undertaken to sell a minimum number of shares to a minimum number of beneficial owners as required by that exchange.


124


Table of Contents

Before this offering, there has been no public market for our common stock. The initial public offering price will be determined through negotiations among us, the selling shareholders and the underwriters. In addition to prevailing market conditions, the factors to be considered in determining the initial public offering price are:
 
  •      the valuation multiples of publicly traded companies that the underwriters believe to be comparable to us;
 
  •      our financial information;
 
  •      the history of, and the prospects for, our company and the industry in which we compete;
 
  •      an assessment of our management; its past and present operations, and the prospects for, and timing of, our future revenue;
 
  •      the present state of our development; and
 
  •      the above factors in relation to market values and various valuation measures of other companies engaged in activities similar to ours.
 
An active trading market for the shares may not develop. It is also possible that after the offering the shares will not trade in the public market at or above the initial public offering price.
 
The underwriters do not expect to sell more than 5% of the shares in the aggregate to accounts over which they exercise discretionary authority.
 
Price Stabilization, Short Positions and Penalty Bids
 
Until the distribution of the shares is completed, SEC rules may limit underwriters and selling group members from bidding for and purchasing our common stock. However, the underwriters may engage in transactions that stabilize the price of the common stock, such as bids or purchases to peg, fix or maintain that price.
 
In connection with the offering, the underwriters may purchase and sell our common stock in the open market. These transactions may include short sales, purchases on the open market to cover positions created by short sales and stabilizing transactions. Short sales involve the sale by the underwriters of a greater number of shares than they are required to purchase in the offering. “Covered” short sales are sales made in an amount not greater than the underwriters’ option to purchase additional shares in the offering. The underwriters may close out any covered short position by either exercising their overallotment option or purchasing shares in the open market. In determining the source of shares to close out the covered short position, the underwriters will consider, among other things, the price of shares available for purchase in the open market as compared to the price at which they may purchase shares through the over-allotment option. “Naked” short sales are sales in excess of the over-allotment option. The underwriters must close out any naked short position by purchasing shares in the open market. A naked short position is more likely to be created if the underwriters are concerned that there may be downward pressure on the price of our shares in the open market after pricing that could adversely affect investors who purchase in the offering. Stabilizing transactions consist of various bids for or purchases of shares made by the underwriters in the open market prior to the completion of the offering.
 
Similar to other purchase transactions, the underwriters’ purchases to cover the syndicate short sales may have the effect of raising or maintaining the market price of our common stock or preventing or retarding a decline in the market price of our common stock. As a result, the price of our common stock may be higher than the price that might otherwise exist in the open market.
 
The representatives may also impose a penalty bid on underwriters and selling group members. This means that if the representatives purchase shares in the open market to reduce the underwriter’s short position or to stabilize the price of such shares, they may reclaim the amount of the selling concession from the


125


Table of Contents

underwriters and selling group members who sold those shares. The imposition of a penalty bid may also affect the price of the shares in that it discourages resales of those shares.
 
Neither we nor any of the underwriters make any representation or prediction as to the direction or magnitude of any effect that the transactions described above may have on the price of our common stock. In addition, neither we nor any of the underwriters make any representation that the underwriters will engage in these transactions or that these transactions, once commenced, will not be discontinued without notice.
 
Passive Market Making
 
In connection with this offering, underwriters and selling group members may engage in passive market making transactions in the common stock on the Nasdaq Global Market in accordance with Rule 103 of Regulation M under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during a period before the commencement of offers or sales of common stock and extending through the completion of the distribution. A passive market maker must display its bid at a price not in excess of the highest independent bid of that security. However, if all independent bids are lowered below the passive market maker’s bid, that bid must then be lowered when specified purchase limits are exceeded.
 
Electronic Distribution
 
In connection with the offering, certain of the underwriters or securities dealers may distribute prospectuses by electronic means, such as e-mail. In addition, Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated will be facilitating electronic distributions for this offering to certain of their electronic subscription customers. Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated intends to allocate a limited number of shares for sale to its online brokerage customers. An electronic prospectus is available on the Internet site maintained by Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated. Other than the prospectus in electronic format, the information on the Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated Internet sites is not part of this prospectus.
 
Other Relationships
 
BVP I Affiliates Fund Limited Partnership and Baird Venture Partners I Limited Partnership, each affiliates of Robert W. Baird & Co. Incorporated, own 200,762 shares and 287,358 shares of our common stock, respectively. The underwriters and their affiliates may in the future engage in investment banking and other commercial dealings in the ordinary course of business with us for which they will receive customary fees and commissions.


126


Table of Contents

 
LEGAL MATTERS
 
The validity of the shares of common stock we are offering and other legal matters concerning this offering will be passed upon for us by Michael Best & Friedrich LLP, Milwaukee, Wisconsin. Legal matters in connection with this offering will be passed upon for the underwriters by White & Case LLP, New York, New York.
 
EXPERTS
 
Grant Thornton LLP, independent registered public accounting firm, has audited our financial statements as of December 31, 2005 and 2006, and for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2006, appearing in this prospectus and the related registration statement, as set forth in their report thereon appearing elsewhere herein, and are included in reliance on such report given on the authority of such firm as experts in accounting and auditing.
 
Virchow Krause Valuation, LLC, acted as an independent third party evaluator and provided a valuation of the fair value of our common stock as of December 29, 2005, March 31, 2006 and December 31, 2006, and of the fair value of our preferred stock as of December 31, 2005 and 2006, in each case in connection with the preparation of our audited financial statements for the years ended December 31, 2005 and 2006.
 
WHERE YOU CAN FIND MORE INFORMATION
 
We have filed with the SEC a registration statement on Form S-1 under the Securities Act of 1933, with respect to our common stock offered hereby. This prospectus, which forms part of the registration statement, does not contain all of the information set forth in the registration statement and the exhibits and schedules to the registration statement. This prospectus omits information contained in the registration statement as permitted by the rules and regulations of the SEC. For further information about us and our common stock, we refer you to the registration statement and the exhibits and schedules to the registration statement filed as part of the registration statement. Statements contained in this prospectus as to the contents of any contract or other document filed as an exhibit are qualified in all respects by reference to the actual text of the exhibit. You may read and copy the registration statement, including the exhibits and schedules to the registration statement, at the SEC’s Public Reference Room at 100 F. Street, N.E., Room 1580, Washington, D.C. 20549. You can obtain information on the operation of the Public Reference Room by calling the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330. In addition, the SEC maintains an Internet site at www.sec.gov, from which you can electronically access the registration statement, including the exhibits and schedules to the registration statement.
 
Upon the completion of the offering hereunder, we will become subject to the informational and reporting requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended. We intend to file periodic reports and other information with the SEC. We intend to furnish our shareholders with annual reports containing financial statements that have been certified by an independent registered public accounting firm. Our registration statement is and future SEC filings will be available to you on our website at www.TomoTherapy.com. The contents of our website are not a part of this prospectus.


127


Table of Contents

 
TomoTherapy Incorporated
 
INDEX TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
         
    Page
 
  F-2
  F-3
  F-4
  F-5
  F-6
  F-7


F-1


Table of Contents

 
REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
 
To the Board of Directors and Shareholders
TomoTherapy Incorporated and Subsidiaries
 
We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of TomoTherapy Incorporated and Subsidiaries (the Company) as of December 31, 2005 and 2006, and the related consolidated statements of operations, temporary equity and shareholders’ equity (deficit), and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2006. These consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements based on our audits.
 
We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. The Company is not required to have, nor were we engaged to perform an audit of its internal control over financial reporting. Our audits included consideration of internal control over financial reporting as a basis for designing audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting. Accordingly, we express no such opinion. An audit also includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.
 
In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the consolidated financial position of the Company as of December 31, 2005 and 2006, and the consolidated results of their operations and their consolidated cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2006, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.
 
As discussed in Note F to the consolidated financial statements, effective January 1, 2006, the Company adopted Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 123(R), Share-Based Payment. In addition, as discussed in Note A to the consolidated financial statements effective January 1, 2006, the Company adopted Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) Staff Position 150-5, Issuer’s Accounting Under FASB Statement No. 150 for Freestanding Warrants and Other Similar Instruments on Shares That Are Redeemable.
 
Madison, Wisconsin
March 21, 2007 (except for stock split disclosures in Notes A and J, as to which the date is May     , 2007, the April 15, 2007 subsequent event item in Note I as to which the date is April 15, 2007, and the proforma shareholders’ equity (deficit) disclosure in Note A, as to which the date is April 15, 2007.)
 
The foregoing auditor’s report is in the form that will be signed upon consummation of the transaction described in Note J to the consolidated financial statements.
 
/s/ Grant Thornton LLP
 
Madison, Wisconsin
April 18, 2007


F-2


Table of Contents

TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS
(In thousands, except share amounts)
 
                         
                Pro Forma
 
                Shareholders’
 
                Equity
 
    December 31,     December 31,
 
    2005     2006     2006  
                (Unaudited)  
 
ASSETS
Cash and cash equivalents
  $ 30,396     $ 20,137          
Accounts receivable
    14,235       19,050          
Inventories
    28,283       40,026          
Deferred tax assets
          5,982          
Prepaid expenses and other current assets
    838       1,014          
                         
Total current assets
    73,752       86,209          
Property and equipment, net
    6,656       15,469          
Test systems, net
    1,769       5,349          
Intangible assets, net
    126       472          
Deferred tax assets
          1,815          
                         
Total assets
  $ 82,303     $ 109,314          
                         
 
LIABILITIES, TEMPORARY EQUITY AND SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY (DEFICIT)
Accounts payable
  $ 7,342     $ 13,960          
Customer deposits
    38,187       23,103          
Deferred revenue
    11,094       20,204          
Accrued expenses
    6,414       12,667          
Accrued warranties
    2,923       5,307          
Convertible preferred stock warrant liability
          3,522          
                         
Total current liabilities
    65,960       78,763          
Other non-current liabilities
    1,347       2,005          
                         
Total liabilities
    67,307       80,768          
COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES (Note D)
                       
TEMPORARY EQUITY
                       
Redeemable convertible preferred stock, $1 par value, 25,686,898 shares authorized, 25,221,239 shares issued and outstanding at December 31, 2005 and 2006; liquidation amount: $49,822,000 and $52,587,000 at December 31, 2005 and 2006; Pro forma: preferred stock, $1 par value; no shares authorized, issued or outstanding
    166,402       212,663     $  
SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY (DEFICIT)
                       
Common stock, $.01 par value, 44,425,147 and 47,689,147 shares authorized; 8,437,897 and 9,264,291 shares issued and outstanding at December 31, 2005 and 2006, respectively; Pro forma: common stock $.01 par value, 47,689,147 shares authorized; 35,774,199 issued and outstanding
    84       93       358  
Additional paid-in capital
    1,013       1,771       214,169  
Treasury stock, 1,632 shares at cost
                 
Accumulated deficit
    (152,503 )     (185,981 )     (185,981 )
                         
Total shareholders’ equity (deficit)
    (151,406 )     (184,117 )   $ 28,546  
                         
TOTAL LIABILITIES, TEMPORARY EQUITY AND SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY (DEFICIT)
  $ 82,303     $ 109,314          
                         
 
The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated statements.


F-3


Table of Contents

TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS
(In thousands, except share and per share amounts)
 
                         
    Year Ended December 31,  
    2004     2005     2006  
 
Revenue
  $ 45,460     $ 75,754     $ 156,102  
Cost of revenue
    28,078       50,047       102,653  
                         
Gross profit
    17,382       25,707       53,449  
                         
Operating expenses:
                       
Research and development
    6,492       11,372       21,397  
Selling, general and administrative
    7,827       14,197       23,119  
                         
Total operating expenses
    14,319       25,569       44,516  
                         
Income from operations
    3,063       138       8,933  
Other income (expense), net
    (31 )     179       (1,202 )
                         
Income before income tax and cumulative effect of change in accounting principle
    3,032       317       7,731  
Income tax expense (benefit)
    151       78       (7,184 )
                         
Income before cumulative effect of change in accounting principle
    2,881       239       14,915  
Cumulative effect of change in accounting principle
                (2,140 )
                         
Net income
    2,881       239       12,775  
Accretion of redeemable convertible preferred stock
    (41,960 )     (68,075 )     (46,253 )
                         
Net loss attributable to common shareholders
  $ (39,079 )   $ (67,836 )   $ (33,478 )
                         
Net loss per share attributable to common shareholders
                       
Basic and diluted
  $ (5.40 )   $ (8.48 )   $ (3.78 )
                         
Weighted average common shares outstanding used in computing net loss per share attributable to common shareholders
                       
Basic and diluted
    7,234,229       7,995,629       8,855,870  
                         
 
The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated statements.


F-4


Table of Contents

TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF TEMPORARY EQUITY
AND SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY (DEFICIT)
(In thousands, except share amounts)
 
                                                                 
                Shareholders’ Equity (Deficit)  
    Redeemable Convertible
                Additional
                Total
 
    Preferred Stock     Common Stock     Paid-in
    Unearned
    Accumulated
    Shareholders’
 
    Shares     Amount     Shares     Amount     Capital     Compensation     Deficit     Equity (Deficit)  
 
Balance at December 31, 2003
    18,897,472     $ 35,597       6,909,230     $ 69     $ 816     $ (1 )   $ (45,588 )   $ (44,704 )
Accretion of preferred stock to redemption value
          41,960                               (41,960 )     (41,960 )
Exercise of stock options
                558,993       6       31                   37  
Grant of compensatory options
                            25       (25 )            
Amortization of unearned compensation
                                  26             26  
Sale of Series D preferred stock and conversion of notes payable
    3,808,000       6,677                                      
Net income
                                        2,881       2,881  
                                                                 
Balance at December 31, 2004
    22,705,472       84,234       7,468,223       75       872             (84,667 )     (83,720 )
Accretion of preferred stock to redemption value
          68,075                               (68,075 )     (68,075 )
Exercise of stock options
                969,674       9       141                   150  
Exercise of warrants
    159,332       182                                      
Sale of Series E preferred stock
    2,356,435       13,911                                      
Net income
                                        239       239  
                                                                 
Balance at December 31, 2005
    25,221,239       166,402       8,437,897       84       1,013             (152,503 )     (151,406 )
Accretion of preferred stock to redemption value
          46,253                               (46,253 )     (46,253 )
Exercise of stock options
                826,394       9       970                   979  
Compensation expense related to stock options
                            232                   232  
Reclassification of warrants to liabilities
                            (444 )                 (444 )
Issuance costs for Series E preferred stock
          8                                      
Net income
                                        12,775       12,775  
                                                                 
Balance at December 31, 2006
    25,221,239     $ 212,663       9,264,291     $ 93     $ 1,771     $     $ (185,981 )   $ (184,117 )
                                                                 
 
The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated statements.


F-5


Table of Contents

TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS
 
                         
    Year Ended December 31,  
    2004     2005     2006  
    (in thousands)  
 
Cash flows from operating activities
                       
Net income
  $ 2,881     $ 239     $ 12,775  
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by (used in) operating activities:
                       
Depreciation and amortization
    859       1,678       3,053  
Noncash charge for stock compensation
    26             232  
Change in carrying value of convertible preferred stock warrants
                3,078  
Noncash charge for interest
    44              
Loss on disposal of property and equipment
                100  
Benefit from deferred income taxes
                (7,797 )
Deferred rent
    (15 )     (16 )     31  
Gain on extinguishment of debt
                (214 )
Changes in operating assets and liabilities:
                       
Accounts receivable
    (3,265 )     (9,199 )     (4,815 )
Inventories
    (7,561 )     (12,543 )     (11,743 )
Prepaid expenses and other current assets
    55       (553 )     (176 )
Accounts payable
    3,191       2,087       6,618  
Customer deposits
    (7,429 )     26,590       (15,084 )
Deferred revenue
    1,996       6,558       9,110  
Accrued expenses
    660       3,360       6,350  
Accrued warranties
    1,701       242       2,384  
                         
Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities
    (6,857 )     18,443       3,902  
Cash flows from investing activities
                       
Purchase of property and equipment
    (2,861 )     (2,205 )     (10,974 )
Cost of test systems
    (707 )     (1,832 )     (4,671 )
Payments for intangible assets
          (133 )     (378 )
                         
Net cash used in investing activities
    (3,568 )     (4,170 )     (16,023 )
Cash flows from financing activities
                       
Proceeds from notes payable
                900  
Payments on notes payable
    (66 )     (70 )     (25 )
Proceeds from the issuance of preferred stock, net of issuance costs of $251 and $90 in 2004 and 2005, respectively
    4,880       13,911       8  
Proceeds from exercise of warrants
          182        
Proceeds from exercise of stock options
    37       150       979  
                         
Net cash provided by financing activities
    4,851       14,173       1,862  
Increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents
    (5,574 )     28,446       (10,259 )
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period
    7,524       1,950       30,396  
                         
Cash and cash equivalents at end of period
  $ 1,950     $ 30,396     $ 20,137  
                         
Supplemental disclosure of cash flow information:
                       
Interest paid
  $ 15     $ 36     $ 97  
Income taxes paid
          205       172  
Supplemental disclosure of noncash investing activities and financing activities:
                       
Leasehold improvements funded by landlord
  $ 368     $     $  
Conversion of notes payable and accrued interest to preferred stock
    1,797              
Reclassification of preferred stock warrants to liability
                444  
 
The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated statements.


F-6


Table of Contents

TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
NOTE A — SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES
 
TomoTherapy Incorporated, a Wisconsin corporation, (the “Company”) developed, manufactures and sells the TomoTherapy Hi Art system (the “System”), a radiation treatment system for the treatment of a wide variety of cancers. The Company markets the System to hospitals and cancer treatment centers.
 
A summary of the Company’s significant accounting policies applied in the preparation of the accompanying consolidated financial statements follows.
 
Pro Forma Shareholders’ Equity (Deficit)
 
Holders of at least 75% of the outstanding preferred stock can require mandatory conversion of all preferred stock into common stock at any time. In addition, upon the consummation of an initial public offering (“IPO”), the Company may require the conversion of all of the outstanding shares of Series A, B, C, D and E preferred stock into 25,221,239 shares of common stock if the following conditions are met: aggregate proceeds of the offering exceed $20 million, the common stock price is $5.51 per share or greater and holders of 75% of the preferred shares outstanding approve the underwriter selection. Based on the expected initial public offering price and the fact that, as of April 15, 2007, as disclosed in Note I, the Company had received proxies from holders of over 75% of the Company’s preferred shares outstanding approving both the underwriters in the Company’s contemplated initial public offering and the conversion of the preferred stock into common stock upon closing of this offering, the Company believes that all of its outstanding preferred stock will be converted into common stock upon the closing of the offering. The December 31, 2006 pro forma shareholders’ equity (deficit) has been prepared assuming the conversion of Series A, B, C, D and E preferred stock outstanding as of December 31, 2006 into common stock and the issuance of 1,288,669 shares of common stock resulting from provisions in the Series A Investment Agreement.
 
Use of Estimates
 
The preparation of financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America (“U.S. GAAP”) requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and the disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements and the reported amount of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. Actual results could differ from those estimates.
 
Principles of Consolidation
 
The consolidated financial statements include those of TomoTherapy Incorporated and its wholly-owned subsidiaries. Significant intercompany balances and transactions have been eliminated in consolidation.
 
Cash and Cash Equivalents
 
The Company considers all highly liquid investments with original maturities of three months or less to be cash equivalents. Cash equivalents primarily consist of time deposits with banks. The balance in the Company’s foreign cash accounts was $16,000 and $114,000 at December 31, 2005 and 2006, respectively.
 
Interest income was $88,000, $166,000 and $1,292,000 for the years ended December 31, 2004, 2005 and 2006, respectively.


F-7


Table of Contents

 
TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)

 
Fair Value of Financial Instruments
 
The Company’s financial instruments consist primarily of cash and cash equivalents, accounts receivable, accounts payable and long-term debt. The carrying value of these assets and liabilities approximate their respective fair values as of December 31, 2005 and 2006.
 
Foreign Currency
 
Foreign currency transaction gains and losses are included as a component of other income and expense. Foreign currency gains or losses were a loss of $27,000, a gain of $66,000 and a loss of $1,450,000 for the years ended December 31, 2004, 2005 and 2006, respectively.
 
Concentration of Credit Risk and Other Risks and Uncertainties
 
The Company’s cash and cash equivalents are deposited with several major financial institutions. At times, deposits in these institutions exceed the amount of insurance provided on such deposits. The Company has not experienced any losses in such accounts and believes that it is not exposed to any significant risk on these balances.
 
The products currently under development by the Company may require clearance by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (“FDA”) or other international regulatory agencies prior to commercial sales. There can be no assurance that the Company’s products will receive the necessary clearance. If the Company were denied such clearance or such clearance was delayed, it could have a material adverse impact on the Company.
 
The Company currently depends on single-source suppliers for a number of the critical components necessary for the assembly of the System, including the gantry, the linear accelerator, the couch and the solid state modulator. If the supply of these components were to be disrupted or terminated, or if these suppliers were unable to supply the quantities of components required, the Company may have difficulty or be unable to find alternative sources for these key components. As a result, the Company may be unable to meet the demand for the System, which could have a material adverse impact on the Company.
 
Inventories
 
Components of inventory include raw materials, work-in-process and finished goods. Finished goods include in-transit systems that have been shipped to the Company’s customers, but are not yet installed and accepted by the customer. All inventories are stated at the lower of cost or market, cost determined by the first-in first-out (“FIFO”) method. The Company reduces the carrying value of its inventories for differences between the cost and estimated net realizable value, taking into consideration usage in the preceding twelve months, expected demand, technological obsolescence and other information. The Company records as a charge to cost of revenue the amount required to reduce the carrying value of inventory to net realizable value. As of December 31, 2005 and 2006, the Company had provided an inventory reserve of $1.5 million and $5.3 million, respectively. Costs associated with the procurement and warehousing of inventories, such as inbound freight charges and purchasing and receiving costs, are also included in the cost of revenue line item within the statements of operations.


F-8


Table of Contents

 
TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)

 
Inventories consisted of the following (in thousands):
 
                 
    December 31,
    December 31,
 
    2005     2006  
 
Raw materials
  $ 13,344     $ 30,091  
Work-in-process
    5,921       4,762  
Finished goods
    9,018       5,173  
                 
    $ 28,283     $ 40,026  
                 
 
Property and Equipment
 
Property and equipment consisted of the following (in thousands):
 
                 
    December 31,
    December 31,
 
    2005     2006  
 
Furniture and equipment
  $ 3,122     $ 5,166  
Computer equipment
    2,054       3,706  
Computer software
    1,257       1,522  
Leasehold improvements
    3,087       6,744  
In process
          3,202  
                 
      9,520       20,340  
Less: Accumulated depreciation and amortization
    (2,864 )     (4,871 )
                 
Property and equipment, net
  $ 6,656     $ 15,469  
                 
 
Property and equipment are recorded at cost and are depreciated using the straight-line method over the following estimated useful lives:
 
     
Furniture and equipment
  5 to 10 years
Computer equipment and software
  3 to 5 years
Leasehold improvements
  Lesser of useful life or the remaining lease term
 
Depreciation expense associated with property and equipment was $742,000, $1,018,000 and $1,930,000 for the years ended December 31, 2004, 2005 and 2006, respectively.
 
Test Systems
 
Test systems include material, labor and overhead costs on the Hi Art systems used for internal testing and training purposes. These costs are amortized, on a straight-line basis over a three-year period.
 
Test systems consisted of the following (in thousands):
 
                 
    December 31,
    December 31,
 
    2005     2006  
 
Test systems at cost
  $ 2,539     $ 7,210  
Less: Accumulated amortization
    (770 )     (1,861 )
                 
Test systems, net
  $ 1,769     $ 5,349  
                 
 
Amortization expense associated with test systems was $117,000, $653,000 and $1,091,000 for the years ended December 31, 2004, 2005 and 2006, respectively.


F-9


Table of Contents

 
TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)

 
Warranty Cost
 
The Company’s sales terms include a warranty that generally covers the first year of system operation and is based on terms that are generally accepted in the marketplace. The Company records a current liability for the expected cost of warranty-related claims at the time of sale. The following table presents changes in the Company’s product warranty liability (in thousands):
 
                 
    December 31,
    December 31,
 
    2005     2006  
 
Balance, beginning of the period
  $ 2,681     $ 2,923  
Charged to cost of revenue
    6,119       10,138  
Adjustments related to change in estimate
    651       (244 )
Actual product warranty expenditures
    (6,528 )     (7,510 )
                 
Balance, end of period
  $ 2,923     $ 5,307  
                 
 
Stock Split
 
All prior period common and preferred stock amounts have been retroactively adjusted to reflect a four-for-one stock split in 2005 and a 1.36-for-one stock split in the form of a stock dividend effective prior to the effective date of the registration statement for the Company’s contemplated initial public offering.
 
Intangible Assets
 
The intangible assets are legal costs incurred to register patents which are capitalized when incurred and amortized on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful life of the related patent. The Company continuously evaluates whether events and circumstances have occurred that indicate the remaining useful life of the patents may warrant revision or that the remaining balance of the patents may not be recoverable. The cost and accumulated amortization for patents was $133,000 and $7,000, respectively, as of December 31, 2005, and $511,000 and $39,000, respectively, as of December 31, 2006. The average remaining useful life of the patents as of December 31, 2005 and 2006 was approximately 9.5 and 8.9 years, respectively. As of December 31, 2006, amortization expense of the patents for each of the years 2007 through 2011 is estimated to be $54,000, and $202,000 thereafter.
 
Impairment of Long-Lived Assets
 
In accordance with the provisions of Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (“SFAS”) No. 144, Accounting for the Impairment on Disposal of Long-lived Assets , the Company reviews long-lived assets for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. If the sum of the expected undiscounted cash flows is less than the carrying value of the related asset or group of assets, a loss is recognized for the difference between the fair value and carrying value of the asset or group of assets. Such analysis necessarily involves significant judgment. No impairment losses were recorded on long-lived assets during the years ended December 31, 2005 and 2006.
 
Accounts Receivable
 
The majority of the Company’s accounts receivable are due from hospitals and medical centers. Credit is extended based on evaluation of a customer’s financial condition and, generally, collateral is not required. Accounts receivable are due in accordance with contract terms. The Company considers accounts receivable to be fully collectible; accordingly, no allowance for doubtful accounts is required. If amounts become uncollectible, they will be charged to operations when that determination is made.


F-10


Table of Contents

 
TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)

 
Revenue Recognition
 
Revenue is recognized from system product sales, including sales to distributors, and related services when earned in accordance with Staff Accounting Bulletin, or SAB No. 104, Revenue Recognition , and Emerging Issues Task Force Issue (“EITF”) No. 00-21, Revenue Arrangements with Multiple Deliverables. Revenue is recognized when the following four criteria are met:
 
  •  Persuasive evidence of an arrangement exists.   The Company requires evidence of a purchase order with a customer specifying the terms and conditions of the product or services to be delivered, typically in the form of a signed quotation or purchase order from the customer.
 
  •  Title and risk of loss have been transferred to the customer.   During the installation phase, each System is fully tested to confirm that it functions within operating specifications. Upon completion of the test procedures, the customer signs the acceptance test procedures document, or ATP, acknowledging acceptance of the system. Revenue for the sale of systems is recognized upon receipt of the signed ATP.
 
  •  The sales price is fixed or determinable.   All contract terms are fixed in the signed quotation or purchase order received from the customer. The contracts do not contain rights of cancellation, return, exchanges or refunds.
 
  •  Collection is reasonably assured.   Due to the fact that the Company’s sales are to hospitals and cancer treatment centers with significant resources, the Company considers accounts receivable to be fully collectible. In addition, the Company’s contracts generally require staged payments as follows: 20% to 30% down payment, 60% to 70% due upon shipment and 10% due upon final acceptance by the customer.
 
Payments received for products or services prior to shipment or prior to completion of the related services are recorded as customer deposits. Once a System has been shipped, the related deposits are transferred to deferred revenue until the criteria for revenue recognition are satisfied.
 
The Company recognizes revenue in connection with distributor sales of the System based on the distributor’s certification status. Once a distributor is certified by the Company to provide installation, testing, training and post-installation warranty services to end customers, the Company recognizes revenue upon shipment to that certified distributor as the Company no longer has any obligations to the distributor or the end customer. Prior to a distributor achieving certification, the Company recognizes revenue upon receipt of the signed acceptance procedure document from the end customer. Distributors do not have any contractual right of return and the Company has not accepted any returns. As of December 31, 2006, the Company had only certified its Japanese distributor.
 
The Company frequently enters into sales arrangements with customers that contain multiple elements or deliverables such as hardware and post-warranty maintenance services. Judgments as to the allocation of the proceeds received from an arrangement to the multiple elements, the determination of whether the undelivered elements are essential to the functionality of the delivered elements and the appropriate timing of revenue recognition are critical to ensure compliance with U.S. GAAP. The ability to establish the fair value of those elements could affect the timing of revenue recognition. For arrangements with multiple elements, the Company recognizes revenue for each element based on the fair value of the element provided when all other criteria for revenue recognition have been met. The fair value for each element provided in multiple element arrangements is determined by referencing historical pricing policies when the element is sold separately. Changes in our ability to establish the fair value for each element in multiple element arrangements could affect the timing of revenue recognition.
 
Revenue allocated to post-warranty maintenance on the System is recognized ratably over the term of the agreement, which ranges from twelve to thirty-six months.


F-11


Table of Contents

 
TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)

 
In 2006, the Company began selling an optional software package. The selling price, cost and functionality of this software is incidental to the operation of the System itself. The Company recognizes revenue for this software product in accordance with SOP No. 97-2, Software Revenue Recognition , as amended by SOP No. 98-9, Software Revenue Recognition with Respect to Certain Agreements. The Company recognizes license revenue when all of the following criteria are met: persuasive evidence of an arrangement exists, the fee is fixed or determinable, collection of the related receivable is reasonably assured and delivery of the product has occurred, provided that all other criteria for revenue recognition under SOP No. 97-2 have been met. Revenue earned on software arrangements involving multiple elements are allocated to each element based on vendor specific objective evidence (“VSOE”) of fair value, which is based on the price charged when the same element is sold separately. In instances when evidence of VSOE of all undelivered elements exists, evidence does not exist for one or more delivered elements and the fair value of all of the undelivered elements is less than the arrangement fee, revenue is recognized using the residual method. Under the residual method, the fair value of the undelivered elements is deferred and the remaining portion of the arrangement fee is recognized as revenue. Therefore, to the extent that a discount exists, the Company attributes the discount entirely to the delivered elements.
 
Revenue by major type consisted of the following (in thousands):
 
                         
    Year Ended December 31,  
    2004     2005     2006  
 
Product sales
  $ 44,984     $ 73,593     $ 148,121  
Service and other revenue
    476       2,161       7,981  
                         
Total revenue
  $ 45,460     $ 75,754     $ 156,102  
                         
 
Shipping and Handling Costs
 
In accordance with EITF 00-10, “Accounting for Shipping and Handling Fees and Costs,” the Company records costs incurred in connection with shipping and handling products as cost of revenue. Amounts billed to customers in connection with these costs are included in revenue and are not material for any of the periods presented in the accompanying consolidated financial statements.
 
Software Development Costs
 
The Company develops proprietary software as a component of the System. All software development costs are expensed as research and development expenses until the establishment of technological feasibility. Upon establishment of technological feasibility, all further costs on the same application are capitalized. Typically the period between achieving technological feasibility of the Company’s software products and the general availability of the products has been short. All software development costs through December 31, 2006 have been expensed, as none of the costs were eligible for capitalization.
 
Research and Development Costs
 
Research and development costs are expensed as incurred. The Company has entered into research collaboration agreements with selected hospitals, cancer treatment centers, academic institutions and research institutions worldwide. These agreements support the Company’s internal research and development capabilities. Costs related to our research collaboration agreements are expensed as incurred.
 
Advertising Expenses
 
Advertising costs of $42,000, $111,000 and $127,000 during the years ended December 31, 2004, 2005 and 2006 were charged to operations as incurred.


F-12


Table of Contents

 
TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)

 
Income Taxes
 
The Company accounts for income taxes in accordance with SFAS No. 109, Accounting for Income Taxes. SFAS No. 109 requires the recognition of deferred tax assets and liabilities for the future tax consequences of temporary differences between the tax basis of assets and liabilities and their reported amounts in the financial statements and are measured using currently enacted tax rates and laws. Deferred tax assets are reduced by a valuation allowance if, based upon management’s estimates, it is more likely than not that a portion or all of the net deferred tax assets will not be realized. The factors used to assess the likelihood of realization are the forecast of future taxable income and the remaining time period to utilize any tax operating losses and tax credits.
 
Other Comprehensive Income
 
Other comprehensive income refers to revenue, expenses, gains and losses that, under U.S. GAAP, are included in other comprehensive income (loss), but are excluded from net income (loss), as these amounts are recorded directly as an adjustment to shareholders’ equity, net of tax. The Company’s net income (loss) is the same as other comprehensive income (loss) for the years ended December 31, 2004, 2005 and 2006.
 
Stock-Based Compensation
 
Prior to January 1, 2006, the Company accounted for stock-based employee compensation arrangements in accordance with the provisions of Accounting Principles Board Opinion No. 25, Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees (“APB No. 25”), Financial Accounting Standards Board’s (“FASB”) Interpretation No. 44 Accounting for Certain Transactions Involving Stock Compensation , an Interpretation of APB Opinion No. 25 (“FIN 44”) and FIN 28, Accounting for Stock Appreciation Rights and Other Variable Stock Option or Award Plans , and had adopted the disclosure provisions of SFAS No. 123, Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation (“SFAS No. 123”) and SFAS No. 148 , Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation — Transition and Disclosure (“SFAS No. 148”).
 
Effective January 1, 2006, the Company adopted SFAS No. 123(R), “Share-Based Payment” (“SFAS No. 123(R)”), which revised SFAS No. 123, and supersedes APB No. 25. SFAS No. 123(R) requires all share-based payments to employees, including grants of employee stock options, to be measured at fair value and expensed in the consolidated statement of operations over the service period (generally the vesting period) of the grant. Upon adoption, the Company transitioned to SFAS No. 123(R) using the prospective transition method, under which only new awards (or awards modified, repurchased, or cancelled after the effective date) are accounted for under the provisions of SFAS No. 123(R) and expense is only recognized in the consolidated statements of operations beginning with the first period that SFAS No. 123(R) is effective and continuing to be expensed thereafter. See Note F for further disclosure related to SFAS No. 123(R).


F-13


Table of Contents

 
TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)

 
Net Income (Loss) Per Share of Common Stock
 
Net income (loss) per share of common stock is as follows for the years ended December 31, 2004, 2005 and 2006:
 
                         
    Year Ended December 31,  
    2004     2005     2006  
 
Net income (loss) per common share:
                       
Basic and diluted:
                       
Income before cumulative effect of change in accounting principle
  $ 0.40     $ 0.03     $ 1.68  
Cumulative effect of change in accounting principle
                (0.24 )
                         
Net income
  $ 0.40     $ 0.03     $ 1.44  
                         
Net loss attributable to common shareholders
  $ (5.40 )   $ (8.48 )   $ (3.78 )
                         
Weighted average common shares outstanding used in:
                       
Basic and diluted
    7,234,229       7,995,629       8,855,870  
                         
 
Basic net income per share is computed by dividing net income by the weighted-average number of common shares outstanding during the period. Diluted net income per share is computed by dividing net income by the weighted-average number of dilutive common shares outstanding during the period. Dilutive shares outstanding are calculated by adding to the weighted shares outstanding any common stock equivalents from redeemable preferred stock, performance shares, outstanding stock options and warrants based on the treasury stock method.
 
Diluted net loss attributable to common shareholders per share is the same as basic net loss attributable to common shareholders per share in the years ended December 31, 2004, 2005 and 2006, since the effects of potentially dilutive securities are anti-dilutive.
 
                         
    Year Ended December 31,  
    2004     2005     2006  
 
Historical outstanding anti-dilutive securities not included in diluted net loss per share calculation
                       
Preferred stock
    22,705,472       25,221,239       25,221,239  
Contingent common shares
    1,288,669       1,288,669       1,288,669  
Stock options and warrants
    5,030,198       8,168,416       9,621,579  
                         
      29,024,339       34,678,324       36,131,487  
                         


F-14


Table of Contents

 
TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)

Pro forma net income (loss) per share assuming conversion of preferred stock, contingent common shares, outstanding stock options and warrants for the year ended December 31, 2006 were as follows (in thousands, except share and per share amounts):
 
         
    Year Ended
 
    December 31,
 
    2006  
    (unaudited)  
 
Historical
       
Numerator:
       
Net loss attributable to common shareholders
  $ (33,478 )
         
Denominator:
       
Weighted-average shares of common stock outstanding
    8,855,870  
         
Net loss attributable to common shareholders per share — basic and diluted
  $ (3.78 )
         
Pro forma
       
Numerator:
       
Net loss
  $ (33,478 )
Pro forma adjustment to add back preferred stock accretion
    46,253  
         
Pro forma net income available for shareholders
  $ 12,775  
         
Denominator for pro forma basic net income per share:
       
Weighted-average shares of common stock outstanding
    8,855,870  
Pro forma adjustments to reflect assumed conversion of preferred stock (as if converted)
    25,221,239  
Pro forma adjustment to reflect assumed conversion of contingent common shares (as if converted)
    1,288,669  
         
Shares used to compute pro forma basic net income per common share:
    35,365,778  
         
Pro forma basic net income per share:
  $ 0.36  
         
Denominator for pro forma diluted net income per share:
       
Weighted-average shares of common stock outstanding
    8,855,870  
Pro forma adjustments to reflect assumed conversion of preferred stock (as if converted)
    25,221,239  
Pro forma adjustment to reflect assumed conversion of contingent common shares (as if converted)
    1,288,669  
Pro forma adjustments to reflect assumed exercise of warrants and stock options using treasury stock method
    4,764,605  
         
Shares used to compute pro forma diluted net income per share:
    40,130,383  
         
Pro forma diluted net income per share:
  $ 0.32  
         
Pro forma outstanding anti-dilutive securities not included in diluted earnings per share calculation
       
Stock options and warrants
    2,152,113  
         
      2,152,113  
         


F-15


Table of Contents

 
TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)

Segment Information
 
The Company has determined that it operates in only one segment in accordance with SFAS No. 131, “Disclosures About Segments of an Enterprise and Related Information,” as it only reports profit and loss information on an aggregate basis to its chief operating decision maker. The Company’s long-lived assets maintained outside the United States are insignificant.
 
Revenue is attributed by geographic region based on the ship-to location of the Company’s customers. The following table summarizes revenue by geographic region (in thousands):
 
                         
    Year Ended December 31,  
    2004     2005     2006  
 
North America
  $ 42,710     $ 59,049     $ 88,937  
Europe
    2,750       5,552       33,586  
Asia
          11,153       33,579  
                         
Total revenue
  $ 45,460     $ 75,754     $ 156,102  
                         
 
Change in Accounting Principle
 
On June 29, 2005, the FASB issued Staff Position 150-5, Issuer’s Accounting under FASB Statement No. 150 (“SFAS 150”) for Freestanding Warrants and Other Similar Instruments on Shares That Are Redeemable (“FSP 150-5”). FSP 150-5 requires the Company to classify its outstanding preferred stock warrants as liabilities on its balance sheet and record adjustments to the value of its preferred stock warrants in its statements of operations to reflect their fair value at each reporting period. The Company adopted FSP 150-5 and accounted for the cumulative effect of the change in accounting principle as of January 1, 2006. For the year ended December 31, 2006, the impact of the change in accounting principle was to decrease net income by $3.1 million. The impact consisted of a $2.2 million cumulative effect adjustment for the change in accounting principle as of January 1, 2006, when the Company adopted FSP 150-5, and $0.9 million of expense that was recorded in other income (expense), net to reflect the increase in fair value of the warrants between January 1, 2006 and December 31, 2006.
 
These warrants will be subject to revaluation at each balance sheet date and any change in fair value will be recognized as a component of other income (expense), net, until exercise of the warrants or completion of an initial public offering.
 
Recent Accounting Pronouncements
 
In May 2005, the FASB issued SFAS No. 154, Accounting Changes and Error Corrections  — a replacement of APB Opinion No. 20 and FASB Statement No. 3. SFAS No. 154 requires that all voluntary changes in accounting principles and changes required by a new accounting pronouncement that do not include specific transition provisions be applied retrospectively to prior periods’ financial statements, unless it is impracticable to do so. This Statement is effective for accounting changes and corrections of errors made in fiscal years beginning after December 15, 2005. The Company’s adoption of SFAS No. 154 did not have a significant effect on its consolidated financial statements.
 
In June 2006, the FASB issued FASB Interpretation No. 48 , Accounting for Uncertainty in Income Taxes — an Interpretation of FASB Statement No. 109 (“FIN 48”). FIN 48 clarifies the accounting for uncertainty in income taxes recognized in an enterprise’s financial statements in accordance with SFAS No. 109, Accounting for Income Taxes , and prescribes a recognition threshold and measurement attribute for the financial statement recognition and measurement of a tax position taken or expected to be taken in a tax return. FIN 48 also provides guidance on derecognition, classification, interest and penalties, accounting in interim periods, disclosure and transition. The Company is required to adopt the provisions of FIN 48


F-16


Table of Contents

 
TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)

beginning in 2007. The Company is currently in the process of assessing what impact FIN 48 may have on its consolidated financial position, results of operations or cash flows.
 
In September 2006, the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”) issued SAB No. 108, “Considering the Effects of Prior Year Misstatements when Quantifying Misstatements in Current Year Financial Statements,” which states that registrants should use both a balance sheet approach and an income statement approach when quantifying and evaluating materiality of a misstatement. The interpretations in SAB No. 108 contain guidance on correcting errors under the dual approach as well as provide transition guidance for correcting errors. This interpretation does not change the requirements within SFAS No. 154 for the correction of an error in financial statements. SAB No. 108 is effective for annual financial statements covering the first fiscal year ending after November 15, 2006. The Company adopted this interpretation in the fourth quarter of 2006 and it did not have a material impact on the consolidated financial statements.
 
In September 2006, the FASB issued SFAS No. 157, Fair Value Measurements (“SFAS No. 157” ). This Statement defines fair value, establishes a framework for measuring fair value in generally accepted accounting principles, and expands disclosures about fair value measurements. This Statement applies under other accounting pronouncements that require or permit fair value measurements, the Board having previously concluded in those accounting pronouncements that fair value is the relevant measurement attribute. Accordingly, this Statement does not require any new fair value measurements. This Statement is effective for financial statements issued for fiscal years beginning after November 15, 2007, and interim periods within those fiscal years. The Company does not expect the adoption of SFAS No. 157 in 2008 to have a material impact on its results of operations or financial position.
 
In February 2007, the FASB issued SFAS No. 159, The Fair Value Option for Financial Assets and Financial Liabilities (“SFAS 159”). SFAS No. 159 permits entities to choose to measure at fair value some financial instruments and certain other items that are not currently required to be measured at fair value. Subsequent changes in fair value for designated items will be required to be reported in earnings in the current period. SFAS No. 159 also establishes presentation and disclosure requirements for similar types of assets and liabilities measured at fair value. SFAS No. 159 is effective for fiscal years beginning after November 15, 2007. The Company is currently assessing the effect of implementing this guidance, which directly depends on the nature and extent of eligible items elected to be measured at fair value, upon initial application of the standard on January 1, 2008.
 
NOTE B — LONG-TERM DEBT AND NOTES PAYABLE
 
On May 11, 2002, the Company entered into a $500,000 technology development loan with the Wisconsin Department of Commerce (“WDC”). Under the terms of the agreement, the unpaid principal balance is subject to interest at an annual rate of 4%, and the Company paid equal monthly installments of $7,104, including principal and interest. Borrowings are collateralized by a security interest in substantially all assets of the Company and a personal guarantee by two Company shareholders. The total unpaid principal balance was $214,000 at December 31, 2005. Effective December 2005, WDC notified the Company that the unpaid principal of $214,000 and accrued interest is eligible for forgiveness in the event the Company spends a specified amount in capital investments. The remaining payments on the loan were deferred at that time and effective December 31, 2006 the loan was forgiven by WDC.
 
On November 28, 2005, the Company entered into a $500,000 note agreement with the WDC and received the principal balance in June 2006 in accordance with the requirements of the agreement. The note payable bears interest at 2%, is payable in monthly installments of $8,647 beginning on January 1, 2008, and the remaining unpaid principal is due on March 1, 2013. The note payable is secured by all of the Company’s equipment, fixtures, inventory, general intangibles and contract rights. The outstanding principal balance at December 31, 2006 was $500,000.


F-17


Table of Contents

 
TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)

 
On February 13, 2006, the Company entered into a $400,000 note agreement with Madison Development Corporation. The note payable bears interest at 4%, is payable in monthly installments of $4,050 and the remaining unpaid principal is due on March 1, 2011. The note payable is secured by all of the Company’s equipment, fixtures, inventory, general intangibles and contract rights. The outstanding principal balance at December 31, 2006 was approximately $375,000.
 
On December 28, 2005, the Company entered into a $30,000,000 revolving credit facility with a bank. The facility bears interest, which is payable monthly, at LIBOR plus 2.5% or at the prime rate plus .25% and is adjusted based on certain financial criteria. The facility expires on December 31, 2007 and is secured by a general business security agreement. The facility requires maintenance of a minimum tangible net worth and a minimum backlog. The Company was in compliance with these covenants and there were no amounts outstanding at December 31, 2005 and 2006.
 
On May 1, 2003, the Company entered into an agreement with certain investors for borrowings up to $4,000,000 in the form of 12% convertible notes payable with a maturity date of April 30, 2004. The Company initially borrowed $1,741,899 under this agreement. In addition, the Company issued detachable warrants and recorded the fair value of the warrants and beneficial interest upon conversion of $348,380, which has been recorded as a discount to the notes payable and an increase to additional paid-in capital on May 1, 2003. The discount was amortized over the term of the notes payable. On October 23, 2003, the Company borrowed $127,723 from an investor under this agreement in the form of a 10% convertible secondary note with a maturity date five years from the date of issuance. In February 2004, the outstanding principal of $1,869,622 and all accrued interest and unamortized debt discount thereon were converted into Series D preferred stock (see Note E).
 
The annual principal payments are as follows (in thousands):
 
         
Years Ending December 31,
     
 
2007
  $ 34  
2008
    114  
2009
    133  
2010
    137  
2011
    330  
Thereafter
    127  
         
Total principal payments
  $ 875  
         
 
NOTE C — INCOME TAXES
 
The provision for income taxes is as follows (in thousands):
 
                         
    Year Ended December 31,  
    2004     2005     2006  
 
Current
                       
Federal
  $ 40     $ 57     $ 172  
State
    111       21       441  
                         
Total current
    151       78       613  
Deferred
                (7,797 )
                         
Total provision (benefit) for income tax
  $ 151     $ 78     $ (7,184 )
                         


F-18


Table of Contents

 
TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)

A reconciliation of the United States federal statutory tax rate to the effective income tax rate is as follows for the years ended December 31:
 
                         
    2004     2005     2006  
 
Provision at statutory rate
    35.0 %     35.0 %     35.0 %
Permanent differences
    2.1       33.3       2.1  
State income taxes, net of federal effect
    5.6       3.8       5.9  
Change in valuation allowance including federal net operating losses and credits
    (35.8 )     (52.9 )     (135.4 )
Change in statutory rate for deferred taxes
                (3.6 )
Nondeductible warrant expense
                4.3  
Other
    (1.9 )     5.3       (1.2 )
                         
Effective income tax rate
    5.0 %     24.5 %     (92.9 )%
                         
 
The significant components of deferred tax assets and liabilities are as follows (in thousands):
 
                 
    December 31,  
    2005     2006  
 
Deferred tax assets:
               
Federal and state operating loss carryforwards
  $ 9,570     $ 4,585  
Tax credit carryforwards
    1,861       1,643  
Warranty reserves
    1,111       2,905  
Other
    1,307       979  
                 
Total deferred tax assets
    13,849       10,112  
Deferred tax liabilities:
               
Tax depreciation in excess of book depreciation
    544       694  
Prepaid insurance
    118       134  
Other
    50       234  
                 
Total deferred tax liabilities
    712       1,062  
Net deferred tax asset
    13,137       9,050  
Valuation allowance
    (13,137 )     (1,253 )
                 
    $     $ 7,797  
                 
 
The valuation allowance was determined in accordance with the provisions of SFAS No. 109, Accounting for Income Taxes , which requires an assessment of both positive and negative evidence when determining whether it is more likely than not that deferred tax assets are recoverable. During 2005, the Company fully reserved all U.S. net deferred tax assets, which are predominantly net operating loss and tax credit carryforwards. Cumulative losses incurred as of December 31, 2005 represented sufficient negative evidence to record a valuation allowance under SFAS No. 109. However, during the year ended December 31, 2006, the Company had a three-year trend of net income as well as three years of cumulative taxable income. Therefore, the Company anticipated that approximately $10.5 million of deferred tax assets were more likely than not to become recoverable as a result of historical and future forecasted earnings.
 
At December 31, 2006, the Company had approximately $15.6 million and $2.2 million of federal net operating loss and research tax credit carryforwards, respectively, which expire beginning in 2022. In the event of a change in ownership greater than 50% in a three-year period, utilization of the net operating losses may be subject to a substantial annual limitation due to the ownership change limitations provided by the Internal


F-19


Table of Contents

 
TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)

Revenue Code and similar state provisions. At December 31, 2006, the Company had approximately $19.1 million and $0.5 million of Wisconsin net operating loss and tax credit carryforwards, respectively, which expire beginning in 2016. SFAS No. 109 requires that deferred tax assets be reduced by a valuation allowance if it is more likely than not that some or all of the deferred tax asset will not be realized. The valuation allowance relates to net operating loss carryforwards and research tax credits for which the Company believes realization is uncertain.
 
At December 31, 2006, the Company had $4.8 million in excess tax benefit stock option deductions. The tax benefit of this portion of the excess tax benefit stock option deductions will be accounted for directly to equity as additional paid in capital as the stock option related deduction reduces taxes payable.
 
NOTE D — COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES
 
The Company is subject from time to time to proceedings, lawsuits and other claims related to patents, product and other matters. The Company assesses the likelihood of any adverse judgments or outcomes to these matters as well as potential ranges of probable losses. A determination of the amount of reserves required, if any, for these contingencies are made after careful analysis of each individual issue. The required reserves may change in the future due to new developments in each situation or changes in settlement strategy in dealing with these matters.
 
The Company leases four facilities under operating leases: its corporate office space lease that expires in 2014 includes four, five-year renewal options; additional office space under a lease that expires in 2008; a manufacturing facility under a lease that expires in 2018; and office space in Brussels, Belgium under a lease that expires in 2014. The last three leases were all entered into during 2006. The Company is required to pay maintenance, taxes, utilities and insurance on all the facilities. The Company also leases company driven automobiles under operating leases. Rent expense during 2004, 2005 and 2006 was $697,000, $880,000 and $1,274,000, respectively.
 
At December 31, 2006, future payments under operating leases (including rent escalation clauses) were as follows (in thousands):
 
         
Years Ending December 31,
     
 
2007
  $ 1,962  
2008
    2,021  
2009
    2,080  
2010
    2,139  
2011
    2,041  
Thereafter
    8,945  
         
Total minimum lease obligation
  $ 19,188  
         
 
NOTE E — TEMPORARY EQUITY AND SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY (DEFICIT)
 
Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock
 
The Company has issued various classes of preferred stock. The holders of Series A, B, C and D preferred stock have the option to put their shares back to the Company at the greater of the original purchase price plus accrued dividends, or the current fair market value of the shares. The holders of Series E preferred stock have the option to put their shares back to the Company at the original purchase price plus accrued dividends. As a result, the carrying value of the preferred stock has been increased by an accretion each period so that the carrying amounts will equal the greater of fair value or the defined redemption value for the Series A, B, C and D preferred stock. The Series E preferred stock has been increased to its redemption value,


F-20


Table of Contents

 
TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)

including accrued dividends. The accreted amounts are recorded to accumulated deficit. The put option and the related accretion of the preferred shares will terminate upon the closing of this offering. The fair value of the Company’s Series A, B, C and D preferred stock at December 31, 2005 was determined based upon the sale by the Company of 2,356,435 shares of Series E preferred stock at $5.94 per share on December 29, 2005 and an independent third-party valuation performed by Virchow Krause Valuation, LLC (Virchow Krause) which allocated the enterprise value of the Company, determined based upon the sale of the Series E preferred stock, to each of the Company’s existing classes of stock including the Series A, B, C and D preferred stock. The fair value of the Series A, B, C and D preferred stock at December 31, 2006 was determined based upon an independent third-party valuation performed by Virchow Krause. This valuation, as of December 31, 2006, was prepared utilizing the probability weighted expected return method as prescribed by the AICPA Practice Aid Valuation of Privately-Held-Company Equity Securities Issued as Compensation. This valuation took into consideration the following scenarios: (i) completion of an initial public offering; (ii) sale to a strategic acquirer; and (iii) remaining private. The valuation amounts determined under each scenario were then probability weighted based upon management’s best estimates of the occurrence of each scenario. The resulting value was then allocated to the Company’s common and each series of preferred stock based upon the economic impact of the conversion rights and liquidation preferences of the preferred stock.
 
As of December 31, 2005 and 2006, the Company had redeemable convertible preferred stock, as follows (in thousands):
 
                 
    December 31,  
    2005     2006  
 
Authorized shares
    25,687       25,687  
                 
Outstanding shares:
               
Series A
    3,686       3,686  
Series B
    9,353       9,353  
Series C
    5,987       5,987  
Series D
    3,839       3,839  
Series E
    2,356       2,356  
                 
Total outstanding shares
    25,221       25,221  
                 
Liquidation amounts:
               
Series A
  $ 4,588     $ 4,828  
Series B
    12,587       13,316  
Series C
    10,804       11,344  
Series D
    7,843       8,267  
Series E
    14,000       14,832  
                 
Total liquidation amount
  $ 49,822     $ 52,587  
                 
Cumulative proceeds, net of issuance costs:
               
Series A
  $ 2,938     $ 2,938  
Series B
    8,828       8,828  
Series C
    8,895       8,895  
Series D
    6,734       6,734  
Series E
    13,911       13,919  
                 
Total cumulative proceeds, net of issuance costs
  $ 41,306     $ 41,314  
                 


F-21


Table of Contents

 
TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)

In December 2005, the Company sold 2,356,435 shares of Series E convertible preferred stock for $5.94 per share and aggregate proceeds of $13.9 million.
 
Each share of Series A, B, C, D and E preferred stock contains certain entitlements which benefit the preferred shareholders. These include:
 
(1) Each share of preferred stock is convertible into one share of common stock at the option of the holder, subject to certain anti-dilution adjustments. All preferred stock automatically converts to common stock in the event of an IPO with aggregate proceeds exceeding $20 million and with a common stock price of $5.51 per share or greater, as long as the underwriters are approved by 75% of the preferred shareholders. Holders of at least 75% of the preferred stock can require mandatory conversion of any series of preferred stock at any time.
 
(2) Preferred shareholders are entitled to ratable preference payments in the event of liquidation or dissolution of the Company up to $0.82, $0.98, $1.50, $1.84 and $5.94, respectively, per share plus accrued and unpaid dividends. Preferred shareholders participate on an “as converted” basis with common shareholders for any remaining proceeds subject to certain restrictions as defined in the Company’s Amended and Restated Articles of Incorporation.
 
(3) Preferred shareholders are entitled to cumulative dividends at an annual rate of $0.07, $0.08, $0.09, $0.11 and $0.35 per share, respectively, compounded quarterly. Through December 31, 2006, no dividends have been declared on any series of stock and the Company believes that it is probable that the preferred stock will be converted into common stock rather than redeemed. At December 31, 2006, accumulated dividends in arrears were approximately $1,828,000, $4,199,000, $2,343,000, $1,210,000 and $832,000 to the preferred shareholders, respectively. All accrued but unpaid preferred stock dividends are cancelled upon conversion to common stock.
 
(4) Holders of Series A, B, C and D preferred stock have the option to put the stock and the stock issuable upon exercise of the related Series A and D warrants back to the Company for purchase at the greater of $0.82 per Series A share, $0.98 per Series B share, $1.50 per Series C share and $1.84 per Series D share, plus all accrued but unpaid dividends (redemption value), or the current fair market value of the shares. Holders of Series E preferred stock have the option to put their stock back to the Company at $5.94 per share plus accrued dividends. The put rights of the preferred shareholders of all series cannot be exercised until December 31, 2007, and require the consent of at least 75% of the preferred shareholders. Due to the aforementioned redemption rights, all preferred stock is presented as temporary equity on the consolidated balance sheets and adjusted by periodic accretions to the statements of operations as an adjustment to net income (loss) so that the carrying amounts will equal the greater of fair market value or redemption value for Series A, B, C and D, and redemption value for Series E. The accretion of the preferred stock is recorded to accumulated deficit. At December 31, 2005 and 2006, the fair value of each series of the Company’s preferred stock was determined based upon reference to third-party transactions or independent valuations.
 
Preferred shareholders are entitled to the number of votes equal to the whole number of shares of common stock into which the preferred shares could be converted.
 
Warrants
 
At December 31, 2005 and 2006, the Company had 307,088 and 158,566 warrants outstanding for the purchase of the Company’s Series A and D preferred stock at a price per share of $0.82 and $1.84, respectively. The warrants may be exercised at any time prior to March 2007 and February 2009, respectively. All of the Series A warrants and 87,366 of Series D warrants were exercised as of February 28, 2007. Based on the expected initial public offering price and the fact that, as of April 15, 2007, as discussed in Note I, the Company had received proxies from holders of over 75% of the Company’s preferred shares outstanding


F-22


Table of Contents

 
TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)

approving both the underwriters in the Company’s contemplated initial public offering and the conversion of the preferred stock into common stock upon the closing of the offering, the Company believes that all of its outstanding Series D preferred stock as of February 28, 2007 will be converted into common stock upon the closing of this offering. Pursuant to their terms, the remaining outstanding Series D warrants would be exercisable for common stock upon the closing of the Company’s contemplated initial public offering.
 
As discussed in Note A, in 2006, the Company adopted FSP 150-5 resulting in the reclassification of the carrying value of the preferred stock warrants as a liability and began recording the warrants at fair value at each reporting period with any increase or decrease in fair value reported in other income (expense), net. For the year ended December 31, 2006, $0.9 million has been recorded as an other expense. The Company selected the Black-Scholes pricing model to determine the fair value of its warrants. The determination of the fair value using this model will be affected by assumptions regarding a number of complex and subjective variables. The assumptions used in the Company’s Black-Scholes calculation for Series A and D warrants at January 1, 2006 upon the adoption of FSP 150-5 were: (i) fair value per share of $6.76 and $6.24, respectively; (ii) expected term of one and three years, respectively; (iii) risk-free interest rate of 4.4% and 4.3%, respectively; (iv) expected volatility of 44% and 49%, respectively; and (v) no expected dividend yield. The assumptions used in the Company’s Black-Scholes calculation for Series A and D warrants at December 31, 2006 were: (i) fair value per share of $8.71 and $8.57, respectively; (ii) expected term of two months and twenty-six months, respectively; (iii) risk-free interest rate of 5.0% and 4.8%, respectively; (iv) expected volatility of 27% and 43%, respectively; and (v) no expected dividend yield.
 
The fair value of the underlying preferred stock at January 1, 2006 was determined based upon the sale by the Company of 2,356,435 shares of Series E preferred stock at $5.94 per share on December 29, 2005 and an independent third-party valuation performed by Virchow Krause which allocated the enterprise value of the Company, determined based upon the sale of the Series E preferred stock, to each of the Company’s existing classes of stock including the Series A and D preferred stock. The fair value of the underlying Series A and D preferred stock at December 31, 2006 was determined based upon an independent third-party valuation performed by Virchow Krause. This valuation, as of December 31, 2006, was prepared utilizing the probability weighted expected return method as prescribed by the AICPA Practice Aid Valuation of Privately-Held-Company Equity Securities Issued as Compensation. This valuation took into consideration the following scenarios: (i) completion of an initial public offering; (ii) sale or merger; and (iii) remaining private. The valuation amounts determined under each scenario were then probability weighted based upon management’s best estimates of the occurrence of each scenario. The resulting value was then allocated to the Company’s common and each series of preferred stock based upon the economic impact of the conversion rights and liquidation preferences of the preferred stock.
 
Contingent Common Shares
 
In addition to the conversion features, the Series A Investment Agreement contains a contingent provision that entitles the Company’s founders, T. Rockwell Mackie and Paul J. Reckwerdt, and the holders of the Series A preferred stock, Avalon Technology, LLC and Venture Investors Early Stage Fund II Limited Partnership, to receive one share of the Company’s common stock for each 2.86 shares of Series A preferred stock held for a total of 1,288,669 shares of common stock. The rights under this provision are contingent upon an IPO or sale, and the number of shares are allocated between the holders of Series A preferred stock and the Company’s founders as follows: one-half of the contingent shares were to be issued based upon the timing of a sale or initial public offering of the Company If the sale or initial public offering was to occur within five years of the date of receipt of the Series A preferred shares, these rights would vest in the founders. If the sale or initial public offering was to occur seven years or more after the date of receipt of the Series A preferred shares, these rights would vest in the holders of Series A preferred stock. The other half of the contingent shares were to be issued based upon the price per share to be received by the holders of Series A preferred stock in such sale or initial public offering. If the value received pursuant to a sale or initial


F-23


Table of Contents

 
TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)

public offering was equal to or greater than eight times the price paid for the Series A preferred shares, these rights would vest in the founders. If the value received pursuant to a sale or initial public offering was equal to or less than five times the price paid for the Series A preferred share, these rights would vest in the holders of Series A preferred stock. In February 2007, in accordance with the terms of the Series A investment agreement, the Company’s Board of Directors allocated one-half of these contingent shares of common stock to holders of Series A preferred stock based upon the fact that a sale or initial public offering did not occur prior to seven years from the Series A issuance date and one-half of these contingent shares of common stock to our founders based upon the Company’s belief that the anticipated initial public offering price was greater than eight times the original Series A offering price in 1999. The Company has accounted for the contingent common shares based upon analogy to the guidance provided by Issue 2 of EITF 00-27, “Application of Issue No 98-5 to Certain Convertible Instruments.” The Company believes the contingent common share feature is an embedded, non-detachable feature of the Series A preferred stock and has similar economic characteristics to an embedded conversion option as addressed in EITF 00-27. When the conditional obligation to redeem the instrument by transferring assets becomes certain, the Company will recognize a charge to retained earnings and an increase to additional paid in capital of approximately $104,000.
 
Common Stock
 
The Company has reserved 25,221,239 shares of common stock at December 31, 2006, to provide for the conversion of 3,685,600, 9,352,992, 5,987,264, 3,838,948 and 2,356,435 shares of Series A, B, C, D and E preferred stock, respectively, 307,088 Series A stock warrants and 158,566 Series D stock warrants and the issuance of 1,288,669 common shares resulting from provisions in the Series A Investment Agreement. The Company has also reserved 11,449,265 shares of common stock at December 31, 2006, to provide for the exercise of outstanding stock options and the granting of stock options. As of February 28, 2007, additional stock options of 1,708,156 had been exercised since December 31, 2006.
 
NOTE F — STOCK OPTIONS
 
The Company sponsors three stock option plans (the “Plans”), which allow for the grant of incentive and nonqualified stock options for the purchase of common stock. Each option entitles the holder to purchase one share of common stock at the specified option price. The exercise price of each incentive stock option granted must not be less than the fair market value on the grant date. The option term is six to ten years. Options vest over three to four years. Prior to January 1, 2006, compensation expense for any difference between the exercise price and the estimated fair market value of the common stock on the date of grant is recognized as compensation expense over the vesting period of the respective options. Compensation expense of $26,000 was recorded in the year ended December 31, 2004. No compensation expense was recorded in the year ended December 31, 2005.


F-24


Table of Contents

 
TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)

 
The following table summarizes information with respect to the Company’s plans:
 
                         
    Shares
    Number of
    Weighted-
 
    Available
    Options
    Average
 
    for Grant     Outstanding     Exercise Price  
 
Balance at December 31, 2003
    574,774       4,102,652     $ 0.15  
Authorized
    3,142,857              
Granted
    (886,720 )     886,720       2.18  
Exercised
          (558,993 )     0.07  
Cancelled
    25,165       (25,165 )     0.29  
                         
Balance at December 31, 2004
    2,856,076       4,405,214       0.57  
Authorized
    2,720,000              
Granted
    (4,334,135 )     4,334,135       3.13  
Exercised
          (969,675 )     0.15  
Cancelled
    66,912       (66,912 )     0.86  
                         
Balance at December 31, 2005
    1,308,853       7,702,762       2.06  
Authorized
    3,264,000              
Granted
    (2,341,833 )     2,341,833       6.63  
Exercised
          (826,416 )     1.18  
Cancelled
    62,254       (62,254 )     3.04  
                         
Balance at December 31, 2006
    2,293,274       9,155,925     $ 3.30  
                         
 
During the years ended December 31, 2004, 2005 and 2006, the Company granted stock options to employees at exercise prices deemed by the Board of Directors to be equal to the fair value of the common stock at the time of grant. The fair value of the common stock at the time of grant was determined by the Board of Directors at each stock option measurement date based primarily on arm’s length sales of the Company’s common and redeemable convertible preferred stock and third-party independent valuations, but also on a variety of other factors including the Company’s financial position and historical financial performance, the status of developments within the Company, the composition and ability of the management team, an evaluation and benchmark of the Company’s competitors, the current climate in the marketplace, the illiquid nature of the common stock, the effect of the rights and preferences of the preferred shareholders, and the prospects of a liquidity event, among others.
 
The application of the Company’s methodology for determining the fair value of the Company’s common stock at each issuance date during the twelve months prior to December 31, 2006 is discussed below:
 
On December 29, 2005, the Company sold 2,356,435 shares of Series E convertible preferred stock at $5.94 per share for net proceeds of $13.9 million. Using this information, the Company engaged an independent valuation firm, Virchow Krause to perform a valuation of its common shares based on this preferred stock transaction. The independent valuation report concluded that the common stock was valued at $4.99 per share as of December 29, 2005. This valuation was then used for the option grant made in January 2006.
 
In the second quarter of 2006, the Board of Directors determined that an updated independent valuation should be performed. The Company engaged the same independent valuation firm that completed valuation for the January 2006 grants to perform a valuation of all classes of stock. The independent valuation firm,Virchow Krause issued a report dated May 16, 2006, which concluded that the Company’s common stock was valued at $5.35 per share as of March 31, 2006. This valuation was then used for the option grants made in May and July 2006.


F-25


Table of Contents

 
TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)

On October 23, 2006, the Chairman of the Board, T. Rockwell Mackie, sold an aggregate of 190,400 shares of common stock to two third-party investors, and President, Paul Reckwerdt, sold 190,400 common shares to a single third-party investor. The purchase price of all these shares was $6.75 per share resulting in aggregate proceeds of $1.3 million to each seller. Given the significant size of the transactions and the fact that these shares were sold to third-party investors, the Company concluded that its common shares should be valued at $6.75 per share as of this date. Stock option grants were made based on this price in October, November and early December 2006.
 
In all cases, the possibility of an initial public offering was factored into the valuation considerations. In addition, the difference in value between the common stock and preferred stock has narrowed as the Company has moved closer to completing an IPO. The following table sets forth option grants made during 2006 with intrinsic value calculated based on grant date fair value.
 
                                 
    Number of
          Fair Value
    Intrinsic
 
    Options
          Estimate
    Value per
 
Date of Grant
  Granted     Exercise Price     per Share     Share  
 
January 2006
    34,000     $ 4.99     $ 4.99     $  
May 2006
    46,920       5.35       5.35        
July 2006
    108,800       5.35       5.35        
October 2006
    190,313       6.75       6.75        
November 2006
    3,400       6.75       6.75        
December 2006
    1,958,400       6.75       6.75        
 
At December 31, 2006, the range of exercise prices on outstanding options was as follows:
 
                                 
          Average
             
    Number of
    Remaining
    Number of
       
    Options
    Contractual Life
    Options
    Weighted-Average
 
Range of Exercise Price
  Outstanding     (Years)     Exercisable     Exercise Price  
 
$.03-$.10
    826,880       3.13       826,880     $ 0.08  
$.29-$.61
    1,440,549       6.45       1,375,949       0.34  
$2.82-$3.46
    4,550,064       6.98       1,211,231       3.13  
$4.99-$5.35
    186,320       5.40              
$6.75
    2,152,112       5.92              
                                 
      9,155,925       6.27       3,414,060       1.26  
                                 
Aggregate intrinsic value
  $ 46,695,218             $ 24,376,388          
                                 
 
The aggregate intrinsic value is calculated as the difference between the exercise price of the underlying stock options and the fair value of the Company’s common stock at December 31, 2006.
 
Upon the adoption of SFAS No. 123(R) on January 1, 2006, the Company continues to use the Black-Scholes valuation model to value stock options. The Company used historical stock prices of companies which it considered as a peer group as the basis for its volatility assumptions. The assumed risk-free rates were based on U.S. Treasury rates in effect at the time of grant with a term consistent with the expected option lives. The Company employed the plain-vanilla method of estimating the expected term of the options as prescribed by SAB 107 as the Company did not have significant historical experience. The forfeiture rate is based on past history of forfeited options. The expense is being allocated using the straight-line method. For the year ended December 31, 2006, the Company recorded $232,000 of stock compensation expense related to the adoption of SFAS No. 123(R). As of December 31, 2006, the Company has $8.0 million of total unrecognized compensation cost related to nonvested awards granted under the Company’s stock based plans that it expects to recognize over a weighted-average period of 3.89 years. Under the prospective method of adoption of SFAS


F-26


Table of Contents

 
TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)

No. 123(R), the Company continues to account for options issued prior to January 1, 2006 under the intrinsic value method of APB 25.
 
The weighted average fair value per share of options granted for the fiscal years ended December 31, 2004, 2005 and 2006 were $2.18, $3.13 and $6.63, respectively. The fair value of each option grant was estimated at the date of grant using the Black-Scholes option-pricing model based on the assumption ranges below:
 
                         
    Year Ended December 31,  
    2004     2005     2006  
 
Expected term (years)
    5.0       5.0       4.25  
Risk-free interest rate
    5.0 %     5.0 %     3.8-5.1 %
Expected volatility
    N/A       N/A       65 %
Dividend yield
    0 %     0 %     0 %
Expected forfeiture rate
    0 %     0 %     2.9 %
 
NOTE G — RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS
 
The Company has an exclusive license agreement with the Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation (“WARF”), a shareholder of the Company, to make, use, sell and otherwise distribute products under certain of WARF’s patents anywhere in the world. The Company is required to pay WARF a royalty for each product sold. The Company has recorded to cost of revenue royalties of $504,000, $672,000, and $1,272,000 during the years ended December 31, 2004, 2005 and 2006, respectively. The license agreement expires upon expiration of the patents and may be terminated earlier if elected by the Company. The Company may also grant sublicenses to third parties but must pay WARF 50% of all fees, royalties and other payments received. WARF has the right to terminate the license agreement if the Company does not meet the minimum royalty obligations or satisfy other obligations related to its utilization of the technology. If the Company lost this license, it would be unable to produce or sell the System. The Company had an accrued royalty payable balance of $192,000 and $456,000 as of December 31, 2005 and 2006, respectively.
 
The Company purchased certain aircraft flight services from a company owned by a member of the Board of Directors. The Company incurred expenses of $25,000, $38,000 and $19,000 for this service during the years ended December 31, 2004, 2005 and 2006, respectively. The payable balance outstanding at December 31, 2004 was $25,000. There was no payable outstanding at December 31, 2005 and 2006.
 
The Company incurred fees of $18,000, $24,000 and $12,000 during the years ended December 31, 2004, 2005 and 2006, respectively, in accordance with an agreement with a member of the Board of Directors who provides consulting services to the Company. The agreement guarantees a minimum payment of $20,000 per year, and is renewable on an annual basis. There was no payable outstanding at any of the period ends. The agreement was cancelled during 2006.
 
NOTE H — RETIREMENT PLAN
 
The Company has established a 401(k) plan covering substantially all employees. Employer contributions, which began in 2005, are at the discretion of the Board of Directors and the policy is to fund the 401(k) plan contributions as they accrue. The Company contributed $0, $348,000 and $735,000 for this service during the years ended December 31, 2004, 2005 and 2006, respectively.


F-27


Table of Contents

 
TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED AND SUBSIDIARIES
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)

NOTE I — SUBSEQUENT EVENTS
 
As of April 15, 2007, the Company had received proxies from holders of over 75% of the Company’s preferred shares outstanding approving the underwriters for the Company’s contemplated initial public offering and the conversion of the preferred stock into common stock upon closing of this offering.
 
On March 1, 2007, the Company entered into a seven-year operating lease for a corporate facility. The total lease obligation over the term of the lease is $5.6 million.
 
On February 14, 2007, the Board of Directors approved the issuance of 1,288,669 contingent shares for no consideration to certain holders of the Company’s Series A preferred stock, including certain members of management and entities affiliated with the Company’s directors, pursuant to the Series A Investment agreement.
 
On February 14, 2007, the Board of Directors approved a revised investment agreement to become effective upon completion of an initial public offering. This revised investment agreement eliminates the right of preferred shareholders to put their shares of Series A, B, C or D preferred stock back to the Company.
 
On February 27, 2007, the Company entered into a cooperative research and development agreement and licensing agreement with the University of California and the Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory. The research agreement required an initial funding of $0.9 million which was made in February and an additional $2.4 million to be paid over the next eight months. The license agreement required an initial payment of $0.2 million and additional milestone payments of $0.3 million over the research project. The license agreement also includes a earned royalty payment of 2% on net sales of the licensed product.
 
NOTE J — STOCK SPLIT
 
On April 5, 2007, the Company’s board of directors approved a 1.36-for-one stock split in the form of a stock dividend of the Company’s outstanding stock which will become effective prior to the effectiveness of the registration statement for the Company’s contemplated initial public offering. All shares and per share amounts in the accompanying consolidated financial statements and notes to the consolidated financial statements have been retroactively adjusted for all periods presented to give effect to the stock split.


F-28


Table of Contents

(TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED LOGO)

 


Table of Contents

 
 
Through and including          , 2007 (the 25th day after the date of this prospectus), all dealers effecting transactions in these securities, whether or not participating in this offering, may be required to deliver a prospectus. This is in addition to the dealers’ obligation to deliver a prospectus when acting as underwriters and with respect to unsold allotments or subscriptions.
 
10,937,500 Shares
 
(TOMOTHERAPY LOGO)
 
Common Stock
 
 
 
PROSPECTUS
 
 
Merrill Lynch & Co.
 
Piper Jaffray
 
Thomas Weisel Partners LLC
 
Robert W. Baird & Co.
 
William Blair & Company
 
          , 2007
 


Table of Contents

PART II
 
INFORMATION NOT REQUIRED IN PROSPECTUS
 
Item 13.    Other Expenses of Issuance and Distribution.
 
The following table indicates the expenses to be incurred in connection with the offering described in this Registration Statement, other than underwriting discounts and commissions, all of which will be paid by TomoTherapy. All amounts are estimates, other than the SEC registration fee, the NASD filing fee and The Nasdaq Global Market listing fee:
 
         
SEC Registration Fee
  $ 21,534  
NASD Filing Fee
    20,625  
The Nasdaq Stock Market Listing Fee
    125,000  
Printing and Engraving Expenses
    290,000  
Legal Fees and Expenses
    800,000  
Accounting Fees and Expenses
    450,000  
Transfer Agent and Registrar Fees and Expenses
    15,000  
Miscellaneous
    77,841  
         
Total
  $ 1,800,000  
         
 
Item 14.    Indemnification of Directors and Officers.
 
On completion of this offering, our amended and restated bylaws will provide that we shall indemnify our directors and executive officers and may indemnify our employees to the fullest extent permitted by the Wisconsin Business Corporation Law.
 
Section 180.0851 of the Wisconsin Business Corporation Law requires the Registrant to indemnify a director or officer, to the extent such person is successful on the merits or otherwise in the defense of a proceeding for all reasonable expenses incurred in the proceeding, if such person was a party to such proceeding because he or she was a director or officer of the Registrant unless it is determined that he or she breached or failed to perform a duty owed to the Registrant and such breach or failure to perform constitutes: (i) a willful failure to deal fairly with the Registrant or its shareholders in connection with a matter in which the director or officer has a material conflict of interest, (ii) a violation of criminal law, unless the director or officer had reasonable cause to believe his or her conduct was unlawful, (iii) a transaction from which the director or officer derived an improper personal profit or (iv) willful misconduct.
 
Section 180.0858 of the Wisconsin Business Corporation Law provides that subject to certain limitations, the mandatory indemnification provisions do not preclude any additional right to indemnification or allowance of expenses that a director or officer may have under the articles of incorporation or bylaws of the Registrant, a written agreement between the director or officer and the Registrant or a resolution of the Board of Directors or the shareholders.
 
Unless otherwise provided in the Registrant’s articles of incorporation or bylaws, or by written agreement between the director or officer and the Registrant, an officer or director seeking indemnification is entitled to indemnification if approved in any of the following manners as specified in Section 180.0855 of the Wisconsin Business Corporation Law:
 
  (i)  by majority vote of a disinterested quorum of the Board of Directors,
 
  (ii)  by independent legal counsel chosen by a quorum of disinterested directors or its committee,
 
  (iii)  by a panel of three arbitrators (one of which is chosen by a quorum of disinterested directors),
 
  (iv)  by the vote of the shareholders,


II-1


Table of Contents

 
  (v)  by a court; or
 
  (vi)  by any other method permitted in Section 180.0858 of the Wisconsin Business Corporation Law.
 
Reasonable expenses incurred by a director or officer who is a party to a proceeding may be reimbursed by the Registrant, pursuant to Section 180.0853 of the Wisconsin Business Corporation Law, at such time as the director or officer furnishes to the corporation written affirmation of his good faith that he has not breached or failed to perform his duties; and written confirmation to repay any amounts advanced if it is determined that indemnification by the Registrant is not required.
 
Section 180.0859 of the Wisconsin Business Corporation Law provides that it is the public policy of the State of Wisconsin to require or permit indemnification, allowance of expenses and insurance to the extent required or permitted under Sections 180.0850 to 180.0858 of the Wisconsin Business Corporation Law for any liability incurred in connection with a proceeding involving a federal or state statute, rule or regulation regulating the offer, sale or purchase of securities.
 
Under Section 180.0828 of the Wisconsin Business Corporation Law, a director of the Registrant is not personally liable for breach of any duty resulting solely from his or her status as a director, unless it shall be proved that the director’s conduct constituted conduct described in the first paragraph of this item.
 
The Underwriting Agreement filed herewith as Exhibit 1.1 provides for indemnification of the directors, certain officers and controlling persons of the Registrant by the underwriters against certain civil liabilities, including liabilities under the Securities Act.
 
In addition, the Registrant intends to obtain directors’ and officers’ liability insurance that will insure against certain liabilities, including liabilities under the Securities Act, subject to applicable restrictions.
 
Item 15.    Recent Sales of Unregistered Securities.
 
(a) From January 1, 2004 through the date of this registration statement, we sold the following securities that were not registered under the Securities Act. The following share numbers give effect to a 4-for-1 split of our common stock and preferred stock that was effected on June 30, 2005 and a 1.36-for-1 split of our common stock and preferred stock that is effective prior to the effective date of the registration statement for the initial public offering.
 
1. On February 18, 2004, we issued 3,808,000 shares of Series D preferred stock at a price per share of $1.84 and the aggregate consideration received by us was $7,000,000.
 
2. On July 13, 2005, we issued 3,454 shares of Series D preferred stock to three investors pursuant to the exercise of warrants. The exercise price was $1.84 per share and the aggregate consideration received by us was $6,340.
 
3. On September 8, 2005, we issued an aggregate of 13,600 shares of Series D preferred stock to an investor pursuant to the exercise of a warrant. The exercise price was $1.84 per share and the aggregate consideration received by us was $25,000.
 
4. On September 20, 2005, we issued 13,893 shares of Series D preferred stock to three investors upon the exercise of our Series D warrants. The exercise price was $1.84 per share. The aggregate consideration received by us was $25,540.
 
5. On December 29, 2005, we issued 2,356,435 shares of Series E preferred stock at a price per share of $5.94 and the aggregate consideration received by us was $14,000,000.
 
6. On January 24, 2007, we issued 307,088 shares of Series A preferred stock to a single investor upon the exercise of our Series A warrants. The exercise price was $0.82 per share and the aggregate consideration received by us was $249,983.
 
7. During February 2007, we issued 81,926 shares of Series D preferred stock to four investors upon the exercise of our Series D warrants. The exercise price was $1.84 per share and the aggregate consideration received by us was $150,600.


II-2


Table of Contents

 
8. During February 2007, we issued 5,440 shares of Series D preferred stock to two employees upon the exercise of our Series D warrants. The exercise price was $1.84 per share and the aggregate consideration received by us was $10,000.
 
9. During March 2007, we issued 61,162 shares of Series D preferred stock to three investors upon the exercise of our Series D warrants. The exercise price was $1.84 per share and the aggregate consideration received by us was $112,430.
 
We believe that the offer and sale of the above-referenced securities were exempt from registration under the Securities Act by virtue of Section 4(2) and/or Rule 506 under Regulation D promulgated thereunder as transactions not involving any public offering. All of the purchasers of unregistered securities for which we relied on Section 4(2) and/or Regulation D represented that they were accredited investors as defined under the Securities Act. We claimed such exemption on the basis that (a) the purchasers in each case represented that they intended to acquire the securities for investment only and not with a view to the distribution thereof and that they either received adequate information about the registrant or had access, through employment or other relationships, to such information, (b) appropriate legends were affixed to the warrants and/or stock certificates issued in such transactions, and (c) that offers and sales of these securities were made without general solicitation or advertising.
 
(b) From January 1, 2004 to March 31, 2007, we granted to our directors, employees and consultants options to purchase an aggregate of 7,562,688 shares of common stock at exercise prices ranging from $0.61 to $6.75 per share. As of March 31, 2007, we had issued a total of 858,811 shares of common stock upon the exercise of such options.
 
We believe that the offer and sale of the above-referenced securities were exempt from registration under the Securities Act because they were made in reliance upon the exemption from registration provided under Section 3(b) of the Securities Act and Rule 701 promulgated thereunder as securities issued pursuant to written compensatory plans or arrangements.
 
(c) There were no underwritten offerings employed in connection with any of the transactions set forth in Item 15(a) or (b).
 
Item 16.    Exhibits and Financial Statement Schedules.
 
(a)   Exhibits
 
         
Exhibit
   
Number
 
Description
 
  1 .1*   Form of Underwriting Agreement
  3 .1**   Amended and Restated Articles of Incorporation of the Registrant, as currently in effect
  3 .2   Form of Amended and Restated Articles of Incorporation of the Registrant, to be in effect upon completion of the offering
  3 .3**   Bylaws of the Registrant, as currently in effect
  3 .4**   Form of Amended and Restated Bylaws of the Registrant, to be in effect upon completion of the offering
  4 .1**   Form of the Registrant’s Common Stock Certificate
  4 .2**   Form of Series D warrant issued by Registrant on February 18, 2004
  5 .1*   Opinion of Michael Best & Friedrich LLP, counsel to the Registrant, as to the validity of our common stock (including consent)
  10 .1**   Amended and Restated Investment Agreement, dated February 8, 2007, by and among the Registrant and the other parties thereto, as amended
  10 .2**   Loan Agreement, dated February 11, 1999, by and between the Registrant and Venture Investors Early Stage Fund II Limited Partnership, as amended
  10 .3**   Note and Warrant Purchase Agreement, by and among the Registrant and the other parties thereto dated May 1, 2003, as amended


II-3


Table of Contents

         
Exhibit
   
Number
 
Description
 
  10 .4†   License Agreement, dated February 22, 1999, by and between the Registrant and Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation, as amended
  10 .5**   Equity Agreement, dated February 22, 1999, by and between the Registrant and Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation
  10 .6**   Employment Agreement by and between the Registrant and Frederick A. Robertson, M.D.
  10 .7**   Employment Agreement by and between the Registrant and Stephen C. Hathaway
  10 .8**   Employment Agreement by and between the Registrant and Paul J. Reckwerdt
  10 .9**   Employment Agreement by and between the Registrant and John H. Hughes
  10 .10**   Employment Agreement by and between the Registrant and Gustavo H. Olivera
  10 .11†   Development and OEM Supply Agreement by and between the Registrant and Analogic Corporation, dated January 27, 2003
  10 .12†   Manufacturing and Supply Agreement by and between the Registrant and Siemens Medical Solutions USA, Inc., dated November 14, 2003, as amended
  10 .13**   Lease Agreement, dated January 26, 2005, as amended, by and between the Registrant and Old Sauk Trails Park Limited Partnership for the property located at 1240 Deming Way, Madison, WI
  10 .14**   Lease Agreement, dated October 28, 2005, by and between the Registrant and Adelphia, LLC for the property located at 1209 Deming Way, Madison, Wisconsin
  10 .15**   Time Sharing Agreement, effective December 2005, by and between the Registrant and Cozzens and Cudahy Air, Inc.
  10 .16**   Incentive Stock Option Plan, as amended, and forms of option agreements thereunder
  10 .17**   2000 Stock Option Plan, as amended, and forms of option agreements thereunder
  10 .18**   2002 Stock Option Plan, as amended, and forms of option agreements thereunder
  10 .19**   2007 Equity Incentive Plan
  10 .20**   2007 Employee Stock Purchase Plan
  10 .21**   Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale
  10 .22**   International Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale
  10 .23**   Tomo Lifecycle Care (TLC) and Partnership Terms and Conditions
  10 .24†**   Logistics Services Agreement between the Registrant and Kuehne + Nagal Inc., dated September 7, 2005
  10 .25†   Purchase Order between the Registrant and ReMedPar, Inc., dated February 7, 2007
  10 .26**   Form of Director and Executive Officer Indemnification Agreement
  10 .27**   Form of Noncompetition Agreement
  10 .28**   Form of Assignment of Inventions Agreement
  10 .29**   Form of Confidentiality Agreement
  10 .30†   Variable Pay Plan
  21 .1**   Subsidiary of the Registrant
  23 .1   Consent of Grant Thornton LLP, independent registered public accounting firm
  23 .2*   Consent of Michael Best & Friedrich LLP (included in Exhibit 5.1)
  23 .3   Consent of Virchow Krause Valuation, LLC
  24 .1**   Power of Attorney (included in signature page to Registration Statement)
 
* To be filed by amendment.
 
** Previously filed.
 
Confidential treatment has been requested for portions of this exhibit. These portions have been omitted from the Registration Statement and submitted separately to the Securities and Exchange Commission.

II-4


Table of Contents

(b) Financial Statement Schedules
 
Schedules not listed above have been omitted because the information required to be set forth therein is not applicable or is shown in the financial statements or notes thereto.
 
Item 17.    Undertakings.
 
Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities Act may be permitted to directors, officers and controlling persons of the registrant pursuant to the foregoing provisions, or otherwise, the registrant has been advised that in the opinion of the SEC such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act, and is, therefore, unenforceable. In the event that a claim for indemnification against such liabilities (other than the payment by the registrant of expenses incurred or paid by a director, officer, or controlling person of the registrant in the successful defense of any action, suit or proceeding) is asserted by such director, officer, or controlling person in connection with the securities being registered, the registrant will, unless in the opinion of its counsel the matter has been settled by controlling precedent, submit to a court of appropriate jurisdiction the question of whether such indemnification by it is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act and will be governed by the final adjudication of such issue.
 
The undersigned registrant hereby undertakes:
 
(1) To provide to the underwriter, at the closing specified in the underwriting agreement, certificates in such denominations and registered in such names as required by the underwriter to permit prompt delivery to each purchaser.
 
(2) That for purposes of determining any liability under the Securities Act of 1933, the information omitted from the form of prospectus filed as part of this registration statement in reliance upon Rule 430A and contained in a form of prospectus filed by the Registrant pursuant to Rule 424(b)(1) or (4), or 497(h) under the Securities Act shall be deemed to be part of this registration statement as of the time it was declared effective.
 
(3) That for the purpose of determining any liability under the Securities Act of 1933, each post-effective amendment that contains a form of prospectus shall be deemed to be a new registration statement relating to the securities offered therein, and this offering of such securities at that time shall be deemed to be the initial bona fide offering thereof.
 
That, for the purpose of determining liability under the Securities Act of 1933 to any purchaser, if the registrant is subject to Rule 430C, each prospectus filed pursuant to Rule 424(b) as part of a registration statement relating to an offering, other than registration statements relying on Rule 430B or other than prospectuses filed in reliance on Rule 430A, shall be deemed to be part of and included in the registration statement as of the date it is first used after effectiveness. Provided, however, that no statement made in a registration statement or prospectus that is part of the registration statement or made in a document incorporated or deemed incorporated by reference into the registration statement or prospectus that is part of the registration statement will, as to a purchaser with a time of contract of sale prior to such first use, supersede or modify any statement that was made in the registration statement or prospectus that was part of the registration statement or made in any such document immediately prior to such date of first use.
 
That, for the purpose of determining liability of the registrant under the Securities Act of 1933 to any purchaser in the initial distribution of the securities: The undersigned registrant undertakes that in a primary offering of securities of the undersigned registrant pursuant to this registration statement, regardless of the underwriting method used to sell the securities to the purchaser, if the securities are offered or sold to such purchaser by means of any of the following communications, the undersigned registrant will be a seller to the purchaser and will be considered to offer or sell such securities to such purchaser:
 
(1) Any preliminary prospectus or prospectus of the undersigned registrant relating to the offering required to be filed pursuant to Rule 424;
 
(2) Any free writing prospectus relating to the offering prepared by or on behalf of the undersigned registrant or used or referred to by the undersigned registrant;


II-5


Table of Contents

(3) The portion of any other free writing prospectus relating to the offering containing material information about the undersigned registrant or its securities provided by or on behalf of the undersigned registrant; and
 
(4) Any other communication that is an offer in the offering made by the undersigned registrant to the purchaser.


II-6


Table of Contents

SIGNATURES
 
Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act, the registrant has duly caused this amendment to Registration Statement on Form S-1 to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, in the City of Madison, State of Wisconsin, on the 19 th  day of April 2007.
 
TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED
 
  By: 
/s/   Frederick A. Robertson, M.D.
Frederick A. Robertson, M.D.
Chief Executive Officer
 
Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act, this Registration Statement has been signed by the following persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated.
 
             
Name
 
Position
 
Date
 
/s/   Frederick A. Robertson, M.D.

Frederick A. Robertson, M.D.
  Chief Executive Officer and Director (principal executive officer)   April 19, 2007
         
/s/   Paul J. Reckwerdt

Paul J. Reckwerdt
  President and Director   April 19, 2007
         
/s/   Stephen C. Hathaway

Stephen C. Hathaway
  Chief Financial Officer (principal financial and accounting officer)   April 19, 2007
         
*

T. Rockwell Mackie, Ph.D.
  Director   April 19, 2007
         
*

Michael J. Cudahy
  Director   April 19, 2007
         
*

John J. McDonough
  Director   April 19, 2007
         
*

John P. Neis
  Director   April 19, 2007
         
*

Cary J. Nolan
  Director   April 19, 2007
         
*

Carlos A. Perez, M.D.
  Director   April 19, 2007


II-7


Table of Contents

             
Name
 
Position
 
Date
 
*

Sam R. Leno
  Director   April 19, 2007
         
*

Frances S. Taylor
  Director   April 19, 2007
         
*By 
/s/   Stephen C. Hathaway

Stephen C. HathawayAttorney-in-fact
       


II-8


Table of Contents

EXHIBIT INDEX
 
         
Exhibit
   
Number
 
Description
 
  1 .1*   Form of Underwriting Agreement
         
  3 .1**   Amended and Restated Articles of Incorporation of the Registrant, as currently in effect
         
  3 .2   Form of Amended and Restated Articles of Incorporation of the Registrant, to be in effect upon completion of the offering
         
  3 .3**   Bylaws of the Registrant, as currently in effect
         
  3 .4**   Form of Amended and Restated Bylaws of the Registrant, to be in effect upon completion of the offering
         
  4 .1**   Form of the Registrant’s Common Stock Certificate
         
  4 .2**   Form of Series D warrant issued by Registrant on February 18, 2004
         
  5 .1*   Opinion of Michael Best & Friedrich LLP, counsel to the Registrant, as to the validity of our common stock (including consent)
         
  10 .1**   Amended and Restated Investment Agreement, dated February 8, 2007, by and among the Registrant and the other parties thereto, as amended
         
  10 .2**   Loan Agreement, dated February 11, 1999, by and between the Registrant and Venture Investors Early Stage Fund II Limited Partnership, as amended
         
  10 .3**   Note and Warrant Purchase Agreement, by and among the Registrant and the other parties thereto dated May 1, 2003, as amended
         
  10 .4†   License Agreement, dated February 22, 1999, by and between the Registrant and Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation, as amended
         
  10 .5**   Equity Agreement, dated February 22, 1999, by and between the Registrant and Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation
         
  10 .6**   Employment Agreement by and between the Registrant and Frederick A. Robertson, M.D.
         
  10 .7**   Employment Agreement by and between the Registrant and Stephen C. Hathaway
         
  10 .8**   Employment Agreement by and between the Registrant and Paul J. Reckwerdt
         
  10 .9**   Employment Agreement by and between the Registrant and John H. Hughes
         
  10 .10**   Employment Agreement by and between the Registrant and Gustavo H. Olivera
         
  10 .11†   Development and OEM Supply Agreement by and between the Registrant and Analogic Corporation, dated January 27, 2003
         
  10 .12†   Manufacturing and Supply Agreement by and between the Registrant and Siemens Medical Solutions USA, Inc., dated November 14, 2003, as amended
         
  10 .13**   Lease Agreement, dated January 26, 2005, as amended, by and between the Registrant and Old Sauk Trails Park Limited Partnership for the property located at 1240 Deming Way, Madison, WI
         
  10 .14**   Lease Agreement, dated October 28, 2005, by and between the Registrant and Adelphia, LLC for the property located at 1209 Deming Way, Madison, Wisconsin
         
  10 .15**   Time Sharing Agreement, effective December 2005, by and between the Registrant and Cozzens and Cudahy Air, Inc.
         
  10 .16**   Incentive Stock Option Plan, as amended, and forms of option agreements thereunder
         
  10 .17**   2000 Stock Option Plan, as amended, and forms of option agreements thereunder
         
  10 .18**   2002 Stock Option Plan, as amended, and forms of option agreements thereunder
         
  10 .19**   2007 Equity Incentive Plan
         
  10 .20**   2007 Employee Stock Purchase Plan
         
  10 .21**   Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale
         
  10 .22**   International Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale


Table of Contents

         
Exhibit
   
Number
 
Description
 
         
  10 .23**   Tomo Lifecycle Care (TLC) and Partnership Terms and Conditions
         
  10 .24†**   Logistics Services Agreement between the Registrant and Kuehne + Nagal Inc., dated September 7, 2005
         
  10 .25†   Purchase Order between the Registrant and ReMedPar, Inc., dated February 7, 2007
         
  10 .26**   Form of Director and Executive Officer Indemnification Agreement
         
  10 .27**   Form of Noncompetition Agreement
         
  10 .28**   Form of Assignment of Inventions Agreement
         
  10 .29**   Form of Confidentiality Agreement
         
  10 .30†   Variable Pay Plan
         
  21 .1**   Subsidiary of the Registrant
         
  23 .1   Consent of Grant Thornton LLP, independent registered public accounting firm
         
  23 .2*   Consent of Michael Best & Friedrich LLP (included in Exhibit 5.1)
         
  23 .3   Consent of Virchow Krause Valuation, LLC
         
  24 .1**   Power of Attorney (included in signature page to Registration Statement)
 
 
* To be filed by amendment.
 
** Previously filed.
 
Confidential treatment has been requested for portions of this exhibit. These portions have been omitted from the Registration Statement and submitted separately to the Securities and Exchange Commission.

 

EXHIBIT 3.2
AMENDED AND RESTATED
ARTICLES OF INCORPORATION
OF
TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED
     The following have been adopted as the Amended and Restated Articles of Incorporation of TomoTherapy Incorporated , a Wisconsin corporation (the “ Company ”), which supersede and take the place of the existing Amended and Restated Articles of Incorporation of the Company:
ARTICLE I
Name
     The name of the Company is TomoTherapy Incorporated.
ARTICLE II
Purposes
     The purposes for which the Company is organized are to engage in any lawful activity within the purposes for which a corporation may be organized under the Wisconsin Business Corporation Law, Chapter 180 of the Wisconsin Statutes.
ARTICLE III
Capital Stock
Common Stock
     The aggregate number of shares of common stock which the Company shall have authority to issue is two hundred million (200,000,000), consisting of a single class of stock. Each share of common stock shall be designated as “ Common Stock ,” and shall have a par value of $0.01 per share.
Preferred Stock
     The aggregate number of shares of preferred stock which the Company shall have the authority to issue is ten million (10,000,000). The Board of Directors of the Company is authorized pursuant to Section 180.0602 of the Wisconsin Business Corporation Law, and subject to the limitations prescribed by law and this Article III , to provide for the issuance of the shares of preferred stock in series, and by filing a certificate pursuant to Section 180.0602 of the Wisconsin Business Corporation Law, to establish from time to time the number of shares to be included in each such series and the voting powers thereof, full or limited, and to fix the designation, powers, preferences and rights of the shares of each such series and the qualifications, limitations or restrictions thereof. The authority of the Board of Directors of the

 


 

Company with respect to each series shall include, but not be limited to, determination of the following:
     (a) The number of shares constituting that series, which number the Board of Directors may thereafter increase or decrease (but not below the number of shares then outstanding);
     (b) The distinctive designation of that series;
     (c) The dividend rate on the shares of that series, whether dividends shall be cumulative, and if so, from which date or dates, and the relative rights of priority, if any, of payment of dividends on shares of that series;
     (d) Whether that series shall have voting rights, in addition to the voting rights provided by law, and, if so, the terms of such voting rights;
     (e) Whether that series shall have conversion privileges, and, if so, the terms and conditions of such conversion, including provisions for adjustment of the conversion rate in such events as the Board of Directors of the Company shall determine;
     (f) Whether the shares of that series shall be redeemable, and, if so, the terms and conditions of such redemption, including the date or date upon or after which they shall be redeemable, and the amount per share payable in case of redemption, which amount may vary under different conditions and at different redemption dates;
     (g) Whether that series shall have a sinking fund for the redemption or purchase of shares of that series, and, if so, the terms and amount of such sinking fund;
     (h) The rights of the shares of that series in the event of voluntary or involuntary liquidation, dissolution or winding up of the corporation, and the relative rights of priority, if any, of payment of shares of that series;
     (i) Restrictions on the issuance of shares of the same series or any other class or series; and
     (j) Any other relative rights, preferences and limitations of that series.
Record Ownership
     The corporation shall be entitled to treat the person in whose name any share of its stock is registered as the owner thereof for all purposes and shall not be bound to recognize any equitable or other claim to, or interest in, such share on the part of any other person, whether or not the corporation shall have notice thereof, except as expressly provided by applicable law.

2


 

ARTICLE IV
Registered Office and Agent
      The address of the registered office of the Company is 1240 Deming Way, Madison, Wisconsin 53717-1954, and the name of the registered agent at such address is Shawn D. Guse.
 

3


 

     The undersigned officer of TomoTherapy Incorporated , a Wisconsin corporation with registered offices in Dane County, Wisconsin, certifies that the foregoing Amended and Restated Articles of Incorporation of said Company, containing amendments requiring shareholder approval, were adopted in accordance with section 180.1003 of the Wisconsin Statutes on, and are effective as of, the ___ day of April, 2007.
 
 
 
 
Shawn D. Guse
Vice President, Secretary, and General Counsel
Dated: April ___, 2007
This instrument was drafted by and is returnable to:
Shawn D. Guse
TomoTherapy Incorporated
1240 Deming Way
Madison, WI 53717-1954
(608) 824-2800

4

 

Exhibit B
Exhibit 10.4
Agreement No. 98-0228
LICENSE AGREEMENT
     This Agreement is made effective the 22nd day of February 1999, by and between Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation (hereinafter called “WARF”), a nonstock, nonprofit Wisconsin corporation, and TomoTherapy Incorporated (hereinafter called “TomoTherapy”), a corporation organized and existing under the laws of Wisconsin;
      WHEREAS, WARF owns certain inventions that are described in the “Licensed Patents” defined below and WARF previously granted a license to TomoTherapy under the Licensed Patents in an agreement, Agreement No. 98-0025, between the parties dated March 1, 1998 (the “Prior License Agreement”); and
      WHEREAS, WARF and TomoTherapy desire to supersede the Prior License Agreement as set forth herein.
      NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants and agreements set forth below, the parties covenant and agree as follows:
     Section 1. Definitions.
     For the purpose of this Agreement, the Appendix A definitions shall apply.
     Section 2. Grant.
          A. License.
     WARF hereby grants to TomoTherapy an exclusive license, limited to the Licensed Field, under the Licensed Patents to make, have made, use, sell and otherwise distribute Products anywhere in the world. Such license shall be exclusive except for the rights granted to Nomos Corporation (“Nomos”) prior to the date of this Agreement. WARF will not broaden or renew rights to Nomos outside those previously rights granted to Nomos under the license agreement existing as of the date of this Agreement.
          B. Sublicenses.
               (i) TomoTherapy may grant written, nonexclusive sublicenses to third parties. Any agreement granting a sublicense shall state that the sublicense is subject to the termination of this Agreement and TomoTherapy shall incorporate relevant terms of this Agreement in the sublicense. TomoTherapy shall have the same responsibility for the activities of any sublicensee as if the activities were directly those of TomoTherapy.
               (ii) In respect to sublicenses granted by TomoTherapy under this Section 2B, TomoTherapy shall pay to WARF [  *  ] percent ([  *  ]%) of all fees, royalties and other payments received from such sublicense(s) in the manner specified in Section 3F. At a minimum, TomoTherapy shall require its sublicensee(s) to pay an upfront license fee of $[  *  ] patent reimbursement of $[  *  ] and minimum royalties of at least $[  *  ] per year beginning three years from the date of the sublicense. In addition, TomoTherapy shall require sublicensees to pay royalties at a rate equal to or exceeding the rate set forth in Section 3D. TomoTherapy shall provide WARF with a copy of all sublicense agreements to
P.O.BOX 7365  •  MADISON, WISCONSIN 53707-7365  •  TEL (608) 263-2500  •  FAX (608) 263-1064

 
Confidential treatment has been requested for portions of this exhibit. The copy filed herewith omits the information subject to the confidentiality request. Omissions are designated as [  *  ]. A complete version of this exhibit has been filed separately with the Securities and Exchange Commission.

Page 1 of 18


 

allow WARF to verify the proper revenue sharing arrangement under such sublicense. WARF shall keep all such information confidential as provided under Section 14. TomoTherapy shall not receive from sublicensees anything of value in lieu of cash payments in consideration for any sublicense under this Agreement without the express prior written permission of WARF. Any strategic partners of TomoTherapy who are not granted a right to make or have made and sell Products under the Licensed Patents shall not be considered a sublicensee under this Agreement and shall not be subject to income sharing under this Section 2B. Strategic partners of TomoTherapy who, in addition to funding Product development, are granted a right to make or have made and sell Products shall be considered sublicensees under this Section 2B and shall be subject to minimum fee and royalty requirements as set forth herein; however, WARF shall not share in any fees for services provided by TomoTherapy or in any funding which TomoTherapy represents in good faith is not consideration for sublicense rights granted to such strategic partner.
               (iii) Agreements with third parties which permit such third party to purchase Products from TomoTherapy and resell such Products shall be considered distribution agreements and not sublicense agreements subject to this Section 2B. Under any such distribution agreement, TomoTherapy shall pay royalties to WARF on the sale of Products to such third party in accordance with Section 3D and such agreements shall not be subject to the fee and royalty requirements of Section 2B(ii).
     Section 3. Consideration.
          A. Development.
     TomoTherapy agrees to and warrants that: it has, or will obtain, the expertise necessary to independently evaluate the inventions of the Licensed Patents; it will establish and actively and diligently pursue the development plan (see Appendix E) to the end that the inventions of the Licensed Patents will be utilized to provide Products for sale in the retail market; and within one month following the end of each calendar quarter ending on March 31, June 30, September 30 and December 31 and until the date of first commercial sale of Products, it will supply WARF with a written Development Report. All development activities and strategies and all aspects of Products design and decisions to market and the like are entirely at the discretion of TomoTherapy, and TomoTherapy shall rely entirely on its own expertise with respect thereto. WARF’s review of TomoTherapy’s development plan is solely to verify the existence of TomoTherapy’s commitment to development activity and to assure compliance with TomoTherapy’s obligations to utilize the inventions of the Licensed Patents for the marketplace, as set forth above.
          B. License Fee.
     TomoTherapy agrees to pay to WARF a license fee of $[  *  ] of which $[  *  ] was paid under the terms of the Prior License Agreement leaving a balance of $[  *  ] due to WARF hereunder. In lieu of a cash payment of these license fees, TomoTherapy agrees to issue to WARF and WARF agrees to accept shares of TomoTherapy’s Common Stock under the terms the Equity Agreement between WARF and TomoTherapy of even date herewith.
          C. Patent Reimbursement.
     TomoTherapy agrees to reimburse WARF for [  *  ]% of the actual costs WARF incurs in filing, prosecuting and maintaining the Licensed Patents. In lieu of a cash payment of patent reimbursement due hereunder, TomoTherapy agrees to issue and WARF agrees to accept shares of TomoTherapy Common Stock under the terms of the Equity Agreement referred to above, as a one time, full and final payment of TomoTherapy’s obligations under this Section 3C to pay a portion of WARF’s
P.O.BOX 7365  •  MADISON, WISCONSIN 53707-7365  •  TEL (608) 263-2500  •  FAX (608) 263-1064

Page 2 of 18


 

patent costs. Such shares are included in the [  *  ]% total of equity securities TomoTherapy agrees to issue WARF under Section 2A of the Equity Agreement. WARF shall have sole discretion to make or maintain any patent filing of the Licensed Patents. However, if WARF fails to maintain the Licensed Patents, TomoTherapy may elect to maintain them in WARF’s name at TomoTherapy’s own expense. In such case, TomoTherapy may credit [  *  ]% of such patent expense against royalties due under Section 3D.
          D. Royalty.
               (i) In addition to the Section 3B license fee, TomoTherapy agrees to pay to WARF as “earned royalties” a royalty per Product Unit sold or leased by TomoTherapy at a rate determined in accordance with the following table based on the cumulative number of Product Units sold or leased by TomoTherapy before and including the sale or lease of the applicable Product Unit:
         
Cumulative Product Units Sold   Royalty Per
or Leased   Product Unit
[  *  ]
    $[  *  ]  
[  *  ]
    $[  *  ]  
[  *  ]
    $[  *  ]  
               (ii) A Product Unit is deemed sold or leased and a royalty is deemed earned under this Agreement as of the date the Product Unit is actually sold and at least one third of the total purchase price has been received by TomoTherapy in the case of a sale, or one third of the annual lease payments for the first year of a lease have been so received by TomoTherapy.
               (iii) WARF is exempt from paying income taxes under U.S. law. Therefore, all payments due under this Agreement shall be made without deduction for taxes, assessments, or other charges of any kind which may be imposed on WARF by any government outside of the United States or any political subdivision of such government with respect to any amounts payable to WARF pursuant to this Agreement. All such taxes, assessments, or other charges shall be assumed by TomoTherapy.
          E. Minimum Royalty.
     TomoTherapy further agrees to pay to WARF a minimum royalty per calendar year or part thereof during which this Agreement is in effect starting in calendar year 2000, against which any earned royalty paid by TomoTherapy or WARF’s share of TomoTherapy’s sublicensee(s) payments for the same calendar year will be credited. The minimum royalty shall be $[  *  ] in calendar year 2000, $[  *  ] in 2001, $[  *  ] in 2002, and $[  *  ] in 2003 and each calendar year thereafter. The minimum royalty for a given year shall be due at the time payments are due for the calendar quarter ending on December 31. It is understood that the minimum royalties will apply on a calendar year basis, and that sales of Products requiring the payment of earned royalties made during a prior or subsequent calendar year shall have no effect on the annual minimum royalty due WARF for any given calendar year.
          F. Accounting; Payments.
               (i) Amounts owing to WARF under Section 3D shall be paid on a quarterly basis, with such amounts due and received by WARF on or before the thirtieth day following the end of
P.O.BOX 7365  •  MADISON, WISCONSIN 53707-7365  •  TEL (608) 263-2500  •  FAX (608) 263-1064

Page 3 of 18


 

the calendar quarter ending on March 31, June 30, September 30 or December 31 in which such amounts were earned. The balance of any amounts which remain unpaid more than thirty (30) days after they are due to WARF shall accrue interest until paid at the rate of the lesser of one percent (1%) per month or the maximum amount allowed under applicable law. However, in no event shall this interest provision be construed as a grant of permission for any payment delays.
               (ii) Except as otherwise directed, all amounts owing to WARF under this Agreement shall be paid in U.S. dollars to WARF at the address provided in Section 16(a). All royalties owing with respect to selling prices stated in currencies other than U.S. dollars shall be converted at the rate shown in the Federal Reserve Noon Valuation — Value of Foreign Currencies on the day preceding the payment.
               (iii) A full accounting showing how any amounts owing to WARF under Section 3D have been calculated shall be submitted to WARF on the date of each such payment. Such accounting shall be on a per-country and product line, model or tradename basis and shall be summarized on the form shown in Appendix C of this Agreement. In the event no payment is owed to WARF, a statement setting forth that fact shall be supplied to WARF.
     Section 4. Certain Warranties of WARF.
          A. WARF warrants that except as otherwise provided under Section 13 of this Agreement with respect to U.S. Government interests, it is the owner of the Licensed Patents or otherwise has the right to grant the licenses granted to TomoTherapy in this Agreement. However, nothing in this Agreement shall be construed as:
               (i) a warranty or representation by WARF as to the validity or scope of any of the Licensed Patents;
               (ii) a warranty or representation that anything made, used, sold or otherwise disposed of under the license granted in this Agreement will or will not infringe patents of third parties; or
               (iii) an obligation to furnish any know-how not provided in the Licensed Patents or any services other than those specified in this Agreement.
          B. WARF MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS, EXTENDS NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITIES WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO USE, SALE, OR OTHER DISPOSITION BY TOMOTHERAPY OR ITS VENDEES OR OTHER TRANSFEREES OF PRODUCTS INCORPORATING OR MADE BY USE OF INVENTIONS LICENSED UNDER THIS AGREEMENT.
     Section 5. Recordkeeping.
          A. TomoTherapy shall keep books and records sufficient to verify the accuracy and completeness of TomoTherapy’s accounting referred to above, including without limitation inventory, purchase and invoice records relating to the Products or their manufacture. Such books and records shall be preserved for a period not less than six (6) years after they are created during and after the term of this Agreement.
          B. TomoTherapy shall take all steps necessary so that WARF may within sixty (60) days of its request review and copy all the books and records at a single U.S. location to verify the accuracy of TomoTherapy’s accounting. Such review may be performed by any employee of WARF as
P.O.BOX 7365  •  MADISON, WISCONSIN 53707-7365  •  TEL (608) 263-2500  •  FAX (608) 263-1064

Page 4 of 18


 

well as by any attorney or registered CPA designated by WARF at WARF’s expense, upon reasonable notice and during regular business hours. TomoTherapy shall have the right to approve WARF’s outside auditors and to reject them for bona fide conflicts of interest. TomoTherapy shall further have the right to require audit participants to sign a reasonable non-disclosure agreement, but such agreement may not compromise the auditor’s confidential communications of finding with WARF.
          C. If a royalty payment deficiency is determined, TomoTherapy shall pay the royalty deficiency outstanding within forty-five (45) days of receiving written notice thereof, plus interest on outstanding amounts as described in Section 3F(i). Should TomoTherapy contest the royalty payment deficiency, TomoTherapy shall notify WARF of such contest within forty-five (45) days of receiving notice and shall remit any uncontested amount plus interest within this same time period. WARF’s acceptance of such payment shall not signify acceptance of this amount as a settlement of the contested amount.
          D. If a royalty payment deficiency for a calendar year exceeds five percent (5%) of the royalties paid for that year, then TomoTherapy shall be responsible for paying WARF’s out-of-pocket expenses incurred with respect to such review.
     Section 6. Term and Termination.
          A. The term of this license shall begin on the effective date of this Agreement and continue until this Agreement is terminated as provided herein or until the earlier of the date that no Licensed Patent remains an enforceable patent or the payment of earned royalties under Section 3D, once begun, ceases for more than eight (8) consecutive calendar quarters.
          B. TomoTherapy may terminate this Agreement at any time by giving at least ninety (90) days’ written and unambiguous notice of such termination to WARF. Such a notice shall be accompanied by a statement of the reasons for termination.
          C. If TomoTherapy at any time defaults in the timely payment of any monies due to WARF or the timely submission to WARF of any Development Report, fails to actively pursue the development plan, or commits any breach of any other covenant herein contained, and TomoTherapy fails to remedy any such breach or default within ninety (90) days after written notice thereof by WARF, or if TomoTherapy commits any act of bankruptcy, becomes insolvent, is unable to pay its debts as they become due, files a petition under any bankruptcy or insolvency act, or has any such petition filed against it which is not dismissed within sixty (60) days, or offers any component of the Licensed Patents to its creditors, WARF may, at its option, terminate this Agreement by giving notice of termination to TomoTherapy.
          D. Upon the termination of this Agreement, TomoTherapy shall remain obligated to provide an accounting for and to pay royalties earned up to the date of the termination and any minimum royalties shall be prorated as of the date of termination by the number of days elapsed in the applicable calendar year.
     Section 7. Assignability.
     This Agreement may not be transferred or assigned by TomoTherapy except with the prior written consent of WARF or except upon sale of substantially all the assets of TomoTherapy to a third party. In such event, TomoTherapy shall ensure that the third party assignee has agreed to be bound by all the obligations of this Agreement as part of such assignment and TomoTherapy shall provide WARF with written notice, including the address and contact person, of the assignee.
P.O.BOX 7365  •  MADISON, WISCONSIN 53707-7365  •  TEL (608) 263-2500  •  FAX (608) 263-1064

Page 5 of 18


 

     Section 8. Contest of Validity.
     In the event TomoTherapy contests the validity of any Licensed Patent, TomoTherapy shall continue to pay royalties with respect to that patent as if such contest were not underway until the patent is adjudicated invalid or unenforceable by a court of last resort.
     Section 9. Enforcement and Defense of Patents.
          A. WARF intends to protect the Licensed Patents against infringers or otherwise act to eliminate infringement, when, in WARF’s sole judgment, such action may be reasonably necessary, proper, and justified. In the event that TomoTherapy believes there is infringement of any Licensed Patent under this Agreement which is to TomoTherapy’s substantial detriment, TomoTherapy shall provide WARF with written notice that such infringement is occurring including reasonable evidence of the infringement. WARF shall have the right to determine the best course of action to resolve such infringement, including but not limited to, the right to settle such infringement by negotiating a license with such infringer. The license terms, fees and royalties shall be on terms no more favorable in the aggregate to the Licensee than (those contained in the sublicense most favorable to TomoTherapy granted by TomoTherapy. In the event that WARF licenses such infringer WARF shall share the income from such license with TomoTherapy as set forth in this Section 9A. Upon request by WARF, TomoTherapy shall take action, join in an action, and otherwise provide WARF with such assistance and information as may be useful to WARF in connection with WARF’s taking such action (if the cause of action arose during the term of this Agreement and WARF reimburses TomoTherapy for TomoTherapy’s reasonable out-of-pocket expenses). Any recovery or damages for infringement or license fees or royalties obtained through any settlement of infringement claims, except enhanced damages, derived through WARF taking such action shall be applied as follows: (a) first, to WARF to reimburse WARF for expenses incurred in litigation or negotiating a settlement, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, (b) second, to TomoTherapy to reimburse TomoTherapy for its reasonable expenses in assisting with same, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, and (c) the balance of any recovery or damages shall be divided [  *  ] percent ([  *  ]%) to TomoTherapy and [  *  ] percent ([  *  ]%) to WARF. If WARF does not take action to abate the infringement of the Licensed Patents within [  *  ] of receiving the notice described above, TomoTherapy may request that WARF do so and WARF will comply as long as TomoTherapy reimburses WARF each month for [  *  ] percent ([  *  ]%) of WARF’s actual expenses incurred in bringing such action. Such expenses may be billed by WARF as frequently as monthly and shall be paid by TomoTherapy to WARF on a net thirty (30) days basis. Late payments shall be subject to the interest provisions set forth in Section 3F(i) for late payments. TomoTherapy shall be reimbursed for its contribution to the cost of litigation or settlement from the proceeds of such action as described in this Section 9A. TomoTherapy shall not have the right to bring any infringement action or enforce the Licensed Patents without WARF’s prior, written consent.
          B. In the event of a declaratory judgment action brought by a third party, WARF shall have the exclusive right to defend the Licensed Patents by litigation or settlement, including the right to grant licenses to third parties bringing such action. In the event that WARF licenses such third party WARF shall share the income from such license with TomoTherapy as set forth in Section 9A.
          C. WARF agrees that if it determines to resolve any infringement or litigation by the grant of a license to the infringer or third party litigant, it will first offer in writing to allow TomoTherapy to negotiate a sublicense with such party. If TomoTherapy is not successful in negotiating a sublicense agreement within six (6) months of such notification or if time becomes of the essence in negotiating a license agreement to settle the infringement litigation, WARF may directly negotiate and grant such a
P.O.BOX 7365  •  MADISON, WISCONSIN 53707-7365  •  TEL (608) 263-2500  •  FAX (608) 263-1064

Page 6 of 18


 

license to such third party and will share any revenue generated by such license with TomoTherapy in accordance with Section 9A.
     Section 10. Patent Marking.
     TomoTherapy shall insure that it applies patent markings that meet all requirements of U.S. law, 35 U.S.C. 287, with respect to all Products subject to this Agreement.
     Section 11. Product Liability; Conduct of Business.
     TomoTherapy shall, at all times during the term of this Agreement and thereafter, indemnify, defend and hold WARF and the inventors of the Licensed Patents harmless against all claims and expenses, including legal expenses and reasonable attorneys fees, arising out of the death of or injury to any person or persons or out of any damage to property and against any other claim, proceeding, demand, expense and liability of any kind whatsoever (other than patent infringement claims) resulting from the production, manufacture, sale, use, lease, consumption or advertisement of Products arising from any right or obligation of TomoTherapy hereunder. WARF at all times reserves the right to select and retain counsel of its own to defend WARF’s interests.
     Section 12. Use of Names.
     TomoTherapy shall not use WARF’s name, the name of any inventor of inventions governed by this Agreement, or the name of the University of Wisconsin in sales promotion, advertising, or any other form of publicity without the prior written approval of the entity or person whose name is being used.
     Section 13. United States Government Interests.
     It is understood that if the United States Government (through any of its agencies or otherwise) has funded research, during the course of or under which any of the inventions of the Licensed Patents were conceived or made, the United States Government is entitled, as a right, under the provisions of 35 U.S.C. § 200-212 and applicable regulations of Chapter 37 of the Code of Federal Regulations, to a nonexclusive, nontransferable, irrevocable, paid-up license to practice or have practiced the invention of such Licensed Patents for governmental purposes. Any license granted to TomoTherapy in this Agreement shall be subject to such right.
     Section 14. Confidentiality.
     Both parties agree to keep all information marked confidential or otherwise subject to an obligation of confidentiality under the terms of this Agreement confidential except to the extent that:
     a. The receiving party can show by written record within sixty (60) days after disclosure of the Information that it possessed such Information prior to its receipt from the other party;
     b. The information was already available to the public or became so through no fault of the receiving party;
     c. The information is subsequently disclosed to the receiving party by a third party that has the right to disclose it to the receiving party free of any obligations of confidentiality;
     d. Five years have elapsed from the later of the date of this Agreement or the disclosure of the information to the receiving party by the other; or
P.O.BOX 7365  •  MADISON, WISCONSIN 53707-7365  •  TEL (608) 263-2500  •  FAX (608) 263-1064

Page 7 of 18


 

     e. Information the receiving party independently develops without reference to the confidential information.
     Section 15. Miscellaneous.
     This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in all respects in accordance with the laws of the State of Wisconsin. If any provisions of this Agreement are or shall come into conflict with the laws or regulations of any jurisdiction or any governmental entity having jurisdiction over the parties or this Agreement, those provisions shall be deemed automatically deleted, if such deletion is allowed by relevant law, and the remaining terms and conditions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect. If such a deletion is not so allowed or if such a deletion leaves terms thereby made clearly illogical or inappropriate in effect, the parties agree to substitute new terms as similar in effect to the present terms of this Agreement as may be allowed under the applicable laws and regulations. The parties hereto are independent contractors and not joint venturers or partners.
     Section 16. Notices.
     Any notice required to be given pursuant to the provisions of this Agreement shall be in writing and shall be deemed to have been given at the earlier of the time when actually received as a consequence of any effective method of delivery, including but not limited to hand delivery, transmission by telecopier, or delivery by a professional courier service or the time when sent by certified or registered mail addressed to the party for whom intended at the address below or at such changed address as the party shall have specified by written notice, provided that any notice of change of address shall be effective only upon actual receipt.
  (a)   Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation
Attn: Managing Director
614 Walnut Street
Madison, Wisconsin 53705
 
  (b)   TomoTherapy Incorporated
Attn: President
P.O. Box 8024
Madison, Wisconsin 53708-8024
     With a copy of such notice to:
Michael E. Skindrud, Esq.
LaFollette & Sinykin
P.O. Box 2719
One East Main Street
Madison, Wisconsin 53701-2719
     Section 16. Integration.
     This Agreement constitutes the full understanding between the parties with reference to the subject matter hereof, and no statements or agreements by or between the parties, whether orally or in writing, made prior to or at the signing hereof, shall vary or modify the written terms of this Agreement. Neither party shall claim any amendment, modification, or release from any provisions of this Agreement by mutual agreement, acknowledgment, or otherwise, unless such mutual agreement is in writing, signed
P.O.BOX 7365  •  MADISON, WISCONSIN 53707-7365  •  TEL (608) 263-2500  •  FAX (608) 263-1064

Page 8 of 18


 

by the other party, and specifically states that it is an amendment to this Agreement. This Agreement supersedes the Prior License Agreement in its entirety.
     Section 17. Authority.
          A. No agreement between the parties shall exist unless the duly authorized representative of TomoTherapy and the managing director of WARF have signed this document within forty-five (45) days of the effective date written on the first page of this Agreement.
          B. The persons signing on behalf of WARF and TomoTherapy hereby warrant and represent that they have authority to execute this Agreement on behalf of the party for whom they have signed.
     IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have duly executed this Agreement on the dates indicated below.
             
   WISCONSIN ALUMNI RESEARCH FOUNDATION    
 
           
By:
  /s/ Richard H. Leazer       Date: 2/24, 1999
 
           
 
  Richard H. Leazer, Managing Director        
 
           
   TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED    
 
           
By:
  /s/ Paul J. Reckwerdt       Date: 2/24, 1999
 
           
 
  Paul J. Reckwerdt, Vice-President        
 
           
Reviewed by WARF’s Attorney:        
 
           
/s/ Elizabeth L.R. Donley       2/27, 1999
         
Elizabeth L.R. Donley, Esq.        
(WARF’s attorney shall not be deemed a signatory to this Agreement.)
WARF Ref: Swerdloff-P91009US
P. O. BOX 7365           MADISON, WISCONSIN 53707-7365           TEL (608) 263-2500           FAX (608) 263-1064

Page 9 of 18


 

APPENDIX A
     A. “Licensed Patents” shall refer to and mean those patents and patent applications listed on Appendix B hereto and any subsequent patent application owned by WARF but only to the extent it claims an invention claimed in a patent application listed on Appendix B.
     B. “Products” shall refer to and mean any and all products that employ or are in any way produced by the practice of an invention claimed in the Licensed Patents or that would otherwise constitute infringement of any claims of the Licensed Patents.
     A. “Affiliates” shall mean and include affiliated companies or other legal entities at least fifty percent (50%) of whose outstanding stock entitled to vote for election of directors is now or hereafter owned or controlled by TomoTherapy either directly or through one or more affiliated companies or both, but such company or other legal entity shall be deemed to be an affiliated company only so long as such ownership or control exists.
     D. “Development Report” shall mean a written account of TomoTherapy’s progress under the development plan having at least the information specified on Appendix D to this Agreement, and shall be sent to the address specified on Appendix D.
     E. “Licensed Field” shall be limited to the field of medical applications of all types, including without limitation, both human and animal diagnostics and therapeutic applications and all research uses designed to lead to such applications. However, WARF retains the right to use and to designate other research institutions, including but not limited to the University of Wisconsin-Madison and the UW Hospitals and Clinics, to use the Licensed Patents for noncommercial research purposes.
P. O. BOX 7365           MADISON, WISCONSIN 53707-7365           TEL (608) 263-2500           FAX (608) 263-1064

Page 10 of 18


 

APPENDIX B
LICENSED PATENTS
                 
REFERENCE       PATENT   ISSUE   APPLICATION
NUMBER   COUNTRY   NUMBER   DATE   SERIAL NUMBER
 
                 
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RADIATION THERAPY (Swerdloff, Mackie, Holmes)
                 
P91009US  
UNITED STATES
  5,317,616.   5/31/94.  
P91009AU  
AUSTRALIA
  661,640   12/12/95    
P91009BE  
BELGIUM
          93301672.7
P91009CA  
CANADA
          2091275
P91009DE  
GERMANY
           
P91009FR  
FRANCE
          93301672.7
P91009GB  
UNITED KINGDOM
          93301672.7
P91009IL  
ISRAEL
  104896   5/19/97    
P91009JP  
JAPAN
          5-58983
P91009KR  
SOUTH KOREA
          4146/1993
P91009MX  
MEXICO
          931495
P91009NL  
NETHERLANDS
          93301672.7
P91009NZ  
NEW ZEALAND
  247042   6/4/96    
P. O. BOX 7365           MADISON, WISCONSIN 53707-7365           TEL (608) 263-2500           FAX (608) 263-1064

Page 11 of 18


 

                 
                APPLICATION
REFERENCE       PATENT   ISSUE   SERIAL
NUMBER   COUNTRY   NUMBER   DATE   NUMBER
 
                 
RADIATION THERAPY SYSTEM WITH CONSTRAINED ROTATIONAL FREEDOM (Swerdloff, Mackie, Holmes)
   
 
           
P92135DE  
GERMANY
      94920124.8
P92135FR  
FRANCE
          94920124.8
P92135GB  
UNITED KINGDOM
          94920124.8
P92135IL  
ISRAEL
          109960
P92135JP  
JAPAN
  8-511452   12/03/96    
P92135NL  
NETHERLANDS
          94920124.8
   
 
           
RADIATION THERAPY SYSTEM (Swerdloff, Mackie, Holmes)
   
 
           
P92136EP  
EPO
      97113658.5
   
 
           
DYNAMIC BEAM FLATTENING APPARATUS FOR RADIATION THERAPY (Swerdloff, Mackie, Holmes)
   
 
           
P92137DE  
GERMANY
      94920125.5
P92137FR  
FRANCE
          94920125.5
P92137GB  
UNITED KINGDOM
          94920125.5
P92137IL  
ISRAEL
          109961
P92137JP  
JAPAN
  8-511453   12/03/96    
P92137NL  
NETHERLANDS
          94920125.5
P. O. BOX 7365           MADISON, WISCONSIN 53707-7365           TEL (608) 263-2500           FAX (608) 263-1064

Page 12 of 18


 

                 
                APPLICATION
REFERENCE       PATENT   ISSUE   SERIAL
NUMBER   COUNTRY   NUMBER   DATE   NUMBER
 
                 
RADIATION THERAPY SYSTEM (Swerdloff, Mackie, Holmes)
   
 
           
P92138EP  
EPO
      97113657.7
   
 
           
DYNAMIC COLLIMATOR FOR RADIATION THERAPY (Swerdloff, Mackie, Holmes, Reckwerdt)
   
 
           
P92138US  
UNITED STATES
  5,442,675.   8/15/95.    
   
 
           
VERIFICATION SYSTEM FOR RADIATION THERAPY (Swerdloff, Mackie, Holmes)
   
 
           
P92140US  
UNITED STATES
  5,394,452.   2/28/95.  
P92140IL  
ISRAEL
          109962
   
 
           
MULTI-LEAF RADIATION ATTENUATOR FOR RADIATION THERAPY (Swerdloff, Mackie, Holmes)
   
 
           
P92142US  
UNITED STATES
  5,351,280.   9/27/94.  
P92142DE  
GERMANY
          94920712.0
P92142FR  
FRANCE
          94920712.0
P92142GB  
UNITED KINGDOM
          94920712.0
P92142IL  
ISRAEL
          109962
P92142JP  
JAPAN
  8-511451   12/03/96    
P92142NL  
NETHERLANDS
          94920712.0
P. O. BOX 7365           MADISON, WISCONSIN 53707-7365           TEL (608) 263-2500           FAX (608) 263-1064

Page 13 of 18


 

                         
                    APPLICATION
REFERENCE       PATENT   ISSUE   SERIAL
NUMBER   COUNTRY   NUMBER   DATE   NUMBER
 
                       
MULTI-LEAF RADIATION ATTENUATOR FOR RADIATION THERAPY WITH VERIFICATION SYSTEM (Swerdloff, Mackie, Holmes)
 
                       
P92143EP
  EPO             97100108.6  
 
                       
MULTI-LEAF RADIATION ATTENUATOR FOR RADIATION THERAPY (Swerdloff, Mackie, Holmes)
 
                       
P92144EP
  EPO                
 
                       
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RADIATION THERAPY (Swerdloff, Mackie, Holmes)
 
                       
P94001US
  UNITED STATES     5,528,650.     6/18/96.        
 
                       
RADIATION TREATMENT PLANNING METHOD AND APPARATUS (Holmes)
 
                       
P95083US
  UNITED STATES     5,647,663.     7/15/97.        
 
                       
METHOD OF REGISTERING A RADIATION TREATMENT PLAN TO A PATIENT (Reckwerdt, Mackie)
 
                       
P95107US
  UNITED STATES     5,673,300     9/30/97        
P95107CA
  CANADA             2,207,539  
P95107EP
  EPO                 97303909.2  
P95107JP
  JAPAN                 09-167979  
 
                       
RADIATION THERAPY SYSTEM WITH CONSTRAINED ROTATIONAL FREEDOM (Swerdloff, Mackie, Holmes)
 
                       
P95141US
  UNITED STATES     5,548,627.     8/20/96.        
P.O.BOX 7365  •  MADISON, WISCONSIN 53707-7365  •  TEL (608) 263-2500  •  FAX (608) 263-1064

Page 14 of 18


 

                         
                    APPLICATION
REFERENCE       PATENT   ISSUE   SERIAL
NUMBER   COUNTRY   NUMBER   DATE   NUMBER
DYNAMIC BEAM FLATTENING APPARATUS FOR RADIATION THERAPY (Swerdloff, Mackie, Holmes)
 
                       
P95201US
  UNITED STATES     5,625,663.     04/29/97.        
 
                       
INTERFACE FOR RADIATION THERAPY MACHINE(SwerdIoff, Mackie, Holmes)
P95202US
  UNITED STATES     5,661,773     08/26/97        
 
                       
RADIATION THERAPY SYSTEM WITH CONSTRAINED ROTATIONAL FREEDOM (Swerdloff, Mackie, Holmes)
 
                       
P95254US
  UNITED STATES     5,724,400.     03/03/98.        
 
                       
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CALIBRATION OF RADIATION THERAPY EQUIPMENT AND VERIFICATION OF RADIATION TREATMENT (Mackie, Reckwerdt, McNutt)
 
                       
P98069US
  UNITED STATES              
 
                       
RADIATION THERAPY SYSTEM WITH CONSTRAINED ROTATIONAL FREEDOM AND DYNAMIC COLLIMATOR (Swerdloff, Mackie, Holmes)
 
                       
P98167IL
  ISRAEL                  
P.O.BOX 7365  •  MADISON, WISCONSIN 53707-7365  •  TEL (608) 263-2500  •  FAX (608) 263-1064

Page 15 of 18


 

APPENDIX C
WARF ROYALTY REPORT
                 
Licensee:
          Agreement No:    
             
 
               
Inventor:
          P#:   P
             
 
               
Period Covered:
  From:                       /                    /   Through:                       /                    /
 
               
 
               
Prepared By:
          Date:    
             
 
               
Approved By:
          Date:    
             
If license covers several major product lines, please prepare a separate report
for each line. Then combine all product lines into a summary report.
         
Report Type:
  o   Single Product Line Report:                                          
 
       
 
  o   Multiproduct Summary Report. Page 1 of                      Pages
 
       
 
  o   Product Line Detail. Line:                      Tradename:                      Page:                     
 
       
Report Currency:
  o   U.S. Dollars    o     Other                                                               
                                                 
    Gross     Less     Net     Royalty     Period Royalty Amount  
Country   Sales     Allowances     Sales     Rate     This Year     Last Year  
 
U.S.A.
                                               
Canada
                                               
Europe:
                                               
 
Japan
                                               
Other:
                                               
 
 
TOTAL:
                                               
 
Total Royalty:                      Conversion Rate:                      Royalty in U.S. Dollars: $                     
The following royalty forecast is non-binding and for WARF’s internal planning purposes only:
     Royalty Forecast Under This Agreement: Next Quarter:                      Q2:                      Q3:                       Q4:                     

* On a separate page, please indicate the reasons for returns or other adjustments if significant.
Also note any unusual occurrences that affected royalty amounts during this period.
To assist WARF’s forecasting, please comment on any significant expected trends in sales volume.
P.O.BOX 7365  •  MADISON, WISCONSIN 53707-7365  •  TEL (608) 263-2500  •  FAX (608) 263-1064

Page 16 of 18


 

APPENDIX D
DEVELOPMENT REPORT
A.   Date development plan initiated and time period covered by this report.
 
B.   Development Report (4-8 paragraphs).
  1.   Activities completed since last report including the object and parameters of the development, when initiated, when completed and the results.
 
  2.   Activities currently under investigation, i.e., ongoing activities including object and parameters of such activities, when initiated, and projected date of completion.
C.   Future Development Activities (4-8 paragraphs).
  1.   Activities to be undertaken before next report including, but not limited to, the type and object of any studies conducted and their projected starting and completion dates.
 
  2.   Estimated total development time remaining before a product will be commercialized.
D.   Changes to initial development plan (2-4 paragraphs).
  1.   Reasons for change.
 
  2.   Variables that may cause additional changes.
E.   Items to be provided if applicable:
  1.   Information relating to Product that has become publicly available, e.g., published articles, competing products, patents, etc.
 
  2.   Development work being performed by third parties other than TomoTherapy to include name of third party, reasons for use of third party, planned future uses of third parties including reasons why and type of work.
 
  3.   Update of competitive information trends in industry, government compliance (if applicable) and market plan.
PLEASE SEND DEVELOPMENT REPORTS TO:
Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation
Attn.: Contract Coordinator
614 Walnut Street
P.O. Box 7365
Madison, WI 53707-7365
P.O.BOX 7365  •  MADISON, WISCONSIN 53707-7365  •  TEL (608) 263-2500  •  FAX (608) 263-1064

Page 17 of 18


 

APPENDIX E
DEVELOPMENT PLAN
     WARF hereby accepts the Business Plan submitted by TomoTherapy to WARF prior to the execution of this Agreement as the development plan required hereunder.
P.O.BOX 7365  •  MADISON, WISCONSIN 53707-7365  •  TEL (608) 263-2500  •  FAX (608) 263-1064

Page 18 of 18

Table of Contents

Exhibit 10.11
DEVELOPMENT AND OEM SUPPLY AGREEMENT
TOMOTHERAPY
AGREEMENT entered into as of this 27th day of January 2003, by and between Analogic Corporation (“ANALOGIC”), a Massachusetts corporation, having its principal place of business at 8 Centennial Drive, Peabody, Massachusetts and TomoTherapy Incorporated (“TOMOTHERAPY”), a Wisconsin corporation, having its principal place of business at 1240 Deming Way Madison, Wisconsin (ANALOGIC and TOMOTHERAPY hereinafter may be referred to individually as a “Party” and collectively as “Parties”).
     WHEREAS TOMOTHERAPY has designed and is manufacturing an integrated radiation therapy and imaging system (the “Product”);
     WHEREAS ANALOGIC is a leading designer and manufacturer of systems and sub-systems used in, among other things, computed tomography systems;
     WHEREAS TOMOTHERAPY wishes to engage ANALOGIC to design, manufacture, and/or supply those systems and sub-systems shown in the Specifications (Exhibit 1) to be designed, manufactured, and/or supplied by ANALOGIC (the “Components”) to be integrated into TOMOTHERAPY’s Product;
     WHEREAS ANALOGIC will lead and coordinate the development of the aforesaid Components;
     WHEREAS, the Parties intend that, upon the successful development of the Components, ANALOGIC will be the exclusive manufacturer of the Components and TOMOTHERAPY will be the exclusive seller of the Product.
     NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the above premises and the mutual obligations undertaken, the parties hereto agree as follows:
1. DEVELOPMENT
  a.   Design: ANALOGIC shall design the Components in accordance with the Engineering Requirement Specification (“SPECIFICATION”) attached as Exhibit 1 , in accordance with the Milestones attached as Exhibit 2 .
 
 
Confidential treatment has been requested for portions of this exhibit. The copy filed herewith omits the information subject to the confidentiality request. Omissions are designated as [  *  ]. A complete version of this exhibit has been filed separately with the Securities and Exchange Commission.

 


Table of Contents

Page 2
27 JANUARY 2002
  b.   Development Test Bed: ANALOGIC shall provide to TOMOTHERAPY one (1) prototype of the Components. Each party shall perform all tests required of it respectively, by the “Prototype Testing” section of the Development Plan as set forth in the SPECIFICATION and the prototype will be suitable for regulatory testing.
 
  c.   First (1 st ) Pilot Production Components: In accordance with Milestones ANALOGIC shall produce and deliver to TOMOTHERAPY three (3) 1st pilot production Components which meet the criteria specified in the SPECIFICATION. Each party shall perform all tests required of it as set forth in the SPECIFICATION. TOMOTHERAPY may request changes to the design of the 1 st pilot production Components in accordance with Section l(g), below. Certain components of the 1 st pilot production Components such as the BCS, DCS, RCS, DAS, and cabling will not have been manufactured per the cGMP/QSR guidelines. The components of the Components which do not meet these guidelines will have to be exchanged, remanufactured, or brought into compliance by other means prior to shipment to an end user. The methodology, documentation, and costs of how this will be accomplished will be mutually agreed upon on a component by component basis.
 
  d.   Second (2 nd ) Pilot Production Components: In accordance with Milestones and any modifications or changes to the SPECIFICATION requested by TOMOTHERAPY and agreed to by ANALOGIC, ANALOGIC shall produce and deliver to TOMOTHERAPY six (6) 2 nd pilot production units of the Components which incorporate any such changes to the prototype or the 1 st pilot production Components, and meet the SPECIFICATION. ANALOGIC shall perform all tests required to meet the SPECIFICATIONS. TOMOTHERAPY may request changes to the design of pilot production Components in accordance with Section l(g), below. With the shipment of any 2 nd pilot production Components (assuming the design has been frozen and the final documentation has been completed) and all future Components to TOMOTHERAPY, ANALOGIC will provide to TOMOTHERAPY a technical file which meets the requirements of cGMP/QSR and/or CE MDD.
 
  e.   NRE: TOMOTHERAPY will pay ANALOGIC for the Non-Recurring Engineering (“NRE”) in accordance with the agreed milestones attached as Exhibit 2.
 
  f.   Manufacturing: The Components with the exception of 1.c will be manufactured by ANALOGIC so as to qualify and validate all manufacturing processes in accordance with the Good Manufacturing Practices and the Quality System Regulation promulgated by the United States Food and Drug Administration (“FDA”) and International Standards Organization’s ISO 9001.
 
      For a period commencing with the shipment to a clinical user (in this Agreement, “clinical user” includes TOMOTHERAPY’s Centers of Excellence institutions) of the first pilot production HI-ART II meeting SPECIFICATIONS and continuing for a period of four and one half years thereafter, ANALOGIC will be the exclusive manufacturer of the Components, provided however, that ANALOGIC’S manufacturing exclusivity for tables only applies to the [  *  ] units ordered

 


Table of Contents

Page 3
27 JANUARY 2002
      by TOMOTHERAPY. After the first [  *  ] tables are purchased by TOMOTHERAPY, TOMOTHERAPY may procure or manufacture another table. However, it is understood by the Parties that ANALOGIC owns all rights to its table design. Similarly, after the 4 and one half year manufacturing exclusivity for the Components, TOMOTHERAPY may procure or manufacture the Components of another design. It being understood by the Parties that ANALOGIC owns all rights to its Components design.
 
  g.   Engineering Changes: ANALOGIC shall transmit to TOMOTHERAPY for approval all proposed Engineering Change Orders (ECO) that have, or could potentially have, an impact on the form, fit, function, SPECIFICATIONS or regulatory approvals of the Components. Specifically in regard to the impact on regulatory approvals, all ECO’s relating to those ANALOGIC Components which are called out in TOMOTHERAPY’S standards construction file shall be transmitted to and approved by TOMOTHERAPY. TOMOTHERAPY is responsible for insuring that ANALOGIC has an updated list of relevant Components, which are listed, in TOMOTHERAPY’S standard construction file. TOMOTHERAPY must respond within 48 hours after receiving all ECO information. ECO’s which do not effect fit, form or function will not require approval by TOMOTHERAPY. TOMOTHERAPY will not need to approve any ECO which is required by regulatory authority. These requirements shall remain in effect throughout the production phase of this Agreement. If TOMOTHERAPY desires to make a change to the SPECIFICATION for the Components at any time, it will make a written request for change to ANALOGIC and ANALOGIC will respond in writing as to the effect(s) of the change (“Change Implications”), if any, including without limitation, the Components availability, Components price, and NRE. ANALOGIC will not be obliged to proceed with making any requested changes unless the parties above first agree to the change implications in writing. ANALOGIC will provide copies of all final Engineering Changes Orders that are required by regulatory authority, that impact any ANALOGIC Component listed in the standards construction file, or those requested by TOMOTHERAPY. These copies will include the cover page and excerpts that sufficiently describe the change.
 
  h.   Records; Regulatory Approval:
  i.   During the term of this Agreement, ANALOGIC shall keep detailed records of all materials, processes, designs, protocols, and tests relevant to the Components and all information required by the United States Food and Drug Administration (“FDA”) for approval of the manufacturing and marketing of the Components that are not explicitly the responsibility of TOMOTHERAPY under this Agreement. However, certain components of the 1 st pilot production as described in section l.c may not follow cGMP and will be brought into compliance by an agreed method on a component by component basis. ANALOGIC shall submit copies of such records to TOMOTHERAPY upon TOMOTHERAPY’S request. TOMOTHERAPY will be responsible for filing

 


Table of Contents

Page 4
27 JANUARY 2002
      with the FDA and obtaining all other necessary regulatory approvals to market and sell the System.
 
  ii.   ANALOGIC hereby agrees to make available to TOMOTHERAPY all technical information within its control with respect to the Components and ANALOGIC’s operations that is required by regulatory clearances such as the United States Food and Drug Administration to obtain 510(k) approval and required by a notified body to obtain the CE mark. TOMOTHERAPY shall treat all such information as Confidential Information in accordance with Section 16 of this Agreement.
 
  iii.   In the event that any component or any of the Components designed or manufactured by ANALOGIC of the Product are recalled by TOMOTHERAPY or ANALOGIC solely as the result of (A) ANALOGIC’s gross negligence or willful misconduct, (B) the recalled Component’s failure to meet the SPECIFICATIONS, (C) ANALOGIC’s failure to comply with Quality System Regulation, Good Manufacturing Practices, or ISO 9001,or (D) any other material breach of this Agreement by ANALOGIC, ANALOGIC at its option shall either: provide replacement parts to TOMOTHERAPY as soon as is reasonably possible or accept the return of the affected units from TOMOTHERAPY for repair by ANALOGIC. The Parties will cooperate fully with each other (including obtaining advance approval of all recall-related expenses to be paid by ANALOGIC, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld) in effecting any recall of the Components and communicating with purchasers, users and the media. ANALOGIC shall not be responsible for any recall related expenses arising from any other recall, including incompatibility of the Components with any other part of the System unless such compatibility is required in the Specifications. If any recall or other event requiring corrective action occurs for any reason, than those set forth in the first sentence of this paragraph (iii)’s including due to (AA) use of any TOMOTHERAPY products or software in combination with the Components (where the combination itself gives rise to the recall and not the Components alone), (BB) modification of the ANALOGIC software by any party (including TOMOTHERAPY) other than ANALOGIC, or (CC) any other act or omission on TOMOTHERAPY’S part, then all costs and expenses associated with the recall or other event, including the cost of replacement parts and/or return and repair of the affected units, shall be borne solely by TOMOTHERAPY.
 
  iv.   ANALOGIC will notify TOMOTHERAPY immediately of any Quality System Regulation audit of ANALOGIC by the United States Food and Drug Administration or other inspection of ANALOGIC’s records or its facilities by any federal, state regulatory agency as well as the results of such audit or inspection.
 
  v.   TOMOTHERAPY shall have the right to conduct an appropriate audit of ANALOGIC’s relevant records and operations to evaluate compliance to the applicable sections of the cGMPs- QSR, and ISO 9001. Such audits will be at a date acceptable to both ANALOGIC and TOMOTHERAPY and will be

 


Table of Contents

Page 5
27 JANUARY 2002
conducted during ANALOGIC’s normal business hours. Within ten (10) days after each such audit, TOMOTHERAPY will provide written notification of any non-compliance issues. If ANALOGIC concurs with such conclusions (concurrence will not unreasonably be withheld), it agrees to use commercially reasonable efforts to be in compliance within 60 days following such written notification.
2. OWNERSHIP OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY
  a.   In performing the Development Work, ANALOGIC will utilize systems, sub-systems, parts, software, know-how, and other intellectual and physical property that it owned and/or had in its possession prior to the commencement of the Development Work (“ANALOGIC Information”). Similarly, TOMOTHERAPY may utilize systems, subsystems, parts, software, know-how, and other intellectual and physical property that it owned and/or had in its possession prior to the commencement of the Development Work (“TOMOTHERAPY Information”). With respect to ANALOGIC Information and TOMOTHERAPY Information, the Parties agree as follows:
  i.   ANALOGIC owns the Proprietary Technology embedded in the ANALOGIC Information and any improvements to it developed by ANALOGIC during the course of the Development Work.
 
  ii.   TOMOTHERAPY owns the Proprietary Technology embedded in the TOMOTHERAPY Information and any improvements to it developed by TOMOTHERAPY during the course of the Development Work.
 
  iii.   To the extent that ANALOGIC develops Proprietary Technology
 
      improvements to TOMOTHERAPY Information during the course of performing the Development Work, and except as provided in Section 13.d. below, ANALOGIC owns the improvements (but not the underlying TOMOTHERAPY Information) and grants TOMOTHERAPY a license to use, modify, market and sublicense the ANALOGIC improvements to the TOMOTHERAPY Information, and TOMOTHERAPY may assign the same to a third party but only with ANALOGIC’s consent which consent will not be unreasonably withheld, except that TOMOTHERAPY may assign the same without ANALOGIC’s consent in connection with the assignment this Agreement pursuant to Section 24 of this Agreement.
 
  iv.   To the extent that TOMOTHERAPY develops Proprietary Technology improvements to ANALOGIC Information during the course of performing the Development Work, TOMOTHERAPY owns the improvements (but not the underlying ANALOGIC Information) and grants ANALOGIC a license to use, modify, market and sublicense the TOMOTHERAPY improvements to the ANALOGIC Information, and ANALOGIC may

 


Table of Contents

Page 6
27 JANUARY 2002
      assign the same to a third party but only with TOMOTHERAPY’s consent which consent will not be unreasonably withheld.
 
  v.   Either Party may develop new Proprietary Technology during the course of the Development Work that is embedded in the Components and that is not an improvement to the Information of the-Party (as covered in subsections 2 a. iii and iv above) (“Development Information”). The Party that created the Development Information owns the Development Information, and may use, modify, market, sublicense, and transfer such Development Information for any purpose other than for Radiation Therapy Delivery (as defined below), and may use, modify, market, sublicense, and transfer the Development Information for Radiation Therapy Delivery only with the written consent of the other Party, which consent may not be unreasonably withheld, subject however to the rights of TOMOTHERAPY set forth in the final sentence of this paragraph. The owner of the Development Information hereby grants to the other Party a license to use, modify , market, and sublicense the Development Information, and may transfer such license, for any purpose other than for Radiation Therapy Delivery (as defined below), and such licensee may use, modify, market, sublicense, and transfer the license to the Development Information for Radiation Therapy Delivery only with the written consent of the other Party, which consent may not be unreasonably withheld, subject however to the rights of TOMOTHERAPY set forth in the final sentence of this paragraph. For purposes of this Agreement, “Radiation Therapy Delivery” means any system delivering external beam radiation in a medical context, and does not include radiation therapy planning. Notwithstanding the foregoing, TOMOTHERAPY may use, modify, market, and sublicense all Development Information in connection with the development, manufacture and sale of its Product without the consent of ANALOGIC, and may assign its own Development Information and its license to Development Information owned by ANALOGIC without ANALOGIC’s consent in connection with the sale or transfer of substantially all of its assets in a transaction to which the provisions of Section 24 of this Agreement apply, provided that in conjunction with the sale or transfer of TOMOTHERAPY’S assets to a third party, that the third party agrees to be bound by all of the terms of this Agreement, as set forth in Section 24 of this Agreement for Analogic to manufacture and supply to the receiver of the assets all of the Components which are the subject of this agreement manufactured or supplied by ANALOGIC.
 
  vi.   Development Information, that is jointly created by the Parties shall be treated as separately owned by each Party, but each Party’s interest shall be subject to the rights and restrictions imposed by the preceding paragraph v on separately owned = Development Information,, without the obligation of the Parties to account to each other for or share with the other party the proceeds arising from such jointly created Development Information.

 


Table of Contents

Page 7
27 JANUARY 2002
  vii.   Nothing herein is intended to give one Party any rights to the Proprietary Technology of the other Party existing on the date of this Agreement is entered into, except as is necessary to achieve the purposes of this Agreement during the term of this Agreement and any mutually agreed upon extensions to this Agreement.
  b.   While ANALOGIC owns the rights to the patient table pallet design that is to be delivered to TOMOTHERAPY pursuant to the Statement of Work and may supply this exact table pallet to other customers, ANALOGIC acknowledges and agrees that it will not knowingly supply this exact table pallet for use by Third Parties in Radiation Therapy Delivery.
 
  c.   TOMOTHERAPY acknowledges and agrees that ANALOGIC is an OEM supplier of subassemblies, whole instruments and systems. It also acknowledges that it understands ANALOGIC intends to continue to remain in this business and, subject to any limitations imposed upon it hereunder, may even design and manufacture products that contain some or all of the technology and designs used in the Components, including, among other things, certain mechanics, circuitry and software, proprietary to ANALOGIC. In addition, the Components may embody certain patented features as well.
3. PURCHASE AND DELIVERY
ANALOGIC agrees to manufacture and sell the Components to TOMOTHERAPY, and TOMOTHERAPY agrees to purchase its total number requirements of the Components exclusively from ANALOGIC per section 1.f. and upon the following terms:
  a.   Upon TOMOTHERAPY’S acceptance of the pilot production Components, (which acceptance shall be in accordance with the Components meeting the SPECIFICATIONS), TOMOTHERAPY shall provide ANALOGIC with a rolling twelve (12) month forecast of its purchase requirements for the Components, updated on a monthly basis. The initial forecast will be accompanied by a firm purchase order for the first six (6) months subject to the lead time defined below, and a projection of orders for the following six (6) months. Three months thereafter, firm purchase orders shall be furnished on the first week of each rolling month for Components to be delivered in the third full calendar month following the month in which ANALOGIC receives the purchase order. Projections of orders shall be for the parties’ planning purposes only, and, except for a firm commitment to purchase Components for the next three months, shall not constitute binding commitments upon TOMOTHERAPY. TOMOTHERAPY may modify any purchase order up to ninety (90) days prior to the beginning of the month covered by such purchase order. TOMOTHERAPY agrees that for economic and production efficiency reasons ANALOGIC requires a consistent and steady production flow (no production breaks month to month).
 
  b.   ANALOGIC shall acknowledge promptly each TOMOTHERAPY purchase order in writing and confirm delivery dates. Each order shall be subject to a lead-time of 120 days (“Lead Time”). TOMOTHERAPY acknowledges that some components used in

 


Table of Contents

Page 8
27 JANUARY 2002
      the manufacture of the Components may be designated by ANALOGIC as “Long-lead-time Items” (“LLTI’s). ANALOGIC shall be authorized in writing by TOMOTHERAPY to place orders for sufficient quantities of LLTI’s necessary to meet TOMOTHERAPY’S projected purchases set forth on its forecasts. In the event that forecasted quantities of Components are not actually ordered by TOMOTHERAPY, TOMOTHERAPY shall reimburse ANALOGIC for the LLTI’s unique to TOMOTHERAPY’S Components purchased by ANALOGIC in connection with such forecasted quantities which cannot be used elsewhere within ANALOGIC, or cancelled, or returned to the vendor. The reimbursement value of such LLTI’s shall be [  *  ]%.
 
  c.   All sales of the Components shall be subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Except with respect to transaction-specific items such as quantities, requested delivery dates, destinations and shipping instructions, purchase orders or other similar documents issued by TOMOTHERAPY are for TOMOTHERAPY’S administrative convenience only. No other terms or conditions contained in a purchase order or such other similar document shall be of any force or effect. If there is any conflict or difference in interpretation between such transaction specific items in a TOMOTHERAPY purchase order and this Agreement, the terms and conditions of this Agreement shall supersede those of such purchase order.
 
  d.   Subject to the lead time requirements set forth herein, ANALOGIC shall be ready and able to timely supply all quantities of Components ordered by TOMOTHERAPY that are within its forecast and/or accepted by ANALOGIC. ANALOGIC shall not be liable for failure or delay in filling TOMOTHERAPY orders because of any cause beyond the control of or occurring without the fault of ANALOGIC.
 
  e.   Should any parts or sub-components used by ANALOGIC in manufacturing the Components either become unavailable for purchase and Analogic is advised thereof by its supplier, or unavailable for a reasonable price, ANALOGIC shall give TOMOTHERAPY notice thereof. Subject to such time limitations imposed on ANALOGIC by the component manufacturer(s) or distributor(s), as the case may be, during which ANALOGIC can acquire such components, TOMOTHERAPY may exercise last time buy rights for the
component(s) by authorizing ANALOGIC to place purchase orders within the 30 days following such notice from ANALOGIC to TOMOTHERAPY. The cost of the unique Components (components which are purchased specifically for TOMOTHERAPY’S Product) which cannot be used elsewhere within ANALOGIC purchased pursuant to the last time buy shall be paid for in full by TOMOTHERAPY and maintained as dedicated inventory owned by TOMOTHERAPY and TOMOTHERAPY will receive a corresponding credit when the component is used in the Components by reducing the Components price by [  *  ]%. Alternatively, Analogic may agree to redesign the relevant component or components for a mutually agreed upon price.
4. PRICES, ADJUSTMENTS, AND PAYMENTS
  a.   The price to be paid by TOMOTHERAPY to ANALOGIC for the Components is set forth on Exhibit 3 hereto. These initial prices shall be valid for a period of two years

 


Table of Contents

Page 9
27 JANUARY 2002
      following shipment to a clinical user of the first production HI-ART II (system #11) meeting SPECIFICATIONS. Thereafter, beginning on the second anniversary of the shipment to a clinical user of the first production HI-ART II meeting SPECIFICATIONS, and every [ * ] thereafter, the Parties shall review prices and quantities with the understanding that prices may be adjusted by mutual agreement in response to the world market for components, production yield, cost improvement, and other factors deemed relevant by the parties. If parties cannot reach a mutual agreement, the parties will follow the arbitration process outlined in section 23 hereafter. Unless otherwise specified or required by law, all prices will be quoted and billed exclusive of federal, state or local excise, sales or other similar taxes. Such taxes, when applicable, will appear as additional items on invoices.
 
  b.   ANALOGIC agrees that the price for the Components is at least as favorable to TOMOTHERAPY as the price and the terms upon which ANALOGIC sells comparable CT components to any other customer under similar circumstances.
 
  c.   Terms of payment are net 30 days from of the date of delivery or invoice; whichever is later, for shipments made.
5. SHIPMENTS OF PRODUCT
ANALOGIC shall ship the Products Ex Works (Incoterms 2000), ANALOGIC’s Peabody, MA plant via carriers designated by TOMOTHERAPY.
6. TERM CHANGE
This Agreement will begin on the Effective Date and will continue for an initial term (“Initial Term”) of four and one half (4.5) years from the shipment to a clinical user of the first pilot production HI-ART II meeting SPECIFICATIONS, unless earlier terminated pursuant to Section 7 below. If no notice of termination is given at least six (6) months prior to expiration of the Initial Term, then this Agreement shall continue in effect until terminated by either party upon six (6) months written notice thereafter.
7. TERMINATION
  a.   In the event of a substantial or material breach of any term or condition of this Agreement by either party, which shall include, but not be limited to, non-payment of invoices when due which breach is not or cannot be corrected by the breaching party within thirty (30) days after notice (unless a longer time is expressly provided for herein), this Agreement may be terminated by the other party by giving notice of termination, to take effect forthwith upon the giving of such notice. Notwithstanding the foregoing, TOMOTHERAPY may terminate this Agreement with respect to an unexcused ANALOGIC breach related to failure to timely deliver Components only if ANALOGIC fails to deliver ordered Components within sixty (60) days of the scheduled delivery date specified in any TOMOTHERAPY purchase order that complies with TOMOTHERAPY’S forecast and has been accepted by ANALOGLC. Additionally, a force majeure would be deemed an excused ANALOGIC breach.

 


Table of Contents

Page 10
27 JANUARY 2002
  b.   This Agreement may be terminated immediately by the either party without the requirement of prior notice if the other party suspends operations, files or suffers to be filed against it a petition in bankruptcy, or the like, executes an assignment for the benefit of creditors, or is adjudicated as bankrupt by a court of competent jurisdiction.
8. PRODUCT CHANGES
ANALOGIC shall notify TOMOTHERAPY in writing of any change to the Components which do affect the Component’s form, fit, function, SPECIFICATIONS or regulatory compliance. ANALOGIC shall not make any change to the SPECIFICATIONS or to the Component’s labeling without TOMOTHERAPY’S prior written consent, which consent will not be unreasonably withheld.
9. QUALITY CONTROL
  a.   ANALOGIC shall perform incoming inspection and testing on all materials it receives from any source for inclusion in any of the Components in accordance with ANALOGIC’s Corporate Quality Assurance Procedure Sampling Inspection/Testing by Attributes Procedure, as amended from time to time in the normal course of business. In no case shall non-conforming materials which affect the Component’s form, fit, or function be used in the manufacture of the Components.
 
  b.   The Components will be designed and manufactured by ANALOGIC in a manner that will qualify and validate all manufacturing processes in accordance with current Good Manufacturing Practices and the Quality System Regulations promulgated by the United States Food and Drug Administration (“FDA”) and ISO 9001 and for the Components after July 2002.
 
  c.   All the Components shall meet the SPECIFICATIONS and shall be subjected to ANALOGIC’s quality control systems and standards, which at all times will comply with applicable regulatory requirements. ANALOGIC shall permit TOMOTHERAPY to review periodically ANALOGIC’s relevant production and quality control procedures and records and to visit ANALOGIC’s facilities at reasonable times with a representative of ANALOGIC present.
10. OUTGOING INSPECTION AND PERFORMANCE INDICATORS
  a.   Beginning with the first pilot production Components, ANALOGIC will inspect all outgoing Components to be supplied to TOMOTHERAPY to be strictly in accordance with SPECIFICATIONS and perform outgoing acceptance testing. TOMOTHERAPY will monitor the delivery and quality performance of ANALOGIC.
 
  b.   An overview or SCAR (Supplier Corrective Action Request) will be generated by TOMOTHERAPY on a quarterly basis or more frequently if necessary. The performance indicators to be applied shall cover:

 


Table of Contents

Page 11
27 JANUARY 2002
% Complete and On-time delivery
Failures per unit (normalized over total quantity consumed monthly)
Failure symptoms, documentation deficiencies, packaging quality.
ANALOGIC will be responsible to provide a written quality report within fifteen (15) days from receipt of TOMOTHERAPY’s SCAR quality report that contains corrective actions to remedy failures.
ANALOGIC will be responsible to provide a written quarterly quality report to be issued by the first Friday of each month that provides all key performance indicators as mutually agreed to with TOMOTHERAPY.
11. SERVICE AND SPARE PARTS
  a.   ANALOGIC will provide Parts for a period of seven (7) years following the last serial delivery of the Components under this Agreement. The price of the Parts will be that listed in Exhibit 4, SPARE PARTS PRICE LIST (Which will be determined by the parties in good faith based on their prior practices, and otherwise based on industry standards). In the event that a Part becomes obsolete, ANALOGIC will provide TOMOTHERAPY notice as soon as ANALOGIC becomes aware of the anticipated obsolescence and offer TOMOTHERAPY the opportunity to make a last buy. In the event that ANALOGIC learns that a component used in manufacturing a Part of the Components will become obsolete, it will notify TOMOTHERAPY and TOMOTHERAPY may request ANALOGIC, at TOMOTHERAPY’s expense, to re-engineer the Part using components that are not obsolete.
 
  b.   TOMOTHERAPY will provide ANALOGIC with Forecasts for Parts. On the 15 th of each month, TOMOTHERAPY will provide ANALOGIC a twelve (12) month Forecast of its Parts needs. The first three (3) months of the Parts Forecast consists a firm and binding commitment to purchase the Parts. ANALOGIC will not be obligated to deliver parts in excess of thirty (30) percent above the second three (3) months Parts Forecast.
 
  d.   ANALOGIC will provide a quotation for Parts within five (5) business days if TOMOTHERAPY seeks to purchase Parts not included in its Forecast and not in stock at ANALOGIC.
 
  e.   ANALOGIC will provide TOMOTHERAPY a list of all Parts that are Field Replacement Units (“FRU”). This list will contain the following information: (1) ANALOGIC part number; (2) ANALOGIC part description; (3) Price of new FRU; (4) FRU lead-time and (5) List of repairable and non-repairable FRUs; (6) Price for non-warranty repairable FRU’s.
 
  f.   TOMOTHERAPY may return to ANALOGIC Parts, which are identified as repairable for warranty and out-of-warranty repairs. ANALOGIC will repair the Parts described in this sub-paragraph to the minimum allowable revision level within a targeted thirty (30) to forty-five (45) working day period from receipt of the returned Parts.

 


Table of Contents

Page 12
27 JANUARY 2002
  g.   ANALOGIC will provide repair services for the Components and Parts for a period of seven years following the last serial delivery of the Components pursuant to this Agreement.
12. WARRANTY AND REPAIRS
  a.   Except for Software, which is defined and provided for in Section 13, ANALOGIC warrants to TOMOTHERAPY that all of the Components sold to TOMOTHERAPY under this Agreement will be at the time of their delivery, free from defects in workmanship and material and in compliance with the Specifications. ANALOGIC further warrants that all of the Components sold to TOMOTHERAPY under this Agreement will, on the date of shipment by ANALOGIC, have been manufactured by ANALOGIC in accordance with the FDA’s current Good Manufacturing Practices, Quality System Regulations, ISO 9001.
 
  b.   The warranty period for the Components shall be twelve (12) months from the date of shipment by TOMOTHERAPY to a customer of a System into which the Components have been integrated or fifteen (15) months from the date of shipment of the Components by ANALOGIC to TOMOTHERAPY, whichever period occurs earlier. ANALOGIC will, at its option, repair or replace defective Components returned during the warranty period at no cost to TOMOTHERAPY, provided that each Party is responsible for the shipping cost of the Components it sends to the other.
 
  c.   ANALOGIC shall perform an inspection and test of field-returnable Components to confirm that there is a defect requiring warranty repair or replacement. Returned Components found not to be defective or no longer under warranty shall be repaired at TOMOTHERAPY’s expense at ANALOGIC’s then current standard rates for out of warranty repairs.
 
      These warranties are made upon the express condition that:
  i.   ANALOGIC is given prompt notice upon discovery by TOMOTHERAPY of such nonconformity, with an explanation of the alleged deficiencies.
 
  ii.   Such Product is returned to ANALOGIC at the expense of TOMOTHERAPY after receipt of a Return Authorization (RA) from ANALOGIC. Upon their repair or replacement, they shall be returned to TOMOTHERAPY as directed, at the expense of ANALOGIC.
 
  iii.   Examination of such Components by ANALOGIC discloses that the nonconformity actually exists and was not caused by accident, misuse, neglect, alteration, improper installation or use, improper repair or improper testing; and
 
  iv.   Such Components (including the Software, as defined below) have not been modified, altered or changed by any person other than ANALOGIC or its duly authorized repair agents, and other than modifications by TOMOTHERAPY as provided under Section 13 a. iii. of this Agreement.

 


Table of Contents

Page 13
27 JANUARY 2002
THESE WARRANTIES ARE IN LIEU OF AND EXCLUDE ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ORAL OR WRITTEN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND/OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE OBLIGATION TO REPLACE OR REPAIR IS THE SOLE REMEDY FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY. ANALOGIC WILL NOT IN ANY EVENT BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER. ANALOGIC WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR DAMAGES FROM LOSS OF USE, OR LOST DATA, EVEN IF ANALOGIC HAS BEEN ADVISED, KNEW OR SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE POSSIBILITY THEREOF. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE RESPONSIBILITY AND LIABILITY OF ANALOGIC IN CONNECTION WITH ANY OF THE COMPONENTS BE GREATER THAN THE PRICE PAID BY TOMOTHERAPY FOR THE NON-CONFORMING PORTION OF THE COMPONENTS. TOMOTHERAPY ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT’S EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES SET FORTH HEREIN ALLOCATE RISKS BETWEEN THE PARTIES FAIRLY AND IN A MANNER WHICH UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL CAUSE SUCH REMEDIES TO FAIL OF THEIR ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
13. SOFTWARE LICENSE AND WARRANTY
  a.   Components may contain pre-existing ANALOGIC proprietary software (“ANALOGIC proprietary software”) and software licensed to ANALOGIC by independent third parties (ANALOGIC licensed “Third Party Software”). TOMOTHERAPY also may add TOMOTHERAPY Software to the Components and/or to the System(s) into which the Components are integrated that may be its own proprietary software or other software licensed by TOMOTHERAPY directly from other third parties (collectively, TOMOTHERAPY Software). ANALOGIC proprietary Software and ANALOGIC licensed Third-Party Software are sometimes referred to collectively herein as the “ANALOGIC Software.” ANALOGIC hereby grants to TOMOTHERAPY for the term of this Agreement, subject to the conditions set forth herein, a non-exclusive, non-transferable (except as provided in Section 24 of this Agreement) worldwide license:
  i.   to market and sublicense the ANALOGIC Software in object code form only;
 
  ii.   to use internally the ANALOGIC proprietary Software in source code form, solely for the purposes of understanding the operation of the Product, supporting TOMOTHERAPY’s installed Product base, and accomplishing the purposes of clause (iii) below; and
 
  iii.   to make modifications and improvements to the ANALOGIC proprietary Software for distribution per clause (i) above.
Neither TOMOTHERAPY nor any of its sub-licensees shall be permitted to transfer the ANALOGIC Software in any form except in connection with the sale of a HI-ART II System, or as provided in Section 24 of this Agreement.

 


Table of Contents

Page 14
27 JANUARY 2002
  b.   During the term of this Agreement, TOMOTHERAPY may sublicense its distributors to distribute and sub-license the ANALOGIC Software solely in connection with Customers’ use of the Components which are part of a System purchased by the customer.
 
  c.   TOMOTHERAPY expressly acknowledges that this Agreement does not grant TOMOTHERAPY the right to copy, reproduce, or transmit in any form the ANALOGIC Software or any part thereof, or to authorize or permit others to do so, except as expressly provided herein. TOMOTHERAPY shall not reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble the ANALOGIC Software not provided hereunder in source code form.
 
  d.   Except as expressly provided herein, all right, title and interest in and to the ANALOGIC Software shall at all times remain and vest solely with ANALOGIC and its suppliers. TOMOTHERAPY shall have no access to or rights in the ANALOGIC licensed Third-Party Software in source code form. Except with respect to TOMOTHERAPY Software, TOMOTHERAPY agrees that it will not claim or assert title to the ANALOGIC Software, or attempt to transfer any title thereto to any third party. This does not apply to software developed specifically for TOMOTHERAPY, that does not interface directly with hardware that is supplied by ANALOGIC. For example, software developed under this contract that implements the general machine control scheme as defined by TOMOTHERAPY, or interfaces with standard 3rd-party components not supplied by ANALOGIC, shall be owned by TOMOTHERAPY.
 
  e.   In the event ANALOGIC changes hardware of the Components for whatever reason the firmware should continue to function to SPECIFICATIONS.
 
  f.   TOMOTHERAPY’s SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND ANALOGIC’S SOLE LIABILITY HEREUNDER SHALL BE TO REPLACE ANALOGIC SOFTWARE THAT DOES NOT MEET ANALOGIC’S LIMITED WARRANTY AS SOON AS IS REASONABLY PRACTICABLE, AND, IF REASONABLY POSSIBLE, TO MAKE THE REPLACEMENT SOFTWARE AVAILABLE TO TOMOTHERAPY VIA SECURE DOWNLOADING OVER THE INTERNET OR BY OTHER ELECTRONIC MEDIUM AGREEABLE TO THE PARTIES. THIS SOFTWARE WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF AND EXCLUDES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ORAL OR WRITTEN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND/OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. ANALOGIC WILL NOT IN ANY EVENT BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER. TOMOTHERAPY ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT’S EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES SET FORTH HEREIN ALLOCATE RISKS BETWEEN THE PARTIES FAIRLY AND IN A MANNER WHICH UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL CAUSE SUCH REMEDIES TO FAIL OF THEIR ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.

 


Table of Contents

Page 15
27 JANUARY 2002
  g.   ANALOGIC SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY OR RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANALOGIC SOFTWARE ALTERED OR MODIFIED BY TOMOTHERAPY WITHOUT ANALOGIC’S PERMISSION OR A THIRD PARTY OR FOR DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ACCIDENT, ABUSE, OR MISAPPLICATION OR FOR PROBLEMS DUE IN WHOLE OR IN PART TO THE USE OR MALFUNCTION OF ANY EQUIPMENT, SOFTWARE OR ACCESSORIES NOT SUPPLIED BY ANALOGIC OR THE INCOMPATIBILITY THEREOF WITH ANALOGIC SOFTWARE.
 
  h.   The Software and documentation is provided with restricted rights. Use, duplication, or disclosure by TOMOTHERAPY is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR Section 52.227-14 (Alternate III) or subparagraph (c)(l)(ii) of the clause at DFAR 252.227-7013, Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software. Contractor/manufacturer is ANALOGIC Corporation, 8 Centennial Drive, Peabody, Massachusetts 01960.
14. PRODUCT LIABILITY/ INDEMNIFICATION
  a.   Notwithstanding any other provisions hereof, each Party agrees to indemnify the other, its officers, agents, servants and employees against claims, damages, demands, suits, actions, judgments, liabilities, defaults, or costs and expenses, including attorneys’ fees, arising from claims made against or liability imposed upon the other, by a court of competent jurisdiction as a result of claims alleging personal injury, disability, death or property damage, or any form or type or wrongdoing or loss arising from such indemnifying Party’s failure to perform its respective obligations hereunder, as well as, in TOMOTHERAPY’s case, its obligations implicitly arising out of or in connection with the sale and/or transfer of the System, including without limitation, TOMOTHERAPY’s burden of Customer training, service and support, its representations made in the course of reselling or distributing the System, and its distribution of related materials and literature. This indemnification shall be limited to the sum of $2,000,000 in any 12-month period commencing on August 1 st of any year.
 
  b.   Each Party hereto agrees that it will maintain product liability insurance adequate to fulfil the indemnification obligation hereunder in each such 12-month period commencing on August 1 st of each year.
 
  c.   In the event that a claim is made against a Party seeking indemnification, that Party shall promptly notify the other Party of the claim, allow the other Party to defend it in the name of such Party and to fully cooperate with its insurers, if relevant, and its counsel in the defense against the claim.
15. PATENTS/INDEMNIFICATIONS
  a.   ANALOGIC will defend TOMOTHERAPY at ANALOGIC’s cost and expense, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, against any claim of infringement of a United States, Canadian, or European Union patent brought against TOMOTHERAPY to the extent that such a claim pertains to Components designed by ANALOGIC, provided

 


Table of Contents

Page 16
27 JANUARY 2002
      that TOMOTHERAPY gives ANALOGIC prompt written notice of such claim and the right to maintain sole control of the defense and all negotiations for settlement of such claim. If a final injunction is obtained against TOMOTHERAPY’S use of Components because of infringement of third Party intellectual property, ANALOGIC will, at ANALOGIC’s option and at ANALOGIC’s expense, either procure for TOMOTHERAPY the right to continue using the Components, replace or modify the Components so that the Components become non-infringing, or grant TOMOTHERAPY credit for the purchase price less reasonable depreciation of infringing Components and accept the return of Components sold by ANALOGIC to TOMOTHERAPY. Under the terms of this Agreement, ANALOGIC will not accept any liability, nor hold any person harmless from infringement claims relating to: (i) Components supplied by ANALOGIC containing components which have been manufactured or produced by others and which carry the original manufacturer’s patent indemnifications; (ii) Components purchased hereunder but altered by TOMOTHERAPY or others (excluding ANALOGIC and ANALOGIC’s authorized agents) to infringe such patent; and (iii) a combination of Components and other equipment; provided, however, that ANALOGIC shall defend such claim to the extent that such infringement claim would lie against the Product notwithstanding such alteration or combination.
 
  b.   Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Agreement, if any alleged infringement of a United States, Canadian, or European Union patent by Components arisen from designs developed and supplied by TOMOTHERAPY, then ANALOGIC shall not be required to repair or replace the Components at ANALOGIC’s cost or in any way indemnify TOMOTHERAPY as set forth in this Agreement.
 
  c.   TOMOTHERAPY agrees to defend ANALOGIC at TOMOTHERAPY’s cost and expense, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, against any claim of patent infringement by reason of use by Analogic of TOMOTHERAPY’s specifications, intellectual property, or other information in the Components. TOMOTHERAPY shall indemnify and hold ANALOGIC harmless against any loss, damage and cost reasonably incurred by ANALOGIC arising out of or related to such infringement claim. TOMOTHERAPY’s obligations with respect to such infringement claims are expressly conditioned upon ANALOGIC giving TOMOTHERAPY prompt notice of such infringement claim and granting TOMOTHERAPY in writing exclusive control over ANALOGIC’s defense or settlement and cooperating with TOMOTHERAPY at TOMOTHERAPY’s expense.
16. CONFIDENTIALITY
The Mutual Non-Disclosure agreement (NDA) signed by the Parties on February 15, 2001, shall apply during the term of this agreement.
17. COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS
ANALOGIC and TOMOTHERAPY, respectively, represent that they are and will remain in compliance with all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, judgments, decrees, orders,

 


Table of Contents

Page 17
27 JANUARY 2002
writs and injunctions of all United States government agencies and all foreign governments and agencies thereof that affect their business, properties or assets.
18. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; NO WAIVER
This Agreement and the Development and Manufacturing Agreement signed October 9 2001, contain the entire agreement between the parties relating to TOMOTHERAPY’s purchase of the Components from ANALOGIC. If a conflict develops, this Development and OEM Supply Agreement shall govern. None of the terms of this Agreement shall be deemed to be waived or amended by either Party unless such waiver or amendment specifically references this Agreement and is in writing signed by the Party to be bound. Waiver by either Party of any default by the other will not be deemed a waiver by such Party of any default by the other that may thereafter occur.
19. FORCE MAJEURE
If performance of this Agreement by ANALOGIC or TOMOTHERAPY is prevented or delayed by reason of any cause beyond the control of, and without the fault of, the Party affected, except the obligation to make payment for Components purchased, and which cannot be overcome by commercially reasonable diligence (including, without limitation, acts of nature, strikes, energy or materials shortages or obsolescence, acts of civil or military authority (including changes in government laws and regulations), fires, floods, epidemics, wars and riots), the Party affected shall be excused from such performance to the extent that it is necessarily prevented or delayed thereby, during the continuance of any such happening or event, and this Agreement shall be deemed suspended so long as and to the extent that any such cause prevents or delays its performance. In order to obtain a suspension under this provision, the Party invoking Force Majeure shall send written notice thereof to the other Party within a reasonable time after the invoking party knows that performance would be delayed or prevented due to the Force Majeure in question.
21. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING HEREIN TO THE CONTRARY, IN NO EVENT SHALL EITHER PARTY BE LIABLE TO THE OTHER PARTY FOR ANTICIPATED PROFITS, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIM ARISING OUT OF THIS AGREEMENT OR ANY PERFORMANCE HEREUNDER, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM SOUNDS IN TORT, CONTRACT, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR ANY OTHER THEORY. THE REMEDIES GRANTED TO EACH PARTY HEREIN ARE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE. EACH PARTY ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT’S EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES SET FORTH HEREIN ALLOCATE RISKS BETWEEN THE PARTIES FAIRLY AND IN A MANNER WHICH UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL CAUSE SUCH REMEDIES TO FAIL OF THEIR ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
22. NOTICES
All notices given under this Agreement shall be in writing and may be delivered (i) by hand, (ii) by United States mail, certified or registered, return-receipt requested, (iii) by overnight-courier service, or (iv) by facsimile transmission if followed by overnight courier service.

 


Table of Contents

Page 18
27 JANUARY 2002
Notices shall be deemed to have been received: if hand delivered, when so delivered; if mailed, five days after deposit as certified or registered mail; if by courier, on the date scheduled for delivery; and if by facsimile transmission, on the date shown on the confirmation of the transmission generated by the sending machine. All notices shall be sent to the addresses and facsimile numbers set forth below (or at such address or facsimile number as the receiving Party may specify from time to time in accordance with this Section):
     
If to TOMOTHERAPY:
  If to ANALOGIC
 
   
TOMOTHERAPY, Inc.
  ANALOGIC Corporation
1240 Deming Way
  8 Centennial Drive
Madison, WI 53717
  Peabody, MA 01960
 
   
Attention: John J. Barni, CEO
  Attention:Lonnie Weaver
 
   
Facsimile: 608-824-2996
  Facsimile: 978-977-6805
 
   
with a copy to:
  with a copy to:
 
   
La Follette Godfrey & Kahn
  General Counsel
Attn: Michael E. Skindrud
  ANALOGIC Corporation
One East Main Street
  8 Centennial Drive
Madison, WI 53703
  Peabody, MA 01960
 
   
Facsimile: 608-257-0609
  Facsimile: 978-977-6802
23. DISPUTE RESOLUTION
If a dispute arises out of or relates to this Agreement, or its breach, and the Parties have not been successful in resolving such dispute through negotiation, the Parties agree to resolve the dispute through binding arbitration in accordance to the rules of the American Arbitration Association (“AAA”). Unless the Parties can agree to a sole arbitrator, there shall be three (3) arbitrators, with each party appointing one arbitrator, who collectively will select a third. Each party shall bear its own expenses and an equal share of the expenses of the arbitrator and the fees of the AAA. The Parties, their representatives, other participants and the arbitrator(s) shall hold the existence, content and result of the arbitration in confidence. This Agreement shall be enforceable, and any arbitration award shall be final, and judgment thereon shall be entered into any court of competent jurisdiction. Nothing in this clause shall be construed to preclude any party from seeking injunctive relief in order to protect its rights pending arbitration. A request by a party to a court for such injunctive relief shall not be deemed a waiver of the obligation to arbitrate.

 


Table of Contents

Page 19
27 JANUARY 2002
If ANALOGIC initiates the arbitration process, the arbitration shall be held in Milwaukee,Wisconsin. If TOMOTHERAPY initiates the arbitration process, the arbitration shall be held in Boston, Massachusetts.
24. ASSIGNMENT
This Agreement shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of the parties, their successors and assigns. This Agreement shall not be assignable by either party without the prior written consent of the other, which consent shall not be unreasonably refused, except that in the event that a third party acquires substantially all assets of TOMOTHERAPY, TOMOTHERAPY may assign this agreement without ANALOGIC’s consent provided that the third party agrees to be bound by all of the terms of this Agreement, including but not limited to ANALOGIC’S right to be the exclusive supplier of all items or Components it has designed; and that any ANALOGIC Technology so assigned will not be used in the design and manufacture of substitutes for new or different versions of the Components.
25. GOVERNING LAW; SEVERABILITY
This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the internal laws of the state of New York. If any portion of this Agreement is found by a court of competent jurisdiction to be illegal, invalid or unenforceable, such portion shall be deleted and all other terms and conditions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect and shall be interpreted to achieve, to the greatest extent possible, the objectives of this Agreement taken as a whole, including the illegal, invalid or unenforceable provision.
26. PUBLICITY
Unless expressly approved in advance and in writing by the other party, neither party shall make any reference to the other, but may do so as to the subject matter of this Agreement in any publicity, advertising or other public statements or documents. Neither party will disclose to others, without the other’s consent, the fact that it is acting on behalf of the others.
27. COUNTERPART
This Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts, ANALOGIC of which shall be considered an original and all of which shall constitute one and the same instrument.
28. NO THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARIES
Nothing in this Agreement is intended to create any rights by persons not a Party to this Agreement and no other Party will be construed to be a third Party beneficiary of this Agreement or otherwise have any legal or equitable rights as a result of this Agreement.
29. SURVIVAL
Notwithstanding the expiration or termination of this Agreement, Sections 11,12,13,14, 15, and 21,the rights that have been given to purchasers of the Products during the term(s) of this Agreement to ANALOGIC Information and Proprietary Technology, TOMOTHERAPY Information and Proprietary Technology, Development Information, and ANALOGIC

 


Table of Contents

Page 20
27 JANUARY 2002
Software, as well as such other provisions hereof where the sense and context so admits, will survive in accordance with their terms.
30. MANUFACTURING RIGHTS
Notwithstanding, anything herein to the contrary, if at any time during the Agreement there is a force majeure failure or inability on ANALOGIC’s part to deliver the Components duly ordered by TOMOTHERAPY for a period of 60 days, and during this period of time ANALOGIC fails to provide TOMOTHERAPY with a realistic plan for resumption of the Components manufactured prior to the expiration of the ninetieth (90 th ) day following failure to deliver the Components, then TOMOTHERAPY will have the manufacturing rights to produce the Components until such time as ANALOGIC is reasonably capable of resuming the manufacturing of the Components.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, authorized representatives of the parties have executed this Agreement as of the Effective Date.
         
    TOMOTHERAPY INCORPORATED a Wisconsin
corporation
 
       
 
  By:   /s/ John J. Barni
 
       
 
  Title:   CEO 2/4/03
 
       
 
       
    ANALOGIC Corporation, a
Massachusetts corporation,
 
       
 
  By:   /s/ (illegible)
 
       
 
  Title:   CEO 2/5/03
 
       

 


Table of Contents

(TOMOTHERAPY LOGO)
                 
Document No.   Document Name   Revision No.   Page
 
  ANALOGIC-TOMOTHERAPY            
-
  DEVELOPMENT AND OEM SUPPLY     5     1 OF 21
 
  AGREEMENT — EXHIBIT 1            
Analogic-TomoTherapy Development and OEM
Supply Agreement
Exhibit 1: Specifications
                 
Rev   CA No   Date   Comment   Originator
0
  -   4/24/02   Initial revision — added PDU, Computers, disk components to first contract for review   D. Murray
1
  -   6/25/02   Modifications following review by Bob Riemer, Dave Murray, and many others   D Murray
2
  -   1/14/03   Modifications following phone discussion between Weaver, Riemer, Murray   D Murray
3
  -   1/14/03   Corrected issue with Section 10 heading   D Murray
4
  -   1/20/03   Change Exhibit 1 reference to Analogic family tree   D Murray
5
  -   1/20/03   Change Exhibit 1 reference to AN6500 (from “TomoTherapy Gantry”)   D Murray

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL
This document contains confidential or proprietary information of TomoTherapy, Inc. Neither this document nor the information contained therein is to be reproduced, distributed, used or disclosed, either in whole or in part, except as specifically authorized by TomoTherapy, Inc.

 


TABLE OF CONTENTS


Table of Contents

(TOMOTHERAPY LOGO)
                 
Document No.   Document Name   Revision No.   Page
 
  ANALOGIC-TOMOTHERAPY            
-
  DEVELOPMENT AND OEM SUPPLY     5     2 OF 21
 
  AGREEMENT — EXHIBIT 1            
Table of Contents
                     
1   Scope     4  
 
                   
    1.1   Identification     4  
 
                   
    1.2   Statement of System’s Intended Use     4  
 
                   
2   Standards and Regulations     4  
 
                   
3   Types of Users     5  
 
                   
4   System Architecture     5  
 
                   
    4.1   System Data Flow     7  
 
                   
5   Gantry Subsystem Requirements     8  
 
                   
    5.1   Scope     8  
 
                   
    5.2   Functional Requirements     8  
 
                   
 
      5.2.1   General     8  
 
                   
 
      5.2.2   Gantry Frame     8  
 
                   
 
      5.2.3   Gantry Mechanical     8  
 
                   
 
      5.2.4   Gantry Component Mounting     9  
 
                   
 
      5.2.5   Slip Ring System     9  
 
                   
 
      5.2.6   Gantry Control     10  
 
                   
 
      5.2.7   Data Communication     10  
 
                   
6   Couch Subsystem Requirements     11  
 
                   
    6.1   Scope     11  
 
                   
    6.2   Functional Requirements     11  
 
                   
 
      6.2.1   General     11  
 
                   
 
      6.2.2   Mechanical     11  
 
                   
 
      6.2.3   Control     11  
 
                   
7   DAS Subsystem Requirements     13  
 
                   
    7.1   Scope     13  
 
                   
    7.2   Functional Requirements     13  
 
                   
 
      7.2.1   General     13  
 
                   
 
      7.2.2   Electronics     13  
 
                   
8   Power Distribution Unit (PDU) Subsystem Requirements     14  
 
                   
    8.1   Scope     14  
 
                   
    8.2   Functional Requirements     14  
     
 
QUALITY RECORD, Template F4-18 REV A
  TomoTherapy, Inc.
Verify Latest Revision Before Using
  COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

 


Table of Contents

(TOMOTHERAPY LOGO)
                 
Document No.   Document Name   Revision No.   Page
 
  ANALOGIC-TOMOTHERAPY            
-
  DEVELOPMENT AND OEM SUPPLY     5     3 OF 21
 
  AGREEMENT — EXHIBIT 1            
                     
 
      8.2.1   General     14  
 
                   
 
      8.2.2   Electrical     14  
 
                   
 
      8.2.3   Control     15  
 
                   
9   Control Computer Requirements     16  
 
                   
    9.1   Scope     16  
 
                   
    9.2   Functional Requirements     16  
 
                   
 
      9.2.1   General     16  
 
                   
 
      9.2.2   Stationary Controller (STC) Hardware     16  
 
                   
 
      9.2.3   On-Board Controller (OBC) Hardware     17  
 
                   
 
      9.2.4   Data Receiver Server (DRS) Hardware     17  
 
                   
 
      9.2.5   Software Drivers     17  
 
                   
10   Gantry Component Requirements     19  
 
                   
    10.1   Scope     19  
 
                   
    10.2   Functional Requirements     19  
 
                   
 
      10.2.1   Circuit Boards     19  
 
                   
 
      10.2.2   List of Gantry Components with Analogic Involvement     21  
     
 
QUALITY RECORD, Template F4-18 REV A
  TomoTherapy, Inc.
Verify Latest Revision Before Using
  COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

 


Table of Contents

(TOMOTHERAPY LOGO)
                 
Document No.   Document Name   Revision No.   Page
 
  ANALOGIC-TOMOTHERAPY            
-
  DEVELOPMENT AND OEM SUPPLY     5     4 OF 21
 
  AGREEMENT — EXHIBIT 1            
1 Scope
  1.1   Identification
 
      The following subsystems are addressed by this document:
    TomoTherapy Hi-Art II Gantry Subsystem, including mounting of certain Analogic- and TomoTherapy-supplied components.
 
    TomoTherapy Hi-Art II Couch Subsystem.
 
    TomoTherapy Hi-Art II DAS Subsystem.
 
    TomoTherapy Hi-Art II Communications Subsystem.
 
    TomoTherapy Hi-Art II Power Distribution Unit (PDU)
 
    TomoTherapy Hi-Art II Control Computers
  1.2   Statement of System’s Intended Use
 
      The TomoTherapy Hi•Art system is intended to be used to provide conformal radiation therapy for patients who have been deemed acceptable candidates for radiation treatment of cancer. Its purpose is to precisely deliver beams of radiation, automatically tailored to the individual case, with immediate verification.
2 Standards and Regulations
      The TomoTherapy Hi•Art System shall be designed to promote conformance with design standards:
    IEC 60601-1: Medical Electric Equipment — Part 1: General Requirements for Safety
 
    UL 2601-1: Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1: General Requirements for Safety (USA version of international requirements)
 
    IEC 60601-1-2: Medical Electric Equipment — Part 1: General Requirements for Safety; Electromagnetic Compatibility — Requirements and Tests
 
    IEC 60601-1-4: Medical Electric Equipment — Part 1: General Requirements for Safety; 4. Collateral Standard: Programmable Electrical Medical Systems
 
    IEC 60601-2-1: Medical Electric Equipment — Part 2: Particular Requirements for Medical Electron Accelerators in the Range 1 MeV to 50 MeV
 
    IEC 61217: Radiotherapy equipment — coordinates, movements and scales (1996-08)
 
    IEC/TR 62266 (2002-03): Medical electrical equipment: Guidelines for implementation of DICOM in radiotherapy
     
 
QUALITY RECORD, Template F4-18 REV A
  TomoTherapy, Inc.
Verify Latest Revision Before Using
  COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

 


Table of Contents

(TOMOTHERAPY LOGO)
                 
Document No.   Document Name   Revision No.   Page
 
  ANALOGIC-TOMOTHERAPY            
-
  DEVELOPMENT AND OEM SUPPLY     5     5 OF 21
 
  AGREEMENT — EXHIBIT 1            
    ANSI/AAMI HE48: Human Factors Engineering Guidelines and Preferred Practices for the Design of Medical Devices.
3 Types of Users
    Physicians/Oncologists
 
    Technicians
 
    Physicists
 
    Service personnel
4 System Architecture
  The architecture for the TomoTherapy Hi•Art system can be broken down into three major subsystems: 1) Planning subsystem, 2) Delivery subsystem, and 3) Database server.
     
 
QUALITY RECORD, Template F4-18 REV A
  TomoTherapy, Inc.
Verify Latest Revision Before Using
  COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

 


Table of Contents

(TOMOTHERAPY LOGO)
                 
Document No.   Document Name   Revision No.   Page
 
  ANALOGIC-TOMOTHERAPY            
-
  DEVELOPMENT AND OEM SUPPLY     5     6 OF 21
 
  AGREEMENT — EXHIBIT 1            
Figure 1 System Architecture
[*]
     
 
QUALITY RECORD, Template F4-18 REV A
  TomoTherapy, Inc.
Verify Latest Revision Before Using
  COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

 


Table of Contents

(TOMOTHERAPY LOGO)
                 
Document No.   Document Name   Revision No.   Page
 
  ANALOGIC-TOMOTHERAPY            
-
  DEVELOPMENT AND OEM SUPPLY     5     7 OF 21
 
  AGREEMENT — EXHIBIT 1            
  4.1   System Data Flow
 
      The figure below illustrates the flow of data between each component of the HI•ART system. All data is accessed from, and saved to, the Database Server.
 
      Figure 2 System Data Flow
[*]
     
 
QUALITY RECORD, Template F4-18 REV A
  TomoTherapy, Inc.
Verify Latest Revision Before Using
  COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

 


Table of Contents

(TOMOTHERAPY LOGO)
                 
Document No.   Document Name   Revision No.   Page
 
  ANALOGIC-TOMOTHERAPY            
-
  DEVELOPMENT AND OEM SUPPLY     5     8 OF 21
 
  AGREEMENT — EXHIBIT 1            
5 Gantry Subsystem Requirements
  5.1   Scope
      The gantry subsystem includes the gantry frame, bearings, slip-rings, rotating mounting plate, and data communication components.
  5.2   Functional Requirements
  5.2.1   General
  5.2.1.1   The gantry system shall conform to [*], [*], and [*] when incorporating Analogic components.
 
  5.2.1.2   Communication software between Analogic components needed for the implementation of the TomoTherapy system shall be supplied, except for 3 rd party development tools and environments that may be sourced directly by TomoTherapy Inc.
  5.2.2   Gantry Frame
  5.2.2.1   The gantry frame shall be capable of supporting at least [*] kg with a safety factor of at least [*].
 
  5.2.2.2   The depth of the gantry frame shall be [*] mm or less.
 
  5.2.2.3   The width of the gantry frame shall be [*] mm or less.
 
  5.2.2.4   The maximum height of the entire gantry system shall be [*] mm or less.
  5.2.3   Gantry Mechanical
  5.2.3.1   The gantry shall be capable of rotating at a speed of up to [*] r.p.m.
 
  5.2.3.2   The gantry bearing shall have a life exceeding [*] years normal clinical use at [*] r.p.m., under a load of [*] kg cantilevered at [*] mm.
 
  5.2.3.3   The gantry must be sufficiently rigid to hold the position of the detector to within [*] ìm of the center of rotation, independently of gantry rotational position.
 
  5.2.3.4   [*]
 
  5.2.3.5   [*]
 
  5.2.3.6   [*]
 
  5.2.3.7   The gantry motor drive shall be capable of providing a steady state torque of at least [*] N.m. ([*] ft.lb).
     
 
QUALITY RECORD, Template F4-18 REV A
  TomoTherapy, Inc.
Verify Latest Revision Before Using
  COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

 


Table of Contents

(TOMOTHERAPY LOGO)
                 
Document No.   Document Name   Revision No.   Page
 
  ANALOGIC-TOMOTHERAPY            
-
  DEVELOPMENT AND OEM SUPPLY     5     9 OF 21
 
  AGREEMENT — EXHIBIT 1            
  5.2.3.8   The gantry motor drive shall also be capable of providing sufficient additional torque to accelerate the fully-loaded gantry to the maximum specified rotation speed in less than [*] seconds.
 
  5.2.3.9   The gantry motor drive controller shall control the gantry position to within [*] degree of the specified position.
 
  5.2.3.10   The inside diameter of the unpopulated gantry before the external covers are fitted shall be [*] cm or greater.
  5.2.4   Gantry Component Mounting
  5.2.4.1   Provision shall be made on the gantry for the mounting of the linear accelerator, primary collimation system, collimating jaws, and multi-leaf collimator.
 
  5.2.4.2   Provision shall be made on the gantry for the mounting of the CT detector, DAS, and associated power supplies.
 
  5.2.4.3   Provision shall be made on the gantry for the mounting of a solid-state modulator power supply, solid-state modulator, magnetron, circulator, and associated electronics.
 
  5.2.4.4   There must be sufficient space on the gantry for the mounting of a conventional modulator and power supply instead of the solid-state modulator.
 
  5.2.4.5   Space shall be available on the gantry for the mounting of the on board computers.
 
  5.2.4.6   Space shall be available on the gantry for the mounting of small low-voltage power supplies to supply the various electrical components.
 
  5.2.4.7   Provision shall be made on the gantry to allow for the routing of cooling pipes or flexible tubing to and from the cooled components.
 
  5.2.4.8   Provision shall be made on the gantry to allow for the routing of signal cables to the electronic components.
 
  5.2.4.9   Provision shall be made on the gantry to allow for the routing of power cables to the electronic components, separated from the signal cables where possible.
 
  5.2.4.10   Provision shall be made on the gantry to allow for the routing of compressed air to the MLC assembly, including mounting of an accumulator tank.
  5.2.5   Slip Ring System
  5.2.5.1   The gantry slip-ring system shall support two-way Ethernet communication with a data rate of at least [*] Mbit/sec, with necessary electronics provided to account for transmission line effects.
 
  5.2.5.2   The gantry slip-ring system shall provide [*] low-power, low voltage lines for use in the hardware interlock system.
 
  5.2.5.3   The gantry slip-ring system shall provide [*] power rings ([*] signal, [*] signal ground, [*] safety ground), capable of handling either [*] A per phase at [*] V or [*] A per phase at [*] V.
     
 
QUALITY RECORD, Template F4-18 REV A
  TomoTherapy, Inc.
Verify Latest Revision Before Using
  COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

 


Table of Contents

(TOMOTHERAPY LOGO)
                 
Document No.   Document Name   Revision No.   Page
 
  ANALOGIC-TOMOTHERAPY            
-
  DEVELOPMENT AND OEM SUPPLY     5     10 OF 21
 
  AGREEMENT — EXHIBIT 1            
  5.2.5.4   The gantry slip-ring system shall provide [*] spare low power, low voltage slip ring.
  5.2.6   Gantry Control
  5.2.6.1   A gantry angle detection system shall be provided.
 
  5.2.6.2   The instantaneous gantry angle to the within [*] degrees must be available to the control software on the rotating side.
 
  5.2.6.3   The gantry angle must be made available across the data communication system (see below) with a known latency, to control stationary side components.
  5.2.7   Data Communication
  5.2.7.1   A one-way data transmission for sending DAS and monitor signal data from the rotating side to the stationary side of the gantry shall be provided.
 
  5.2.7.2   The data transmission system shall be capable of detecting and signaling data transmission violation errors.
 
  5.2.7.3   The data transmission system shall support transfer of up to [*] channels of DAS data at up to [*] views per second.
 
  5.2.7.4   The underlying data transmission system technology shall be capable of transferring data fast enough to handle a multi-row detector of at least [*] rows, [*] channels per row, at [*] views per second.
     
 
QUALITY RECORD, Template F4-18 REV A
  TomoTherapy, Inc.
Verify Latest Revision Before Using
  COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

 


Table of Contents

(TOMOTHERAPY LOGO)
                 
Document No.   Document Name   Revision No.   Page
 
  ANALOGIC-TOMOTHERAPY            
-
  DEVELOPMENT AND OEM SUPPLY     5     11 OF 21
 
  AGREEMENT — EXHIBIT 1            
6 Couch Subsystem Requirements
  6.1   Scope
 
      The couch (table) subsystem includes the physical patient support and the control and output electronics and software interfaces associated with it.
 
  6.2   Functional Requirements
  6.2.1   General
  6.2.1.1   The couch system shall conform to [*], and [*], when incorporating Analogic components.
 
  6.2.1.2   Communication software between Analogic components needed for the implementation of the TomoTherapy system shall be supplied, except for 3 rd party development tools and environments that may be sourced directly by TomoTherapy Inc.
  6.2.2   Mechanical
  6.2.2.1   There shall be no metal structural members within the pallet in the scan region.
 
  6.2.2.2   The total longitudinal couch travel shall be at least [*]m.
 
  6.2.2.3   The maximum possible couch height when installed shall be no less than the height of the machine isocenter, namely [*] cm. Additional “feet” may need to be added to the couch by TomoTherapy or Analogic to achieve this.
 
  6.2.2.4   The minimum possible couch height when installed shall be no greater than [*] cm.
 
  6.2.2.5   The couch width shall be that of a standard [*] couch, namely [*] cm.
 
  6.2.2.6   The couch thickness shall be [*].
 
  6.2.2.7   Total couch sag when maximally extended at a plane [*] mm from the cradle pivot, relative to an unloaded couch, shall not exceed [*]mm when a load of [*]kg is placed [*]mm from the cradle pivot.
 
  6.2.2.8   In the case of couch failure, it shall be possible to release the couch pallet and withdraw the patient from the gantry bore.
  6.2.3   Control
     
 
QUALITY RECORD, Template F4-18 REV A
  TomoTherapy, Inc.
Verify Latest Revision Before Using
  COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

 


Table of Contents

(TOMOTHERAPY LOGO)
                 
Document No.   Document Name   Revision No.   Page
 
  ANALOGIC-TOMOTHERAPY            
-
  DEVELOPMENT AND OEM SUPPLY     5     12 OF 21
 
  AGREEMENT — EXHIBIT 1            
  6.2.3.1   At any time, the absolute longitudinal position of the couch to within [*]µm shall be available to control software via polling, at speeds of less than or equal to [*] mm/sec.
 
  6.2.3.2   At any time, feedback on the absolute vertical position of the couch shall be available via a [*].
 
  6.2.3.3   It shall be possible to command the couch to move longitudinally at speeds as low as [*] µm/sec.
 
  6.2.3.4   It shall be possible to command the couch to move longitudinally at speeds as high as [*] mm/sec.
 
  6.2.3.5   The couch shall provide a software interface to allow a remote computer to control its movements and poll for feedback.
 
  6.2.3.6   The couch shall be capable of signaling the controlling computer via hardware when an internal (watchdog) failure is detected.
     
 
QUALITY RECORD, Template F4-18 REV A
  TomoTherapy, Inc.
Verify Latest Revision Before Using
  COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

 


Table of Contents

(TOMOTHERAPY LOGO)
                 
Document No.   Document Name   Revision No.   Page
 
  ANALOGIC-TOMOTHERAPY            
-
  DEVELOPMENT AND OEM SUPPLY     5     13 OF 21
 
  AGREEMENT — EXHIBIT 1            
7 DAS Subsystem Requirements
  7.1   Scope
 
      The DAS subsystem includes the electronics to convert the detector signals and other rotating-side monitoring signals and provide it in a form that can be used by the rest of the system.
 
  7.2   Functional Requirements
  7.2.1   General
  7.2.1.1   The radiation therapy system shall conform to [*], [*], and [*], when incorporating Analogic DAS components.
 
  7.2.1.2   Communication software between Analogic components needed for the implementation of the TomoTherapy system shall be supplied, except for 3 rd party development tools and environments that may be sourced directly by TomoTherapy Inc.
  7.2.2   Electronics
  7.2.2.1   The DAS shall support at least [*] detector channels.
 
  7.2.2.2   The DAS shall support [*] additional data channels for other on-board signals (some [*]V pulsed, some [*]V DC, some charge-based).
 
  7.2.2.3   The DAS shall be designed to work with the [*], model number [*].
 
  7.2.2.4   The DAS shall provide a minimum of [*] bits of resolution.
 
  7.2.2.5   The DAS shall support view rates of [*] to [*] Hz.
 
  7.2.2.6   [*]
 
  7.2.2.7   [*]
     
 
QUALITY RECORD, Template F4-18 REV A
  TomoTherapy, Inc.
Verify Latest Revision Before Using
  COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

 


Table of Contents

(TOMOTHERAPY LOGO)
                 
Document No.   Document Name   Revision No.   Page
 
  ANALOGIC-TOMOTHERAPY            
-
  DEVELOPMENT AND OEM SUPPLY     5     14 OF 21
 
  AGREEMENT — EXHIBIT 1            
8 Power Distribution Unit (PDU) Subsystem Requirements
  8.1   Scope
 
      The PDU subsystem includes electrical components to isolate and transform mains power, and distributing it to various components of the TomoTherapy Hi-Art II System.
 
  8.2   Functional Requirements
  8.2.1   General
  8.2.1.1   The PDU shall be certified and labeled to comply with [*], [*], [*].
  8.2.2   Electrical
  8.2.2.1   The PDU shall accept the following AC 3-phase input voltages at [*]Hz: [*]V, [*]V, [*]V, [*]V and [*]V.
 
  8.2.2.2   For each allowable input voltage, a constant input voltage shall result in the nominal [*] output having a value between [*]% and [*]% of the [*]V value.
 
  8.2.2.3   For each allowable input voltage, a constant input voltage shall result in the nominal [*] output having a value between [*]% and [*]% of the [*]V value.
 
  8.2.2.4   There shall be a circuit breaker on the input side of the transformer, accessible from outside the PDU. All output side breakers shall not be accessible from outside the PDU.
 
  8.2.2.5   The PDU shall be rated for [*]% duty cycle on all outputs.
 
  8.2.2.6   The PDU shall provide [*]A at [*]VAC (3-phase) with a circuit breaker, for powering the gantry slip rings. A neutral and a safety ground shall also be supplied.
 
  8.2.2.7   The PDU shall provide [*]A at [*] VAC (3-phase), with a circuit breaker, for powering the compressor.
 
  8.2.2.8   The PDU shall provide [*]A at [*] VAC (3-phase), with a circuit breaker for powering the pump stand.
 
  8.2.2.9   The PDU shall provide sufficient power, with a circuit breaker, for powering the couch supplied by Analogic.
 
  8.2.2.10   The PDU shall provide sufficient power, with a circuit breaker, for powering the gantry drive supplied by Analogic.
 
  8.2.2.11   The PDU shall provide a total of [*]A at [*] VAC (single phase) over 3 outlets, each with a circuit breaker, for powering the Stationary Controller (STC), lasers, and gantry display.
     
 
QUALITY RECORD, Template F4-18 REV A
  TomoTherapy, Inc.
Verify Latest Revision Before Using
  COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

 


Table of Contents

(TOMOTHERAPY LOGO)
                 
Document No.   Document Name   Revision No.   Page
 
  ANALOGIC-TOMOTHERAPY            
-
  DEVELOPMENT AND OEM SUPPLY     5     15 OF 21
 
  AGREEMENT — EXHIBIT 1            
  8.2.2.12   The PDU shall provide [*]A at [*] VAC (single phase), with a circuit breaker, for powering the Data Receiver Server (DRS). This supply shall be protected by an uninterruptible power supply (UPS), delivering the rated load for a minimum of [*] minutes.
 
  8.2.2.13   The PDU shall provide [*]A at [*] VAC (single phase), with a circuit breaker, for powering the Operator Station and monitor.
 
  8.2.2.14   The PDU shall provide [*] ingress protection per [*].
 
  8.2.2.15   All power connections to the PDU shall be either hard-wired, or locking-type plugs.
 
  8.2.2.16   The PDU shall monitor output voltage on the [*] outputs, and provide an output signal indicating whether or not the voltage is within [*]% to [*]% of the nominal value.
  8.2.3   Control
  8.2.3.1   The PDU shall be capable of disabling power to the disk in response to an external control signal (the “disk off” signal).
 
  8.2.3.2   The PDU shall provide an output signal that indicates the status of the power phases.
 
  8.2.3.3   The PDU outputs shall not be able to be turned on unless an external key switch control signal is active.
 
  8.2.3.4   The PDU shall remove power from the outputs in response to either of two external control signals (the “off” or “key enable” signals).
 
  8.2.3.5   The PDU outputs shall turn on if both of two external control signals (the “key enable” and “system on” signals) are active.
 
  8.2.3.6   The PDU shall open the main input-side breaker in response to [*] (the “[*]”).
 
  8.2.3.7   The PDU outputs shall not provide output power unless [*] (the “[*]”) is connected.
 
  8.2.3.8   The PDU shall provide [*], [*] (for operating the door indicator system).
 
  8.2.3.9   The PDU shall provide a [*]. The PDU shall provide [*].
     
 
QUALITY RECORD, Template F4-18 REV A
  TomoTherapy, Inc.
Verify Latest Revision Before Using
  COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

 


Table of Contents

(TOMOTHERAPY LOGO)
                 
Document No.   Document Name   Revision No.   Page
 
  ANALOGIC-TOMOTHERAPY            
-
  DEVELOPMENT AND OEM SUPPLY     5     16 OF 21
 
  AGREEMENT — EXHIBIT 1            
9 Control Computer Requirements
  9.1   Scope
 
      The Control Computers include the computer chassis, boards, and software components needed to control the operation of the TomoTherapy Hi-Art II delivery subsystem. The control computers include: On-board Controller (OBC), Stationary Controller (SBC), and Data Receiver Server (DRS).
 
  9.2   Functional Requirements
  9.2.1   General
  9.2.1.1   All circuit boards used in the control computers shall be certified to [*], and be labeled as such.
 
  9.2.1.2   All circuit boards used in the control computers shall be designed to standards [*] and [*].
 
  9.2.1.3   The control computers shall consist of three separate boxes: the Stationary Controller (STC); On-Board Controller (OCB), and Data Receiver Server (DRS).
 
  9.2.1.4   The control computers shall each have status indicators indicating if the computer is functioning normally or in one or more error states.
 
  9.2.1.5   The control computers shall each be constructed in a manner consistent with the requirements of [*].
 
  9.2.1.6   The control computers shall each be supplied with one [*].
 
  9.2.1.7   On each compute, Analogic shall pre-install a [*] and [*]. Alternatively, Analogic shall install a [*] supplied by TomoTherapy if and when it becomes available. The software supplied to Analogic will be subject to change, but shall be provided by TomoTherapy in a controlled way and with sufficient notice to allow integration into Analogic’s manufacturing process.
  9.2.2   Stationary Controller (STC) Hardware
  9.2.2.1   The STC shall provide I/O lines to control the gantry motor drive, supplied by Analogic.
 
  9.2.2.2   The STC shall provide hardware I/O lines to interface with the [*].
 
  9.2.2.3   The STC shall provide an Ethernet connection to the delivery subsystem communications network and gantry displays.
 
  9.2.2.4   The STC shall provide hardware I/O lines to interface with the [*].
 
  9.2.2.5   The STC shall provide hardware I/O lines to interface with the [*].
     
 
QUALITY RECORD, Template F4-18 REV A
  TomoTherapy, Inc.
Verify Latest Revision Before Using
  COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

 


Table of Contents

(TOMOTHERAPY LOGO)
                 
Document No.   Document Name   Revision No.   Page
 
  ANALOGIC-TOMOTHERAPY            
-
  DEVELOPMENT AND OEM SUPPLY     5     17 OF 21
 
  AGREEMENT — EXHIBIT 1            
  9.2.2.6   The STC shall provide hardware I/O lines to interface with the [*].
 
  9.2.2.7   The STC shall provide hardware I/O lines to interface with the [*].
 
  9.2.2.8   The STC shall provide hardware I/O lines to interface with the [*], supplied by [*].
 
  9.2.2.9   The STC shall provide hardware I/O lines to interface with [*] and [*] for [*] and [*].
  9.2.3   On-Board Controller (OBC) Hardware
  9.2.3.1   The OBC shall be able to operate correctly when rotating at speeds between and including [*] r.p.m. and [*] r.p.m.
 
  9.2.3.2   The OBC shall provide Ethernet connection to the delivery subsystem communications network.
 
  9.2.3.3   The OBC shall provide hardware I/O lines to interface with the [*].
 
  9.2.3.4   The OBC shall provide hardware I/O lines to interface with the [*].
 
  9.2.3.5   The OBC shall provide hardware I/O lines to interface with the [*] ([*]) subsystem.
 
  9.2.3.6   The OBC shall provide hardware I/O lines to interface with the [*] ([*]) subsystem.
 
  9.2.3.7   The OBC shall provide an interface to the [*] ([*]) subsystem, supplied by [*].
 
  9.2.3.8   The OBC shall provide electronics to prepare the [*] and [*] for transfer over the high speed data transmission system, supplied by [*].
  9.2.4   Data Receiver Server (DRS) Hardware
  9.2.4.1   The DRS shall provide an Ethernet connection to the delivery subsystem communications network.
 
  9.2.4.2   The DRS shall provide a separate Ethernet port for connection to the external communications network (of which the TomoTherapy Hi-Art II Operator Station forms a part).
 
  9.2.4.3   The DRS shall provide electronics to receive the [*] and [*] transferred over the high speed data transmission system, supplied by [*].
 
  9.2.4.4   The DRS shall provide a set of [*] ([*]), that can be used to implement [*] on [*] that are received from the [*].
  9.2.5   Software Drivers
 
      The following software drivers shall be supplied by Analogic with a royalty-free license to use on the TomoTherapy Hi-Art II System:
     
 
QUALITY RECORD, Template F4-18 REV A
  TomoTherapy, Inc.
Verify Latest Revision Before Using
  COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

 


Table of Contents

(TOMOTHERAPY LOGO)
                 
Document No.   Document Name   Revision No.   Page
 
  ANALOGIC-TOMOTHERAPY            
-
  DEVELOPMENT AND OEM SUPPLY     5     18 OF 21
 
  AGREEMENT — EXHIBIT 1            
     
9.2.5.1
  [*]
 
   
9.2.5.2
  [*]
 
   
9.2.5.3
  [*]
 
   
9.2.5.4
  [*]
 
   
9.2.5.5
  [*]
 
   
9.2.5.6
  [*]
 
   
9.2.5.7
  [*]
 
   
9.2.5.8
  [*]
     
 
QUALITY RECORD, Template F4-18 REV A
  TomoTherapy, Inc.
Verify Latest Revision Before Using
  COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

 


Table of Contents

(TOMOTHERAPY LOGO)
                 
Document No.   Document Name   Revision No.   Page
 
  ANALOGIC-TOMOTHERAPY            
-
  DEVELOPMENT AND OEM SUPPLY     5     19 OF 21
 
  AGREEMENT — EXHIBIT 1            
Gantry Component Requirements
  10.1   Scope
 
      Analogic will supply a number of components on the gantry subsystem when delivered to TomoTherapy. These components include, but are not limited to, power supplies, circuit breakers, cables, and circuit boards. Analogic will perform the following tasks in relation to this work:
    Developing, along with TomoTherapy, the system design.
 
    Selecting and/or sourcing the components (see Section 10.2.2 below).
 
    Designing and developing components (see Section 10.2.2 below).
 
    Developing control software for selected components (as described in Exhibit 2, “Milestones”).
 
    Fabricating, assembling, and integrating the Analogic portion of the Hi-Art II prototype subsystem.
 
    Assisting TomoTherapy with integration of the Analogic-developed portion of the Hi-Art II prototype with the TomoTherapy-developed portion of the Hi-Art II prototype.
  10.2   Functional Requirements
  10.2.1   Circuit Boards
 
      Based upon TomoTherapy requirements specifications, Analogic shall design and manufacture the following circuit boards for use in the TomoTherapy Hi-Art II System:
  10.2.1.1   MLC Control Board
 
      The MLC Control Board provides an interface from the [*] to the [*]. The board isolates the [*] signals from and routes power to the [*].
  10.2.1.2   PDU and Interlock Control Board
    The PDU and Interlock Control Board provides an interface to the [*], [*] and [*]. It forwards the [*] to the [*] to disable the [*] and [*]. It also forwards the signal to the [*] to turn off the disk power.
 
    The PDU and Interlock Control Board also interfaces with the [*] to break or make the interlock depending on the status of the [*] from the [*]. The status of the door interlock is [*].
     
 
QUALITY RECORD, Template F4-18 REV A
  TomoTherapy, Inc.
Verify Latest Revision Before Using
  COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

 


Table of Contents

(TOMOTHERAPY LOGO)
                 
Document No.   Document Name   Revision No.   Page
 
  ANALOGIC-TOMOTHERAPY            
-
  DEVELOPMENT AND OEM SUPPLY     5     20 OF 21
 
  AGREEMENT — EXHIBIT 1            
    The PDU and Interlock Control Board provides an interface to the [*] with the [*] to allow it to make and break the interlock. The [*] can also read the interlock status from the board. The board also requires the computers to send a [*].
 
    The PDU and Interlock Control Board provides an interface to [*] to allow [*] to any one of [*] preconfigured angles of [*],[*],[*], and [*] degrees.
  10.2.1.3   Linac Moderator Interface Board
 
      The linac modulator interface board provides an interface from the [*] to the [*], [*], [*], and [*]. In response to signals from the [*], it controls [*] to the linac subsystem. Also, a high voltage interlock circuit on this board is connected to the high voltage interlock line, and will [*] and [*] when the [*] [*].
 
  10.2.1.4   AUX Input Board
 
      The AUX Board provides an interface from the [*] to the [*]. It also monitors [*] and [*] and [*] when [*] specified values.
 
      Signals processed by the AUX board include:
     
[*]
  [*]
 
   
[*]
  [*]
 
   
[*]
  [*]
 
   
[*]
  [*]
 
   
[*]
  [*]
 
   
[*]
  [*]
 
   
[*]
  [*]
 
   
[*]
  [*]
 
   
[*]
  [*]
 
   
[*]
  [*]
 
   
[*]
  [*]
 
   
[*]
  [*]
 
   
[*]
  [*]
 
   
[*]
  [*]
     
 
QUALITY RECORD, Template F4-18 REV A
  TomoTherapy, Inc.
Verify Latest Revision Before Using
  COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

 


Table of Contents

(TOMOTHERAPY LOGO)
                 
Document No.   Document Name   Revision No.   Page
 
  ANALOGIC-TOMOTHERAPY            
-
  DEVELOPMENT AND OEM SUPPLY     5     21 OF 21
 
  AGREEMENT — EXHIBIT 1            
       
 
 
    [*]
 
[*]   [*]
 
[*]   [*]
  10.2.1.5   Detector Gang Boards
 
      The detector gang boards interface between the [*] (model number [*]) backplane and the detector cables that lead to the Analogic DAS. Each board combines [*] backplane connectors ([*] channels) into a single [*] connector.
  10.2.2   List of Gantry Components with Analogic Involvement
 
      In addition to the circuit boards, Analogic will supply other components and cables to be mounted on the gantry prior to shipment.
 
      The document in Exhibit lb ([*], [*], Analogic document number [*]) defines the components that will have Analogic involvement, including the circuit boards described above.
 
      For each component, Analogic will either manufacture the component, or source the component directly. In either case the cost of the component will be included in the Analogic quoted price. The component will be mounted on the [*] gantry by Analogic prior to shipment (some of the components may be unmounted before shipping as agreed by both parties).
 
      TomoTherapy will provide Analogic with a [*] assembly (TomoTherapy assembly part number [*]), which includes the [*] and [*] adjustors. These components will be mounted on the [*] gantry by Analogic before shipment.
     
 
QUALITY RECORD, Template F4-18 REV A
  TomoTherapy, Inc.
Verify Latest Revision Before Using
  COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

 


Table of Contents

Analogic-TomoTherapy Development and OEM Supply
Agreement 1/14/03

Exhibit 2: Milestones/Payments
I. Original Agreement
                 
Milestone #   Description   Payment Amount     Date Billed
 
               
1
  Contract Signing   $ [*]     10/01
 
               
2
  Delivery of Rotating Test Bed   $ [*]     1/02
 
               
3
  Design Review   $ [*]     10/01
 
               
4
  Delivery of Table #1   $ [*]     10/01
 
               
5
  Delivery of DAS #1   $ [*]     1/02
 
               
6
  Delivery of Rx/PTM # 1   $ [*]     5/02
 
               
7
  Delivery of DAS #2   $ [*]     3/02
 
               
8
  Delivery of Rx/PTM #2   $ [*]     5/02
 
               
9
  Delivery of DAS #3   $ [*]     4/02
 
               
10
  Delivery of Rx/PTM #3   $ [*]     9/02
 
               
11
  Delivery of Table #2   $ [*]     2/02
 
               
12
  Delivery of Table #3   $ [*]     4/02
 
               
13
  Delivery of Gantry #1   $ [*]     3/02
 
               
14
  Delivery of Gantry #2   $ [*]     4/02
 
               
15
  Delivery of Gantry #3   $ [*]     4/02
 
               
 
               
 
                        Subtotal   $ [*]      

1


Table of Contents

Analogic-TomoTherapy Development and OEM Supply
Agreement 1/14/03

Exhibit 2: Milestones/Payments
II. Extension #1 — Power Distribution Units
                 
Milestone #   Description   Payment Amount     Date Billed
 
               
16
  Upon Agreement of PDU Extension:            
 
  PDU NRE #1   $ [*]     12/01
 
               
17
  Upon Delivery of PDU # 1:            
 
  PDU NRE #2   $ [*]     4/02
 
  PDU #1   $ [*]     4/02
 
               
18
  Upon Regulatory Approval:            
 
  PDU NRE #3   $ [*]     9/02
 
               
19
  Upon Delivery of PDU #2   $ [*]     4/02
 
               
20
  Upon Delivery of PDU #3   $ [*]     9/02
 
               
21
  Upon Delivery of PDU #4   $ [*]     11/02
 
               
22
  Upon Delivery of PDU #5   $ [*]      
 
               
23
  Upon Delivery of PDU #6   $ [*]      
 
               
24
  Upon Delivery of PDU #7   $ [*]      
 
               
25
  Upon Delivery of PDU #8   $ [*]      
 
               
26
  Upon Delivery of PDU #9   $ [*]      
 
               
27
  Upon Delivery of PDU #10   $ [*]      
 
               
 
               
 
                        Subtotal   $ [*]      
III. Extension #2 — Disk Casting for Test Bed
                 
Milestone #   Description   Payment Amount     Date Billed
 
               
28
  Disk Casting for Test Bed     [*]     1/02
 
               
 
                        Subtotal     [*]      

2


Table of Contents

Analogic-TomoTherapy Development and OEM Supply
Agreement 1/14/03

Exhibit 2: Milestones/Payments
IV. Extension #3 — Computers
                 
Milestone #   Description   Payment Amount   Date Billed
 
               
29
  Upon Agreement of Computers Extension:            
 
  •   Computer Hardware NRE # 1   $ [*]     1/02
 
  •   Computer Software NRE #1   $ [*]     1/02
 
               
30
  Upon Partial Delivery of Development Computer Set #1   $ [*]     12/01
 
               
31
  Upon Completion of Development Computer Set #1:            
 
  •   Prototype OBC           3/02
 
  •   Prototype STC   $ [*]     8/02
 
  •   Computer Hardware NRE #2   $ [*]     4/02
 
               
32
  Upon Completion of Software Training Workshops:            
 
  •   Computer Software NRE #2   $ [*]     3/02
 
               
33
  Upon Delivery of Computer Set #2:            
 
  •   Computer Set #2   $ [*]     5/02
 
  •   Rx/PTM #1 Credit (See Milestone # 6)   $ [*]     5/02
 
  •   Computer Hardware NRE #3   $ [*]     5/02
 
               
34
  Upon Delivery of Computer Set #3            
 
  •   Computer Set #3   $ [*]     5/02
 
  •   Rx/PTM #2 Credit (See Milestone #8)   $ [*]     5/02
 
               
35
  Upon Delivery of Computer Set #4            
 
  •   Computer Set #4   $ [*]     9/02
 
  •   Rx/PTM #3 Credit (See Milestone # 10)   $ [*]     9/02
 
               
36
  Upon Delivery of Computer Set #5   $ [*]     11/02
37
  Upon Delivery of Computer Set #6   $ [*]     12/02
38
  Upon Delivery of Computer Set #7   $ [*]      
39
  Upon Delivery of Computer Set #8   $ [*]      
40
  Upon Delivery of Computer Set #9   $ [*]      
41
  Upon Delivery of Computer Set #10   $ [*]      
42
  Upon Completion of Computer Software Support            
 
  •   Computer Software NRE #3   $ [*]     10/02
 
             
 
               
 
  Subtotal   $ [*]      

3


Table of Contents

Analogic-TomoTherapy Development and OEM Supply
Agreement 1/14/03

Exhibit 2: Milestones/Payments
V. Extension #4 — Additional Gantries, Tables, and DAS’s
             
Milestone #   Description   Payment Amount   Date Billed
 
           
43
  Delivery of Gantry #4   $[*]   9/02
 
           
44
  Delivery of Table #4   $[*]   11/02
 
           
45
  Delivery of DAS #4   $[*]   11/02
 
           
46
  Delivery of Gantry #5   $[*]   9/02
 
           
47
  Delivery of Table #5   $[*]    
 
           
48
  Delivery of DAS #5   $[*]   12/02
 
           
49
  Delivery of Gantry #6   $[*]   11/02
 
           
50
  Delivery of Table #6   $[*]    
 
           
51
  Delivery of DAS #6   $[*]    
 
           
52
  Delivery of Gantry #7   $[*]   12/02
 
           
53
  Delivery of Table #7   $[*]    
 
           
54
  Delivery of DAS #7   $[*]    
 
           
55
  Delivery of Gantry #8   $[*]    
 
           
56
  Delivery of Table #8   $[*]    
 
           
57
  Delivery of DAS #8   $[*]    
 
           
58
  Delivery of Gantry #9   $[*]    
 
           
59
  Delivery of Table #9   $[*]    
 
           
60
  Delivery of DAS #9   $[*]    
 
         
 
           
 
  Subtotal   $[*]    

4


Table of Contents

Analogic-TomoTherapy Development and OEM Supply
Agreement 1/14/03

Exhibit 2: Milestones/Payments
VI. Extension #5 — Partial System Development and Manufacture
                 
Milestone #   Description   Payment Amount     Date Billed
 
               
61
  Upon Agreement            
 
  System NRE #1   $ [*]     3/02
 
               
62
  System Design Review            
 
  System NRE #2   $ [*]     7/02
 
               
63
  Completion of First 3 Man Months Software Development            
 
  System Software NRE #1   $ [*]     5/02
 
               
64
  Completion of Second 3 Man Months Software Development            
 
  System Software NRE #2   $ [*]     7/02
 
               
65
  Assembly of Gantry Subsystem #1 at Analogic            
 
  System NRE #3   $ [*]     10/02
 
               
66
  Completion of Third 3 Man Months Software Development            
 
  System Software NRE #3   $ [*]     10/02
 
               
67
  Test Bed Hardware Integration of Analogic and TomoTherapy            
 
  Subsystems            
 
  System NRE #4   $ [*]     10/02
 
               
68
  Delivery of Integrated Gantry Subsystem #1   $ [*]     9/02
69
  Delivery of Integrated Gantry Subsystem #2   $ [*]     11/02
70
  Delivery of Integrated Gantry Subsystem #3   $ [*]     12/02
71
  Delivery of Integrated Gantry Subsystem #4   $ [*]      
72
  Delivery of Integrated Gantry Subsystem #5   $ [*]      
73
  Delivery of Integrated Gantry Subsystem #6   $ [*]      
74
  Delivery of Integrated Gantry Subsystem #7   $ [*]      
75
  Delivery of Integrated Gantry Subsystem #8   $ [*]      
76
  Delivery of Integrated Gantry Subsystem #9   $ [*]      
 
             
 
                        Subtotal   $ [*]      

5


Table of Contents

Analogic-TomoTherapy Development and OEM Supply
Agreement 1/14/03

Exhibit 2: Milestones/Payments
VII. Extension #6 — Disk Casting Machining Modifications
                 
Milestone #   Description   Payment Amount     Date Billed
 
               
77
  Lot Charge (9 Disks)   $ [*]     10/02
 
             
 
               
 
                        Subtotal   $ [*]      
VIII. Extension #7 — Add Pneumatic Seal to Bearings
                 
Milestone #   Description   Payment Amount     Date Billed
 
               
78
  Delivery of Prototype Bearing #1   $ [*]      
 
               
79
  Delivery of Prototype Bearing #2   $ [*]      
 
             
 
               
 
                        Subtotal   $ [*]      
IX. Extension #8 — 100 VxWorks Target Licenses
                 
Milestone #   Description   Payment Amount     Date Billed
 
               
80
  15 Target Licenses (Computer Sets #1 - #5)   $ [*]     10/02
 
               
81
  3 Target Licenses (Computer Set #6)   $ [*]     12/02
 
               
82
  3 Target Licenses (Computer Set #7)   $ [*]      
 
               
83
  3 Target Licenses (Computer Set #8)   $ [*]      
 
               
84
  3 Target Licenses (Computer Set #9)   $ [*]      
 
               
85
  3 Target Licenses (Computer Set #10)   $ [*]      
 
               
86
  70 Target Licenses (@ $[*]/license)   $ [*]      
 
             
 
               
 
                        Subtotal   $ [*]      

6


Table of Contents

Analogic-TomoTherapy Development and OEM Supply
Agreement 1/14/03

Exhibit 2: Milestones/Payments
X.     Extension #9 — Gantry Power Interface Upgrade Kits
                 
        Payment     Date
Milestone #   Description   Amount     Billed
 
               
87
  Gantry Power Interface Kit #1   $ [*]     12/02
 
               
88
  Gantry Power Interface Kit #2   $ [*]     12/02
 
               
89
  15:1 Gear Reducer   $ [*]     12/02
 
               
90
  NRE   $ [*]     12/02
 
             
 
               
 
 
Subtotal
  $ [*]      

7


Table of Contents

TOMOTHERAPY SPARES
             
Part #   Description   Quantity   Price (each)
10-42956-01
  Recon Computer Assy   [*]   $[*]
 
           
10-60165-01
  PDU Control Board 00B   [*]   $[*]
 
           
10-41954-01
  Base Control Comptr Assy   [*]   $[*]
 
           
10-60204-01
  MLC Control Board   [*]   $[*]
 
           
10-60274-01
  Sensor Bd Cal Assy   [*]   $[*]
 
           
10-60274-02
  Sensor Bd, Tick   [*]   $[*]
 
           
10-60019-01
  Gang Bd Assy Tested (8)   [*]   $[*]
 
           
10-60113-01
  Gang Bd Offset 2 Assy   [*]   $[*]
 
           
10-60112-01
  Gang Bd Offset 1 Assy   [*]   $[*]
 
           
10-60276-01
  Modulator Interface Bd 00D   [*]   $[*]
 
           
10-60399-01
  Aux Input Bd Rev 1   [*]   $[*]
 
           
10-44771-01
  Disk Control Assy   [*]   $[*]
 
           
10-27160-01
  RTS DAS   [*]   $[*]
 
           
10-42363-01
  Table Control Assy   [*]   $[*]
Notes:
Spares available until forecast from TomoTherapy and production ramp.

 


Table of Contents

Exhibit 3 — Production System Pricing (24 January 2003)
System is defined as of 12 August 2002 to include:
Gantry
Table
DAS
Computers (2- control and 1- reconstruction ) PDU
Commercial Components Cables
PCB’s, Chassis, Mounting Hardware
*System Assembly/ Integration / Test
* Does not include:
LINAC, Magnetron, SSM, HVPS
MLC and Jaws
Xenon Detectors
Rotary Union
System Covers
System workstation
System quantity pricing is based upon a quantity ordered and delivery accepted within the following 12 month period. This Production Systems Pricing will commence with the shipment of a production HI-ART-II system (system #11) and will apply to all production systems.
Production System Pricing
         
1-19   20-49   50- UP
$[*]   $[*]   $[*]
Pre-production System Pricing
Pilot systems #1 thru #10 = $[*] each

 

 

Exhibit 10.12
SIEMENS
MANUFACTURE AND SUPPLY AGREEMENT
           This Agreement made as of this 14” day of November 2003 by and between Siemens Medical Solutions, USA, Inc., acting through and on behalf of its Oncology Care Systems Group having a business address at 4040 Nelson Avenue, Concord, CA 94520 (“Seller”) and Tomo Therapy, Incorporated, having a business address at 1240 Deming Way, Madison, WI 53717 (“Buyer”).
W I T N E S S E T H :
           WHEREAS, Seller has experience and expertise in the manufacturing, and/or support of RF Systems Assemblies; and
           WHEREAS, Buyer wishes to have Seller use its expertise to continue manufacturing and/or supporting the products (herein collectively referred to as “Products”) listed in Exhibit A for the period specified in this Agreement; and
           NOW, THEREFORE, for good and valuable consideration, the adequacy of which is hereby acknowledge, the Seller and Buyer do hereby agree to covenant and promise the following:
  1.   SCOPE
Commencing on the effective date of this Agreement Buyer shall provide Seller with a twelve (12) month rolling forecast, which shall be updated on a monthly basis. The initial forecast will be accompanied by a firm purchase order for the first six (6) months and a projection of orders for the next six (6) months, subject to the lead time stated in Exhibit B. In accordance with this Agreement, Buyer shall issue a purchase order to Seller by no later than November 30, 2003. Seller will provide the personnel, technical services and facilities necessary in order to manufacture the Products for Buyer.
Neither party shall be deemed to be in default of this Agreement if prevented from performing any obligation hereunder for any reason beyond its reasonable control including, without limitation, governmental laws and regulations, terrorists acts, Acts of God or the public, calamities, floods, and storms.
  2.   PURCHASE ORDER PLACEMENT
Every three (3) months, thereafter, firm purchase orders shall be issued on the first of each rolling month for Products to be delivered in the third full calendar month, following the month in which Seller receives the purchase order. Buyer may delay delivery by as much as 30 days, provided such delay notice is delivered to Seller not less than 90 days prior to the originally scheduled delivery date.
As a condition of this Agreement, Buyer agrees to a firm minimum buy procurement of [  *  ] sets of Accelerator Assembly, part number [  *  ] for each of the two years commencing with the effective date of this Agreement. Said purchase orders shall be binding to the parties and any successors or assigns. Notwithstanding the above, the Buyer will provide the purchasing forecast for Seller’s planning purpose only.
Siemens Medical Solutions USA, Inc.
                 
Oncology Care Systems Group   4040 Nelson Avenue
Concord, CA 94520
  1   Tel: (925) 246-8200
Fax: (925) 246-8284
  ww.siemensmedical.com/oncology

 
Confidential treatment has been requested for portions of this exhibit. The copy filed herewith omits the information subject to the confidentiality request. Omissions are designated as [  *  ]. A complete version of this exhibit has been filed separately with the Securities and Exchange Commission.

 


 

SIEMENS
Seller shall formally acknowledge Buyer’s purchase orders and provide a confirmation of delivery dates (lead time is 90 days). Seller shall maintain as necessary, an appropriate level of IS0 certification and compliance to IS0 9001. Seller further warrants that all Products sold to Buyer under this Agreement comply with the requirements of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (“FDA”) and the FDA’s Good Manufacturing Practices (“GMP”) with respect to the manufacture, package, assembly and testing for the Products
Seller shall formally notify Buyer of any Product changes that affects form fit or function (class one).
  3.   PACKAGING
Packaging of the Products shall be in a manner adequate to ensure undamaged arrival at Buyer’s business address, when transported by airplane, ship, truck or railroad. All deliveries shall be accompanied by a shipping list.
  4.   TERM
The term of this Agreement is two (2) years from date of signature. Seller may elect to automatically extend this Agreement for additional one (1) year increments upon written Amendment to this Agreement signed by both parties.
  5.   PRICING
The pricing for Products shall be in accordance with Exhibit A and shall be valid for a period of one (1) year following the effective date of this Agreement. At the end of each year, Seller will review prices for an increase not to exceed [  *  ] of then current price.
Excepting Seller’s inability to deliver, if at the end of the first 12 months of this Agreement, the Buyer is unable to meet the minimum purchase quantity of [  *  ] sets of Accelerator Assembly stated in Exhibit B, then Seller will review prices for an increase not to exceed an additional 10%.
  6.   PAYMENT TERMS
The Payment terms are net 30 days after the receipt of invoice from Seller. All Products shipped are FOB Concord, CA.
  7.   WARRANTY
All Products provided under this Agreement shall be in accordance with the Seller’s specifications. Except for [  *  ], which is warranted for one (1) year from the date of delivery, Seller warrants all other Products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of six (6) months from the date of delivery.
Seller shall only perform an inspection and test of returned Accelerator Assembly Product part number [  *  ] to confirm that there is a defect during warranty period. Seller at its option will repair or replace defective Product within 30 business days after receipt at Seller’s facility.
Siemens Medical Solutions USA, Inc.
                 
Oncology Care Systems Group   4040 Nelson Avenue
Concord, CA 94520
  2   Tel: (925) 246-8200
Fax: (925) 246-8284
  ww.siemensmedical.com/oncology

 


 

SIEMENS
Buyer’s remedy is contingent on (1) prompt written notification of the defect; (2) the cause of the defect not being the result of misuse, accident, neglect, alteration, improper testing, storage, installation or negligence on the part of the Buyer; and (3) return of the Products to Buyer’s manufacturing location with shipment and in-transit loss or damage at the risk and expense of the Buyer. Such repair, replacement or credit shall constitute fulfillment of all liability of Buyer to Seller whether based in contract, tort, and indemnity or otherwise.
In the event, Seller is unable to confirm a failure for an Accelerator Assembly Product, which has been returned to Seller under warranty, Seller shall invoice Buyer at the current manufacturing rate of [  *  ], at an amount not to exceed the current labor value of the Product.
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN THE PRECEDING SENTENCES AND/OR IN SPECIFICATIONS, SELLER MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS.
  8.   LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING TO THE CONTRARY CONTAINED OR CONSTRUED TO BE CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT, EXCEPT FOR NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT RESULTING IN BODILY INJURY, SELLER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, HOWEVER CAUSED, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SELLER’S LIABILITY TO THE OTHER SHALL NOT EXCEED THE SUMS PAID BY BUYER TO SELLER UNDER THIS AGREEMENT. BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THESE LIMITATIONS ON POTENTIAL LIABILITIES WERE AN ESSENTIAL ELEMENT IN SETTING CONSIDERATION UNDER THIS AGREEMENT.
  9.   TERMINATION
If either party materially breaches its obligations in this Agreement, the other party may terminate this Agreement by giving not less than 30 days notice to the other party. Termination will not occur if the defaulting party, within such thirty (30) day period, remedies such breach to the reasonable satisfaction of the non-defaulting party.
This Agreement may be terminated immediately by the other party without the requirement of prior notice, if the other party suspends operations, files or suffers to be filed against it a petition in bankruptcy, or the like, executes an assignment for the benefit of creditors, or is adjudicated as bankrupt.
  10.   EXPORT
Each party agrees that it will not knowingly (i) export or re-export, directly or indirectly, any technical data (as defined by the U.S. Export Administration Regulations), including software received from the other under this Agreement, (ii) disclose such technical data for
Siemens Medical Solutions USA, Inc.
                 
Oncology Care Systems Group   4040 Nelson Avenue
Concord, CA 94520
  3   Tel: (925) 246-8200
Fax: (925) 246-8284
  ww.siemensmedical.com/oncology

 


 

SIEMENS
use in, or (iii) export or re-export, directly or indirectly, any direct product of such technical data, including software, to any destination to which such export or re-export is restricted or prohibited by U.S. or non-U.S. law without obtaining prior authorization from U.S. Department of State and other competent government authorities to the extent required by those laws. This clause shall survive termination or cancellation of this Agreement.
  11.   INDEMNIFICATION
  a)   Bodily injury, Disability or Death
Notwithstanding any other provisions hereof, each party agrees to indemnify the other, its officers, agents, servants and employees against claims, damages demands, suits actions judgments, liabilities, defaults, or costs and expenses, including attorney’s fees, arising from claims made against or liability imposed upon the other, by a court of competent jurisdiction as the results of claims alleging personal injury, disability, death or property damage or any form or type or wrongdoing or loss arising from either party’s failure to perform its respective obligations hereunder. In Buyer’s case, such indemnity obligations shall also apply to claims arising out of or in connection with Buyer’s assembly and resale of the Products, including without limitation, Buyer’s burden of customer training, service and support, its representations made in the course of reselling or distributing the Products, and its distribution of related materials and literature
For Buyer, indemnification for the bodily injury, disability, death or property damage shall be limited to the sum of $2,000,000 in any twelve (12) month period, commencing on October lst of any year. For Seller, indemnification shall be limited to the cumulative total value of the Products purchase under the life of this Agreement. Notwithstanding the aforementioned, under no circumstances, excepting gross negligence or willful misconduct, will Seller’s liability exceed the cumulative total value of the Products purchased under the life of this Agreement.
In the event that a claim is made against a Party seeking indemnification for bodily injury disability or death, that Party shall promptly notify the other party of the claim, allow the other Party to defend it in the name of such Party and to fully cooperate with its insurers, if relevant, and its counsel in the defense against the claim.
  b)   Intellectual Property Infringement
The Seller agrees, at its cost and expense, to defend any claim, suit or legal proceeding asserted or brought against the Buyer or the Buyer’s customers, that any Product, or the use thereof, infringes any United States patent, copyright or other intellectual property rights of a third party, provided the Seller is notified promptly in writing of such claim, suit or legal proceeding, and given full and complete authority to defend the same, and given such information as the Buyer may have regarding the same as may be reasonably required for the defense of the same. The Seller shall pay all damages, awards and costs, awarded. The Seller shall not be responsible for any settlement negotiated and agreed to by the Buyer or any other party without the consent of the Seller. The Seller shall have the right, at its own election and at its own expense, to either (a) procure for the Buyer the right to continue to distribute and use such Products or part or component, thereof or (b) modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing provided that the functionality, level of performance, features and quality thereof are not affected, or, if neither of the foregoing alternatives is commercially
Siemens Medical Solutions USA, Inc.
                 
Oncology Care Systems Group   4040 Nelson Avenue
Concord, CA 94520
  4   Tel: (925) 246-8200
Fax: (925) 246-8284
  ww.siemensmedical.com/oncology

 


 

SIEMENS
reasonable, the Seller may repurchase such Product (the repurchase price is to be based on the original price paid by the Buyer less depreciation on a straight line basis over five (5) years, commencing with the date of installation and start up of such Product). The Buyer shall have the right, at its own election, to return any such affected Product to the Seller for refund of the purchase price as set forth above, and to cancel any outstanding Orders or further deliveries of the Product, without any liability to the Seller with respect thereto.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Seller shall not have any liability to the Buyer under the provision of Section 7 (b), that (i) is based upon the interconnection and/or the use of a Product, or part thereof, in combination with products or other devices outside the scope of this Agreement without the prior written consent of the Seller, which are not made by the Seller whether or not supplied hereunder, or (ii) for use in any manner for which the Product, or part thereof, was not designed or created. Also, the Buyer shall hold the Seller harmless against any expense, judgment or loss for infringement of any patent or copyright that results from the Seller’s compliance with the incorporation of designs specifications furnished by the Buyer. In addition, to the extent it is empowered, the Seller agrees to pass on to the Buyer patent infringement indemnification received from suppliers to the Seller of the Products or part thereof not designed by or for the Seller but furnished hereunder.
The foregoing states the entire liability of the Parties with respect to infringement of intellectual property rights by the Products or any part thereof.
  c)   Product Liability Insurance
Buyer covenants that it will maintain product liability insurance adequate to fulfill the indemnification obligation hereunder in each such 12-month period commencing on October 1st of each year. Seller is self-insured and covenants that it has sufficient capital to meet all obligations hereunder.
  12.   CONFIDENTIALITY
During the term of this Agreement and for five (5) years after the latter of either the termination of this Agreement or the termination of the last Statement of Work under this Agreement, each party shall use the same efforts it uses to protect its own confidential information (but in any event, no less than reasonable efforts to prevent its disclosure) to hold in strict confidence and to require its personnel to hold in strict confidence and not disclose to any third party without the prior written consent of the disclosing party, and not use in any manner except in accordance with the terms of this Agreement, any confidential business or technical information of the other party in its possession which is related to any Product or Statement of Work or any confidential business or technical proprietary information obtained from the other party (or any of its Affiliates) in connection with the transactions contemplated hereunder.
Such confidential information specifically may include, without limitation, all engineering drawings, specifications and other technical documentation, any proposed design and specifications for future products and products in development, marketing plans, costs and pricing information, and all third party information required to be maintained in confidence. Promptly following termination of this Agreement or upon the request by or for the disclosing party, the receiving party shall surrender to the disclosing party or destroy all
Siemens Medical Solutions USA, Inc.
                 
Oncology Care Systems Group   4040 Nelson Avenue
Concord, CA 94520
      Tel: (925) 246-8200
Fax: (925) 246-8284
  ww.siemensmedical.com/oncology

5


 

SIEMENS
materials remaining in its possession containing any such confidential information including all copies, extracts, or transcriptions, regardless of media.
For purposes of this Agreement and the Products and Statement of Work, information shall not be deemed confidential:
  a)   if such information is generally available from public sources other than as a result of the breach of this Agreement
 
  b)   if such information is received from a third party not under any obligation to keep such information confidential
 
  c)   if the recipient can demonstrate that such information was independently developed by the recipient without use of any confidential information of the other party or its Affiliates; and
 
  d)   if such information is marketing material such as catalogs or leaflets distributed to third parties as a part of sales and promotions.
Neither party shall be liable to the other for a breach of these confidentiality obligations to the extent it is required by law or any governmental body to disclose any confidential information of the other party; provided, however, unless otherwise required by such governmental body or such law, the party providing such information to such governmental body or disclosing the same pursuant to requirement of law shall first notify the other party so as to enable the other party opportunity to take steps it deems appropriate to protect its confidential or proprietary information.
  13.   GOVERNING LAW
This Agreement is governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, USA, without regards to conflict of law provisions thereof. Assignment of this Agreement may be made only upon the written consent of both parties; provided, however, that Seller may assign this Agreement to any parent, affiliate or subsidiary corporation upon notice to Buyer. Any attempted assignment or transfer of any of the rights, duties or obligations of this Agreement without the prior written consent of either party shall be void. If consent is given, this Agreement shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of the assigns.
Siemens Medical Solutions USA, Inc.
                 
Oncology Care Systems Group   4040 Nelson Avenue
Concord, CA 94520
  6   Tel: (925) 246-8200
Fax: (925) 246-8284
  ww.siemensmedical.com/oncology

 


 

SIEMENS
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have caused this Agreement to be executed by their duly authorized representatives as of the date first written above.
                 
Siemens Medical Solutions USA, Inc.       TomoTherapy Incorporated
Oncology Care Systems Division       1240 Deming Way
Concord, CA 94520       Madison, WI 53717
“Seller”       “Buyer”
 
               
By: Ajit Singh, Ph.D.       By: Mr. John Barni
Title: President       Title: CEO
 
               
Signature:
  /s/ Ajit Singh       Signature:   /s/ John Barni
 
               
 
               
Date:
  11/17/03       Date:   11/18/03
 
               
 
               
By: Mr. Bernd Haetzel            
Title: Vice-President Finance and Administration            
 
               
Signature:
  /s/ Bernd Haetzel            
 
               
 
               
Date:
  11-13-03            
 
               
Siemens Medical Solutions USA, Inc.
                 
Oncology Care Systems Group   4040 Nelson Avenue
Concord, CA 94520
  7   Tel: (925) 246-8200
Fax: (925) 246-8284
  ww.siemensmedical.com/oncology

 


 

SIEMENS
COVER PAGE
AMENDMENT THREE
to
Manufacturing and Supply Agreement
MSA-50047-WMG
Between
SIEMENS MEDICAL SOLUTIONS USA INC.
Oncology Care Systems

4040 Nelson Avenue
Concord, CA 94520
And
TomoTherapy, Inc.
1240 Deming Way
Madison, WI 53717
Siemens Medical Solutions USA, Inc.
             
Oncology Care Systems Group   4040 Nelson Avenue   Tel: (925) 246-8200   www.siemensmedical.com/oncology
    Concord, CA 94520   Fax: (925) 246-8284    

 


 

     
SIEMENS
  MSA- 50047-WMG
Amendment 03
This Amendment Three to the Manufacturing and Supply Agreement dated November 14, 2003 between Siemens Medical Solutions USA, Inc. and TomoTherapy, Inc. is hereby entered into retroactively as of October 1, 2005.
The parties hereto agree to the following modifications:
1. Section 2. Purchase Order Placement
DELETE in its entirety and REPLACE in lieu thereof the following:
“Buyer will provide Seller an annual blanket purchase order for the Products. Buyer may delay delivery by as much as 30 days, provided such delay notice is delivered to Seller not less than 60 days prior to the originally scheduled delivery date.
As a condition of this Agreement, Buyer agrees to take delivery of a minimum of [  *  ] Accelerator Assemblies per year, comprised of either part number [  *  ] or part number [  *  ], commencing with the effective date of this Agreement. Said minimum shall be binding upon the parties and any their successors or assigns. Notwithstanding the above, the Buyer will provide the purchasing forecast for Seller’s planning purpose only.
Seller shall formally acknowledge Buyer’s purchase orders by fax or email and provide a confirmation of delivery dates.
All products shall be delivered in full on or 5 days before the scheduled due date.
2. Section 4. Term
DELETE in its entirety and REPLACE in lieu thereof the following:
“This Agreement shall remain in full force and effect until October 1, 2010. This Agreement shall be automatically renewed for additional renewal terms of twelve (12) months each, unless either Party gives the other Party at least one (1) year prior written notice of election to terminate this Agreement effective at the end of the then current term. In the event that the Seller elects to terminate this Agreement in accordance with the above terms, the Buyer shall have the right to place a “last time” Purchase Order no later than 90 days prior to the termination of this Agreement to provide Buyer with sufficient quantity to meet the Buyer’s expected product needs for the one (1) year period immediately following termination of this Agreement. The Parties will negotiate in good faith the delivery schedule for each product covered by such “last time” Purchase Order, but it is presumed that Buyer will take delivery of those products equally over the first nine months after termination of the Agreement.
Siemens Medical Solutions USA, Inc.
             
Oncology Care Systems Group   4040 Nelson Avenue   Tel: (925) 246-8200   www.siemensmedical.com/oncology
    Concord, CA 94520   Fax: (925) 246-8284    

2


 

     
SIEMENS
  MSA- 50047-WMG
Amendment 03
3. Section 5. Pricing
DELETE Section 5 in its entirety and REPLACE in lieu thereof the following:
“The pricing for Products shall be in accordance with Exhibit B and shall be valid until September 30, 2010.
4. Section 6. Payment Terms
DELETE Section 6 in its entirety and REPLACE in lieu thereof the following:
“Delivery is F.O.B. or F.C.A. origin (INCO Terms 2000), whichever is applicable. Buyer shall specify the carrier and its account number with carrier by so indicating on the face of its purchase order.”
5. Section 7. WARRANTY
DELETE Section 7 in its entirety and REPLACE in lieu thereof the following:
“Seller warrants maintaining as necessary, an appropriate level of IS0 certification and compliance to IS0 13485 . Seller further warrants that all Products sold to Buyer under this Agreement comply with the requirements of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (“FDA”) and the FDA’s Good Manufacturing Practices (“GMP”) with respect to the manufacture, package, assembly and testing for the Products and that all Products provided under this Agreement shall be in accordance with the Seller’s specifications.
Except for part numbers [  *  ] and [  *  ], which are warranted for one (1) year from the date of delivery, Seller warrants that all other Products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of six (6) months from the date of delivery.
Seller shall only perform an inspection and test of returned Accelerator Assembly Products [  *  ] to confirm that there is a defect during warranty period. Seller at its option will repair or replace defective Product within 30 business days after receipt at Seller’s facility. Though not obligated to do so, Seller at its sole unilateral option, may elect to conduct inspection and test on other Products under this Agreement.
Buyer’s remedy is contingent upon (1) prompt written notification of the defect; (2) the cause of the defect not being the result of misuse, accident, neglect, alteration, improper testing, storage, installation or negligence on the part of the Buyer; and (3) return of the Products to Buyer’s manufacturing location with shipment and in-transit loss or damage at the risk and expense of the Buyer. Such repair, replacement or credit shall constitute fulfillment of all liability of Buyer to Seller whether based in contract, tort, and indemnity or otherwise.
If an Accelerator Assembly Product has been returned to Seller under warranty and Seller is unable to confirm a failure for it after Buyer has had a full opportunity to verify the cause of the failure, explain the same to Seller, and Seller has conducted tests necessary to confirm the failure, Seller shall invoice Buyer at the manufacturing rate of [  *  ], at an amount not
Siemens Medical Solutions USA, Inc.
             
Oncology Care Systems Group   4040 Nelson Avenue   Tel: (925) 246-8200   www.siemensmedical.com/oncology
    Concord, CA 94520   Fax: (925) 246-8284    

3


 

SIEMENS   MSA-50047-WMG
Amendment 03
    to exceed the equivalent of [  *  ]. Seller must obtain a purchase order from the Buyer for testing beyond the amount of [  *  ].
 
    EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN THE PRECEDING SENTENCES AND/OR IN SPECIFICATIONS, SELLER MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS.”
6. Section 11. INDEMNIFICATION
DELETE the second paragraph in Section 11 and REPLACE in lieu thereof the following:
    “Each party’s maximum liability to the other party relating to claims for property damage shall be limited to a maximum of $2,000,000 for performance under this Agreement.”
7. Section 12. CONFIDENTIALITY
DELETE Section 12 and REPLACE in lieu thereof the following:
    “During the term of this Agreement and for five (5) years after the latter of either the termination of this Agreement or the termination of the last Statement of Work under this Agreement, each party shall use the same efforts it uses to protect its own confidential information (but in any event, no less than reasonable efforts to prevent its disclosure) to hold in strict confidence and to require its personnel to hold in strict confidence and not disclose to (1) any employee, director, or agent that does not need to know such information for the purpose of carrying out this Agreement or (2) any third party without the prior written consent of the disclosing party, and not use in any manner except for purposes of carrying out this Agreement and otherwise in accordance with the terms of this Agreement, any confidential information of the other party in its possession. Such confidential information specifically may include, without limitation, all engineering drawings, specifications and other technical documentation, any proposed design and specifications for future products and products in development, marketing plans, costs and pricing information, all third party information required to be maintained in confidence, and any other information that the disclosing party has marked as confidential. Promptly following termination of this Agreement or upon the request by or for the disclosing party, the receiving party shall surrender to the disclosing party or destroy all materials remaining in its possession containing any such confidential information including all copies, extracts, or transcriptions, regardless of media.
 
    For purposes of this Agreement and the Products and Statement of Work, information shall not be deemed confidential:
  a)   if such information is generally available from public sources other than as a result of the breach of this Agreement;
 
  b)   if such information is received from a third party not under any obligation to keep such information confidential;
             
Siemens Medical Solutions USA, Inc.
 
           
Oncology Care Systems Group
  4040 Nelson Avenue   Tel: (925) 246-8200   www.siemensmedical.com/oncology
 
  Concord, CA 94520   Fax: (925) 246-8284    

4


 

SIEMENS   MSA-50047-WMG
Amendment 03
  c)   if the recipient can demonstrate that such information was independently developed by the recipient without use of any confidential information of the other party or its Affiliates; and
 
  d)   if such information is marketing material such as catalogs or leaflets distributed to third parties as a part of sales and promotions.
    Neither party shall be liable to the other for a breach of these confidentiality obligations to the extent it is required by law or any governmental body to disclose any confidential information of the other party; provided, however, unless otherwise required by such governmental body or such law, the party providing such information to such governmental body or disclosing the same pursuant to requirement of law shall first notify the other party so as to enable the other party opportunity to take steps it deems appropriate to protect its confidential or proprietary information.”
8. ADD: New Section 15. Notices
    “All contractual notices from one party to the other under this Agreement shall be in writing and either personally delivered or sent via certified mail, (E-mail or other electronic media are not acceptable), postage prepaid and return receipt requested to:
         
 
  Buyer:   TomoTherapy, Inc.
 
      1240 Deming Way
 
      Madison, WI 53717
 
      ATTENTION: Bob Evensen
 
       
 
  Seller:   Siemens Medical Solutions USA, Inc.
 
      Oncology Care Group
 
      4040 Nelson Avenue
 
      Concord, CA 94520
 
      ATTENTION: Manager, Strategic Procurement
    or to such other person or places as either party may designate from time to time by notice hereunder. Such notices shall be deemed effective upon personal delivery or deposit in the mails in accordance herewith.”
9. ADD: New Section 16. Conflicts with Other Terms and Conditions
    “This Agreement contains all of the terms and conditions as they relate to the relationship between Buyer and Seller. Any terms and conditions, other than price, quantity, and shipping instructions, which may be specified on Buyer’s purchase order or on any Buyer’s Order Acknowledgement Form, are null and void unless expressly agreed upon in writing by Seller’s representative responsible for Contract Administration.”
             
Siemens Medical Solutions USA, Inc.
 
           
Oncology Care Systems Group
  4040 Nelson Avenue   Tel: (925)246-8200    
 
  Concord, CA 94520   Fax: (925)246-8284   www.siemensmedical.com/oncology

5


 

SIEMENS   MSA-50047-WMG
Amendment 03
10. Exhibit A. Statement of Work (Performance Specification Requirements)
      DELETE in its entirety and REPLACE in lieu thereof the following Exhibit A:
STATEMENT OF WORK
(Performance Specification Requirement)
Product Documents: In addition to “Accelerator Tomo 6MV Design Specification 11.000207 Rev. E.”, which is the governing document for the rectangular waveguides (OCS P/N: [  *  ]) and “Accelerator Tomo 6MV Design Specification 1 1.000236 Rev. A.”, which is the governing document for the round waveguides (OCS P/N: [  *  ]); the following Seller’s Product documents are hereby incorporated by reference.
     
Part Number   Description
 
   
[  *  ]
  AFC ASSY, G39
[  *  ]
  ACCELERATOR ASSY,TOMO 6V
[  *  ]
  PWR SPL ASSY,ION PMP,12V-A20
[  *  ]
  DRIVE ASSY-MAGN TUNER-M5
[  *  ]
  DOSE CHAMBER ASSY
[  *  ]
  RF CIRCULATOR ASSY,KD2-G36
[  *  ]
  INJECTOR ASSY,ELECT-G45
[  *  ]
  TARGET ASSY,MONO 6MV / PRIMART
[  *  ]
  RF,DETECTOR MOUNT ‘N’
[  *  ]
  ATTENUATOR,RF 20DB N 250 watts
[  *  ]
  O-RING,BUNA-N 3.975-ID M4152TR
[  *  ]
  ACCELERATOR ASSY, TOP TOMO
[  *  ]
  TARGET, SPINNING TUNGSTEN
             
Siemens Medical Solutions USA, Inc.
 
           
Oncology Care Systems Group
  4040 Nelson Avenue   Tel: (925) 246-8200   www.siemensmedical.com/oncology
 
  Concord, CA 94520   Fax: (925) 246-8284    

6


 

SIEMENS   MSA-50047-WMG
Amendment 03
11. Exhibit B — Product Pricing
    DELETE in its entirety and REPLACE in lieu thereof the following Exhibit B:
EXHIBIT B
PRODUCT PRICING
                         
PN     Description   Base Price     Lead Times  
  [  *  ]    
AFC ASSY, G39
  $ [  *  ]     60 days
  [  *  ]    
ACCELERATOR ASSY, TOMO 6V
  $ [  *  ]     90 days
  [  *  ]    
PWR SPL ASSY, ION PMP, 12V-A20
  $ [  *  ]     42 days
  [  *  ]    
DRIVE ASSY-MAGN TUNER-M5
  $ [  *  ]     75 days
  [  *  ]    
DOSE CHAMBER ASSY
  $ [  *  ]     120 days
  [  *  ]    
RF CIRCULATOR ASSY, KD2-G36
  $ [  *  ]     75 days
  [  *  ]    
INJECTOR ASSY, ELECT-G45
  $ [  *  ]     65 days
  [  *  ]    
TARGET ASSY, MONO 6MV / PRIMART
  $ [  *  ]     90 days
  [  *  ]    
RF,DETECTOR MOUNT ‘N’
  $ [  *  ]     60 days
  [  *  ]    
ATTENUATOR, RF 20DB N 250 watts
  $ [  *  ]     60 days
  [  *  ]    
0-RING,BUNA-N 3.975-ID M4152TR
  $ [  *  ]     60 days
  [  *  ]    
ACCELERATOR ASSY, TOP TOM0
  $ [  *  ]     90 days
  [  *  ]    
TARGET, SPINNING TUNGSTEN
  $ [  *  ]     90 days
    [  *  ]
 
    Seller shall be entitled to the following break-point discounts on part numbers [  *  ] and [  *  ] when a twelve (12) month non-cancelable purchase order is placed for the following corresponding quantities. Each twelve (12) month period shall run from October 1 st of each year through September 30 th of the following year.
 
    The below stated discount break-points apply to all quantities stated on the aforementioned twelve (12) month purchase order.
     
Discount   Quantities of PIN [  *  ] and/or [  *  ]
[  *  ]%
  If yearly PO quantity is 65 units or less
[  *  ]%
  If yearly PO quantity is between 66 and 85 units
[  *  ]%
  If yearly PO quantity is between 86 and 100 units
[  *  ]%
  If yearly PO quantity is between 101 and 130 units
The parties will negotiate in good faith the discount for quantities exceeding one hundred thirty (130) units per year of part numbers [  *  ] and [  *  ].
             
Siemens Medical Solutions USA, Inc.
 
           
Oncology Care Systems Group
  4040 Nelson Avenue   Tel: (925) 246-8200   www.siemensmedical.com/oncology
 
  Concord, CA 94520   Fax: (925) 246-8284    

7


 

SIEMENS   MSA-50047-WMG
Amendment 03
     Except as modified herein, all other Terms and Conditions shall remain unchanged and apply hereto in full force.
SIGNATURE PAGE
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have caused this Amendment One to be executed by their duly authorized representatives as of the date written below.
     
Siemens Medical Solutions USA Inc.
  TomoTherapy, Inc.
Oncology Care Systems Group
   
 
   
By:    Mr. Martin Wentzlik
  By:    Fred Robertson
Title: Chief Fiancial Officer
  Title: CEO
 
   
Signature: /s/ Mr. Martin Wentzlik
  Signature: /s/ Fred Robertson
 
   
Date: 01/11/06
  Date: January 23, 2006
 
   
By:    Mr. Rolf Reimann
   
Title: VP, Plant Management
   
 
   
Signature: /s/ Rolf Reimann
   
 
   
Date: 01/11/2006
   
             
Siemens Medical Solutions USA, Inc.
 
           
Oncology Care Systems Group
  4040 Nelson Avenue   Tel: (925) 246-8200   www.siemensmedical.com/oncology
 
  Concord, CA 94520   Fax: (925) 246-8284    

8

 

Amendment to Terms and Conditions of Purchase
Purchase Order No. 8754
Buyer: TomoTherapy Incorporated
Seller: ReMedPar, Inc.
Effective Date: February 7, 2007
 
This Amendment to Terms and Conditions of Purchase (this “Amendment”) supplements and amends the Terms and Conditions of Purchase (the “Terms and Conditions”) contained in Purchase Order No. 8754 (the “Purchase Order”) dated as of December 28, 2006 by and between TomoTherapy Incorporated, a Wisconsin corporation (“Buyer”), and ReMedPar, Inc., a Delaware corporation (“Seller”).
1. Delivery Schedule. Seller shall deliver to Buyer the number of [  *  ] detectors (“Dectors”) on or before the dates indicated on the Purchase Order.
2. Safety Stock Inventory. In order to support Seller in its efforts to build an adequate inventory of Detectors, Buyer agreed to purchase up to [  *  ] Detectors (“Safety Stock Inventory”) on the terms provided in Paragraph 3, below. Transfer of ownership shall be at the time of invoice to the Buyer with respect to the Safety Stock Inventory. Seller agrees to record and track serial numbers for each Detector retained in Safety Stock Inventory. While Seller holds any Safety Stock Inventory, it will maintain the insurance as provided for in the attached Evidence of Property Insurance. Seller will provide to Buyer Safety Stock Inventory cycle counts, including serial numbers and location, on a monthly basis. Buyer or its designee may physically audit the Safety Stock Inventory at any time upon seven (7) days’ notice to Seller.
3. Payment for Safety Stock Inventory. Seller has submitted the invoices listed on Exhibit A to Buyer for [  *  ] per Detector purchased by Seller during the previous month for the Safety Stock Inventory. Buyer has paid or agrees to pay Seller within thirty (30) days after Buyer’s receipt of such invoices.
4. Security Interest. In exchange for payment to Seller and to secure full performance of Seller’s obligations hereunder, Seller hereby grants to Buyer, as Seller acquires the Security Stock Inventory and Buyer pays the Seller for each Detector included therein, a security interest in the entire Safety Stock Inventory and any accessions to the Detectors included therein (collectively, the “Collateral”). Seller hereby authorizes Buyer, and shall cooperate fully with Buyer, to execute and/or file documents, financing statements and amendments thereto as Buyer may deem necessary to maintain and perfect its security interest in the Collateral. Seller shall pay all filing fees and taxes associated with filing UCC financing statements to secure Buyer’s interest in the Collateral. Seller agrees to take any action reasonably requested by Buyer to ensure the attachment, perfection and first priority of, and the ability of Buyer to enforce, Buyer’s security interest in the Collateral, including notifying Buyer of any other security interests in the Collateral and their priority and cooperating with Buyer to obtain and

 


 

ADDITIONAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF PURCHASE
Page 2 of 3
execute subordinations of any security interests in the Collateral which are senior or equal to Buyer’s security interest in priority. Seller represents and warrants as follows: (i) Seller’s Tennessee organizational identification number is 0416324, (ii) Seller’s Delaware organizational identification number is 3425364, and (iii) Seller’s place of business, chief executive office and mailing address is 101 Old Stone Bridge Road, Goodlettsville, Tennessee 37072 (collectively, “Seller’s Information”). Seller covenants to not change any of Seller’s Information without providing prior notice to Buyer.
5. Delivery Specifications. Seller has delivered and will deliver Detectors to Buyer fully modified, assembled, tested, crated, and labeled in accordance with specifications (“Delivery Specifications”), such Delivery Specifications which were agreed upon in writing by Buyer and Seller on or before December 1, 2006. Buyer may amend the Delivery Specifications in writing at any time during the term of this Amendment, and Seller shall indicate written acceptance of delivered Detectors, such acceptance not to be unreasonably withheld.
6. Test Documentation. Test documentation describing the tests to be performed by Seller on each Detector, as agreed upon in writing by Buyer and Seller on or before December 1, 2006 (“Test Documentation”), shall accompany each Detector shipped to Buyer. Buyer may amend the Test Documentation in writing at any time during the term of this Amendment, and Seller shall indicate written acceptance, such acceptance not to be unreasonably withheld.
7. Warranty. In Paragraph 2 of the Terms and Conditions (Warranties), item (ii) “are of new, merchantable quality and free of defects of workmanship and materials” shall be replaced with the following: “are of merchantable commercial quality, suitable for incorporation into the TomoTherapy Hi Art System”. Seller shall warrant the Detectors to be in compliance with the above upon delivery and acceptance by the Buyer, Buyer may reject materials in accordance with Section 4 of the Terms and Conditions not to exceed ninety (90) days from delivery date, notwithstanding Section 4 of Terms and Conditions, rejection of materials may only occur on the basis of defects deemed to be inherent prior to modification.
8. Defective Detectors. If any Detector is not delivered to Buyer per the Delivery Specifications and with the proper Test Documentation (“Defective Detector”), then within sixty (60) days of its receipt, Buyer may return the Defective Detector to Seller for a replacement. Seller shall deliver to Buyer a replacement within ten (10) days of its receipt of a Defective Detector. If Buyer receives less than [  *  ] percent ([  *  ]%) of the Detectors indicated on the Purchase Order in acceptable condition within a sixty (60)-day period, then Buyer may purchase Detectors from other vendors until Seller remedies shipments to [  *  ] percent ([  *  ]%). If Buyer receives less than [  *  ] percent ([  *  ]%) of the Detectors indicated on the Purchase Order in acceptable condition within a sixty (60)-day period, then Buyer may terminate this Agreement. In the event of termination, Seller shall refund Buyer within thirty (30) days for all Defective Detectors. This section supersedes Paragraph 7 (Time of Delivery) of the Terms and Conditions.

 


 

ADDITIONAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF PURCHASE
Page 3 of 3
9. Pricing and Order Adjustments. Seller may review market conditions and make reasonable price adjustments of the Detector every [ * ] months. Also, every [ * ] months, Buyer may adjust the number of Detectors to be ordered based on forecasted supply requirements.
10. Term and Termination. The term of this Amendment shall be for a period of three (3) years beginning on the “effective date” of this Amendment.
11. Counterparts; Facsimile. This Amendment may be executed in two or more counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original, but all of which together shall constitute one and the same instrument, provided that all such counterparts, in the aggregate, shall contain the signatures of all parties. Signatures made by facsimile shall be deemed original signatures.
12. Effect of Amendment. All terms and provisions of the Purchase Order and the Terms and Conditions contained therein shall continue in full force and effect except as expressly modified in this Amendment.
Dated this 7 th day of February, 2007.
             
Seller:   Buyer:
 
           
ReMedPar, Inc.   TomoTherapy Incorporated
 
           
By:
  /s/ Mark Graham   By:   /s/ Shawn D. Guse
 
           
 
  Mark Graham       Shawn D. Guse
 
  President and CEO       Vice President, Secretary, and General Counsel

 

 

Exhibit 10.30
Variable Pay Plan
TomoTherapy Inc.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Certain performance-related confidential data omitted. Omissions are designated as [  *  ].

 


 

About This Material
This document is intended to be used to describe the terms and goals of TomoTherapy’s variable pay plan. The draft of this document must be approved by the Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors before being implemented as a formal compensation program.

 


 

Contents
         
Variable Pay Guidelines
    1  
 
       
Variable Pay Program
    2  
 
       
Plan Administration
    8  

 


 

Variable Pay Guidelines

 


 

Variable Pay Guidelines
Variable pay is that portion of compensation that is contingent upon the organizational results of TomoTherapy. TomoTherapy will share a portion of its business success above a threshold performance level with all employees.
Variable pay must be re-earned each performance period (in this case annually). Variable pay does not increase base pay. It is an incentive to motivate all employees to focus on the corporate goals and superior customer service.
The plan performance measures and weightings and target incentive opportunities will evolve over time as TomoTherapy grows and changes in the future. At this time, goals will be measured at the organizational level to determine if the plan will pay out and the amount of the plan payout.

 


 

Variable Pay Program

 


 

Variable Pay Program
Eligibility
Every active, full-time TomoTherapy employee will be eligible to participate in the variable pay program except those TomoTherapy non-executive employees who participate in a sales commission plan. Employees must be hired by September 30 th (end of the third quarter) to be eligible to participate. Part-time employees who are eligible for benefits will also be eligible to participate in the plan provided that they are hired by September 30 th . Temporary employees are not eligible to participate in the plan.
Participation
If TomoTherapy achieves its organizational goals, all eligible employees will receive an incentive payout if they are:
  Employed by TomoTherapy on the incentive payout date; and
  Not on a written corrective plan or higher during the performance period.
Part-time employees and mid-year hires employed prior to September 30th will receive a prorated incentive payment based on their earnings during the plan year.
In addition, eligible employees on documented and approved leave, as well as eligible employees retiring during the fiscal year, will receive an incentive payout based on their earnings during the plan year and contingent upon organizational performance.
Performance Measures
The performance measures for this plan are intended to balance the need to:
  Focus on business results,
  Provide goals that all employees understand, and
  Ensure that the plan is easy to administer.
The performance measures chosen for the plan are:
  Operating income will be the trigger measure. This means that if the organization does not achieve its operating income goal, no plan payout will be made. This approach is taken because operating income is a measure of how much of a payout TomoTherapy can afford to pay.

 


 

This measure can be impacted by any employee. Some avenues for reducing operating expenses or cost savings include:
  ¾   Reducing waste,
 
  ¾   Doing more with less, or
 
  ¾   Improving processes to accomplish tasks in less time with fewer process steps or with fewer resources.
  Reliability, as defined and measured as up-time. This measure is intended to demonstrate production improvements, appropriate levels of maintenance, and timely repairs. Reliability will be used as a multiplier to provide an opportunity for lesser or greater plan payout potential.
 
    We want to focus on reliability as one of the measures as reliability is fundamental to our positive market image. It will significantly impact our future ability to grow both revenues and operating income.
Funding Mechanism
The performance measure of operating margin is vitally important to the organization as it grows, and funding for the plan will be based on threshold operating income. In 2007, these goals will be:
                 
Organizational   Operating   Plan Funding
Performance   Income Goal   Level
 
  75%
  $ [*]M       50 %
100%
  $ [*]M       100 %
125%
  $ [*]M       150 %
 
               
 
[*]

 


 

Incentive Modifier
Because reliability is a measure that our customers and the marketplace focus on closely, we are adding a modifier related to our achievement of reliability goals. The modifier can increase or decrease the amount of payout employees receive if operating margin and revenue goals are achieved.
Incentive targets will be modified to reflect the achievement of the reliability measure “up-time” as currently calculated. Up-time targets are described in the following table. Other measures may be used as a modifier in future plan designs as market demands dictate.
             
Target Achievement   Target   Modifier
 
Below Minimum
  Less than [*]%   0.95 (in other words, there will be a lower payment to reflect below 2006 reliability results performance)
 
           
Minimum
    [*]%     1.00 (in other words, there will be no adjustment if achievement is maintained at prior year’s level)
 
           
Target
  [*]% up-time   1.05 (in other words, the payout will increase by [*]% to reflect higher than expected reliability)
 
           
Maximum
  [*]% up-time   1.10 (in other words, the payout will increase by [*]% to reflect higher than expected reliability)
 
Employee Levels and Target Opportunity
The target incentive is the incentive paid to all employees when organizational performance targets are met. Incentive targets may change over time as market conditions change. Participating employees will receive a payout under the plan if organization performance warrants. The targeted payout will be based on an employee’s role in the organization as defined in the following table.
             
        Target
Level   Definition   Opportunity
 
1
  Contributes to task-related activities in support of tactical implementation of short-term team goals.

    [*] %
 
  Has limited knowledge of concepts, practices, and procedures of particular field of specialization. Develops solutions to problems of limited scope and complexity following established policies and procedures. Works under general supervision. Role is narrow, specific in impact; and task-oriented.        
 
           
2
  Contributes to the tactical implementation of short term business goals. May have some influence on the overall goals of the team.

    [*] %
 
  Responsible for applying the fundamental concepts, practices, and procedures of particular field of specialization to the completion of varied and moderately difficult assignments. Develops solutions based on general technical knowledge and        

 


 

             
        Target
Level   Definition   Opportunity
 
 
  experience. Understands related departments or functions. Participates in determining objectives of assignments. Little or moderate supervision required. May or may not have direct reports of limited number. Has direct impact on short-term departmental goals.        
 
           
3
  Develops and implements tactical solutions to achieve short term business goals. Manages, directs or monitors daily operations for workers or teams engaged in a single task or multiple, but closely related tasks. Directly impacts the short-term performance of the unit(s) to which s/he is assigned.

    [*] %
 
  Responsible for monitoring day-to-day operations for assigned work teams/project areas. Provides direction, leadership, coaching, and technical expertise to group of employees. Has impact/influence on budgeting, controlling costs, planning, scheduling, and procedural/policy changes.        
 
           
4
  Translates long- and short-term business goals into tactical, functional initiatives. Manages managers or is an individual contributor viewed as the highest level expert within field. Directly impacts the short-term success of a function or operation. Influences the development of overall objectives of the function or operation.

    [*] %
 
  Within a department or line of business, has direct accountability for specific function or discipline of significant scope or technical requirements. Trains and mentors staff; estimates staffing needs, assigns work, and ensures projects are completed on schedule following established procedures and schedules. Consults with manager for extraordinary and exceptional issues. Expected to bring long-term view/perspective to individual projects.        
 
           
5
  Translates long-term strategy into long- and short-term goals for a line of business or organization-wide department.

    [*] %
 
  Has oversight and accountability for implementation of long-term departmental business strategies. Responsible for developing function’s or department’s objectives to achieve long- and short-term plans. Ensures overall budgets, schedules, and performance standards are realistically set and attained. Has wide sphere of responsibility and knowledge and a direct impact on total department’s ability to deliver against performance goals. Generally accomplishes results through others/lower management levels. Expected to drive teams toward optimum balance of long-term and short-term performance and initiatives.        

 


 

             
        Target
Level   Definition   Opportunity
 
6
  Works cross-functionally to direct the total company towards achieving its mission and goals. Also develops and directs the long term vision for a specific function(s) in support of overall company mission.

  [*]%
 
  Has shared accountability for total (global) company performance. Develops long-term strategies in support of corporate business goals and has direct accountability for overall operations in the department(s) s/he oversees.        
 
           
7
  Directs the overall vision, mission, strategic direction, and financial results for the organization.

    [*] %
 
  Has ultimate accountability for company’s worldwide performance and reputation.        
Performance Period
Performance for the 12 month period beginning January 1 will be considered for purpose of this variable pay program. This time frame is considered the performance period. The performance period coincides with TomoTherapy’s fiscal year.
Payout Frequency
Payouts for this plan will occur once a year if organizational performance warrants a payout. Payouts will occur after the end of the fiscal year, once organizational results can be finally determined for the fiscal year and determined payouts can be processed through payroll.
Board and Leadership Discretion
In all cases, the Board of Directors and management have the right, at their discretion, to adjust incentive payouts for individual employees based on factors outside the stated goals of this plan. Such adjustments may include recognition of above-and-beyond efforts of employees throughout the fiscal year.
Communication of Variable Pay Plan
The variable pay plan goals and measures will be communicated as quickly as practical after the Board of Directors has approved the variable pay plan. The organization’s leadership will provide ongoing communication of progress toward the plan goals as possible on a quarterly basis. We will also communicate year-end financial business results within the first quarter of the next fiscal year.

 


 

Plan Administration

 


 

Plan Administration
Powers of the Board
Nothing in this plan constitutes a promise of employment or promise to deliver a given level of compensation. The Board of Directors and Management have the right to cancel or discontinue this plan at any time at their discretion. The Board of Directors, with input from Management, has broad powers which include:
  Determining annually whether or not to recommend continuing the plan;
  Determining eligibility;
  Approving performance measures, threshold values, etc. for the applicable fiscal year;
  Approving plan funding and individual incentive awards;
  Resolving disputes or questions regarding the plan;
  Recommending amendment or termination of the plan as necessary during the fiscal year;
  Establishing the rules necessary to administer the plan;
  The Board will have discretion to construe and interpret the plan;
  All decisions of the Board will be final and binding on all persons; and
  The Board may at any time elect to amend, suspend, or terminate the plan.
Annual Program Review
TomoTherapy will review this variable pay plan on an annual basis to evaluate its impact on the measures chosen and business success. This review process will begin in conjunction with the business planning process in the fall with the goal of establishing any new measures or plan design features during the first quarter of the new fiscal year.
As a result of this review process, the variable pay plan may change over time. Aspects of the variable pay program that may be adjusted are, but not limited to:
  Employee participation and incentive opportunity;
  Performance measures—types of measures, level of organizational performance measured, and weighting of measures; and
  Performance period and payout frequency.

 

 

Exhibit 23.1
  
CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
 
We have issued our report dated March 21, 2007, except for stock split disclosures in Notes A and J, as to which the date is May        , 2007, the April 15, 2007 subsequent event item in Note I, as to which the date is April 15, 2007, and the pro forma shareholders’ equity (deficit) disclosure in Note A, as to which the date is April 15, 2007, accompanying the consolidated financial statements of TomoTherapy Incorporated and Subsidiaries (which report expressed an unqualified opinion and contains an explanatory paragraph relating to the adoption of Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 123(R), Share-Based Payment , and Financial Accounting Standards Board Staff Position 150-5, Issuer’s Accounting under FASB Statement No. 150 for Freestanding Warrants and Other Similar Instruments on Shares That Are Redeemable ) contained in Amendment No. 3 to the Registration Statement (Form S-1 No. 333-140600) and Prospectus, which will be signed upon consummation of the transaction described in Note J to the consolidated financial statements. We consent to the use of the aforementioned report in Amendment No. 3 to the Registration Statement and Prospectus, and to the use of our name as it appears under the caption “Experts.”
 
/s/  Grant Thornton LLP
 
Madison, Wisconsin
April 18, 2007

 

Exhibit 23.3
(VIRCHOW KRAUSE & COMPANY LOGO)
April 19, 2007
Mr. Stephen C. Hathaway
Chief Financial Officer
TomoTherapy Incorporated
1240 Deming Way
Madison, Wisconsin 53717
Subject:   Written Consent to Reference Virchow Krause Valuation, LLC Valuation in S-1 Filing of TomoTherapy Incorporated
Dear Mr. Hathaway:
We hereby consent to the reference to our firm under the captions “Experts,” “Compensation Discussion and Analysis,” “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and “Consolidated Financial Statements” in the Registration Statement on Form S-1 of Tomotherapy Incorporated for the registration of shares of its common stock and any amendment thereto (the “Registration Statement”). In giving such consent, we do not hereby admit that we come within the category of person whose consent is required under Section 7 or Section 11 of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, or the rules and regulations adopted by the Securities and Exchange Commission thereunder, nor do we admit that we are experts with respect to any part of such Registration Statement within the meaning of the term “experts” as used in the Securities Act of 1933, as amended or the rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission thereunder.
Sincerely,
-S- VIRCHOW KRAUSE VALUATION, LLC
Virchow Krause Valuation, LLC
(VIRCHOW KRAUSE & COMPANY LETTERHEAD)